2015-2016 Catalog - The Art Institutes

Transcription

2016 - 2017 Catalog
1799 SE 17th Street
Fort Lauderdale, FL 33316-3000
Publication Date: October 03, 2016
artinstitutes.edu/fort-lauderdale
(800) 275-7603
Note on Catalog Updates
At the time this catalog was produced, every effort was made to assure its accuracy. However, in keeping with the
commitment of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale to its students, the school reserves the right to make changes
in faculty, curriculum, courses, schedules, requirements, tuition, fees, and policies and procedures. Please contact
the appropriate department for current information or any special requirements. The school also publishes
additional policies and procedures in the Student Handbook.
An online version of this catalog is updated regularly on The Art Institute web site at
www.artinstitutes.edu/fort-lauderdale
Published October 03, 2016
1799 S.E. 17th Street, Fort Lauderdale, FL 33316-3013
Page 2 of 183
Table of Contents
ABOUT THE CATALOG ....................................................................................................................................................4
MESSAGE FROM THE PRESIDENT ..................................................................................................................................5
INTRODUCTION TO THE ART INSTITUTE OF FORT LAUDERDALE ...................................................................................6
COLLEGE GOVERNANCE AND ADMINISTRATION.........................................................................................................11
GENERAL INFORMATION .............................................................................................................................................13
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS ....................................................................................................................21
FINANCIAL SERVICES ....................................................................................................................................................56
SCHOLARSHIPS .............................................................................................................................................................58
REFUND POLICY ...........................................................................................................................................................66
ACADEMIC PROGRAMS ...............................................................................................................................................76
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................................................................................................112
FACULTY LISTING .......................................................................................................................................................176
TUITION AND FEES .....................................................................................................................................................180
ACADEMIC CALENDAR ...............................................................................................................................................182
Page 3 of 183
ABOUT THE CATALOG
We hope prospective students find the information in The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale (“The Art Institute”)
2016 - 2017 catalog helpful in making an informed college decision. As useful as this information may be,
prospective students are encouraged to visit the campus to explore our college community, see what the college
has to offer, and determine how it meets individual needs.
The Art Institute reserves the right to change the policies, rules, degree requirements, program and course
offerings, procedures, and tuition and fees contained within this catalog from time to time. Notice is not required
for changes to take effect; however, The Art Institute will make reasonable attempts to notify students promptly of
any policy changes through website or email postings, mail distributions or other methods deemed appropriate by
the college administration. The Art Institute also reserves the right to cancel program and/or individual courses
due to insufficient enrollment.
It is each student’s responsibility to adhere to and abide by the policies and procedures in this Catalog and the
Student Handbook. Students are encouraged to work closely with faculty, department directors, program
coordinators, and academic advisors to seek guidance in making course selections and other academic decisions to
ensure they meet degree and graduation requirements. However, students are ultimately responsible for these
decisions.
Page 4 of 183
MESSAGE FROM THE PRESIDENT
Welcome to The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale. The Fort Lauderdale area is a beautiful place to study, work, and
live -- a locale that enhances all the senses and stimulates creativity. As you explore our catalog, I hope that you
will get an idea of what it is like to be a student at The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale.
The Art Institute is committed to student success with much to offer that includes:
1.
Faculty who are professionals in their areas of expertise
2.
Technology that supports The Art Institute programs
3.
Programs with plenty of hands-on experience
4.
Programs that include real-world projects
5.
A dedicated Student Services team
Our goal is to provide you with the tools you’ll need to sharpen your creative talent and the technical skills needed
to succeed today and in the future in the areas of design, media, fashion, and the culinary arts. The Art Institute
faculty and staff will guide you, challenge you, and encourage you on your quest for a career in your chosen field.
Please enjoy reading this catalog. It not only provides the information you’ll need about what we offer but
showcases the spirited and talented work of our students, faculty, and alumni.
I hope to see you around campus.
Regards,
Carolyn Pierce
Page 5 of 183
INTRODUCTION TO THE ART INSTITUTE OF FORT LAUDERDALE
The History of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale
48 YEARS OF CREATIVE EDUCATION
The Art Institute opened its doors in September 1968, offering diploma programs in Commercial Art, Interior
Design, and Fashion Illustration. The Art Institute received state approval for veteran’s training in September 1970
and was accredited by the Accrediting Commission for Trade and Technical Schools of the Career College
Association in April 1971.
In November 1973, Education Management Corporation acquired The Art Institute from its founder, Mark K.
Wheeler.
In addition to the Bachelor of Science degree programs, The Art Institute added the following Associate of Science
degree programs between 1973 and 1988: Photography, Fashion Marketing, Music and Video Business, Travel and
Tourism, and Fashion Design. The Art Institute started a new Associate of Science degree program in Broadcasting
in fall 1990. In fall 1991, The Art Institute began two new Associate of Science degree programs, Culinary Arts and
Industrial Design, and added a Bachelor of Science degree program in Interior Design. In 1995, the college was
approved to add Computer Animation, Video Production, and Multimedia and Web Design.
In September 1989, The Art Institute leased space at the 1650 SE 17th Street. This building, referred to as Harbor
Walk, currently houses The Art Institute’s Culinary Arts and Industrial Design departments, as well as the Chef’s
Palette restaurant.
The Art Institute began offering the following diploma programs in 1987: Applied Photography, Residential Design,
and Layout and Production Art. In 1992, Desktop Publishing was added. Layout and Production Art and Desktop
Publishing were merged to create Graphic and Desktop Design. In April 1996, Travel Industry was added to the
diploma offerings.
In 1996, the college took a large step in the reorganization of the programs and the extension of the bachelor’s
degree offerings. Four Bachelor of Science degrees were offered: Computer Animation, Graphic Design, Industrial
Design, and Interior Design.
In keeping with educational trends in higher education and realizing the necessity to offer convenient coursescheduling opportunities to students with many obligations, The Art Institute embarked on an online-education
initiative in January 1999. Approval was granted in September 1999, and the first online course was added to the
schedule in Fall 1999 through a consortium agreement with The Art Institute of Pittsburgh-Online Division.
In 2001, The Art Institute initiated conversion of the course codes to codes approved by the Florida State Course
Numbering System and used by all public post-secondary institutions in Florida, so that transfer of credit from and
to other colleges within the state of Florida would be less complicated and more effective. Also in 2001, The Art
Institute was awarded the Distinguished Performance Award of Career College of the Year by the National Alliance
of Business (NAB). The Distinguished Performance Awards are presented to “businesses, organizations, and
individuals for their commitment to, and accomplishments in, improving student achievement and workforce
quality” (source: NAB 2001 Distinguished Performance Awards pamphlet).
The Art Institute approved articulation agreements with Broward, Miami-Dade, and Palm Beach counties of Florida
in 2002 under the Tech Prep high school program, facilitating the granting of credit to high school graduates who
have successfully completed one of these select programs during their high school years. During 2002, the college
also entered into a statewide articulation agreement with Florida Restaurant Association Educational Foundation’s
ProStart School-to-Career Programs. This agreement allows high school graduates who have completed secondary
or post-secondary vocational ProStart culinary programs to receive academic credit at The Art Institute.
Page 6 of 183
Four new Bachelor of Science degree programs, Digital Media Production, Game Art & Design, Visual Effects &
Motion Graphics, and Yacht & Marine Design, were offered in 2002; a new Bachelor of Science degree in Fashion
Design was added in 2004. In 2005, two additional Bachelor of Science degree programs, Illustration and Fashion
Merchandising, were added. In 2007, a new Bachelor of Science degree program in Baking & Pastry was added.
In July 2006, the Council for Interior Design Accreditation granted accreditation to the Bachelor of Science Interior
Design program and in January 2008, the Accrediting Commission of the American Culinary Federation Foundation
accredited both the Bachelor of Science Culinary Management and Associate of Culinary Arts programs.
The purpose of The Art Institute, as initially developed when it opened its doors in 1968, was to prepare its
graduates to enter careers in their chosen fields. Although The Art Institute has expanded its program offerings
through the years, this basic purpose remains unchanged.
Why Fort Lauderdale?
The Venice of America
Just moments away from South Beach, the Keys, and the Everglades, The Art Institute is located in an area that’s
overflowing with things to do, places to go, and people to meet. The Art Institute is conveniently situated at the
west end of the 17th Street Causeway bridge which when crossed (on foot, bike, or car) reveals the downtown
skyline (dazzling at sunset), sparkling waterways with moored yachts and boats of all sizes and shapes, a
spectacular overlook of Port Everglades and its cruise ships ready to set sail, a view of the Atlantic Ocean (stunning
at daybreak), and then, the 22 miles of amazing beaches lined with outdoor cages, restaurants, and shops. The
stimulating atmosphere that surrounds the campus is motivating and inspiring to any artist or designer. The ideas
for projects are enticing. There are international boat, film, food, and art festivals, museums and galleries for all
ages, concerts, parks, dining, nightlife, sporting events, and natural wonders. Learn how to parasail, golf, and scuba
dive. Wouldn’t these activities inspire you with a new perspective? The best part… all these things can be enjoyed
ALL YEAR LONG.
So if you are out for a bike ride in a park, roller-blading along the beachfront, sketching a palm tree, or dining on a
delightful tropical dish, think about Fort Lauderdale as a place to enhance your educational pursuits. Besides, the
sunrises are spectacular!
There is always something going on around campus such as snorkeling trips, job fairs, yoga lessons, internship fairs,
video festivals, international student festivals, city tours, comedy shows, trips to sporting events, and holiday
parties, to name a few. These activities are available to folks living in housing or for those who commute.
Guest lecturers offer exciting presentations along with alumni working at Dreamworks, Warner Brothers,
Telemundo, and Sony Imageworks. The Mark K. Wheeler Gallery, located in the main building, hosts several
exhibitions each year, including juried student art shows, faculty shows, and guest artist installations. Do you want
to get involved? There are many clubs and student chapters of professional organizations on campus, all related to
particular programs of study or your special interest such as the Green Club, Student Government, IDSA, ASID, the
Gay-Straight Alliance, International Club, Fashion Club, and the Illustration Club. Enter a contest for rewarding
prizes and notoriety. Our students have won national competitions, including QUARK, Humane Society’s Cool vs.
Cruel fur-free contest, and Adobe sponsored challenges.
Page 7 of 183
Get Around
Get Involved
CAMPUS LIFE
Have you ever shown your work in a gallery? You will have an opportunity to showcase your art at a gallery show
on campus or take part in art installations around town. You can also participate in design projects to benefit the
community such as the Boys and Girls Clubs, Gold Coast Jazz Society, Big Brothers, Big Sisters, the City of Fort
Lauderdale, and the Opera Society. You can get your name out there and be recognized for your talents.
Conserve your gas… there are many convenient resources on campus:
• extensive library collection
• fully stocked bookstore
• convenient computer labs
• peer tutors
• a cafe
• Chef’s Palette restaurant
• equipment check out
Student Housing
If you are living in the housing facility, a convenient shuttle bus is at your service to take you to and from the
campus. It’s a family atmosphere with lots of scheduled events, including barbecues, talent shows, and more!
When you need a break from studying, work out in the gym or go for a swim in the pool.
Security
We understand how important safety and security is on campus. It is an extremely high priority. Since we have an
urban campus, it is important for our college community to remain close and informed. Therefore, we have
security services throughout the campus, as well as housing. Our staff is trained in emergency procedures and
crisis situations.
New Friends
That’s what you’ll make with fellow students, friends who will last a lifetime, sharing the same drive and passion in
the creative arts as you. Who knows? Some of them may even want to go in business with you and together, you
may make dreams become a reality.
Values
The value system of The Art Institute provides the foundation for our educational institution. From this system
emerges our collective vision and establishes the foundation for the college mission.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
We believe in an educational environment that places the student at the center of our
efforts.
We believe in measuring excellence in education by focusing on employment outcomes that
enhance the lives of students.
We believe that the education we provide is rooted in the expressed needs of the business
community.
We believe in the commitment, dedication, and loyalty of the entire Art Institute
community.
We believe in collaborative decision making.
We believe in supporting our employees’ and students’ efforts to balance professional and
personal lives.
• We believe accreditation bestows credibility upon our institution.
Page 8 of 183
Vision
The vision of The Art Institute is to be the leader in quality, career-focused higher education for creative industries.
Mission
The mission of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale as an undergraduate institution of higher education is to
provide quality education by promoting a culture of learning with a commitment to excellence in curricula and
teaching that leads to the successful launch of student careers.
To live our mission effectively, we are dedicated to the achievement of the following goals:
1. Champion a culture of learning through continuous personal and professional development
of students and employees
2. Ensure market-driven, competency-based education and curricula through ongoing
communication with employers, advisory committees, graduates, and students.
3. Ensure successful and measurable outcomes.
4. Enhance institutional effectiveness and productivity by improving processes and operations,
promoting teamwork and effective communications, and maintaining appropriate
accreditation.
5. Develop and maintain staff and faculty who are dedicated to student success and academic
quality.
6. Financially protect the academic quality of the college through sound fiscal management.
Institutional Accrediting, Affiliation, and Licensing
The Art Institute is licensed by the Commission for Independent Education, Florida Department of Education.
Additional information regarding this institution may be obtained by contacting the Commission at 325 West
Gaines Street, Suite 1414, Tallahassee, FL 32399-0400, toll-free number (888) 224-6684.
Notice to students and prospective students: Education Management Corporation campuses have been placed on
probation by their accreditor, The Accreditation Council for Colleges and Schools (“ACICS”), based on financial
stability standards.
The Art Institute is accredited by the Accrediting Council for Independent Colleges and Schools to award diplomas,
associate’s degrees and bachelor’s degrees. The Accrediting Council for Independent Colleges and Schools is listed
as a nationally recognized accrediting agency by the United States Department of Education and is recognized by
the Council for Higher Education Accreditation. ACICS can be contacted at 750 First Street NE, Suite 980,
Washington, D.C. 20002. Telephone: 1.202.336.6780.
The Art Institute is approved for the training of veterans and eligible veterans’ dependents authorized under
federal law to enroll non-immigrant alien students.
This school is authorized under Federal law to enroll nonimmigrant alien students.
Programmatic Accreditation
Interior Design
The Interior Design program leading to the Bachelor of Science degree is accredited by the Council for Interior
Design Accreditation, www. accredit-id.org, 206 Grandville Avenue, Suite 350, Grand Rapids, MI 49503.
Culinary Arts
The Diploma in Baking & Pastry, Diploma in Culinary Arts, Associate of Science in Baking & Pastry, Associate of
Science in Culinary Arts and the Bachelor of Science in Culinary Management programs are accredited by The
Accrediting Commission of the American Culinary Federation Education Foundation.
Page 9 of 183
Student Body
Students attend The Art Institute from nearly all 50 states and more than 30 countries. The student body consists
of men and women who have enrolled directly after completing high school, have transferred from other colleges
and universities, or have decided on a career change.
Contact Information
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale 1799 SE 17th Street, Fort Lauderdale, FL 33316-3000 Telephone: 954.463.3000
Toll-Free: 800.275.7603 Fax: 954.308.2341 Internet: www.aifl.edu
Page 10 of 183
COLLEGE GOVERNANCE AND ADMINISTRATION
Statement of Ownership
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale, Inc. is a wholly owned subsidiary of The Art Institutes International LLC, which
through two intermediary limited liability companies, is a subsidiary of Education Management Corporation, 210
Sixth Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA, 15222.
Board of Directors of Education Management Corporation
Kermit J. Cook
Jonathan D. Harber
Director, KKR Capstone
CEO of Harber Advisors LLC; cofounder of Edge Edtech, LLC and
former CEO of Pearson K12
Technology
John M. Danielson
Chairman and Managing Director,
Chartwell Hamilton Group LLC;
former Chief of Staff at The United
States Department of Education
Mark A. McEachen
President and Chief Executive Officer
of Education Management
Corporation
The Art Institute Board of Trustees
Heiko Dobrikow
Thomas L. Green, Chairman
General Manager at Riverside
President, Southern Playbill
Hotel
Publishing
Executive Vice President at The Las Miami, FL
Olas Company
Fort Lauderdale, FL
Lisa Scott-Founds
President and CEO
Winterfest, Inc.
Fort Lauderdale, FL
Jerome G. Kamer
Co-founder and Managing
Partner the Entertainment
Investment Group (EIG) and
President and Chief Operating
Officer of Oladas Inc.
Louis Melocchi,
Vice President,, Finance
The Art Institutes International II
LLC
Pittsburgh, PA
Carolyn Pierce
President
The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale
Fort Lauderdale, FL
Executive Committee
Yudi Nin Cecyn, Director of Financial Services
Debra Bartkowski, M.S., Senior Director of Admissions
Samantha Gordon, M.S., Human Resources Manager
Jeff LaLiberte, M.S., Director of Campus Relations
Carolyn Pierce, M.B.A., President
Open, Director of Student Services
Eric Watson, M.B.A., Dean of Academic Affairs
Page 11 of 183
Academic Department Directors and Program Coordinators
Kristin Berkey-Abbott, Program Coordinator – General Education
Ph.D., University of South Carolina
Jerome Gomez, Program coordinator – Design
M.F.A. Miami International University of Art and Design
John Kane, Academic Department Director - Culinary Arts
M.S., C.C.A., C.E.C., C.C.E., C.H.E., Florida International University
Joshua Kanies, Academic Department Director – Media Arts
M.F.A., San Francisco Art Institute
Howard Katz, Program Coordinator – Media Arts
M.F.A., Northern Illinois University
Debbie Rose-Myers, M.F.A., Academic Department Director - Design
M.B.A., St. Bonaventure University
Sheila Walden, Academic Department Director – Fashion
M.A., Miami International University of Art and Design
Registrar
Della Pack. Ed.D.
Librarian
Marisha Kelly, MLS
M.S., Drexel University
Page 12 of 183
GENERAL INFORMATION
Admissions Information
CRITERIA FOR ADMISSION
In order to matriculate at The Art Institute, a student must provide proof of graduation from high school that is
acceptable to The Art Institute in the form of one of the following:
a) an official high school transcript from a high school whose accreditation is recognized by the U.S.
Department of Education;
b) Passing General Equivalency Diploma (GED) test scores;
c) an official transcript from a postsecondary school whose accreditation is recognized by the U. S.
Department of Education —that demonstrates completion of an associate, bachelor’s, master’s, or higher
degree;
d) in lieu of the GED, an equivalent exam approved in the laws or regulation of a specific state (such as the
California High School Proficiency Exam— CHSPE).
e) All applicants must demonstrate proficiency in English. An I-20 cannot be released without proof of
English Proficiency.
Other admissions requirements follow. Please note that a certificate of attendance or completion, or a diploma
based on the passing of a series of tests other than the GED (with the exception of item d. above), is not
acceptable.
Admissions Requirements
The Admissions Committee determines the suitability of applicant for the programs at The Art Institute and
ultimately makes a decision regarding acceptance or rejection. The Assistant Director of Admissions and/or the
Admissions Committee reserves the right to request additional records of accomplishments in core academic
courses and/or the results of any nationally based examinations such as the ACT or SAT prior to making this
decision.
An application and enrollment agreement must be completed and signed by the applicant and parent or guardian
(if the applicant is a minor).
Prospective students are encouraged to visit The Art Institute, although a visit is not a condition for submitting the
application/enrollment agreement for acceptance. Arrangements for an interview and tour of The Art Institute
may be made by telephone (800-275-7603) or by letter addressed to the Director of Admissions, The Art Institute
of Fort Lauderdale, 1799 SE 17th Street, Fort Lauderdale, FL 33316-3013.
Placement Test
Applicants to The Art Institute may be required to take a placement test.
Admission Committee Literacy Review Essay Policy
A student must demonstrate literacy, defined as the ability to read and write at a level that allows him or her to be
successful in a college level course, with reasonable remediation allowed, in order to be accepted into The Art
Institutes. The admission essay will be assessed by a faculty/academic committee (ADCOM) and scored at one of
two levels: Meets standard or Does not meet standard. No student may be admitted to an Art Institute without
an essay that Meets Standard. An essay may only be rewritten one time for each start, and any appeal decision by
the Dean or his or her designee is final. The evaluation of writing ability is useful in determining the applicant’s
compatibility with the program’s course of study and in determining the applicant’s ability to write and develop
ideas according to the rules of Standard English.
Page 13 of 183
Essay Requirements
1.
Applicants must write an essay of at least 250 words, answering the following prompts:
What are your career goals and how do you expect your education at The Art Institute
of Fort Lauderdale to help you attain them? In what ways will you participate and
commit to your education in order to be successful?
2.
3.
4.
5.
The documents/directions to be provided to the student are in Procedures for ADCOM Literacy
Review Student Handout.
All prospective students must be assessed for college readiness in literacy except applicants who have
attended another Art Institute and who have documentation of an accepted essay to that school in
the student file.
If an applicant was accepted by another Art Institute and did not attend, or if the applicant attended
and failed or withdrew from all classes, the student must apply through the normal admissions
process.
All members of ADCOM and admissions staff will be trained on the essay and the rubric.
Scoring on the rubric is as follows:
1. Meets Standard: Student is considered literate and may be accepted as long as all other admission
requirements are met.
2. Does not meet standard: Student does not meet the literacy standard and may not be accepted even
if all other admission requirements are met.
3. Students will be notified of their essay results in writing by the admissions office.
Appeals Process (Rewrite).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The student may request to rewrite the essay only one time for each start and is advised to first
meet with the appropriate academic official (Dean of the Campus or his or her designee) to
discuss his or her score. That official may not be a member of the Admissions Committee
(ADCOM.)
The applicant must submit the appeal (rewrite) essay to the Admissions representative
(Enrollment Processor/Admissions Office Manager) for processing prior to the start date.
The Essay rewrite must follow the same requirements and guidelines as indicated in section I.
Any decision on the results of the rewrite is to be considered final.
The applicant must meet ALL admissions requirements for full acceptance to the school.
DIGITAL BOOKSHELF AND DIGITAL TEXTBOOKS
The school is enhancing the learning experience by converting traditional textbooks to electronic media. A majority
of courses will have a Digital Textbook associated with the course. Courses that include a Digital Textbook will be
noted in the registration material. Students enrolling in a course that includes a Digital Textbook will incur an
additional Digital Textbook charge, in addition to the course tuition. Students that opt out of using digital
textbooks for that course will not incur the additional Digital Textbook charge. Students that do not opt out will
not need to purchase textbooks for courses using a Digital Textbook. Students that do opt out will be responsible
for purchasing the required textbook. The Digital Textbook Charge allows student access to the Electronic Library
and HTML versions of the textbook(s), and in some cases, other electronic media, which is integrated into the
course.
If a student was charged for a Digital Textbook in a previous course and the student is required to use the same
Digital Textbook for another course, the student will not incur the Digital Textbook charge again since students
have access to the Digital Textbook for up to ten years. On average the price of the Digital Textbook charge is less
than the retail price of the textbook(s) for each course, with the added benefits of no shipping charges, immediate
access to the materials, and interactive features that accompany the Digital Bookshelf.
Page 14 of 183
Hardware Specifications eCollege and VitalSource System and Hardware Specifications
The Art Institute uses eCollege and Vital Source to deliver its digital resources. As with any software, the faster the
processor, the more RAM, and the larger hard drive space you provide, the better the performance. Users wanting
to move their material to their hard drive may need additional space. It is also important that users understand the
process and benefits of maintaining their machines in top operating condition by keeping them current with the
latest operating system updates, correctly configuring virus control, and other beneficial habits.
Preferred Requirements Preferred Hardware Specifications
• 2.4 or higher quad-core Intel i5 or i7
• 8GB DDR3 memory
• 1TB hard drive or 256GB SSD hard drive
• Graphics card capable of 1280x800 screen resolution
• Sound Card & Speakers
• High speed WIFI / Internet access
Preferred Software Specifications
• Apple Mac OS X 10.7.5 or 10.8.2
• Safari 6.0.2 or Mozilla Firefox
OR
• Microsoft Windows 7 SP1 64bit
• Internet Explorer 9 or Mozilla Firefox
Minimum Requirements Minimum Hardware Specifications
• 2.4Ghz or higher dual Core Intel i5 processor
• 4GB DDR3
• 320GB hard drive
• Graphics card capable of 1280x800 screen resolution
• Sound Card & Speakers
• High speed WIFI / Internet access
Minimum Software Specifications
• Apple Mac OS X 10.6.8
• Safari 5.0 or Mozilla Firefox
OR
• Microsoft Windows 7 SP1
• Internet Explorer 8 or Mozilla Firefox
Recommended Plug-ins
• Java
• Adobe Reader
• Adobe Flash Player
• Adobe Air
• Microsoft Silverlight
Recommendation regarding “Netbooks”
Students often see “Netbooks” (small laptop computers primarily designed for web browsing and emailing) as an
affordable option when looking to purchase a computer for classwork. However, it is strongly recommend that
students do not purchase a Netbook.
Purchasing a low-price laptop or desktop computer that meets the system requirements outlined above is a much
better solution for classwork. While newer Netbooks may meet resolution and screen-size requirements for
Page 15 of 183
reading your eBooks, much like some older laptops, some older Netbooks may not be able to graphically handle
these sites.
This means that reading e-texts and participating in the classroom could become difficult. It may be challenging to
scroll through your readings and effectively and efficiently work through the material.
High school seniors who make application prior to graduation and who meet all other admission requirements will
be accepted, pending submission of a final transcript following graduation. Students who are not granted final
acceptance within 30 days after matriculation will be cancelled from enrollment. In the case of a fully documented
extenuating circumstance, the Dean of Academic Affairs may approve an extension to the 30-day limit that will not
extend beyond the student’s first quarter of study.
Home-schooled students entering The Art Institute must provide proof of graduation through a GED or a
document issued by the state or an institution accredited by a body recognized by the Federal Department of
Education.
Each individual who seeks admission to The Art Institute is interviewed, either in person or by telephone, by an
Assistant Director of Admissions. The purpose of this interview is threefold:
1.
to explore the prospective student’s background and interests as they relate to the program
offerings at The Art Institute
2.
to assist prospective students in identifying the appropriate area of study consistent with their
backgrounds and interests
3.
to provide information concerning curricular offerings and support services available at The Art
Institute
ADDITIONAL CRITERIA
Additional entry requirements must be satisfied for all students seeking admission into the Illustration or Game Art
& Design programs. Entry requirements follow.
Program Entry Requirements
GAME ART & DESIGN PROGRAM ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
All applicants and continuing students who wish to enter into the Game Art & Design program at The Art Institute
must meet the following requirements prior to starting classes in addition to all other admission requirements set
forth by The Art Institute.
CGPA Requirement
Applicants requesting enrollment in the Game Art & Design Bachelor of Science degree program must present a
high school transcript that shows evidence of graduation with a CGPA (Cumulative Grade Point Average) of 2.5 or
higher on a 4.0 scale. Alternatively, applicants who do not meet the CGPA requirement may be accepted into the
program as described in CGPA Exception 1 or 2.
Portfolio Requirement
Additionally, all applicants must submit to the Game Art & Design Entrance Portfolio Committee, a portfolio of 510 observational/full figure life drawings in a variety of poses, with hands, feet, and facial features that show an
understanding of the human body’s anatomy and skeletal structure, and 5-10 pages from the applicant’s
sketchbook. The drawings should show the body’s form in space, proportions, and perspective.
If a portfolio submission is rejected, the student may appeal to the Chair of the Game Art & Design Entrance
Portfolio Committee to resubmit new work. If the portfolio is rejected a second time, the student may submit a
written appeal to schedule a meeting with the Chair of the Game Art & Design program to determine a course of
action.
Page 16 of 183
CGPA Exception 1 - Successful College Performance
To have college performance accepted in lieu of high school performance, a minimum of two semesters or
quarters of successful college work with a minimum total of eight courses must be demonstrated. Applicants must
present official transcripts from all colleges attended. If the CGPA from all of The Art Institute transcripts are
equivalent to a 2.5 CGPA on a 4.0 scale, the applicant will be permitted to enter the program.
CGPA Exception 2 - Changing Program of Study to Game & Art Design at The Art Institute
Applicants who do not meet the CGPA requirements listed above may enroll at The Art Institute in another
program of study. Continuing students must successfully complete a minimum of two quarters with a minimum
total of eight courses at The Art Institute before they can request to change their program of study to Game Art &
Design. A continuing student’s CGPA must be 2.5 or greater before a change of program will be approved. The
student must also be in good academic standing for a change of program of study to be approved.
Additionally, continuing students must submit a portfolio of work as described above to the Game Art & Design
Entrance Portfolio Committee.
ILLUSTRATION PROGRAM
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS (No longer accepting new enrollments)
All applicants and continuing students who wish to enter into the Illustration program at The Art Institute must
meet the following requirements prior to starting classes in addition to all other admission requirements set forth
by The Art Institute in The Art Institute catalog.
CGPA Requirement
Applicants requesting enrollment in the Bachelor of Science in Illustration degree program must present a high
school transcript that shows evidence of graduation with a CGPA of 2.5 or higher on a 4.0 scale. Alternatively,
applicants who do not meet the CGPA requirement may be accepted into the program as described in CGPA
Exception 1 or 2.
Portfolio Requirement
Additionally, all applicants must submit to the Illustration Entrance Portfolio Committee, a portfolio of 5-10
observational/ full figure life drawings in a variety of poses, with hands, feet and facial features that show an
understanding of the human body’s anatomy and skeletal structure, and 5-10 pages from the applicant’s
sketchbook. The drawings should show the body’s form in space, proportions and perspective.
If a portfolio submission is rejected, the student may appeal to the Chair of the Illustration Entrance Portfolio
Committee to resubmit new work. If the portfolio is rejected a second time the student may submit a written
appeal to schedule a meeting with the Chair of the Illustration program to determine a course of action.
CGPA Exception 1 - Successful College Performance
To have college performance accepted in lieu of high school performance, a minimum of two semesters or
quarters of successful college work with a minimum total of eight courses must be demonstrated. Applicants must
present official transcripts from all colleges attended. If the CGPA from all of The Art Institute transcripts are
equivalent to a 2.5 CGPA on a 4.0 scale, the applicant will be permitted to enter the program.
CGPA Exception 2 - Changing Program of Study to Illustration at The Art Institute
Applicants who do not meet the CGPA requirements listed above may enroll at The Art Institute in another
program of study. Continuing students must successfully complete a minimum of two quarters with a minimum
total of eight courses at The Art Institute before they can request to change their program of study to Illustration.
A continuing student’s CGPA must be 2.5 or greater and they must have passed the courses listed previously in this
section before a change of program will be approved. The student must also be in good academic standing for a
change of program to be approved.
Page 17 of 183
Additionally, continuing students must submit a portfolio of work as described above to the Illustration Entrance
Portfolio Committee
Culinary Standards
The culinary profession requires skills and abilities in the classroom and kitchen settings. As such, guidelines for
students are necessary to provide appropriate expectations. Industry and kitchen standards introduced and
reinforced throughout the curriculum are essential for student’s success in the classroom and the industry.
Abiding by local health codes is essential for safety and sanitation in the kitchen. The Art Institute is committed to
equal opportunity in its culinary programs and does not discriminate on the basis of disability (or any other reason)
and will make reasonable accommodations to a qualified student to enable the student to participate in culinary
programs, provided that the accommodation does not jeopardize safety, pose an undue hardship, or materially
alter the academic integrity of the program.
To participate in any program in The International Culinary Schools at The Art Institute, each student, with or
without reasonable accommodations, must be able to safely and effectively:
Attend and participate in both day and night shift (including first and fourth shifts) classes
• Communicate in person with co-workers, students and guests and process written and verbal
instructions
• Attend and participate in laboratory and production classes of up to 6 hours in length
• Regularly lift and transport food and other culinary product, equipment, small wares and utensils
weighing up to 40 pounds.
• Regularly lift and transport trays with hot and cold plated foods, small wares and other items, and
serve and clear tables where guests are seated.
• Pour and serve liquids and beverages, including hot liquids up to temperatures of 180-185 degrees
Fahrenheit (82.2 – 85 degrees Celsius)
• Use knives and other commercial cooking utensils
• Perform repetitive motion skills required in the kitchen and the food industry, such as whisking,
dicing, or piping
• Handle and cook different varieties of fish, seafood, beef, pork, chicken, lamb, venison, or other
meats, vegetables, and fruit products
• Handle and bake/cook using different flours – including all grains – as well as chocolate, fruits, and
nuts
• Operate commercial cooking and food service equipment
• Stand or maneuver in professional or commercial kitchens, dining rooms and related facilities for up
to 2 hours
• Sit on a kitchen stool or at a classroom desk for up to 50 minutes
• Visually assess, and evaluate the taste, appearance, texture and aroma of food and beverage
products
• Use commercial cleaning and sanitizing equipment and materials
• Produce food products within the time parameters designated by a course objective within a class or
for a hands-on or baking practical
The foregoing technical standards are essential to the programs of instruction in The International Culinary School
at The Art Institute and also reflect industry requirements and standards.
Page 18 of 183
INTERNATIONAL STUDENT ADMISSIONS POLICY
All international students must meet the same admissions standards as all other students when seeking to
enroll in The Art Institute of Ft. Lauderdale. Please refer to Admissions Requirements. Those international
students applying to SEVP-certified schools and requiring the school’s sponsorship for international student
visa status (Form I-20) must meet the additional requirements listed below. The school requires
nonimmigrant students present in Visa Waiver, B-1, and B-2 status to change visa to F-1 or other qualifying
status prior to enrolling in programs of study (other than avocational or recreational courses). Students in F2 or M-2 status may enroll on a part-time basis where available. Please note that some programs may not be
eligible for international students requiring Form I-20 sponsorship. Please ask to speak with the school’s
International Admissions Representative for more detail.
Important International Student Disclosure – International students attending Art Institute locations under
F-1 visas (Form I-20) are required to maintain a “full course of study” during each academic term of their
programs of study. For undergraduate (non-degree, Diploma, Associates, and Bachelors-level programs)
students, this is defined as a minimum of 12 credits per academic term. Graduate programs will vary by
program of study. Not more than 1 online course or 3 online credits per academic term may be counted
toward meeting the “full course of study” requirement. Please note that not all Art Institute locations offer
online courses. Speak with an admissions representative for more information. Program and course
offerings are subject to change and international students may be required to take additional courses to meet
the full course of study requirement. International students should work closely with the International
Student Advisor to ensure all requirements of their visa statuses are met.
THIS SCHOOL IS AUTHORIZED UNDER FEDERAL LAW TO ENROLL NONIMMIGRANT ALIEN STUDENTS.
ADMISSIONS REQUIREMENTS FOR STUDENTS REQUIRING FORM I-20 SPONSORSHIP
International students requiring The Art Institute of Ft. Lauderdale’s Form I-20 must submit the following
items in addition to the standard documents required for admission:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Original or official copies of all educational transcripts and diplomas (secondary and post-secondary
if applicable)
English language translation(s) of education transcripts and diplomas, if applicable
If used to meet admissions requirements above, official credential evaluation of post-secondary, nonU.S. transcripts and diplomas required for admission. NOTE: evaluations must be prepared by a
National Association of Credential Evaluation Services (NACES) or Association of International
Credential Evaluators (AICE)-member organization
Proof of English Language Proficiency (see English Language Proficiency Policy)
Proof of financial responsibility to cover costs of tuition and fees and living expenses (and dependent
costs if applicable) for at least one academic year (official bank statements, Sponsor’s Statement of
Support, if required)
Photocopy of student’s “bio-info” page of passport to provide proof of birth date and citizenship
For all nonimmigrant applicants residing in the United States, provide a copy of passport visa page
and Entry Record or Form I-94 card
For all non-immigrant applicants currently in F, M, or J status, provide a copy of all Forms I-20 or
Forms DS-2019
Transfer Clearance Form for students currently in F, M, or J status at another institution
Page 19 of 183
English Language Proficiency Policy
As the lectures, seminars, materials, and discourse which comprise programs of study at The Art Institute of
Ft. Lauderdale are presented in English, the school requires that all students possess and demonstrate a
minimum level of English language proficiency required to substantially benefit from the programs offered.
A student is deemed proficient in the English language if he or she:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Holds a U.S. high school diploma or U.S. General Equivalency Diploma (GED) or international high
school diploma, e.g., U.S. military base, business/diplomat expat community, etc., in which instruction
is delivered primarily in English
Holds the equivalent (evidenced by credential evaluation) of a U.S. high school diploma from
overseas institution in which instruction is delivered primarily in English
Completes (with passing grades in all courses) a minimum of two (2) academic terms at a regionally
or nationally accredited U.S. post-secondary institution in which instruction is delivered primarily in
English
Completes (with passing grades in all courses) English 101 and 102 at a regionally or nationally
accredited U.S. post-secondary institution in which instruction is delivered primarily in English
Presents acceptable English Language Proficiency test scores meeting the minimum required levels
set forth below.
Minimum Acceptable Proof of English Language Proficiency Standard
ELP TEST
DIPLOMA
AS/BS
TOEFL PAPER
480
500
TOEFL i-BT
54-55
61
IELTS
Level 5.5
Level 6.0
American College Testing (ACT) English
17
19
EF International Language Schools
C1
C1
ELS Language Schools
Level 108
Level 109
iTEP
4.0
4.5
Pearson
42
44
Michigan English Language Assessment Battery
(MELAB or “Michigan Test”)
73
80
Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT)-English Section**
420
526
Students from Puerto Rico: Prueba Aptitud
Academica (PAA) English Proficiency Section
453*
526
TOEIC (Academic Test)
600
650
*The scale for the Prueba Aptitud Academica has changed and now closely reflects the SAT.
GRAD.
550
79-80
Level 6.5
21
C2
Level 112
5.0
53
85
572
572
700
**As of April 2005, the SAT verbal test is replaced with the SAT critical reading test.
Undergraduate (diploma, associate and bachelor level) applicants may also satisfy the minimum standard of
English language proficiency by submitting official documentation of one of the following:
1
2
3
4
Successful completion of a minimum of two semesters or quarters of post-secondary course work at
a regionally accredited college or university or a college or university accredited by an approved
national accrediting body in which English is the language of instruction Successful completion is
defined as passing all courses for which the student was registered during the two semesters;
U.S. High School Diploma or GED administered in English;
Equivalent of a U.S. High School Diploma from a country in which English is the official language
(equivalency must be verified by a recognized evaluator of international credits);
Satisfactory completion of English 101 or 102 at an English speaking college or university within the
U.S., achieving a grade of “C” or higher.
Page 20 of 183
Please contact an International Student Admissions Representative for questions about acceptable alternative
measures of English Language Proficiency.
STUDENT RIGHT-TO-KNOW ACT
According to regulations published by the Department of Education based on the Student Right-to-Know Act, the
graduation/completion rates for first-time, full-time students who entered school and graduated/completed
within 150% of the normal time to complete the program must be made available to current and prospective
students. You may obtain this information in the Admissions Office or in the Consumer Information section of the
school’s website.
READMISSIONS PROCEDURES & RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF FINANCIAL AID
Any student who has left The Art Institute for any time period must go through the formal re-entry process. To
begin the process, the student must meet with the Assistant Director of Readmissions. The student’s record will be
reviewed for academic progress and financial obligations. If approval is obtained, the Assistant Director of
Readmissions may proceed with the reentry process.
Students who interrupt their education will be subject to any changes in tuition, curricula, and graduation
requirements that occurred during their leave.
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS
Introduction
Academic Affairs serves the students, faculty, and community through the development and implementation of
post-secondary educational programs. This prepares students with the necessary skills for entry-level positions in a
variety of design-related and business-related careers. Academic Affairs achieves its mission through:
• the selection, development, and retention of qualified faculty
• the careful, continual planning and development of a curriculum that is responsive to the needs of
students and employers
• the promotion and support of an effective library that provides access to the needed materials and
information supporting educational programs at The Art Institute
The Academic Affairs Division includes the Dean of Academic Affairs, Academic Department Directors, Registrar,
Librarian, Academic Advisor, and their respective staffs. The Academic Department Directors report to the Dean of
Academic Affairs. Faculty members report through their respective Department Director. Faculty and staff members
have been carefully selected to assure excellence in the educational process. In addition to having academic
credentials in their discipline, faculty members also have professional experience and backgrounds in the careerrelated areas they teach. Students come to The Art Institute to prepare to seek entry-level employment in the careers
of their choice. The major focus of the educational process is devoted to the development of employable skills and
professional work habits so that graduates are prepared for the working world.
It is very important that students use every resource at their disposal and acquire the maximum benefit from every
course. The student should consult with the instructors, advisors, or program chairs whenever there is need for
additional instruction or support services.
The Academic Department Directors are charged with the day-to-day administration of their student body through
academic advisement and curriculum management. They meet with faculty, both formally and informally,
throughout each quarter to ensure a strong and supportive learning environment. The program coordinators and
academic department directors meet regularly with the Dean of Academic Affairs. The meetings address
administrative and procedural issues, provide training and support, and cover strategic and operational initiatives.
Page 21 of 183
Academic Advising
The Art Institute has academic advisors who work with students to assist them in the selection of their courses.
Advisors are available during days and evenings.
Students are assisted with registration, schedule adjustment processes, and other matriculation necessities. Their
Advisors also serve as liaisons facilitating student communication with business offices such as Financial Services,
the Registrar’s Office, Academic Department Directors, and the Dean of Academic Affairs.
Students who experience academic difficulty are strongly encouraged to immediately consult with their
instructor[s], an academic advisor, and their Department Director to develop an action plan for resolving their
academic needs and concerns.
Articulation Agreements
The Art Institute maintains articulation agreements to facilitate the transfer of credit.
High School Agreements
The School Board of Miami-Dade County, FL and Delaware County Technical High School Agreements:
The Art Institute has established criteria to grant credit to students who have completed select Tech Prep and
other curricula in Florida high schools in Miami-Dade county. Through agreements with the district school boards
of education in these counties, credit may be granted for coursework in the following Tech Prep programs:
Academy of Database and Programming
Essentials Academy of Entrepreneurship
Academy of Information Technology
Business Technology Digital Design
Commercial Art Technology
Commercial Foods and Culinary Arts
Culinary Operations
Drafting and Illustrative Design Technology
Fashion Design Services
Interior Design Services
Television Production
Web Design Services
Please see: http://www.aifl.info/collegecredit/ for more information.
Statewide High School Agreements:
The Art Institute and the Florida Restaurant & Lodging Association Educational Foundation’s ProStart School- toCareer Programs and grant credit to high school graduates who have completed secondary programs of Food
Production and Services or Commercial Foods, or postsecondary vocational programs of Commercial Foods &
Culinary Arts or Food Management, Production, and Services.
For more information on receiving credit for these programs, please contact the Senior Director of Admissions at
954-308 -2434.
A range of online course opportunities is available.
For more information regarding the agreement between The Art Institute and other schools within The Art
Institutes system, please refer to Transfer of Credit Policy, or contact a program director.
Page 22 of 183
Attendance Policy
COURSE ATTENDANCE (GROUND)
The Art Institutes maintain an institutional attendance policy to support the academic achievement of its students.
Students are expected to attend all scheduled class, laboratory, or examination periods each week. Students,
whether present or absent from class, are responsible for knowing all that is announced, discussed, and/or
lectured upon in class or laboratory, as well as mastering all assigned reading. In addition, students are
responsible for submitting on time all assignments and examinations as required in class. Although some absences
are unavoidable because of illness or emergency, due to the nature of the program, there are no excused
absences.
Students will not be penalized for pregnancy or related conditions, including recovery from childbirth. Students
who are absent due to pregnancy or related conditions may receive an exception to the attendance policy and/or
be permitted to make up missed work for as long as the student’s absence is medically necessary. To avoid being
administratively withdrawn, students must contact their academic advisor or registrar about the need for a
pregnancy-related exception. As with other students seeking exceptions for medical-related reasons, students
seeking a pregnancy-related exception to the attendance policy must provide a doctor’s note indicating that the
absences were medically necessary. Failure to provide evidence of medical necessity for any absence may result in
the student being administratively withdrawn from school, and the student may not be allowed to make up any
missed assignments. Please note that a pregnancy exception to the attendance policy is only applicable to the
current course and cannot be carried over into any subsequent courses.
A student who is absent for three cumulative weeks (three classes for those that meet once a week or six classes for
those that meet twice a week)_in an 11-week term * will be withdrawn from the course and will receive a
Withdrawal (W) grade during weeks 1 through 9 of an 11 week term and a Withdrawal/Fail (W/F) grade after week
9 of an 11 week term for that course (after week 4 of a 5.5 week Mid quarter ground term**) unless the student
submits an appeal to remain in class that is accepted by the instructor and department director/dean. A student is
allowed only one appeal per class. In other words, if a student submits an appeal and it is approved, the next
absence will initiate a non-appealable withdrawal from the course. The Attendance Appeal Request Form may be
found in the registrar office.
Appeal Process – Withdrawn from Course (Ground)
Students who are administratively withdrawn from a single course for violating the attendance policy may submit a
one-time appeal per course per term to the Dean of Academic Affairs for reinstatement into their course(s) in the
active term. Students who appeal must do so in writing prior to the next class meeting for each course being
requested for reinstatement. The instructor must determine that the student still has the potential of successfully
completing the course(s) to earn a successful appeal. A copy of this appeal must be put into the student’s file.
CONSECUTIVE DAYS ABSENCE GRADING POLICY (GROUND)
Students who are not marked present in any of their scheduled classes for fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days
before the end of the ninth week of the 11 week term (week 4 of a 5.5 week Mid quarter ground term), will be
withdrawn from the Institute and will receive W’s (withdrawals, with no grade penalty), or if the withdrawal occurs
after the end of the ninth week of an 11 week term (after week 4 of a 5.5 week Mid quarter ground term) students
will be withdrawn from the Institute and will receive WF’s (Failures due to late withdrawal). Calendar days include
days that the student does not have any scheduled class. All calendar days that the school is not in session (e.g.,
school closings and holidays) do not count in the fourteen (14) calendar days as well during the active term.
Students who have been withdrawn due to violation of the consecutive absence policy, but are still in good
academic standing, if otherwise eligible, will be able to return the following term through the normal readmissions
process. Students who have been withdrawn and the withdrawal results in a violation of the satisfactory academic
progress policy (SAPP) must follow the procedure for appealing the academic dismissal.
Page 23 of 183
APPEAL PROCESS – CONSECUTIVE DAYS ABSENT (GROUND)
Students who are administratively withdrawn from school for violating the consecutive days absence attendance
policy may submit an appeal to the Dean of Academic Affairs for reinstatement into their course(s) in the active
term based on mitigating circumstances. Students, who appeal, must do so in writing and must include
documentation of mitigating circumstances.
Mitigating circumstances may include one of the following reasons: on the day of the recorded absence. The
following is a comprehensive list of events that may indicate a mitigating circumstance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Death of an immediate family member
Student illness requiring hospitalization (this includes mental health issues)
Illness of an immediate family member where the student is the primary caretaker
Illness of an immediate family member where the family member is the primary financial support
Abusive relationships
Divorce proceedings
Previously undocumented disability
Natural disaster
Family emergency
Financial hardship such as foreclosure or eviction
Documentation from a Professional Counselor
A doctor documented illness of the student for a significant period of time
Military deployment
Military Permanent Change of Station (PCS)
Special Circumstances
New students at on-ground campuses who attend the first week of a course and fail to attend the second week
of classes will be cancelled for the term start.
Continuing students at on-ground campuses who do not attend any of their classes through close of business
Wednesday of the second week of classes may be withdrawn from the Institute. They must contact the campus
registrar to indicate their intent to return. Additionally, the cumulative week policy (above) will still apply to
any classes not attended in week 1 and beyond.
Students who receive Veteran Affairs (VA) educational benefits must understand VA benefits, including tuition
and fees, the monthly housing allowance, book stipend, and Yellow Ribbon benefits are based in whole or in
part on the number of credit hours certified. The school is required to monitor and report enrollment status to
the VA. Accordingly, any violation of the school attendance policy will result in the adjustment or termination of
VA benefits. Adjustments in enrollment will likely affect payment of VA benefits, and reductions in enrollment
may result in a debt to the VA for any education benefits already received. The school will report enrollment as
follows:
o VA Students who officially withdraw, the actual last date of attendance (LDA) must be
determined and reported.
o VA students who are administratively withdrawn or stops attending without officially
withdrawing, the actual last date of attendance (LDA) must be determined and
reported.
o VA students who complete the term with all non-punitive “F” and/or non-punitive
grades, the school will determine and report the actual last date of attendance for
each course.
*Reports will be available in SIS for this information; please see Course Attendance Process.
**Students in Mid quarter ground courses that meet for 5.5 weeks who miss two cumulative weeks will be
withdrawn from the course and will receive a Withdrawal (W) grade before week 4 or Withdrawal/Fail (W/F) grade
after week 4.
**There may be additional conditions placed on veterans for pursuing their education. VA students should see
their VA School Certifying Official (VASCO).
Page 24 of 183
ATTENDANCE VERIFICATION
Students may verify their attendance at any time during the term by speaking with their instructor. In addition,
they may go to the campus academic advisors. Students who need information regarding their attendance will
need to request it in person. Any discrepancies should be discussed with the individual instructors.
QUALIFYING MILITARY SERVICE, DISASTERS, NATIONAL EMERGENCIES
To assist individuals who are performing qualifying military service and individuals who are affected by disaster,
war or other military operation or national emergency, an attendance exception may be granted. A student is
declared as military deployed upon receipt of official activation orders documentation by the school. Similarly,
appropriate documentation for students residing in an area declared as a disaster area must be submitted to the
school. The school’s registrar office will record the student’s actual last date of attendance and then provide an
attendance exception. If the documentation shows that the student knew she/he was going to be deployed prior
to the term or course start date and still decided to start, the school will not provide this military attendance
exception. For these reasons, it is required that the school personnel request deployment paperwork/orders to
verify deployment status or to document evidence of a disaster area declaration prior to applying the attendance
exception. The school must record the student’s actual last date of attendance regardless of the exception
granted.
ONLINE ATTENDANCE POLICY AND SUBSTANTIVE PARTICIPATION CRITERIA
Students taking online classes (including students taking PLUS courses) must submit at least one academicallyrelated posting in the learning management system each full attendance week. For online classes beginning on a
Monday, the full attendance week is defined as beginning on Monday at 12:00 a.m. Mountain Standard Time
(MST) to 11:59 p.m. MST the following Sunday. For online classes beginning on Thursday, the full attendance week
is defined as beginning on Thursday at 12:00 a.m. MST to 11:59 p.m. MST the following Wednesday.
1.
2.
For attendance purposes, an academically-related posting can include, but may not be limited to,
posting a drop box submission, posting to a threaded discussion forum, and taking a test/quiz. If
a third-party system such as MyLabs is required, usage of that system may also count for student
attendance if also recorded within an approved learning management system. For attendance
purposes, simply logging into an online class does not count toward attendance. It does not
include orientation, reading the courses or programs syllabus or activity prior to the start date of
the course.
Examples of acceptable evidence of academic attendance and attendance at an academicallyrelated activity in a distance education program include:
a) Student submission of an academic assignment
b) Student submission of an exam
c) Documented student participation in an interactive tutorial or computer assisted
instruction.
d) A posting by the student showing the students participation in an online study group
that is assigned by the institution.
e) Posting by the student in a discussion forum showing the students participation in an
online discussion about academic matters, and
f) An email from the student or other documentation showing that the student initiated
contact with a faculty member to ask a faculty member about the subject studied in the
course.
Online students are required to meet the first week’s attendance in order to be confirmed as an active student.
Failure to do this could negatively impact a student’s financial aid.
During the last half week of a 5.5 week class, students taking online classes must submit at least one academicallyrelated posting in the classroom on at least one day. For online classes that end on a Wednesday, the half week is
defined as beginning on Monday at 12:00 a.m. Mountain Standard Time (MST) to 11:59 p.m. MST the following
Page 25 of 183
Wednesday. For online classes that end on a Saturday, the half week is defined as beginning on Thursday at 12:00
a.m. Mountain Standard Time (MST) to 11:59 p.m. MST the following Saturday.
Students who fail to meet the attendance requirements for a week will be given an absence for that attendance
week. AiPOD students who fail to meet the attendance requirements for two consecutive attendance weeks
(cumulative for PLUS students) during a course will be administratively withdrawn from the course. If the student
is administratively withdrawn from all current courses, the student will be withdrawn from the institution.
If the student is administratively withdrawn due to attendance on or before the last day of week 4 in a 5.5 week
course (week 9 in an 11 week course), the student will receive a W grade for the course. If the student is
administratively withdrawn due to attendance after the last day of week 4 in a 5.5 week course (week 9 in an 11
week course), the student will receive a grade of WF for the course. The last date of attendance will be the last day
where the student met the attendance requirements.
In the specific case where a student has a current course grade of F but did not complete the final assignment of
the course and failed the course, the final course grade of F will be considered an unearned F as it pertains to Title
IV financial aid purposes.
Change of Program and Change of Level
A change of program at The Art Institute refers to a change in the area of study, not in the degree/diploma level.
For example, a change of program would include a change from the Associate of Science degree program in
Culinary Arts to the Associate of Science degree program in Photography.
A change in level refers to a change from one degree program to another degree program within the same field of
study; from a diploma program to a degree program within the same field of study; or from a degree program to a
diploma program within the same field of study.
For example, a level change would include a change from the Associate of Science degree program in Culinary Arts
to the diploma program in Culinary Arts.
A student who is on academic probation may not change programs or levels. If a change in either program or level
will immediately place a student into a probation or termination status, the change will not be allowed.
A student may request a change of program only once prior to graduating. It should be noted that a student’s
length of study, as well as their financial aid, may be affected by a change of program.
Courses taken in one program applicable to the second program are transferred with the grade earned. If students
have taken a course more than once, all grades relevant to that course apply to the second program. Grades
earned in the original program count towards the cumulative grade point average.
A student’s CGPA is based on all grades earned in any current and prior programs at The Art Institute except those
grades earned in transitional studies and language study courses and “W,” “P,” “V”, and “K” grades (which are
based on withdrawals, proficiency/life credit, requirements waived, and transfer credit).
Whether a student changes program or level, the student must sign a new enrollment agreement with their
academic advisor.
A student requesting a change in level from a diploma program to an Associate of Science or Bachelor of Science
degree program must meet all Art Institute requirements for admission into the degree program including
completion of any ACCUPLACER and/or LOEP or TOEFL test requirements. Such a student must take the
ACCUPLACER test immediately or be determined to be exempt (see Placement Testing, Transitional Studies and
Language Studies) before final approval of the transfer. Results of the ACCUPLACER test will determine whether
the student shall enroll in transitional studies courses. Students may not enroll in more than one program at a
time.
Page 26 of 183
A new student who wishes to pursue another degree after graduation must be processed as a new student
through the Admissions Department by completing a new application and enrollment agreement.
Class Sizes
The average class size is approximately 20 students. The maximum class size for lecture is approximately 60 and
the maximum laboratory setting is 35.
Class Sessions
Classes are in session six days a week, Monday through Saturday. Students are scheduled by The Art Institute to
meet their total weekly hour requirement through a combination of morning, afternoon, evening, and weekend
classes. The weekly hour requirement is scheduled to be completed in a minimum of three days and a maximum of
six days during each week. Individual times and days of attendance vary by department and quarter level and are
assigned and generally announced to students in advance of each quarterly start date.
The Art Institute reserves the right to change a student’s class session from time to time according to classroom,
studio, shop and/ or lab availability, and academic and student distribution circumstances. Occasionally,
instructional activities may occur at an off-campus location appropriate for the particular activity.
Late Start Policy
The Art Institute does not allow new students to start late. A late start is defined as someone who would enter on
or after the first day of the scheduled start, including the drop/add or schedule adjustment period.
In order to start at the next scheduled start, a student must be:
•
Completed and submitted an application by 5 p.m. one week before the start day (Monday – Main Start,
Friday – Mid-Session Start)
• Accepted, as defined in the ADCOM policy, planned at a 4 or 5 financial status, registered, by the
Wednesday preceding the start date. (Main Start) and Monday for a mid-session start.
• Must meet attendance and confirmation policies for the first week of class.
All placement tests must also be completed if the student is to be entered into a class that requires it; for instance,
English or online. If a student is transferring credits in lieu of a placement test, transcripts (either official or
unofficial) must be in the admission packet in order to place a student into the appropriate classes.
New student orientation is mandatory component for new students. Students are required to attend the
scheduled new student orientation for the campus location. Campuses can also hold additional or make-up
orientation sessions to accommodate students who aren’t able to attend the regularly scheduled orientation.
Course Code/Numbering System
Florida’s Statewide Course Numbering System (SCNS)
A number of courses in this catalog are identified by prefixes and numbers that were assigned by Florida’s
Statewide Course Numbering System (SCNS). This numbering system is used by all public postsecondary
institutions in Florida and 28 participating non-public institutions. The major purpose of this system is to facilitate
the transfer of courses between participating institutions. Students and administrators can use the online
Statewide Course Numbering System to obtain course descriptions and specific information about course transfer
between participating Florida institutions. This information is at the SCNS website at http://scns.fldoe.org.
Each participating institution controls the title, credit, and content of its own courses and recommends the first
digit of the course number to indicate the level at which students normally take the course. Course prefixes and
the last three digits of the course numbers are assigned by members of faculty discipline committees appointed for
that purpose by the Florida Department of Education in Tallahassee. Individuals nominated to serve on these
committees are selected to maintain a representative balance as to type of institution and discipline field or
specialization.
Page 27 of 183
The course prefix and each digit in the course number have a meaning in the Statewide Course Numbering System
(SCNS). The list of course prefixes and numbers, along with their generic titles, is referred to as the “SCNS
taxonomy.” Descriptions of the content of courses are referred to as “statewide course profiles.”
EXAMPLE OF COURSE IDENTIFIER
Prefix ENG
English Composition
Decade Digit (third digit) 0
Skills
Level Code (first digit) 1
Lower (Freshman) Level at this institution
Unit Digit (fourth digit) 1
Skills 1
Century Digit (second digit) 1
Freshman Composition
Lab Code
this course
General Rule for Course Equivalencies
Equivalent courses at different institutions are identified by the same prefixes and same last three digits of the
course number and are guaranteed to be transferable between participating institutions that offer the course,
with a few exceptions.
For example, a freshman composition skills course is offered by 56 different postsecondary institutions. Each
institution uses “ENC101” to identify its freshman composition skills course. The level code is the first digit and
represents the year in which students normally take the course at a specific institution. In the SCNS taxonomy,
“ENC” means “English Composition,” the century digit “1” represents “Freshman Composition,” the decade digit
“0” represents “Freshman Composition Skills,” and the unit digit “1” represents “Freshman Composition Skills I.” In
the sciences and certain other areas, a “C” or “L” after the course number is known as a lab indicator. The “C”
represents a combined lecture and laboratory course that meets in the same place at the same time. The “L”
represents a laboratory course or the laboratory part of a course, having the same prefix and course number
without a lab indicator, which meets at a different time or place.
Transfer of any successfully completed course from one participating institution to another is guaranteed in cases
where the course to be transferred is equivalent to one offered by the receiving institution. Equivalencies are
established by the same prefix and last three digits and comparable faculty credentials at both institutions. For
example, ENC 1101 is offered at a community college. The same course is offered at a state university as ENC 2101.
A student who has successfully completed ENC 1101 at the community college is guaranteed to receive transfer
credit for ENC 2101 at the state university if the student transfers. The student cannot be required to take ENC
2101 again since ENC 1101 is equivalent to ENC 2101. Transfer credit must be awarded for successfully completed
equivalent courses and used by the receiving institution to determine satisfaction of requirements by transfer
students on the same basis as credit awarded to the native students. It is the prerogative of the receiving
institution, however, to offer transfer credit for courses successfully completed that have not been designated as
equivalent. NOTE: Credit generated at institutions on the quarter-term system may not transfer the equivalent
number of credits to institutions on semester-term systems. For example, 4.0 quarter hours often transfers as 2.67
semester hours.
The Course Prefix
The course prefix is a three-letter designator for a major division of an academic discipline, subject matter area, or
sub-category of knowledge. The prefix is not intended to identify the department in which a course is offered.
Rather, the content of a course determines the assigned prefix to identify the course.
Authority for Acceptance of Equivalent Courses
Section 1007.24(7), Florida Statutes, states:
Any student who transfers among postsecondary institutions that are fully accredited by a regional or national
accrediting agency recognized by the United States Department of Education and that participate in the statewide
course numbering system shall be awarded credit by the receiving institution for courses satisfactorily completed
by the student at the previous institutions. Credit shall be awarded if the courses are judged by the appropriate
statewide course numbering system faculty committees representing school districts, public postsecondary
educational institutions, and participating nonpublic postsecondary educational institutions to be academically
equivalent to courses offered at the receiving institution, including equivalency of faculty credentials, regardless of
Page 28 of 183
the public or nonpublic control of the previous institution. The Department of Education shall ensure that credits
to be accepted by a receiving institution are generated in courses for which the faculty possess credentials that are
comparable to those required by the accrediting association of the receiving institution. The award of credit may
be limited to courses that are entered in the statewide course numbering system. Credits awarded pursuant to this
subsection shall satisfy institutional requirements on the same basis as credits awarded to native students.
Exceptions to the General Rule for Equivalency
Since the initial implementation of the SCNS, specific disciplines or types of courses have been accepted from the
guarantee of transfer for equivalent courses. These include varying topics courses that must be evaluated
individually, or applied courses in which the student must be evaluated for mastery of skill and technique. The
following courses are exceptions to the general rule for course equivalencies and may not transfer. Transferability
is at the discretion of the receiving institution.
A. Courses not offered by the receiving institution.
B. For courses at non-regionally accredited institutions, courses offered prior to the established transfer date
of the course in question.
C. Courses in the 900-999 series are not automatically transferable, and must be evaluated individually.
These include such courses as Special Topics, Internships, Apprenticeships, Practical, Study Abroad, Thesis
and Dissertations.
D. College preparatory and vocational preparatory courses.
E. Graduate courses.
F. Internships, Apprenticeships, Practica, Clinical Experiences and Study Abroad courses with numbers other
than those ranging from 900-999.
G. Applied courses in the performing arts (Art, Dance, Interior Design, Music, and Theatre) and skills courses
in Criminal Justice (academy certificate courses) are not guaranteed as transferable. These courses need
evidence of achievement (i.e., portfolio, audition, interview, etc.).
Courses at Non-Regionally Accredited Institutions
The Statewide Course Numbering System makes available on its home page (http:// scns.fldoe.org) a report
entitled “Courses at Nonregionally Accredited Institutions” that contains a comprehensive listing of all nonpublic
institution courses in the SCNS inventory, as well as each course’s transfer level and transfer effective date. This
report is updated monthly.
Questions about the Statewide Course Numbering System and appeals regarding course credit transfer decisions
should be directed to Mike Kain in the Department of institutional Effectiveness or the Florida Department of
Education, Office of Articulation, 1401 Turlington Building, Tallahassee, Florida 32399-0400. Special reports and
technical information may be requested by calling the Statewide Course Numbering System office at (850) 2450427 or via the internet at http://scns.fldoe.org.
The foregoing notwithstanding, any Art Institute course that carries a course number designated by Florida’s
Statewide Course Numbering System (SCNS) is eligible for transfer to any other Florida postsecondary institution
participating in the SCNS program with a few exceptions.
Course Scheduling
The Art Institute reserves the right to reschedule students at any time to accommodate classroom needs. The Art
Institute also reserves the right to alter or change course titles, course content, or the sequencing of classes,
subject to regulatory approval, at any time necessary for the purpose of enhancing the education program.
Electives Terminology
An elective course is a course taken by a student to fulfill total credit hour graduation requirements but not
specifically listed in the required course listing in The Art Institute catalog or on the student’s degree audit as a
specific course requirement.
Program Electives
A program elective is a course specific to any program area other than General Education.
Page 29 of 183
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Program elective requirements may be fulfilled through advanced standing (transfer or proficiency credit)
but generally are not fulfilled in this manner due to currency issues and the rapid pace of technological
change.
The program chair or designee awards transfer or proficiency credit in the student’s declared field of
study. All advanced standing credit transfer must be completed prior to the beginning of the student’s
first quarter. See the Standards for Academic Progress Policy and Transfer of Credit policy for specific
rules.
A student’s program elective selection is bound by prerequisite/corequisite/concurrent requisite
requirements.
A student may request special permission in writing from the program chair to register for any course in
which they wish to enroll.
A General Education course or elective cannot be used to fulfill a required program course or program
elective.
Students should consult the most recent listing of approved program electives prior to registering.
The list of approved program electives for a given program is updated quarterly by the corresponding
program director.
General Education Electives
1. General Education electives refer to elective courses that are not listed on the student’s degree audit as a
required course in the student’s program area and that fall in the General Education list of courses.
2. General Education electives are chosen by a student to fulfill the total credit hour requirement in the
General Education area.
3. General Education electives must fulfill the definition of a General Education course as described in the
Accrediting Council of Independent Colleges and Schools (ACICS) and Florida Commission for Independent
Education (CIE criteria.)
4. Students should consult the listing of approved General Education elective courses prior to registering.
5. A Program course or elective cannot be used to fulfill a required General Education course or General
Education elective.
General Education
Associate’s and bachelor’s degree programs at The Art Institute include general education requirements. Courses
in general education are intended to complement the knowledge and skills students acquire in their program area.
The focus is on concepts, principles, and theory rather than practical application to a specific program.
These requirements are designed to help provide graduates with an understanding of the world around them and
to prepare them for a lifetime of growth and development as a person, citizen, and member of the global
community. Students have the opportunity to gain competencies in mathematics and computer science, English
and literature, behavioral and social sciences, physical and natural sciences, and humanities.
General education objectives common to many program areas include:
1. Acquire essential written, oral, and interpersonal communication skills
2. Use quantitative reasoning skills
3. Develop critical-thinking and logical-reasoning skills
4. Learn information literacy skills
5. Appreciate the humanities and sciences in historical and cultural contexts
Students should consult an Academic Advisor or Department Director/Coordinator to determine which general
education courses are required, their sequence, and electives, if any, that are available.
Page 30 of 183
Graduation Requirements
To be qualified to graduate and become eligible to participate in Portfolio Review for those programs requiring a
portfolio, a student must fulfill the following requirements:
1. receive a passing grade or credit for all required coursework
2. achieve a minimum CGPA of 2.0
3. maintain satisfactory academic progress standards
4. satisfy all financial obligations to The Art Institute
5. receive a passing grade on the portfolio or thesis, if required
6. students must be enrolled at The Art Institute during the quarter in which they will graduate All program
changes must be approved and completed prior to the add/ drop period of the last quarter of attendance
Please note: Portfolio courses require students to earn a “C” or better to exit the course. Any performance below a
“C” results in failure and is calculated in the student’s CGPA as an “F” grade.
Bachelor of Science Degree
To graduate with a Bachelor of Science degree, students are required to have fulfilled all required coursework and
achieved a final Cumulative Grade Point Average of 2.0 or higher. Additionally, students must have successfully
completed 180 credits.
Associate of Science Degree
To graduate with an Associate of Science degree, students must have fulfilled all required coursework and
achieved a final Cumulative Grade Point Average of 2.0 or higher. Also required for graduation are 90 quarter
credit hours in either Baking & Pastry, Culinary Arts, Fashion Design, Graphic Design, Photography, Web Design &
Interactive Media, or Video Production programs
Diploma
To graduate with a diploma, students must have fulfilled all required coursework and achieved a CGPA of 2.0 or
higher. Also required for graduation are 48 or 54 quarter credit hours.
Portfolio and Capstone Evaluation Requirements
Graduating students from all art-based/design departments must pass a required course in which a portfolio is
produced. The portfolio must be produced to the standard established by the faculty. The portfolio in some
departments may be evaluated by a committee. An outline of portfolio standards, projects, and general criteria is
separately provided to students within each program. These portfolio requirements are periodically reviewed.
Graduating students from the culinary departments must pass a required capstone course in which a restaurant
business plan is produced. The final capstone business plan project will utilize competencies developed from
previous coursework within the curriculum. These competencies will be reviewed and assessed by faculty
throughout the capstone course.
The Art Institute reserves the right to alter or modify the portfolio and/or capstone requirements at any time it is
deemed to be in the best interest of graduating students to enhance their career employment potential.
Portfolio Review
The Art Institute celebrates the work and accomplishments of its graduating classes with Portfolio Review. This
venue also serves as a showcase to introduce graduates and their work to prospective employers, the community,
family, and friends. Portfolio Review is held at the end of each quarter. This will be mandatory for all students at all
levels.
Page 31 of 183
Length of Time & Document Received Upon Graduation
Advertising
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Advertising program, the Bachelor of Science
degree will be conferred.
Media Arts & Animation
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Media Arts & Animation program, the Bachelor of
Science degree will be conferred.
Culinary Arts Programs
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Culinary Management program, the Bachelor of
Upon completion of the 18-month, 6-quarter [90 credit hours] Culinary Arts program, the Associate of Science
degree will be conferred. Holders of an Associate of Science degree in Culinary Arts will have the length of the 12quarter [180 credit hours] Bachelor of Science degree in Culinary Management reduced proportionately.
Upon completion of the 18-month, 6-quarter [90 credit hours] Baking & Pastry program, the Associate of Science
degree will be conferred. Holders of an Associate of Science degree in Baking & Pastry will have the length of the
12-quarter [180 credit hours] Bachelor of Science degree in Culinary Management reduced proportionately.
Upon completion of the 12-month, 5-quarter (54 credit hours) program, the diploma in Culinary Arts will be
conferred.
Upon completion of the 12-month, 5-quarter (54 credit hours) program, the diploma in Baking and Pastry will be
conferred.
Digital Filmmaking & Video Production
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Digital Filmmaking & Video Production program,
the Bachelor of Science degree will be conferred.
Upon completion of the 18-month, 6-quarter [90 credit hours] Video Production program, the Associate of Science
Holders of an Associate of Science degree in Video Production will have the length of the 12-quarter [180 credit
hours] Bachelor of Science degree in Digital Filmmaking & Video Production reduced proportionately.
Fashion Design
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Fashion Design program, the Bachelor of Science
Upon completion of the 18-month, 6-quarter [90 credit hours] Fashion Design program, the Associate of Science
Holders of an Associate of Science degree in Fashion Design will have the length of the 12-quarter [180 credit
hours] Bachelor of Science degree reduced proportionately.
Fashion Retailing
Upon completion of the 12-month, 4-quarter (48 credit hours) program, the diploma in Fashion Retailing will be
conferred.
Fashion Merchandising
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Fashion Merchandising program, the Bachelor of
Page 32 of 183
Game Art & Design
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Game Art & Design program, the Bachelor of
Graphic Design
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Graphic Design program, the Bachelor of Science
Upon completion of the 18-month, 6-quarter [90 credit hours] Graphic Design program, the Associate of Science
degree will be conferred. Holders of an Associate of Science degree in Graphic Design will have the length of the
12-quarter [180 credit hour] Bachelor of Science degree reduced proportionately.
Illustration
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Illustration program, the Bachelor of Science
Industrial Design
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Industrial Design program, the Bachelor of
Interior Design
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Interior Design program, the Bachelor of Science
Upon completion of the 18-month, 6-quarter [90 credit hours] Interior Design program, the Associate of Science
Holders of an Associate of Science degree in Interior Design will have the length of the 12-quarter [180 credit hour]
Bachelor of Science degree reduced proportionately.
Photography
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Photography program, the Bachelor of Science
Upon completion of the 18-month, 6-quarter [90 credit hours] Photography program, the Associate of Science
Visual Effects & Motion Graphics
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Visual Effects & Motion Graphics program, the
Bachelor of Science degree will be conferred.
Web Design & Interactive Media
Upon completion of the 36-month, 12-quarter [180 credit hours] Web Design & Interactive Media program, the
Bachelor of Science degree will be conferred.
Upon completion of the 18-month, 6-quarter [90 credit hours] Web Design & Interactive Media program, the
Associate of Science degree will be conferred.
Holders of an Associate of Science degree in Web Design & Interactive Media will have the length of the 12-quarter
[180 credit hours] Bachelor of Science degree reduced proportionately.
Page 33 of 183
Web Design & Interactive Communication
Upon completion of the 12-month, 4-quarter (48 credit hours) program, the diploma in Web Design & Interactive
Communication will be conferred.
Web Design & Development
Upon completion of the 12 month, 4-quarter (48 credit hours) program, the diploma in Web Design &
Development will be conferred.
Late Work
Late work will be permitted with the permission of the instructor. Work extended beyond the end of the
subsequent quarter must be recommended by the faculty and approved by the Department Director and Dean of
Academic Affairs. Late work has no impact on recorded attendance. The standard Art Institute contract to finish
work must be completed, signed, and approved prior to any late work being accepted.
Online Courses
About Online Courses
The Art Institute offers selected online courses through a consortium agreement with The Art Institute of
Pittsburgh - Online Division. Online courses are intended to allow students more freedom in course scheduling
because they are completed off campus at the student’s convenience.
Academic and Software Orientation for Online Courses
Each student taking online courses is required to successfully complete an academic orientation to online learning
prior to the beginning of their course(s); each student is notified of when this orientation must be completed. This
orientation reviews the expectations, policies, and procedures associated with taking courses online. During the
software orientation, the student logs on to the site that runs the courses on their computer. Several exercises are
provided that help to clarify to the student whether they are knowledgeable and comfortable enough to begin
working when the course begins.
The student has 24-hour online platform software support via a toll-free number throughout the length of the
course.
Students also have access to email help through the Art Institute of Pittsburgh - Online Division web site
https://www.artinstitutes.edu/flyover/catalogs/12. asp to address questions and concerns.
Some courses also require knowledge of software used in the course. Should a student enroll in one of these
courses, a software tutorial is offered at no additional charge. The tutorial should be completed and a test of
software competency demonstrated by the student prior to taking the course.
Placement Testing, Transitional Studies (TS)
Placement Determination Criteria
The results of the ACCUPLACER test determine whether a student must enroll in developmental English courses at
The Art Institute.
ACCUPLACER Test Scoring
An applicant whose ACCUPLACER score is 87 or higher for English will be waived from Introduction to Composition
(ENC0020). An applicant whose ACCUPLACER score is lower than 87 for English must enroll in Introduction to
Composition. If a student does not successfully complete the Introduction to Composition course within three
consecutive attempts, they shall be academically terminated. Students who are required to take the English
Transitional Course are required to take it in their first or second quarter of enrolment.
A student who is enrolled in any transitional studies coursework must obtain advisement from their academic
advisor before course registration for the next quarter. Registration by a student currently enrolled in transitional
studies coursework without first obtaining advisement is prohibited and may lead to academic probation. To
Page 34 of 183
advance from a transitional studies course to a college level English a student must exit the transitional studies
course with a grade of “C” or higher.
Any student who does not exit the transitional studies course successfully or withdraws from the course in a given
quarter must repeat the course in the following quarter. All courses must be attempted and completed in
consecutive quarters or the student will be placed on academic probation. If a student does not successfully
complete a required transitional studies course within three consecutive attempts, they will be academically
terminated. For more information, please refer to the Standards for Academic Progress Policy below.
Quarter Credit Hour Definition
A quarter credit hour is an amount of work represented in intended learning outcomes and verified by evidence of
student achievement that is an institutionally established equivalency that reasonably approximates not less than:
1. One hour of classroom or direct faculty instruction and a minimum of two hours of out-of-class student
work each week for 10-12 weeks, or the equivalent amount of work over a different amount of time; or
2. At least an equivalent amount of work as required in paragraph (1) of this definition for other academic
activities as established by the institution including laboratory work, internships, practica, studio work,
and other academic work leading to the award of credit hours.
Quarter Credit Hour Calculation
General Courses
All coursework at The Art Institute is measured in quarter credit hours. One quarter credit hour is awarded for
every 10 classroom contact hours of lecture, 20 classroom contact hours of laboratory instruction, or 30 contact
hours of internship. One classroom contact hour is defined as 50 minutes in a 60-minute period. The student is
assumed to devote appropriate time to preparation and study outside the classroom.
Measurement in credit hours or the listing of credits for courses is not intended to imply transferability into college
programs at other postsecondary institutions.
Culinary Program Quarter Lab Course Credit Hour Calculation
All lab courses within the Culinary Arts programs are measured in quarter credit hours. One quarter credit hour is
awarded for every 11 classroom contact hours of lecture, 22 classroom contact hours of lab instruction, or 33
contact hours of externship.
The Art Institute operates on a quarter schedule. One semester hour is converted as 1.5 quarter credit hours.
Transfer credit applied to any The Art Institute course will not exceed the credit value of that course.
Registration
General Information
The Registrar and staff are responsible for the following services:
• Maintenance of all students’ permanent academic records
• Issuance of grade reports and/ or attendance reports
• Issuance of student transcript records. There is a $10 fee for each transcript. Allow 10–14 days processing
time; requests must be made in writing. Failure to meet financial obligations may lead to the withholding
of academic transcripts.
• Supervision of quarterly student registration activities
• Processing of student changes, including:
o leaves of absence
o course and program interruptions
o requests for program changes
o veterans’ enrollment certifications and reports
o Social Security verification
o address changes
o verification of enrollment forms
Page 35 of 183
Registration
Driven by the goal of The Art Institute to prepare students to seek opportunities in their chosen fields of
employment, The Art Institute maintains the following credit load recommendations:
All degree students are encouraged to register for a minimum of 12 credits per quarter and a maximum of 18
credits per quarter.
All diploma students are encouraged to register for a minimum of 9 credits per quarter and a maximum of 12
credits per quarter.
Exceptions to these policies must be approved by the Dean of Academic Affairs or their designee.
Courses are available on a first-come, first-serve basis, so it is important that each student register during the
designated registration period. Students must register and complete all outstanding paperwork with the business
offices by the end of registration. Students may adjust their scheduled classes only through the seventh academic
day [including Saturday] of the quarter.
Undergraduate Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy
A student must demonstrate Satisfactory Academic Progress by successfully completing courses attempted.
Completing courses with C or better grades indicates academic progress. Receiving D or lower grades and/or
withdrawing from classes may put students at risk. Poor academic performance may lead to Academic/Financial
Warning and/or Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. It is very important that students attend all registered courses
and complete them successfully. Should a compelling reason arise that requires a student to cease attendance, it is
the student’s responsibility to immediately contact the Dean of Academic Affairs or Registrar’s Office.
The following criteria are used to determine whether or not a student is making Satisfactory Academic Progress. A
student must be able to:
• Maintain a minimum cumulative grade point average (CGPA);
• Achieve the minimum incremental completion rate (ICR); and
• Complete the program within a maximum allowable timeframe (MTF).
Students who fail to meet the minimum standards of any of the above criteria will be notified by letter by the Dean
of Academic Affairs or Campus Registrar within four (4) business days of determination. Administrative actions will
be taken when a student fails to meet the minimum standards of any of the above criteria. If the resulting action
results in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal, a student may appeal the Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. If the
appeal is denied, the student will remain dismissed and can no longer attend or receive Title IV aid at the Institute.
The Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy contains the following information:
• Criteria for Honors Designations
• Milestones and Evaluation Points for Satisfactory Academic Progress
• Academic/Financial Aid Warning
• Procedure for Appealing Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal
• Procedure to Apply for Re-Entry after Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal
• Academic/Financial Aid Probation and an Academic Plan
• Explanations of Related Issues
Failure to complete courses successfully for any reason may negatively affect a student’s Satisfactory Academic
Progress (SAP) and are considered to be punitive grades. Failing courses, being suspended or terminated from
courses, or withdrawing from courses could result in the loss of financial aid and/or veterans education benefits
and academic dismissal. In order for a student to graduate, the minimum requirements are a CGPA of 2.0, 66.67%
ICR, and completion of the program without attempting more than 150% of the credits in the program. Refer to
the Metrics of SAP section below for additional information regarding the calculation of CGPA, ICR and MTF.
Page 36 of 183
While the terms Academic/Financial Aid Warning, Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal, and Academic/Financial Aid
Probation are used, the status applies to all students whether receiving aid or not.
The College has the right to modify the Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy at any time.
Criteria for Honors Designations
To promote academic excellence and to recognize exemplary academic achievement, the following system is
recommended for honor designations on a quarter basis and upon graduation.
Quarter Honors Designations (at the completion of a quarter)
Any student who enrolls for and completes 12 credits or more is eligible for the following designations:
Quarter GPA
4.0
3.7-3.99
3.5-3.69
Honors Designation
President’s Honor List
Dean’s Honor List
Honor Roll
Honors Designation at Graduation
Students who achieve a CGPA of 3.5 or better are designated as Honor Graduates. Transitional studies courses are
not considered when evaluating honors designations.
Milestones and Evaluation Points for Satisfactory Academic Progress
Compliance with Standards of Academic Progress is reviewed every quarter for all Certificate and Diploma
programs.
Certificate and Diploma Programs:
1. At the end of the first quarter, students must attain a minimum CGPA of 1.00 and an ICR of 33.33%.
Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/Financial Aid Warning for one quarter. Students
who are only participating in Transitional Studies courses are considered to be maintaining Satisfactory
Academic Progress (SAP).
2. At the end of the second quarter, students must attain a minimum CGPA of 1.50 and an ICR of 50.00%.
Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/Financial Aid Warning for one quarter unless the
student was on Academic/Financial Aid Warning in his or her previous quarter. If the student was on
Academic/Financial Aid Warning in the previous quarter, failure to meet these standards will result in
Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. Students who are only participating in Transitional studies courses are
considered to be maintaining SAP.
3. At the end of the third quarter, and every quarter thereafter, students must attain a minimum CGPA of
2.00 and an ICR of 66.67%. Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/Financial Aid Warning
for one quarter unless the student was on Academic/Financial Aid Warning in his or her previous quarter.
If the student was on Academic/Financial Aid Warning in the previous quarter, failure to meet these
standards will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal.
4. Students may not attempt more than 150% of the credits in their programs; anything in excess of 150% of
the credits will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. Dismissal for violating the maximum
timeframe (MTF) can happen at any time.
5. Reentries: To ensure an evaluation is completed for all students in the last 12 months, an evaluation will
be completed upon reentry processing using the criteria for the next applicable evaluation point (See
Certificate/Diploma Evaluation Point Milestones (CGPA/ICR) requirements) noted in this policy. For
example, if a student enrolled in October 2015 and completed the fall quarter, dropped in the winter
2016 quarter and returned in the spring 2017 quarter of the following year, the student would have an
evaluation prior to the start of the spring 2017 quarter against the next applicable evaluation point for the
student. Students reviewed upon reentry will be advised based on their SAP status at the time of reentry
and provided with a projection of what they will need to accomplish in order to be in compliance with SAP
requirements at the next official evaluation point (See Certificate/Diploma Evaluation Point Milestones
(CGPA/ICR) requirements). Reentries whose evaluation does not indicate the ability to meet the next
Page 37 of 183
evaluation point during reentry processing will not be allowed to reenter into the program of
enrollment.
6. Students should note that if they are on Academic/Financial Aid Warning, it will be very difficult to meet
the minimum requirements of the next evaluation point. Students should consult with their academic
advisor concerning their exact requirements.
7. Transitional Studies courses are based on the result of the academic assessment tool. Like any course,
students must successfully complete such courses in order to progress in the program. Transitional
Studies course credits do not count towards the total number of credits for graduation nor do they count
in the CGPA. Additionally, the courses do not count in determining the maximum time frame allowable to
earn the certificate or diploma or in the incremental completion rate as attempted credits and, if
successful, earned credits.
8. Transitional Studies courses do have credit hours assigned to them for enrollment and tuition charging
purposes. While Transitional Studies courses are not included in the CGPA, a student who attempts but
does not pass or withdraws from the same Transitional Studies course three times is dismissed and there
is no right to appeal the termination.
9. Students on Academic/Financial Aid Warning are considered to be making progress toward meeting
Standards of Satisfactory Academic Progress and, if otherwise eligible may receive financial aid.
10. The grades, grade point average, cumulative data for all courses a student attempted at the Institution, as
well as courses successfully transferred in from prior postsecondary education, are available on the
student portal for review. There is also an indication if a student is on Academic/Financial Aid Warning, on
Academic/Financial Aid Probation, or on academic/Financial Aid Dismissal.
11. Compliance with SAP is reviewed every quarter for Certificate and Diploma programs. A student who
starts or re-enters at a MID session will have that session count as an entire quarter for SAP purposes.
CERTIFICATE/DIPLOMA
Evaluation Point
End of First Quarter
Milestones (CGPA and ICR)
< 1.0 and/or 33.33%
End of Second Quarter
< 1.5 and/or 50.00%
End of Third Quarter and
every quarter thereafter
At Any Time
< 2.0 and/or 66.67%
Anything in excess of 150% MTF
Required Action
Academic/Financial Aid Warning
Academic/Financial Aid Warning (if 1st
time)/Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal (if on
Academic/Financial Aid Warning
Academic/Financial Aid Warning (if 1st time)/
Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal (if on
Warning)
Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal
Please note that if you do not pass the same Transitional Studies course after three attempts, the result will be
Academic / Financial Aid Dismissal with no right to appeal the dismissal.
Unless otherwise noted, Academic/Financial Aid Dismissals can be appealed. Please see the Appeal Process
below.
Degree Programs:
Degree programs are evaluated after a student has attempted three quarters and sixth quarters including portions
of a quarter) during the first six quarters. After the sixth quarter, the student is evaluated at the end of each
quarter. While grades, GPAs, and Incremental Completion Rates are made available at the end of a student’s
quarter, they are informational only except at evaluation points. Please note students may be alerted of their
progress at any time and may be required to take specific action.
1. At the end of the first academic year (an academic year is three (3) quarters in which courses are
attempted in each quarter); students must achieve a minimum CGPA of 1.00 and an ICR of 33.33%.
Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal.
2. At the end of the second academic year, students must attain a minimum CGPA of 2.00 and an ICR of
66.67%. Anything below these milestones will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal.
Page 38 of 183
3.
Starting the quarter after the sixth attempted quarter, and every quarter thereafter, students are
evaluated at the end of each quarter and must attain a minimum CGPA of 2.00 and an ICR of 66.67%.
Failure to meet these standards will result in Academic/Financial Aid Warning unless the student was on
Financial Aid Warning the previous quarter. If the student was on Academic/Financial Aid Warning in the
previous quarter, failure to meet these standards will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal.
4. Students may not attempt more than 150% of the credits in their programs; anything in excess of 150%
of the credits will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal. Dismissal for violating the maximum
timeframe (MTF) can happen at any time.
5. Placement into Transitional Studies courses are based on the result of the academic assessment tool. Like
any course, students must successfully complete such courses in order to progress in the program.
Transitional studies course credits do not count towards the total number of credits for graduation nor do
they count in the CGPA. Additionally, the transitional study course(s) do not count in determining the
maximum time frame allowable to earn the degree and do not count in the incremental completion rate
as attempted credits and, if successful, earned credits. Please note that the student will be dismissed
immediately if the student does not successfully complete the same Transitional Study upon a third
attempt.
6. Transitional Studies courses do have credit hours assigned to them for enrollment and tuition charging
purposes. While Transitional Studies courses are not included in the CGPA, a student who attempts but
does not pass or withdraws from the same Transitional Studies course three times is dismissed and there
is no right to appeal the dismissal.
7. The grades, grade point average, cumulative data for all courses a student attempted at the Institution, as
well as courses successfully transferred in from prior postsecondary education, are available on the
student portal for review. There is also an indication if a student is on Academic/Financial Aid Warning, on
Academic/Financial Aid Probation or on Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal.
8. For Degree programs, compliance with SAP is reviewed every academic year during a student’s first two
years and then quarterly thereafter. A student who starts or re-enters at a MID session will have that
session count as an entire quarter for SAP purposes.
9. Students on Academic/Financial Aid Warning are considered to be making progress toward meeting
Standards of Satisfactory Academic Progress and, if otherwise eligible may receive financial aid.
10. Reentries: To ensure an evaluation is completed for all students in the last 12 months, an evaluation will
be completed upon reentry processing using the criteria for the next applicable evaluation point (See
Degree Programs Evaluation Point Milestones (CGPA/ICR) requirements) noted in this policy. For example,
if a student enrolled in October 2015 and completed the fall quarter, dropped in the Winter 2016 quarter
and returned in the spring 2017 quarter of the following year, the student would have an evaluation prior
to the start of the spring 2017 quarter against the next applicable evaluation point for the
student . Students reviewed upon reentry will be advised based on their SAP status at the time of reentry
and provided with a projection of what they will need to accomplish in order to be in compliance with SAP
requirements at the next official evaluation point (See Degree Programs Evaluation Point Milestones
(CGPA/ICR) and requirements). Reentries whose evaluation does not indicate the ability to meet the
next evaluation point during reentry processing will not be allowed to reenter into the program of
enrollment.
DEGREE PROGRAMS
Evaluation Point
End of First Academic Year
End of Second Academic
Year
End of Seventh Quarter and
Thereafter
At Any Time
Both Milestones
(CGPA and ICR) Must be Met
< 1.00 and/or 33.33%
< 2.00 and/or 66.67%
< 2.0 and/or 66.67%
Anything in excess of 150% MTF
Required Action
Academic/Financial Aid Warning (if 1st time)/
Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal (if on
Academic/Financial Aid Warning)
Page 39 of 183
Please note that if you do not pass the same Transitional Studies course after three attempts, the result will be
Academic / Financial Aid Dismissal with no right to appeal the dismissal.
Unless otherwise noted, Academic/Financial Aid Dismissals may be appealed. Please see the Appeal Process below.
A student enrolled in Transitional Studies courses must be able to pass the same Transitional Studies course after
three attempts or that student will be placed on Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal.
If the review of a student’s Satisfactory Academic Progress performed at any time indicates that it is
mathematically impossible to meet the minimum requirements of the Standards of Satisfactory Academic Progress
policy at the next mandatory check point, the student will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal from the
Institution.
To be removed from Academic/Financial Aid Warning or Academic/Financial Aid Probation, a student must meet
the Satisfactory Academic Progress requirements at the next applicable measuring point.
Procedure for Appealing Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal
A student who is dismissed for violating Satisfactory Academic Progress must appeal in writing to the Dean of
Academic Affairs for re-entry before the start of the quarter in which he/she wishes to return. The written appeal
must state the mitigating circumstances that contributed to the dismissal. The written appeal must be supported
with appropriate documentation of the mitigating circumstances with an explanation on how the circumstances
have been remedied or changed to ensure that he or she will be able to meet satisfactory academic progress if readmitted.
The Dean of Academic Affairs or an Appeals Committee will review the student’s appeal and will determine within
14 business days of the date of the receipt of the appeal whether the circumstances and academic status warrant
consideration for re-admission. The student may be asked to appear in person during the review process when
deemed necessary by the Dean of Academic Affairs or the Appeals Committee. Upon the Appeals Committee
decision, the student will be notified by the Dean of Academic Affairs both verbally and in writing. The Appeals
Committee decision will be final. Following is a comprehensive list of events that indicate there may be a
mitigating circumstance which has negatively impacted academic progress:
• Death of an immediate family member
• Student illness requiring hospitalization (this includes mental health issues)
• Illness of an immediate family member where the student is the primary caretaker
• Illness of an immediate family member where the family member is the primary financial support
• Abusive relationships
• Divorce proceedings
• Previously undocumented disability
• Natural disaster
• Family emergency
• Financial hardship such as foreclosure or eviction
• Documentation from a Professional Counselor
• A doctor documented illness of the student for a significant period of time
• Military deployment
• Military Permanent Change of Station (PCS)
• Special Circumstances
Students should understand that by having a mitigating circumstance it does not automatically mean the appeal
will be approved. The Appeal Committee will review that the student sufficiently providing documentation of the
mitigating circumstance (as outlined above) and that the student has resolved the mitigating circumstance.
A student who is successful in his or her appeal is able to apply for re-entry and if otherwise eligible, receive
financial aid for one quarter; however, the student will be placed on Academic/Financial Aid Probation at the start
Page 40 of 183
of the academic quarter. A student on Academic/Financial Aid Probation may receive financial aid (if otherwise
eligible) for one quarter. If the appeal is denied, aid cannot be paid and the student is dismissed.
Students who have an appeal denied can reapply however the passage of time by itself does not impact the Appeal
Committee’s decision.
The Dean of Academic Affairs is responsible for determining the appropriateness of the mitigating Circumstance in
regards to severity, timing and duration of the mitigating circumstance, and for determining whether the student’s
situation has changed that would allow the student to demonstrate satisfactory academic progress at the end of
the Academic/Financial Aid Probation or the end of the period of the Academic Plan. Any consideration of the
conditions outside of the list provided should be discussed with the Art Institute Vice President of Academic
Affairs. Student life issues and making the transition to college are not considered mitigating circumstances under
this policy.
Documentation from a professional counselor should not breach the student/counselor relationship and should
remain confidential. A memorandum or letter on school or organizational letterhead indicating a counselor’s
opinion that the student issues may be accommodated to ensure that the student will be able to meet Satisfactory
Academic Progress will suffice as proof of mitigating circumstances as well as documentation that the student’s
circumstances have been remedied or changed to ensure that the student will be able to meet Satisfactory
Academic Progress with the accommodations from the institution.
If a student’s appeal is successful, the student will be placed on Academic/Financial Aid Probation for one quarter
(or two if eligible) following re-admittance. The student will be eligible for financial aid during the
Academic/Financial Aid Probation period. Academic Advisors, Registrars, and/or Academic Department
Chairs/Program Directors must develop, document and maintain as part of the appeals process a concrete
Academic Plan for how a student will complete his remaining coursework and meet the minimum requirements of
Satisfactory Academic Progress by end of either the Academic/Financial Aid Probation period or by the end of the
quarter included in the Academic Plan. The Academic Plan must detail specific time frames and student success
measures and cannot be greater than one (1) quarter for certificate or diploma programs but for degree programs
may be up to two (2) quarters if necessary for the student to meet the minimum requirements of Satisfactory
Academic Progress. The Academic Plan must be reviewed with the student so that designated Academic Plan is
being met and the student will remain on track to achieve the success measures within the approved timeframe.
For students in degree programs that may have an Academic Plan for more than one quarter, the student must
meet the academic targets of the Academic Plan at the end the first quarter when the student is on
Academic/Financial Aid Probation and by the end of the Academic Plan, the student must meet the minimum
requirements of Satisfactory Academic Progress. If the student meets the academic goals and requirements under
the Academic Plan for the first quarter while on Academic/Financial Aid Probation, he or she may complete the
second quarter under the Academic Plan and be eligible to receive financial aid. Failure to meet the established
goals included in the Academic Plan will result in Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal
Registrars will ensure that Academic Advisors or Academic Department Directors have notified students in
writing that they are in Academic Warning/Financial Aid Warning, Academic Probation/Financial Aid Probation,
or Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal with a student signed Satisfactory Academic Progress Prediction Calculation
Form.
Any student who ceased attendance or withdrew from the institution will be evaluated against the minimum
standards of the Satisfactory Academic Progress for grades and credits attempted as of the time of withdrawal in
his or her last quarter of attendance. Any student who did not meet the minimum standards of Satisfactory
Academic Progress at the SAP evaluation point must go through the same appeal process should the student want
to be readmitted. The appeal procedure described in the preceding section applies.
Upon the Appeals Committee decision, the student is notified by the Dean of Academic Affairs both verbally and in
writing. The Appeals Committee decision will be final.
Page 41 of 183
Any student who is on Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal can no longer attend school nor get Title IV at the
Institution.
Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal Appeals not Allowed
A student who attempts but does not pass the same Transitional Studies course three times is Dismissed and there
is not a right to appeal the dismissal.
Additional Appeal Procedures:
While an appeal can be made for Maximum Time Frame, the Institution and the Art Institute Vice President of
Academic Affairs must review the appeal.
If a student who has successfully appealed an Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal is later again dismissed, the
student can file one additional appeal as long as the appeal is based on different mitigating circumstances from
any previous appeal, the new mitigating circumstance occurred after the previous successful appeal, the student is
showing significant Satisfactory Academic Progress and mathematically the student can meet the next SAP
evaluation points requirements.
In addition to the Institution’s Review of the Appeal, it must also be reviewed by the Art Institute Vice President of
Academic Affairs.
Explanations of Related Issues
Calculation of CGPA
A student’s cumulative grade point average is calculated by a) Multiplying credits for each course by grade points
associated with the grade earned; b) Totaling the grade points earned for all the courses, and c) Dividing total
grade points earned by the total number of quality credits. The Institute uses a 4.0 scale in assigning grade points.
Note: that if there is a change of programs, only courses applicable to the new program will be considered in the
CGPA.
Transitional Studies Courses
Many Art Institutes require academic assessments. Depending on assessment scores, students may be required to
take Transitional Studies courses. Students must successfully complete such courses in order to progress in the
program. Transitional Studies course credits do not count towards the total number of credits for graduation nor
do they count in the CGPA. Additionally, they do not count in determining the maximum timeframe and the
incremental completion rate.
While Transitional Studies course(s) are not included in the CGPA, each individual Transitional Studies course may
be attempted no more than three times. Failure to pass the courses within the attempts permitted will result in
dismissal from the Institution and there is no right to appeal the dismissal.
Repeated Courses and Grades
As courses are retaken, only the highest grade will count in the GPA/CGPA. All attempts are included in the credit
hours attempted for the purposes of calculating the incremental completion rate (ICR). Withdrawn and failing
grades are included in the maximum allowable timeframe and incremental completion rate as credit hours
attempted but not earned. The grade Incomplete (I) is calculated as if it is an F for CGPA and ICR purposes until it is
changed to another grade and the course will be included as credits attempted but not credits earned until it is
changed to another grade.
Remediation of Academic Deficiencies
It is strongly recommended that any student with withdrawn or failing grades enroll in the same course(s) in the
subsequent quarter to improve academic performance.
Page 42 of 183
Transfer Credits from another Postsecondary Institution
Credits from transfer courses are calculated in the maximum allowable credits and incremental completion rate
requirements as credits attempted and credits earned. Grades for credits transferred from any other
postsecondary institution will be recorded as Transfer Credit (TR) and will not be calculated in the student’s CGPA
Change of Program
Students will be allowed one change of program. Changing from a day program to an evening program of the same
major is not considered a change of major. Changing from an associate’s program to a bachelor’s program in the
same major is not considered a change of major. Courses that apply to the second major will be recorded as
earned credit and will affect the student’s CGPA and will be included as credits attempted and credits earned.
Students who change programs must sign a new program enrollment agreement which must be filed in the
student’s academic file. Note: If a student is at the point of dismissal for Satisfactory Academic Progress in the first
major, that student must be put on Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal, appeal the dismissal, have the appeal
granted based on mitigating circumstances before transferring to the new major. Under no circumstances can a
request to change majors circumvent a dismissal of Satisfactory Academic Progress.
In cases in which a student has graduated from one program in the Institution then subsequently begins work in a
different program, grades earned in the first program, if applicable to the new program, will be recorded with the
letter grades and thus will be included in the Cumulative Grade Point Average and will be included in the
Incremental Completion Rate as credits attempted and credits earned.
Transfers from another Art Institute
A student must be maintaining Satisfactory Academic Progress in order to be allowed the opportunity of
transferring from one program to another or from one school or campus to another. A student who is on
Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal and wishes to transfer to another affiliated Art Institute must appeal his/her
Academic/Financial Aid Dismissal at the originating school and receive reinstatement prior to the transfer. An
affiliated Art Institute is any campus that shares the same leading six-digit OPE-ID number with the originating
school. Campuses that share the same leading six-digit OPE-ID number are the same institution.
Please note that course credits and applicability of those credits at each Art Institute for a program can vary from
location to location. Please carefully discuss any possible transfer with the Art Institute you wish to attend.
Grading System
At the conclusion of each course in the program, the student receives a report of his or her grade(s) for the
course(s) just completed. These grades are entered also in the student’s academic transcript, which is updated
each quarter. The criteria for determining a student’s grade shall be as follows (on a percentage of total point
basis):
The Metrics of SAP
Academic Grading System
The grading system incorporates letter grades, equivalent numeric values and letter codes as follows:
Letter Grade
A
AB+
B
BC+
C
CD+
D
F
Quality Points
4.0
3.7
3.4
3.0
2.7
2.4
2.0
1.7
1.4
1.0
0.0 *
Page 43 of 183
*F does compute in GPA and CGPA and does count as credit attempted.
Other Grade Codes worth Zero Quality Points:
CR = Credit through examination
Credits Earned/TR grade. This does not affect CGPA. They do impact ICR
and MTF.
I = Incomplete
Affects ICR/MTF/CGPA( Computes as an F)
IPA = Incomplete Pass
This grade is assigned only when some portion of a course has not been
completed for good and sufficient reason. Courses in which “IPA” grades
are assigned must be completed no later than the end of the next
regular term in which the student is enrolled or the grade will be
recorded as “F” on the permanent record in the term in which the grade
is granted to replace the IPA. IPA does not affect CGPA/ICR/MTF.
S = Suspension
Affects ICR/MTF/CGPA( Computes as an F)
NC = No Credit
This grade is reserved for zero-credit courses only. Non-credit courses
are not computed in the CGPA/ ICR/ MTF.
NP = Not passing/Fail
Does not affect ICR/CGPA This grade designation is utilized to indicate
that a student did not acceptably complete a non-credited course
P or PR= Proficiency Credit by Exam
or Portfolio
This does not affect CGPA. They do impact ICR and MTF.
PA = Pass
This grade designation is utilized to indicate that a student acceptably
completed a non-credited course. Does not affect ICR/MTF/CGPA.
SP or SA = Satisfactory/Pass
This grade designation is utilized to indicate that a student acceptably
completed a non-credited course. Does not affect ICR/MTF/CGPA.
T = Termination from course
Affects ICR/MTF/CGPA (Computes as an F)
TR = External Transfer Credit
Grade designation utilize for transfer credits. This does not affect CGPA.
They do impact ICR and MTF.
U = Unsatisfactory
Indicates that a student unsuccessfully completed a non-credited course.
Does not affect ICR/MTF/CGPA.
F= Earned F
Students who met the course requirements by completing the final
assignment in the course. Final assignment includes a final exam, final
project, final paper, portfolio presentation, or capstone project. If a
student completed all assignments including the final assignment of the
course, but did not pass the course, the F grade will be considered
earned. The course’s instructor will award this grade when appropriate.
Does compute in GPA and CGPA and does count as credit attempted.
UF = Unearned F
Students who failed the course AND did not complete the final
assignments in the course. Final assignments include, but are not
limited to a final exam, final project, final paper, portfolio presentation,
capstone project or any other assignment due in the last week of the
course. If a student completed some or all of the other requirements in
the course but did not complete the final assignment of the course and
failed the course, the F grade will be considered unearned. An unearned
F grade will be reflected as a “UF” grade on the transcript. The course’s
instructor will award this grade when appropriate. Does compute in
Page 44 of 183
GPA and CGPA and does count as credit attempted.
W = Withdrawal
When a student withdraws from the total program of study by the end
of the ninth week of the quarter or from individual classes after
drop/add but before the end of the ninth week of the quarter. The “W”
is not used in the calculation of the GPA or CGPA but is considered
attempted credits but not earned credits.
WF = Withdrawal Fail
When a student withdraws from individual classes or a total academic
program of study after the ninth week of classes. The “WF” is calculated
as an “F” in the GPA and CGPA. The “WF” also counts as attempted
credits and not earned credits.
WV = Waiver
Commonly used when waiving a Transitional courses and does not affect
ICR/MTF/CGPA
WX = Course was registered for but
never attended
Self-explanatory and does not affect ICR/MTF/CGPA
Students receive grades at the end of each quarter including midquarter. The grade report contains both the grade
point average for the quarter (GPA) and cumulative grade point average (CGPA) for the program. When a course is
repeated after failure, the grade earned upon repeating the class replaces the original grade in determining the
grade point average, though the failing grade will still appear on the transcript.
Repeating Courses
Grades earned in repeated courses will replace grades of ‘F’, “UF”, ‘W’, or ‘WF’. Course credits with grades of ‘F’,
‘UF’,’W’, or ‘WF’ are included in the maximum time frame (MTF) and incremental completion rate (ICR)
requirements as credits attempted but not earned. Students with incomplete grades will receive an ‘F’ if a grade
change is not submitted by the end of the second week of the following term. The grade ‘I’ indicates Incomplete
and is calculated as if it is an ‘F’ until it is changed to another grade and the course will be included as course
credits attempted, but not earned. Only if it is part of an Academic Plan may students retake courses in which they
received a passing grade in order to improve their CGPA but can retake a course passed only one additional time.
Credits from all repeated courses are included as credits attempted. The highest grade earned will be used in the
CGPA calculations.
Changed Grade
When a final course grade has been established and recorded in the student record, the grade may not be changed
without approval by both the Academic Department Director and the Dean of Academic Affairs. Only the final
grade (not the original grade/code) will be computed in the grade point average. The final grade is the one that
counts in the calculation.
Calculations
The Art Institute measures and records academic performance by computing the Grade Point Average (GPA) and
Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) for each student, using the letter grades, four-point scale and credit-hour
values. GPA is the average of grade points a student earns during one quarter. CGPA is the cumulative average of
all grade points a student has earned over all quarters at The Art Institute. Transitional study courses do not count
in this calculation. Here is an example of how GPA and CGPA are computed: Imagine that a student is taking a
total of two courses during one quarter. One course has a four credit hours value and the student earns an A. The
second course has a three credit hour value and the student earns a B. Remember, each letter grade carries a
grade point value. Grade point values are multiplied by credit hours.
In this example:
A = 4 grade points x 4 credit hours = 16 grade points earned
B = 3 grade points x 3 credit hours = 9 grade points earned
Page 45 of 183
To compute the GPA, divide the total number of grade points earned for the quarter by the total number of credit
hours earned for the quarter.
16 grade points + 9 grade points = 25 total grade points
25 grade points earned divided by 7 total hours earned = student’s GPA for the quarter, 3.571 which is rounded to
3.57. Rounding occurs after the 4 digit of a CGPA is calculated and if the fourth digit is 5 or over, it is rounded up. If
the fourth digit is 4 or lower it is rounded down.
A student’s CGPA is computed in the same way by dividing the student’s total grade points earned from all
quarters/semester at The Art Institute by the student’s total credit hours earned from all quarters at The Art
Institute.
Incremental completion rate is determined as follows (transitional study credits do not count in this calculation):
(EARNED CREDITS at the institution + TRANSFER CREDITS Accepted)
______________________________________________________
(ATTEMPTED CREDITS at the institution + TRANSFER CREDITS Accepted)
The 150% MTF: Only the attempted courses required in the program for which the student is currently enrolled
are used in determining the number of MTF credits remaining. Transitional study courses do not count in this
calculation.
The 150% MTF is determined as follows:
TOTAL CREDITS NEEDED TO GRADUATE FROM THE PROGRAM x 1.5 =
TOTAL NUMBER OF CREDITS ALLOWED TO BE ATTEMPTED.
STUDENT STATUS CHANGES AND SAP
Transfer Students
Transfer credits from other post-secondary institutions are calculated in the maximum time frame allowable
credits and incremental completed rate requirements. Therefore, the maximum number of attempted credits for a
student with transfer credit is still one and one-half times the number of credits required to complete a program
for graduation.
Example: if a student transfers in 36 credits to a program consisting of 180 credits, the calculation would be 180 X
1.5 = 270 credits. Therefore, the 36 transfer credits would be considered attempted and earned so only 234 more
credits could be attempted.
Grades for credits transferred in from any post-secondary institution (including an Art Institute) will be recorded as
“TR” in the Student Information System and will not affect the student’s CGPA.
Students wishing to transfer from one Art Institute to another may do so only if they are in good standing at the
sending school. If the student is transferring to a different institution (as defined by the Department of Education
as a campus that does not share the same leading six-digit OPE-ID number), then he or she is treated as a student
transferring in from an unaffiliated institution. Any student dismissed for violation satisfactory academic progress
cannot transfer or be considered a New student (if they had a break in enrollment) at another affiliated Art
Institute until he or she has been granted an appeal at the original school and is deemed to be making satisfactory
academic progress.
Page 46 of 183
Changes in Program
Unless a second change is specifically approved for the specific student by the Dean, students are allowed only one
change of program and must be making satisfactory academic progress at the time a request is made to change
programs.
Courses taken in one program that is applicable to the second program will be transferred with the applicable
grade. If the student has taken a course more than once, only the grades transferred to that new program will
apply to the second program. All grades earned in the original program that apply to the new program will count
towards the SAP CGPA (SGPA). For ICR and 150% purposes only, those courses transferred will apply to the second
program will be considered.
In the formulas below, the “CHANGE OF MAJOR” adjustment factor would be those credits from the previous
major that we will NOT count in the student’s current major.
Incremental completion rate is determined as follows (Transitional credits do not count in this calculation):
(EARNED CREDITS in the New Program + TRANSFER CREDIT ACCEPTED)
minus CHANGE OF MAJOR ADJUSTMENT FACTOR FOR EARNED CREDITS
______________________________________________________
(ATTEMPTED CREDITS in the New Program + TRANSFER CREDITS Accepted)
minus CHANGE OF MAJOR ADJUSTMENT FACTOR FOR EARNED CREDITS
The 150% MTF Only the attempted courses required in the program for which the student is currently enrolled are
used in determining the number of MTF credits remaining.
The 150% MTF is determined as follows:
TOTAL CREDITS NEEDED in the PROGRAM TO GRADUATE times 1.5 = TOTAL NUMBER OF CREDITS ALLOWED TO
BE ATTEMPTED.
Second Degree
When a student has graduated from The Art Institute in one program, then subsequently begins work in a different
program, grades used in the CGPA of the previous program will be applied to the student’s new program CGPA
calculation.
Satisfactory Academic Progress for Educational Benefits which are not Title IV Funds
Please note that in order to receive and/or retain certain education benefits from a source other than the
Department of Education, it may require a higher cumulative grade point average and/or a higher incremental
completion rate. Examples of these education benefits are State Grants, Veterans’ Benefits, Department of
Defense (TA) benefits or employee reimbursements. Please check with the Student Financial Service Office for
details.
Retaking Coursework Policy
Effective July 1, 2011, ED amends the full-time enrollment status definition for programs at term-based
institutions. In a standard term-based program, students who retake previously completed coursework are
considered eligible for additional Title IV assistance, even if the students will not receive credit for that coursework
in addition to credits already received. To comply with this provision and to assist students with managing
appropriate FSA loan balances, EDMC has implemented the following policy on retaking coursework for standard
term and non-term based programs.
Page 47 of 183
In a notification issued by NASFAA on October 4, 2012, the agency has received reaffirmation from the Department
of Education (ED) that its guidance on retaking coursework provisions found at 668.2 of the General Provisions
regulations apply only to undergraduate students. ED stated it will issue a Dear Colleague Letter for the purpose of
stating the current policy in a more official manner.
Standard Term-based Programs
Students enrolled in standard term-based undergraduate programs will receive Title IV funds for unlimited retakes
of failed courses and withdrawn courses with no credits earned as long as the student is meeting the satisfactory
academic progress (SAP) standards. Although there is no limit on how many times students can repeat failed or
withdrawn courses for FSA purposes, some EDMC’s Educational Systems have limitations on how many times
students can retake failed courses before they are dismissed from the institution. Please refer to the school’s SAP
Policy.
For standard term-based undergraduate programs, EDMC’s policy will allow financial aid to cover a single
repetition of a previously successfully passed course subject to certain conditions. Students who earned credit(s)
may receive Title IV funds for one retake of any previously passed course only if they meet one of the following
conditions:
• Specific State or Accreditation regulations require a student to retake a course which was previously
successfully passed, as defined under Stale Course.
•
Required as part of an academic plan if a student has successfully appealed a Satisfactory Academic
Progress (SAP) termination, as defined under Progress or Professional Requirements.
•
For students who need a specific grade or G.P.A. to practice upon graduation or progress in a program, as
defined under Progress or Professional Requirements.
The student must have completed the course for it to be considered a repetition under this policy. Because only
one repetition of a previously passed course may be included in the a student’s enrollment status for purposes of
Title IV aid, if the student failed the repeated course, the student is not eligible for an additional retake because
the student is considered to have completed the course.
Non-term Based Programs
Student’s coursework is divided into payment periods based the credit hours and weeks of instructional time in the
program or the academic year, whichever is less. A student must successfully complete the credit hours and
instructional weeks in a payment period, or withdrawal, in order to advance to the next payment period and
academic year. Students who fail or withdrawal from a course will not earn credits for the payment period and
academic year. Students who successfully completed a course (earned credits) and wish to repeat the course to
earn a better grade or G.P.A., the course attempted and earned credits will not be included in the payment period
and academic year credits requirement. Students may only use FSA funds to cover such repeated courses to the
extent excess funds are available in the academic year.
Study Trips
The Art Institute arranges study trips to local cultural and commercial sites. These visits are an integral part of each
student’s learning and offer a chance for valuable exposure to various places and events of importance to the
student’s field of study. In addition to local study trips that support the curriculum, out-of-town seminars and tours
are planned in individual programs. Costs related to optional study trips are not included in regular tuition or fees
and are the responsibility of the student.
Transfer Credit
Contact the office of The Dean of Academic Affairs for all matters related to Transfer Credit and Program Change.
Page 48 of 183
Transfer of Credit Between Art Institutes Schools
Associate’s Degree Graduates to Bachelor’s Degree Programs: A serious attempt will be made to ensure that all
associate’s degree credits earned by graduates of an Art Institutes school will transfer to the corresponding
bachelor’s degree program within the system. Such graduates will attain upper division status. However, differing
state and accrediting regulations may require additional courses at the associate’s degree level. If the associate’s
degree transferred by the graduate has been updated with the addition of new competencies, the Dean of
Academic Affairs has the discretionary authority to add a course(s) at the associate’s degree level.
Associate’s degree credits earned by graduates of an Art Institutes school for which there is no corresponding
bachelor’s degree program, will be evaluated on a course-by-course basis for applicability to the new program of
study. Only those courses and credits required for graduation in the new program of study will be accepted. All
conditions in the following associate’s degree credits to associate’s degree credits to associate’s/bachelor’s degree
program procedure apply.
Allowable Total Transfer of Credit
Students must earn a minimum of 25 percent of the total program credits required for graduation in residency.
Therefore, students may only be granted a maximum of 75 percent of the total program credits required for
graduation through transfer credit earned at an outside institution, including other Art Institutes campuses. Due
to regulatory considerations, at some Art Institutes schools, the minimum percentage of total program credits that
must be earned in residency may vary from the standard above.
Transcripts
Official Transcripts must be sent to the Admissions Office of the admitting Art Institutes School prior to the class
start. Transcripts submitted after the student’s first quarter of attendance at The Art Institutes school may be
considered for transfer credit, at the discretion of the Dean of Academic Affairs.
Associate’s Degree Credits to Associate’s/Bachelor’s Degree Program:
Associate’s degree credits, with a grade of “C” of better, from an Art Institutes school, earned by students who do
not hold an associate’s degree, will transfer to the same program at the associate’s degree or bachelor’s degree
level. Differing state and accrediting regulations may require additional courses at the associate’s degree level.
If the associate degree transferred by the student has been updated with the addition of new competencies, the
Dean of Academic Affairs has the discretionary authority to add a course(s) at the associate’s degree level and/or
bachelor’s degree level.
Transcripts
Official transcripts must be sent to the Admissions Office of the admitting Art Institute School prior to the class
start. Transcripts submitted after the student’s first quarter of attendance at an Art Institutes school may be
considered for transfer credit, at the discretion of the Dean of Academic Affairs.
Course Descriptions
The official descriptions of the courses submitted for transfer credit must be comparable to the coursework at an
Art Institutes school. Official course descriptions from the sending college or a college catalog will be used to
determine comparability and must be received prior to the class start.
Level of Transfer Credits
Only college-level credits (100 level course or equivalent) taken at an accredited institution of higher education will
be considered for transfer. No remedial courses will be considered.
Grades of Transfer Credits
Only courses with earned grades of “C” (2.0) or better will be considered for Transfer Credit.
Course Prerequisites and Sequence of Courses
Course Prerequisites and course sequences are to be observed to assure appropriate student skill development.
Page 49 of 183
Proficiency Credit
Official documents (CLEP or AP scores) related to transfer or proficiency credit must be received by an Art
Institutes school prior to the class start. No more than 25 percent of program credits will be considered for any
type of proficiency credit.
Class Proficiency Test
Requests for testing out of specific classes approved by the Institute must be made through the Department
Director prior to the class start. No more than 25 percent of program credits will be considered for any type of
proficiency credit.
Portfolio Review
Requests for portfolio review, and/or relevant work experience documented by appropriate samples of work
outcomes, references, and verification of employment must be received prior to the class start.
LIMITATION TO ONLINE EDUCATION QUOTIENT: Based on government and accreditation standards related to
consortium agreements, students are limited in the total number of credits that can be earned in an online
delivery mode. Students are required to complete more than 50% of their program credits in residence at the
Art Institute School into which they have enrolled and from which they hope to graduate. Once the threshold of
50 percent program credits has been exceeded, the student must be transferred to The Art Institute of
Pittsburgh – Online Division for the completion of the program. Transfer between Art Institute campuses does
not guarantee that all credits earned will transfer to the same program at the receiving campus, including The
Art Institute of Pittsburgh – Online Division.
TRANSFER OF DEGREES AND COURSE CREDIT FROM COLLEGES AND UNIVERSITIES BEFORE
MATRICULATION AT AN ART INSTITUTES SCHOOL
Transcripts
Official transcripts must be sent to the Admissions Office of the admitting Art Institutes school prior to the class
start. Transcripts submitted after the student’s first quarter of attendance at an Art Institutes school may be
considered for transfer credit, at the discretion of the Dean of Academic Affairs
Course Descriptions
The official descriptions of the courses submitted for transfer credit must be comparable to the coursework at an
Art Institutes school. Official course descriptions from the sending college or a college catalog will be used to
determine comparability and must be received prior to the class start.
Level of Transfer Credits
Only college-level credits (100 level course or equivalent) taken at an accredited institution of higher education will
be considered for transfer. No remedial courses will be considered.
Grades of Transfer Credits
Courses with earned grades of “C” (2.0) or better will be considered for transfer credit.
Course Prerequisites and Sequence of Courses
Course prerequisites and course sequences are to be observed to assure appropriate student skill development
Page 50 of 183
Proficiency Credit from External Sources
Official documents (CLEP or AP scores) related to transfer or proficiency credit must be received by an Art
Institutes school prior to the class start. No more than 25 percent of program credits will be considered for any
type of proficiency credit.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Advanced Placement. Some foundation courses can be obtained through College Board’s AP Studio
examinations. Students who take the College Board Advanced Placement (AP) or International
Baccalaureate (IB) courses and score three or higher on the AP exam or four or higher on the IB exam for
those courses while in secondary school may receive proficiency credit. This score applies to all subjects.
All materials must be received from the Scholastic College Board organization and evaluated prior to the
end of the schedule adjustment period (add/drop) of the student’s first quarter of attendance.
College Level Examination Program (CLEP). Complete the College Level Examination Program (CLEP) and
earn a score of 50 or higher on computer-based CLEP examinations equivalent to University courses prior
to the end of the scheduled adjustment period (add/drop) of the student’s first quarter of attendance.
Articulation Agreement Credit. Successfully complete programs included in articulation agreements that
have been established between the University and their high schools.
Military Experience Credits. Complete training, employment, or other educational experience in the
military as measured through DANTES, DSST examinations, or as shown on the Joint Service Transcript,
the Community College of the Air Force Transcript or as recommended by the American Council on
Education (ACE).
Internal Proficiency Testing for Credit. Requests for testing out of specific courses approved by the
Institute must be made through the Department Director prior to the class start.
Experiential Learning. Students may request advanced standing for experiential learning. Students will
present relevant work or life experiences for review by the Dean of Academic Affairs or designee. The
Dean of Academic Affairs or designee will have the necessary forms for the student to complete.
Documentation such as portfolios, writing samples, publications, verification of employment, and
references represents a sampling of what may be requested by the Department Chair from the student in
order for the advanced standing review to be completed.
Portfolio Review for Credit. Requests for portfolio review, and/or relevant work experience documented
by appropriate samples of work outcomes, references, and verification of employment must be received
prior to the class start.
Class Proficiency Test
Requests for testing out of specific classes approved by the Institute must be made through the Department
Director prior to the class start.
No more than 25 percent credits will be considered for any type of proficiency credit.
TRANSFER CREDIT AFTER MATRICULATION (CONCURRENT ENROLLMENT OR RE-ENTRY TO
THE INSTITUTION) AT AN ART INSTITUTES SCHOOL
NOTE: Transfer credit after matriculation must be completed prior to the student’s final term of study.
Page 51 of 183
Concurrent Enrollment: Requests for transfer of credit from accredited institutions of higher education, for a
course taken concurrently with an Art Institutes school full-time schedule, after a student’s matriculation at an Art
Institutes school may be made to the Dean of Academic Affairs. Transfer Credit may be awarded if all other
criteria for transfer of credit are met, and if the institution permits concurrent enrollment.
Approval Needed
Requests for concurrent enrollment in a course at another college or university while the student is on full-time
status at an Art Institutes school (according to the US Department of Education’s definition of the term) must be
approved by the General Education Program Coordinator, the Department Director, or the Dean of Academic
Affairs prior to enrollment in the course.
Full-time Status
The student must be enrolled full-time at an Art Institutes school at all times during the concurrent enrollment at
another college or university.
One Course Limit
Only one course per quarter in concurrent enrollment will be accepted.
Grading
The concurrent enrollment course must be passed with a grade of “C” or better. The student’s record at The Art
Institute will reflect a “TR” grade. The grade will not be factored into the GPA or the CGPA.
Completion Deadline
Credit will be awarded for the course when documentation is produced that the course was successfully
completed.
Transcripts
Official Transcripts must be sent to the Dean of Academic Affairs upon successful completion of the concurrent
enrollment course.
Transfer Credit Upon Re-Entry to the Institution: Requests for transfer of credit from accredited institutions of
higher education, for a course taken while a student was not in attendance at an Art Institutes school, but after a
student’s initial matriculation at the school may be made to the Dean of Academic Affairs. Transfer Credit may be
awarded if all other criteria for transfer of credit are met.
Grading:
The course(s) must be passed with a grade of “C” or better. The student’s record at an Art Institutes school will
reflect a “TR” grade. The grade will not be factored into the GPA or the CGPA.
CHANGE OF PROGRAM WITHIN AN ART INSTITUTES SCHOOL
A student petitioning to transfer from one program to another within The Art Institute must obtain approval from
the Department Director of the department from which the student is transferring. The student’s coursework and
earned credits will be reviewed for applicability to the new program. Only those credits required for graduation in
the new program will be transferred to the new program and counted toward graduation. Only one change of
program is allowed per student.
Page 52 of 183
TRANSFERABILITY OF CREDIT TO OTHER INSTITUTIONS
The Art Institute does not imply, promise, or guarantee transferability of its credits to any other institution.
In the U. S. higher education system, transferability of credit is determined by the receiving institution taking into
account such factors as course content, grades, accreditation and licensing.
This program is designed to lead directly to employment. Course credits will likely not transfer to other schools,
and degrees will likely not be accepted by another school’s graduate degree program.
Additionally, programs offered by one school within The Art Institutes system may be similar to but not identical to
programs offered at another school within the system. This is due to differences imposed by state law, use of
different instructional models, and local employer needs. Therefore, if you decide to transfer to another school
within The Art Institutes system, not all of the credits you earn in this program may be transferable into that
school's program.
If you are considering transferring to either another Art Institutes or an unaffiliated school, it is your responsibility
to determine whether that school will accept your Art Institute credits. We encourage you to make this
determination as early as possible.
TRANSFERRING TO ANOTHER ART INSTITUTE
Students wishing to transfer from one Art Institutes school to another may do so only if they are in good standing
at the sending school. Any student dismissed for academic progress cannot transfer to another affiliated Art
Institute school until he or she has been reinstated at the sending school and is deemed to be making satisfactory
academic progress. (See the Student Academic Progress Policy-Transfer from another Art Institute). An affiliated
Art Institute is any campus that shares the same leading six-digit OPE-ID number with the originating school.
Campuses that share the same leading six-digit OPE-ID number are the same institution.
Test-Out Credit
The Art Institute offers the opportunity to earn credit for Computer Science, CGS1160C, by completing a
proficiency test. The test is optional and can be taken only once.
Applicants must take the test prior to matriculation to determine whether or not they will be exempt from taking
CGS1160C.
A score of 70% or higher is necessary for students to be exempt from taking CGS1160C and earn proficiency credit
for this course. If the student passes this test, they will be required to take a General Education elective in its place.
Students interested in taking the proficiency test should see their admissions representative.
Military Service Credit
The Art Institute encourages veterans and active-duty service personnel to apply for admission. Credit for military
school and training may be given for successfully completing certain service schools. The credit awarded may be
determined by utilizing the recommendations in A Guide to the Evaluation of Educational Experiences in the
Armed Services (published by The American Council on Education). The Admissions officer should be notified prior
to matriculation if credit for military training may be applicable to particular programs of study. The amount of
credit awarded will vary with the type of courses successfully completed. The Admissions Office must receive the
Joint Service Transcript or the Community College of the Air Force transcript and/or official military records for the
purpose of reviewing experience. It is recommended that the applicant make an appointment with the transfer
credit officer to review the documents together.
Page 53 of 183
Course Substitution Policy
On occasion it may be necessary for students to substitute one course for another. A student desiring to substitute
a course needs to petition the chair of their department requesting approval. The student needs to provide
legitimate reasons for the substitution. These reasons could be as a result of enrollment in honors classes, for
special needs and/or disabilities that may prevent the student from participation in a specific class, or for other
academic reasons approved by the chair.
Normally substituted courses should be for like classes and should be roughly equivalent and have special
permission of the Department Director. All substitutions are evaluated and approved on an individual basis.
Students interested in course substitutions will need to complete the “Course Substitution Form” located in the
registrar’s office. They will need to obtain all signatures prior to approval being granted.
STUDENT SERVICES
GENERAL INFORMATION
The mission of the Student Services Department is to supplement The Art Institute’s educational processes and to
support its stated purpose by providing assistance and services to the student body in the areas of advocacy,
disability, student development, counseling, international advising, housing, foodservice, and bookstore supplies.
The department actively encourages the involvement of students, faculty, and staff in activities that stimulate
cultural awareness, creativity, social interaction, and professional development. To fulfill its mission, the Student
Services Department has established the following objectives:
1.
Provide college-sponsored housing that is convenient and suitable to the students’ needs and
conducive to their educational goals.
2.
Provide student support services.
3.
Provide resources and assist international students with their transition into this country.
4.
Provide Student Engagement and networking activities to complement your academic experience
5.
Serve as the advising point of contact for military and veteran students.
Career Services
As you near the completion of your program of study, you will have the opportunity to meet individually with a
career services advisor to review career goals, job-search strategies, interview techniques, and résumé
development.
The Student Services Department coordinates the quarterly Portfolio Show and career focused activities. These
events bring together prospective employers and soon-to-be graduates. Graduate employment information is
available on the College website.
Alumni Services
The Student Services Department offers a variety of online services and resources to Art Institute graduates. The
self-directed alumni website (www.alumni.artinstitutes.edu) is available to graduates and to students in their last
quarter.
The website exists to support the creative endeavors of our graduates and to provide a forum for networking with
fellow classmates. Art Institutes graduates can connect from anywhere around the world. Alumni can share their
challenges and victories, access services to elevate their career, showcase artwork, and demonstrate their impact
in their personal and professional communities. Information about career services, campus events, Art Institute
news is also available.
The website is exclusive to Art Institute graduates and there are no costs, fees or dues to access these services. The
Art Institutes values our talented alumni community and we strive to build and maintain the alumni relationship
through e-communications, virtual events, and campus activities. Alumni are invited to share their personal and
professional updates with The Art Institutes community!
Page 54 of 183
For more information, visit www.alumni.artinstitutes or email AiAlumniSupport@aii.edu
Orientation
The Art Institute provides a comprehensive orientation program for all new students. Orientation is offered as a
means of assisting new students in their transition and adjustment to life at The Art Institute. For information on
the orientation programs, contact the Student Services Department.
Counseling
Counseling services, also known as the Student Assistance Program, are provided through The Wellness
Corporation. The Student Assistance Program is a pre-paid benefit that provides caring, respectful, and
confidential short-term counseling. Licensed counselors staff the Student Assistance Program for students seeking
help with relationship difficulties, school problems, alcohol or drug use, domestic violence or emotional problems
such as depression and anxiety - any concern that keeps them from being healthy.
Disability Services
The Art Institutes provide accommodations to qualified students with disabilities. The Office of Disability Support
Services assists qualified students with disabilities in acquiring reasonable and appropriate accommodations and in
supporting equal access to services, programs and activities at The Art Institutes.
Students who seek reasonable accommodations should notify the Office of Disability Support Services at 1-855855-0567 or via email at _TheCenterDSS@edmc.edu of their specific limitations and, if known, their specific
requested accommodations. Students will be asked to supply medical documentation of the need for
accommodation. Classroom accommodations are not retroactive, but are effective only upon the student sharing
approved accommodations with the instructor. Therefore, students are encouraged to request accommodations
as early as feasible with The Office of Disability Support Services to allow for time to gather necessary
documentation. If you have a concern or complaint in this regard, please contact the Office of Student Conduct
and Resolution at studentresolution@edmc.edu. Complaints will be handled in accordance with the school’s
Internal Grievance Procedure for Complaints of Discrimination and Harassment.
Student Housing Department
The Housing Department is dedicated to helping students meet their housing needs throughout their stay at The
Art Institute. Living arrangements are important to the student’s well-being and success. The Art Institute offers
supervised housing and independent housing referrals. The Art Institute- sponsored, supervised housing facility is
close to The Art Institute and is available to those students who prefer a more traditional, residential life
environment. They provide a community of students with similar goals sharing a variety of cultural and educational
interests. Professional and student staff live on site. Additionally, a security guard is on the property. Shuttle
service is also provided between the residence hall and the campus.
The Art Institute is a member of the International Association of College and University Housing Officers. For more
information, please see the Director of Housing.
International Student Affairs
International students at The Art Institute constitute approximately 8% of the student body. Students attending
come from more than 54 countries. The Office of International Student Affairs (OISA) supports this diverse
population by providing comprehensive services including assistance with immigration, academic, and personal
matters.
OISA also plans a variety of activities in an effort to build cultural awareness and enhance the students’ social life,
including sponsorship of the International Student Club. OISA and the International Club host a broad array of
activities including events through which students participate in welcoming and easing the transition of new
students. OISA and the International Club also organize field trips, informal group sports, attendance at musical
and other local cultural productions, and weekend picnics.
Page 55 of 183
OISA encourages international students to carefully review the International Student Handbook concerning
information pertinent to maintaining proper Non-immigrant status, obtaining a driver’s license in the state of
Florida, purchasing a vehicle, shopping, and a variety of other important topics. The International Student Advisor
is always the best source of information for students who need additional information on all matters involving
immigration and cultural adjustment issues.
FINANCIAL SERVICES
General Information
At the time of initial enrollment, students work with a member of the Student Financial Services staff to develop a
financial plan to meet direct expenses involved in the education process (tuition, fees, supply kit, and collegesponsored housing). The Art Institute is eligible to offer its students the opportunity to apply for a variety of
financial assistance programs. These programs include loans, grants, and work-study assistance for qualified
applicants. Details regarding these programs are available in the Student Financial Services Office. Students who
receive financial assistance are advised to be aware of the responsibilities they must fulfill under these programs:
1.
2.
Maintain satisfactory academic progress as outlined in this catalog and the student handbook.
Inform the Student Financial Services Office of address changes, schedule changes, program changes, or
any other status changes that might affect the student’s eligibility for financial assistance.
Some students do not initially apply for financial assistance or do apply and are determined to be ineligible for
assistance. Students should be aware that the federal and state eligibility criteria are periodically reviewed and
modified. Therefore, any student whose financial circumstances change or for whom a financial need arises is
encouraged to contact the Student Financial Services Office for assistance. There are state, federal, and college
deadlines to meet in applying for financial aid. Please check with Student Financial Services for this information.
Financial Aid
The Art Institute participates in federal, state, and other financial aid programs. Financial aid is divided into three
general categories: gift aid, which includes grants, scholarships, and other benefits requiring no repayment; loans,
which require repayment; and work assistance, which includes the Federal Work-Study Program and part- time job
assistance. Most grants are based on financial need and are granted by federal or state governments. Most
scholarships are based on criteria such as performance or affiliation and may or may not include a financial-need
component. Loans must be repaid, although repayment may often be deferred until several months after the
student has dropped below half time enrollment. Work assistance provided by The Art Institute includes the
Federal Work-Study Program, a source funded by the federal government, as well as The Art Institute’s assistance
to students in finding part-time jobs in the community.
All eligible students may apply for financial assistance under various federal and state programs as follows:
1. Federal Pell Grant
2. Federal Supplemental Education Opportunity Grant [FSEOG]
3. Federal Direct Student Loan (subsidized and unsubsidized)
4. Federal Direct Parent Loan [PLUS]
5. Federal Work Study [FWS]
6. State-Funded Student Assistance Programs
a. Florida Student Assistance Grant [FSAG]
b. Florida Bright Futures Scholarship
c. Jose Marti Scholarship Challenge Grant
d. Scholarships for Children/Spouses of Deceased or Disabled Veterans
7. Veterans’ Education Act
8. Vocational Rehabilitation Programs
9. Bureau of Indian Affairs
Page 56 of 183
Awards under these programs are based on individual need and the availability of funds. Florida offers a state
grant program and scholarships to eligible students. Contact The Art Institute’s Student Financial Services Office for
complete details about financial aid resources.
Students receiving financial assistance must maintain satisfactory academic progress standards as outlined in this
catalog. For purposes of calculating financial aid eligibility, student status based on credit hours is defined as
follows:
1. Full-time: Enrolled in 12 credit hours or more in an academic quarter
2. Three-quarter-time: Enrolled in 9–11 credit hours in an academic quarter
3. Half-time: Enrolled in 6–8 credit hours in an academic quarter
4. Less than half-time: Enrolled in 1–5 credit hours in an academic quarter
5. Academic year: 36 quarter credit hours or three quarters
For detailed and complete information on all financial aid awards, processes, requirements, and deadlines, please
refer to the school’s current Financial Aid Guide, the Student Consumer Information on the school’s website, or
contact the Student Financial Services Office directly.
PROVISION FOR BOOKS AND SUPPLIES
Students who are Title IV eligible and are expected to receive excess Title IV funding will receive a stipend for the
lesser amount of either their presumed excess Title IV funding or their book and supply budget to provide students
the ability to purchase books (for courses that do not use Digital Textbooks) and supplies by the seventh (7th) day
of the course start date within the payment period.
As described below, by the seventh (7th) day of each course start date within the payment period, The Art Institute
will provide a method for students to obtain their books and supplies required for their courses.
•
•
For newly enrolled students, a starting kit provided by The Art Institute consisting of basic equipment and
materials needed for beginning each program and charged to the student account.
For courses using a Digital Textbook and/or digital resources, a Digital Textbook provided by The Art
Institute to be automatically redeemed with The Art Institute’s contracted third-party vendor and charged
to the student account.
Title IV funding, if the student is eligible, will be used to pay for these charges. Any books and supplies charged in
excess of Title IV and other financial aid funding on the student account are the responsibility of the student. A
detailed listing of charges is disclosed on The Art Institute’s Enrollment Agreement and in the Catalog, or a
supplemental disclosure.
If the student opts out of The Art Institute’s method, the student account will not be charged and the student is
responsible for purchasing the required books and supplies for her/his courses. For courses using a Digital
Textbook, the charge will be reversed on the student account after the Add/Drop Period.
Starting kit and Digital Textbook (for courses using Digital Textbooks) charge information is disclosed on The Art
Institute’s Enrollment Agreement and in the Catalog, or a supplemental disclosure.
If the student opts out of The Art Institute’s method, s/he will receive any Title IV credit balance, if one is created
for the payment period in question, no later than fourteen (14) calendar days after the first day of class or
fourteen (14) calendar days of the date the Title IV credit balance appears on the student account. If a Title IV
credit balance is not created and, therefore, the student is not due to receive one, s/he is responsible for
purchasing the required books and supplies for her or his courses.
The student may request a modification at any time for a subsequent payment period, regarding her or his choice
to use The Art Institute’s method to obtain books and supplies, but not retroactively, by contacting the Student
Financial Services or Student Accounting Department.
Page 57 of 183
National Grants/Awards
The Art Institutes Grant – The Art Institutes Grant provides financial assistance to students enrolled in a degree
program who attend a minimum of 12 credit hours per quarter. Students/parents must meet general financial aid
requirements and accept all federal and state grants and loans for which they are eligible.
Students cannot receive any other Art Institute award or grant in the same quarter that they receive The Art
Institutes Grant. Students must remain continuously enrolled at The Art Institute to receive The Art Institutes
Grant. Applications for The Art Institutes Grant may be obtained from Student Financial Services and may be
submitted to that department at any time throughout the year. Annual funds are limited and awarded on a firstcome, first-serve basis.
SCHOLARSHIPS
The Art Institutes National Scholarships
On an annual basis, The Art Institutes offer various merit and competitive scholarships to incoming high school
seniors, juniors, and international students, as follows:
Additional National Scholarships include:
1. Art Grant
2. C-Cap Careers through Culinary Arts Program
3. DECA Scholarship
4. Future Business Leaders of America National scholarship Program
5. The Art Institutes Scholarship Competition
6. FCCLA Culinary Arts Competition
7. National Art Honor Society Scholarship
8. National Postart Invitational
9. SkillsUSA Championship
10. The Scholastic Art & Writing Awards
The Art Institutes Scholarship Competition
Partial tuition scholarship to high school seniors and international students graduating in 2017 who demonstrate
outstanding ability and commitment to succeed in a creative career. The number of scholarships offered varies and
every Art Institutes school may not participate. Please contact your school of interest for detailed scholarship
information.
ART GRANT
The Art Grant can earn new and current students a grant award toward your tuition on average of up to 20% for
Bachelor’s degree programs and up to 15% for Associate’s degree programs. For every 12 credits earned, as you
maintain continuous enrollment and satisfy other eligibility criteria, you can earn an Art Grant to be applied to
tuition. The Art Grant is offered at all Art Institutes schools except for The Art Institute of Vancouver and The Art
Institute of Pittsburgh—Online Division. Amounts vary by location. Check with the school you’re considering
attending for exceptions and details.
DECA
Open to high school seniors graduating in 2017 who are DECA members. There are varying numbers of DECA
scholarships available nationwide and in various categories.
DECA scholarship: up to $1,000
DECA state scholarship: up to $1,500
DECA international scholarship: up to $5,000
Page 58 of 183
National Art Honor Society
Three nationwide scholarships are available and are awarded to high school seniors graduating in 2017 who are
members of the National Art Honor Society.
1st place: $20,000 tuition scholarship
2nd place: $10,000 tuition scholarship
3RD place: $5,000 tuition scholarship
Future Business Leaders of America Nat ional scholarship Program
Three $10,000 nationwide tuition scholarships will be awarded to high school seniors graduating in 2017 who are
FBLA members; students with a first-year GPA of 3.0 may earn an additional $5,000 tuition scholarship.
Scholastic Art & Writing Awards
Four nationwide $10,000 scholarships will be awarded to eligible high school seniors graduating in 2017 who are
Scholastic National Award recipients; awarded on a first-come, first-served basis.
FCCLA Competition ((Family, Career and Community Leaders of America)
Open to high school seniors graduating in 2017 who are members of FCCLA and participate in competitions in the
categories of Culinary (3 na tionwide scholarships available), Interior Design (2 nationwide scholarships available),
Fashion Design and Fashion Construction (1 nationwide scholarship available in each category), and Hospitality (3
nationwide scholarships available). Tuition scholarships are renewable for up to 4 years.
1st place: $3,000 tuition scholarship ($12,000 maximum)
2nd place: $2,000 tuition scholarship ($8,000 maximum)
3rd place: $1,000 tuition scholarship ($4,000 maximum)
SkillsUSA
Open to high school students and post-secondary who are members of SkillsUSA and participate in competitions in
the categories of Advertising Design, Culinary, and Photography (6 nationwide scholarships available in each
category), as well as 3-D Visualization & Animation, Web Design, and Television Production (12 nationwide
scholarships available in each category). Scholarships are awarded on first-come, first-served basis.
1st place: $10,000-$20,000 tuition scholarship*
*amount varies depending on the program in which the student enrolls
2nd place: $5,000 tuition scholarship
3rd place: $2,500 tuition scholarship
C-CAP Careers (Careers Through Culinary Arts Program)
One nationwide, full-tuition scholarship will be awarded to a high school senior graduating in 2017 who is enrolled
in a C-CAP program. Full-tuition scholarship valued at approximately $38,000 to $95,000.
ProStart
High school seniors graduating in 2017 who complete the ProStart program with a C average or above and obtain a
certificate of achievement may receive Advance Placement credits to any U.S. school of The International Culinary
Schools at The Art Institutes.
National ProStart Invitational
High school seniors graduating in 2017 who are enrolled in a ProStart program are eligible for the National ProStart
Invitational Culinary Competition Scholarship (15 available nationwide) and Management Competition Scholarship
(15 available nationwide). Competition winners may receive partial tuition scholarships.
1st place: $10,000 non-renewable tuition scholarship
2nd place: $7,500 non-renewable tuition scholarship
3rd place: $5,000 non-renewable tuition scholarship
Page 59 of 183
ProStart State Scholarships
State level ProStart Scholarships are awarded to high school seniors graduating in 2017 who are first-place winners
in ProStart Culinary Arts and Culinary Management competitions in 41 states and the District of Columbia. The
number of scholarships awarded varies by state. First-place award is a $3,000 scholarship, renewable for up to 4
years for a maximum of $12,000.
CLOSED SCHOOL TRANSFER GRANT
Recognizing that some students have been displaced due to school closures, the transfer grant is being offered to
ease the burden of transferring to another institution and offset the cost of credits ineligible for transfer due to
different curriculum requirements or campus transfer criteria.
Any student meets all admission requirements, and who earned at least 12 credits between the dates of 8/1/2015
and 8/31/2016 at another accredited institution that has ceased enrolling students, is eligible to receive an
institutional grant. The grant amount is up to $7,500 for bachelor degree programs, up to $3,500 for associate
degree programs, and up to $2,000 for certificate/diploma programs with no grant exceeding the amount of
unmet financial need*. Students must be enrolled, confirmed and actively attending by February 24, 2017 to be
eligible for this grant. The institutional grant will be disbursed per term, to enrolled students who meet the
eligibility requirements.
Eligible students earn the grant by being enrolled at least half-time and meeting the minimum Satisfactory
Academic Progress standards. The grant will be disbursed within 10 calendar days of each term start date.
Students can receive only one institutional transfer grant. Any credit balance resulting from the grant will not be
refundable and is not redeemable for cash.
Students transferring pursuant to an articulation agreement or from another EDMC school are not eligible for this
grant.
In the event that the student’s enrollment is terminated either by the student or the institution, including but not
limited to withdrawal, cancel, academic termination, financial termination, or expulsion; or in the event that the
student fails to fulfill the terms of the grant, only the portion of the grant awarded for terms completed and partial
terms attempted up to the date of determination will be honored. Any portion of the grant scheduled to be award
after the date of determination becomes null and void.
* Unmet Financial need is determined by the Program Balance of Cost with school sponsored housing after all
applicable and eligible financial aid and other educational benefits have been applied, minus a student’s EFC
(Expected Family Contribution). Program Balance of Cost is determined by taking a full program’s tuition charges
and fees minus all applicable and eligible financial aid and educational benefits, including the Art Grant.
THE ART INSTITUTES TEACH OUT TRANSFER GRANT
Effective September 26, 2016, in an effort to help students attending The Art Institutes International Kansas City,
The Art Institutes International Minnesota, The Art Institute of Salt Lake City, The Art Institute of St. Louis, The Art
Institute of Tucson, The Art Institute of Wisconsin, and The Art Institute of York – Pennsylvania, which are currently
in teach out, complete their educational program, the institution wishes to support students with options that will
further their educational goals.
As class sizes become smaller, The Art Institutes realize that classroom and group learning interaction may be
affected. Therefore, we are providing our students with the opportunity to transfer to a different Art Institute
location which is currently enrolling students or transfer to The Art Institute of Pittsburgh – Online Division. This
grant is designed to offset the burden of cost of credits that may not transfer for students who elect to transfer to
another campus or online, as well as to offset the potential burden of attending a different location or learning via
a different modality.
Page 60 of 183
Any student who transfers from an eligible Art Institutes location currently in teach out to an Art Institutes
location currently enrolling students that is located within the United States or to The Art Institute of Pittsburgh Online Division, will be eligible to receive either one (1) or two (2) one-time grants of $5,000 per the terms
established below.
To be eligible for this transfer grant, students must transfer from The Art Institutes International Kansas City, The
Art Institutes International Minnesota, The Art Institute of Salt Lake City, The Art Institute of St. Louis, The Art
Institute of Tucson, The Art Institute of Wisconsin, or The Art Institute of York – Pennsylvania to an Art Institutes
location currently enrolling students within the United States, or to The Art Institute of Pittsburgh-Online Division.
Students must be enrolled, confirmed, and actively attending campus or online by January 16, 2017.
Eligible students who transfer by January 16, 2017, with a scheduled and actual graduation date prior to December
31, 2017, will receive a one-time grant of $5,000. Eligible students will receive the disbursement of this grant after
successfully earning 12 academic credits at the new Art Institute location or The Art Institute of Pittsburgh-Online
Division. Recipients must be in good academic standing as defined by the Satisfactory Academic Progress policy,
and be actively attending.
Eligible students who transfer by January 16, 2017, with a scheduled and actual graduation date after December
31, 2017, will receive two (2) one-time grants of $5,000 each ($10,000 total). Eligible students will receive the
disbursement of the first grant after successfully earning 12 academic credits at the new Art Institutes location or
at The Art Institute of Pittsburgh-Online Division. Recipients must be in good academic standing as defined by the
Satisfactory Academic Progress policy, and be enrolled and confirmed in the subsequent quarter. Eligible students
will receive the disbursement of the second grant after completing a total of four (4) quarters of continuous
enrollment at the new Art Institutes location or at The Art Institute of Pittsburgh-Online Division, earning at least
36 academic credits at the new Art Institutes location or The Art Institute of Pittsburgh-Online Division, and
maintaining a minimum half-time load each quarter. Recipients must be in good academic standing as defined by
the Satisfactory Academic Progress policy, and be actively enrolled and attending at least half-time.
Credit balances resulting from the grant will not be refundable and are not redeemable for cash.
grant.
limited to withdrawal, cancellation, academic termination, financial termination, or expulsion; or in the event that
the student fails to fulfill the terms of the grant, no portion of the grant will be honored.
THE ART INSTITUTE OF PITTSBURGH TRANSFER HOUSING GRANT
Effective September 26, 2016, in an effort to help students attending The Art Institutes International Kansas City,
The Art Institutes International Minnesota, The Art Institute of Salt Lake City, The Art Institute of St. Louis, The Art
Institute of Tucson, The Art Institute of Wisconsin, and The Art Institute of York – Pennsylvania, which are currently
in teach out, complete their educational program, the institution wishes to support students with options that will
support their educational goals.
As class sizes become smaller, The Art Institutes realize that classroom and group learning interaction may be
affected. Therefore, we are providing our students with the opportunity to transfer to The Art Institute of
Pittsburgh. This grant is designed to partially offset the burden to students who elect to transfer to The Art
Institute of Pittsburgh from a different city and will live in school-sponsored housing.
Any student transferring from The Art Institutes International Kansas City, The Art Institutes International
Minnesota, The Art Institute of Salt Lake City, The Art Institute of St. Louis, The Art Institute of Tucson, The Art
Institute of Wisconsin, or The Art Institute of York – Pennsylvania to The Art Institute of Pittsburgh by January 16,
2017, is eligible to receive the grant. The housing grant offers $2,652 per quarter at The Art Institute of Pittsburgh
Page 61 of 183
based on the current housing rates. Students must live in school-sponsored housing to be eligible for this grant.
Students may receive the housing grant for up to two (2) quarters. Housing is limited to the number of available
rooms, and rooms may not be available to all students. Ensure that space is available before you make a transfer
decision. All conditions of the student housing policy and student code of conduct will apply.
To be eligible for this grant, students must be enrolled at least half-time and meet Satisfactory Academic Progress
during the student’s enrollment. The grant will be disbursed on a quarterly basis for up to two (2) quarters or until
graduation, whichever occurs first, provided that the student maintains Satisfactory Academic Progress and meets
all other requirements of eligibility.
Credit balances resulting from the grant will not be refundable and are not redeemable for cash.
grant.
limited to withdrawal, cancellation, academic termination, financial termination, expulsion, or removal from
school sponsored housing; or in the event that the student fails to fulfill the terms of the grant, only the portion of
the grant awarded for terms completed and partial terms attempted up to the date of determination will be
honored. Any portion of the grant scheduled to be awarded after the date of determination becomes null and void
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale Institutional Scholarships
Mark K. Wheeler Memorial Scholarship
In memory of its founder and original President, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale awards up to $10,000 in
tuition scholarships annually. Awards are typically valued at $2,000 - $5,000 each. This scholarship is available only
to students who are currently attending The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale. Students are nominated for this
scholarship by their Department Directors. The winner is selected by the Mark K. Wheeler Memorial Scholarship
Committee, composed of The Art Institute’s Executive Committee and other college personnel as appropriate.
Applicants must meet each of the following criteria:
1. applicants must be currently attending The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale.
2. applicants must have earned at least 45 credits
3. applicants must be registered for the next session
4. applicants must submit a 250-word essay describing why they should be considered
5. applicants must be nominated by their program chair
6. applicants must be received by the Scholarship Committee by March 1
The winner will be selected for their academic success, professionalism, service to The Art Institute, attendance
record, overall performance, and attitude.
Award Distribution:
Awards will be credited to recipients’ tuition accounts in an even distribution over the course of their program.
The Art Institute High School Senior Scholarship (IBA)
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale annually offers $85,000 in scholarships to high school seniors. Award amounts
range from $2,000 to $10,000; the basis for granting the awards is the potential performance of the students in
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale program to which they are applying.
Eligibility Requirements and Other Conditions:
1. Applicants must be graduates of a U.S. high school or equivalent international institution.
2. Applicants are responsible for initiating the application process and for securing nominations for the
award.
Page 62 of 183
3.
While all high school seniors are eligible to enter the competition, winners must meet all acceptance
criteria and be accepted for admission to realize the scholarship award. In the event that education is
terminated by the student or The Art Institute the scholarship becomes null and void. The scholarship is
not redeemable for cash and may not be used to finance optional programs sponsored by The Art
Institute. The scholarship covers tuition only and may not be applied against fees, housing, living
expenses, or program supplies, and it may not be transferred between The Art Institutes schools.
Entry Preparation & Submission Deadline:
1. Applicants must complete a scholarship entry form and indicate the program of study for which they are
applying
2. Applicants must fulfill all individual program entry requirements for the indicated program of study
3. Applicants must submit a 250-word essay indicating their goals and motivation for the scholarship
4. Applicants must label all slides, prints, and other materials with their name and medium used (if
appropriate). Slides must have cardboard or plastic mounts. All essays must be typewritten with the
student’s name and program title (Graphic Design, Interior Design, etc.) indicated on the title page
5. Applicants must submit a resume stating educational background, extracurricular activities, hobbies, work
experience, community involvement, artistic accomplishments, and/or related awards
6. Applicants must submit the original version of at least one letter of recommendation from an arts- related
instructor or academic/career advisor. Official school letterhead is preferred
7. Applicants must submit a letter from a high-school guidance counselor confirming the entry materials are
the original creation of the student
8. Applicants must submit a current high school transcript
9. Entries must be submitted in one package and mailed via the U. S. Postal Service and postmarked by
March 15th to: Scholarship Committee The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale 1799 SE 17th Street Fort
Lauderdale, FL 33316-3013
10. Winners will be notified by May 1 and have until May 15 to accept the scholarship offer. Offers not
accepted by that date will be rescinded and awarded to the first alternate.
Entry Materials – All slides, prints, and other entry materials submitted for consideration become the property of
The Art Institute upon receipt. The Art Institute is not responsible for loss, damage, or return of materials. Finalists
and/or winners must be prepared to submit their original work upon request and sign a release form permitting
The Art Institutes to use their work for promotional purposes.
International Entrants – All written materials and documentation must be submitted in English, including original
recommendation letters. When necessary, English translations must be attached. Scholarship winners must
provide bank statements and letters of financial support as evidence that the student and/or the student’s sponsor
has the capability to provide living expenses, fees, and college supplies not included in the scholarship. The letter
from The Art Institutes awarding the scholarship, financial documentation, academic records, and an I-20
certificate of eligibility for Non-immigrant student status must be presented to the U.S. embassy or consulate in
the student’s home country before the U.S. visa officer is permitted to grant the necessary Non-immigrant F-1
student visa to the student.
Individual Program Entry Requirements:
Advertising [BS]
1. In lieu of the 250-word essay required in the general competition guidelines, write a 500-word essay
on why you have chosen a career path in Advertising.
2. Submit a portfolio containing up to five examples of your work, on paper or a CD-ROM disk that
shows your unique approach to any of the following: web page design, advertising design, sales
concepts, conceptual writing or design, or product or service marketing.
Digital Filmmaking & Video Production [BS], Video Production [AS]
• In lieu of the 250-word essay required in the general competition guidelines, write a 500-word essay on
why you have chosen a career path in Video Production.
Page 63 of 183
•
Submit a VHS tape or DVD that represents a 10-minute short feature that includes:
o a script you have written
o camera changes
o lighting techniques
o a music score or other audio- to-visual treatment
Fashion Design [BS]
Submit 10 JPG images on a CD or DVD of original illustrations that feature major design interest/area. A substantial
selection of sketches should be focused in one design classification, such as Misses’ Sportswear, Junior Dresses,
Men’s Furnishings, Infant Sleepwear, or Children’s Active wear.
Fashion Merchandising [BS]
Submit a project titled “Create a Retail Store” that includes the following information:
1. imaginary store setup
2. store name
3. product descriptions (lines of merchandise)
4. display descriptions
5. personnel descriptions
Project should be supported by creative or visual means in addition to written material, e.g., photography, collage,
drawings, and be presented in the format of a notebook or scrapbook portfolio. The whole project can be
submitted in print or electronic format.
Game Art & Design [BS]
Submit at least four, but no more than seven, original JPG images sent via email or CD in one of or a combination
of the following:
1. charcoal or pencil drawing
2. color illustration or painting
3. graphic design poster incorporating shapes, flat (non-gradated) colors, and type
4. black-and-white illustration using ink or markers
5. computer artwork of any of the above (optional)
Graphic Design [BS/AS]
Submit a portfolio containing up to five examples of your work on paper or on a CD that shows your unique
approach to any of the following:
1. poster design
2. web design
3. conceptual thinking
4. ad design
5. brochure design
Illustration [BS]
Submit 10 originally produced slides, CDs, color prints, or JPG images of the following:
3. black-and-white illustration
4. figurative drawing or painting
Industrial Design [BS]
Submit ten 8 1/2 x 11 inch color prints of original projects created. The presentation should include:
1. at least one piece of artwork
2. at least one model designed and built from applicant’s original ideas and materials
3. front and side view mechanical drawings based on original ideas
Page 64 of 183
Interior Design [BS/AS]
Submit at least four, but no more than nine, 35-mm color slides/transparencies, or a CD showing original interior
design projects. Each should include:
1. a rendering in any medium of a bedroom in elevation or perspective
2. a floor plan of the same room
3. a color scheme for that room showing actual fabric samples or color reproductions of wall, window, floor,
and furniture coverings, with each sample numbered
4. a one-page, typed chart or concept statement accompanying the color-scheme slide or CD that identifies
the fabric type and usage of each sample
Media Arts & Animation [BS]
Submit at least four, but no more than seven, original JPGs sent via email or a CD in one of or a combination of the
following:
3. graphic design poster incorporating shapes, flat (non-gradated) colors, and type
4. black-and-white illustration using ink or markers
5. computer artwork of any of the above (optional)
Photography [BS/AS]
Submit between six and nine mounted original prints that may range in size from 3” x 5” to 11” x 14”. At least
three of the prints must be black and white. Prints should include:
1. at least one portrait
2. at least one landscape
3. at least one still-life
4. at least one action image
Visual Effects & Motion Graphics [BS]
Submit at least four, but no more than seven, original JPGs sent via email or a CD in one of or a combination of the
following:
1. original logo design 2.
2. poster design incorporating color, composition, and typography
3. photo retouching, including “before” and “after”
4. black-and-white illustration using ink or markers computer artwork of any of the above
Web Design & Interactive Media [BS/AS]
Utilizing creative problem-solving skills create an interactive solution detailing how to apply to a college. Plan a
presentation (maximum 12 typed pages) that will incorporate sound, text, static, and interactive images to show
students how to get ready to apply to college.
• describe the presentation
• outline the different aspects of the presentation such as test, audio, and visual components
• discuss how the viewer will interact with the presentation
• computer/digital artwork should be created for the presentation
• Presentation should be completed in either (a) Powerpoint, (b) Photoshop, (c) Dreamweaver, or (d) Flash
Final presentation will include (i) the typed presentation AND (ii) the interactive presentation.
Military Institutional Scholarship Opportunities
The Art Institutes are proud to offer institutional scholarship opportunities to qualifying military students. Eligibility
may be based upon current or former military affiliation or relationship to a current military service member.
Documentation will be required to prove eligibility. School personnel will be able to advise you regarding available
scholarships, eligibility requirements and required documentation.
Page 65 of 183
The Art Institutes are pleased to offer a military tuition scholarship of 10% to eligible Active Duty, Active and
Drilling members of the Reserve and National Guard and service member spouses as well as dependent children
who are receiving military education benefits.
EDMC Scholarship Foundation
The Education Foundation turns monetary donations into scholarships for current Art Institute students in need.
The Education Foundation is a nonprofit tax- exempt foundation under Section 501(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue
Code. The Foundation is supported by contributions from multiple sources, and provides scholarships to students
who attend EDMC-owned schools. Charitable alumni who want to give back can do so by making a tax deductible
donation to benefit current students with a scholarship to: The Education Foundation, 210 Sixth Avenue, 33rd
Floor, Pittsburgh, PA 15222 Indicate that your donation is for The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale in your
correspondence.
Award Distribution
All scholarship awards are credited to recipients’ tuition accounts in an even distribution over the course of their
program.
Accounting Services
Quarterly tuition and fee notices are mailed to the student, parents, or others assisting with educational expenses
in accordance with the student financial plan developed during the planning process. In order to remain in good
financial standing with the college, students must adhere to their agreed-upon payment schedule. Failure to meet
one’s financial obligations may lead to termination from the college, the withholding of academic transcripts, and
assignment to a collection agency.
REFUND POLICY
Examples of the calculations for these policies are available in the Student Accounting Office
REFUND POLICY
As allowed under Federal, state, and accreditation agency rules, the refund policy may be changed. Students will
be notified approximately sixty (60) calendar days in advance of any changes.
Initial Period of Enrollment and Cancellation Refund Policy for First-Time Undergraduate Students Enrolled OnGround
For purposes of this Initial Period of Enrollment Policy, a first-time undergraduate student is defined as a student
who is not currently enrolled, is not a prior graduate from an undergraduate program, and does not have a prior
enrollment in a withdrawn or dismissal status.
For students in graduate programs and undergraduate students who have previously attended, please see the
Refund Policy Prior to Class Start section of the enrollment agreement and catalog.
The school provides all new applicants seeking a first-time enrollment in any on-ground undergraduate program of
study, including hybrid programs, an Initial Period of Enrollment. The Initial Period of Enrollment allows first-time
undergraduate students the ability to begin classes as a non-regular student, without any financial penalty, to
determine if our school and educational program are right for the student. Students who enroll may cancel their
enrollment prior to the start of the term or within seven (7) calendar days following the first day of the student’s
first scheduled class, whichever is later (referred to as the “Initial Period”).
The chart below illustrates the days in the Initial Period for a non-regular student:
Class Days
th
Initial Period Days
st
April 28 = 1 Scheduled Class
Number of Calendar Days in Initial
Period
1
Page 66 of 183
th
1 Day of Initial Period
2
April 30
th
2
3
st
3
4
nd
4
5
rd
5
6
th
6
7
April 29
May 1
May 2
May 3
May 4
th
st
th
May 5
7 = Last Day of Initial Period
8
May 6th
Initial period over – student is
eligible to be reviewed for full
admission
9
A first-time undergraduate student who notifies the school of the intent to withdraw in person or in writing, or
simply stops attending and does not attend classes past the seventh (7th) calendar day following the student’s first
day of the term or first scheduled class, whichever is later, will be considered a cancellation. The school will
refund any monies paid on the student’s behalf and will remove any charges from the student’s account. All
refunds will be made within thirty (30) calendar days of the date of the cancellation.
During a first-time student’s Initial Period of Enrollment in an undergraduate program, the student is considered a
non-regular student for federal student aid purposes and is not eligible to receive federal, state or any other types
of aid during this period.
Please note, a first-time undergraduate student who is receiving military educational benefits may incur a debt
with the benefit provider for educational benefits paid if the student cancels within the seventh (7th) calendar day
following the student’s first scheduled class or does not meet the requirements for admission to the school.
Students who complete the Initial Period of Enrollment will be reviewed for full admission into the school as a
th
regular student on the ninth (9 ) respective calendar day (the day after the first calendar day plus seven (7)
calendar days). Students are required to meet all school admission requirements and any additional programmatic
admission requirements that apply to the student’s program of study. Students completing the Initial Period of
Enrollment who continue in the educational program will be subject to all student policies back to the first day of
the student’s first term or first scheduled class day, whichever is later, including the withdrawal, refund and Return
to Title IV policy should the student cease attending at a later date.
In order to qualify for aid, students must be a regular student and meet all federal, state, or other types of aid
eligibility requirements.
Cancellation Refund Policy Student Examples for On-Ground Students:
Example 1:
1
2
3
4
Student’s first scheduled class is January 5th.
Student ceases to attend and his or her last date of attendance is January 9th (the 4th day).
Student would no longer be enrolled and would not be eligible for any Title IV, state aid and other aid
program funding nor would the student be charged tuition or fees for any portion of his or her Initial
Period or for the term.
Students receiving military educational benefits may incur a debt with the benefit provider for
educational benefits paid.
Example 2:
5
Student’s first scheduled class is January 5th.
Page 67 of 183
6
7
8
9
Student remains enrolled and attends class through January 14 (the 9th day), then ceases enrollment
and attendance.
Student would be charged for the full class amount and his or her refund, if any, would be calculated
based on withdrawal on day ten (10) of the class.
Student would be eligible for Title IV, veteran’s benefits, state aid, and other aid programs, if all other
conditions are met for admission and aid eligibility, since he or she became a regular student after
January 11th (the 7th day).
Students receiving military educational benefits may incur a debt with the benefit provider for
educational benefits paid.
REFUND POLICY PRIOR TO CLASS START
Applicants may cancel their enrollment in person or in writing before the beginning of classes. Applicants not
requesting cancellation before the scheduled starting date indicated on their Enrollment Agreement will be
considered a student.
1.
2.
3.
All monies paid by applicants will be refunded if they are not accepted for admission.
The applicant may cancel the contract and receive a full refund of all monies paid if cancellation is
requested by the applicant prior to the beginning of classes or within five (5) business days after signing
the enrollment agreement, whichever is later, and making an initial payment.
Refunds will be made within thirty (30) calendar days of the applicant’s request or within thirty (30)
calendar days after their first scheduled class day.
REFUND POLICY AFTER CLASS START
In the event of withdrawal from the program by the student or termination by the school during any quarter of
study:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Prepaid tuition and fees for any period beyond the student’s current quarter will be refunded in full.
The student may officially withdraw from the school by notifying the Office of the Registrar in person or in
writing. If the student stops attending without notifying the Office of the Registrar, the school shall
determine the date of withdrawal. This determination date will be considered the notification date for
refunding purposes.
Refunds due shall be paid within thirty (30) calendar days of the notification date, unless the student is
withdrawing at the end of the quarter. Refunds for a student notifying the school prior to the end of a
quarter that they will be withdrawing at the end of that quarter will be paid within thirty (30) calendar
days of the last day of the quarter.
Refunds for a student who completes a previous quarter of study and does not notify the school prior to
the end of that quarter that they will not be returning for the following quarter will be paid within thirty
(30) calendar days of the first day of that following quarter in which the student was expected to return.
In the event of a fully documented extreme illness or personal emergency that makes it impossible for the
student to complete the program, the school may modify the tuition refund policy as deemed appropriate
to the circumstances.
A separate lease agreement and refund policy exists for students who lease housing accommodations
arranged by the school. The school reserves the right to apply any student payment, or any refund due to
a student, to any student financial account that is in arrears.
Each academic quarter is eleven (11) weeks in duration. The calculation of refunds is based upon the last
day of attendance within the quarter. Any portion of a week’s attendance is considered a full week of
attendance for refund purposes.
Session II academic terms are approximately five and one-half (5 ½) weeks in duration. The calculation of
refunds is based upon the last day of attendance within the term. Any portion of a week’s attendance is
considered a full week of attendance for refund purposes. Information in the catalog or student handbook
will apply except for the following changes specific to Session II classes: For students only scheduled to
attend Session II, the add/drop period is two (2) days from the start of Session II classes. If you drop or
Page 68 of 183
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
add one or more classes, your financial aid eligibility may change. Please see your Financial Aid Officer
before you drop or add a class.
In the event the school cancels or changes a course or program of study in such a way that a student who
started the program or course is unable to complete it, the school will refund all monies paid by the
student for the course or program within thirty (30) calendar days.
Examples of the calculations for these policies are available in the Student Accounting Office.
Students may add/drop classes during the first week of the quarter (or the first two (2) days for the midquarter starts), and tuition will be refunded. Students may not add classes to their schedule after the first
week of the quarter. Tuition will not be adjusted for any classes dropped after week one unless the
student completely withdraws from the program.
Any changes made to a student’s schedule may change the student’s financial aid eligibility.
If a student has not attended sixty (60) percent of the academic term, the school shall not retain or be
entitled to payment for a percentage of any tuition and fees or other educational costs for a session that
was scheduled to be taken during the relevant academic term but was not attended because the student
withdrew from school prior to the commencement of the session. For example, if a student is enrolled for
multiple sessions within the term but withdraws completely from school prior to the start of a subsequent
session within the academic term, the adjustment of charges based on the student’s last date of
attendance will be applied to the applicable period of attended session(s) using the session(s) charges and
the start date of the first attended session through the end date of the last attended session within the
academic term. Charges for the unattended session(s) after the student’s last date of attendance within
the academic term will be reversed for the Institutional Refund Policy, or State Refund Policy, where
applicable. The reversal of applicable charges will be completed after the Return of Title IV Policy. For
the Return of Title IV, the evaluation period and term charges include the entire period in which the
student registered.
If a student has attended sixty (60) percent of the academic term, the evaluation period and academic
term charges include the entire period in which the student registered. The Institutional Refund Policy, or
State Refund Policy, where applicable, shall be applied based on the student’s last date of attendance in
the academic term using the academic term charges, aid disbursed during the academic term, and the
start date of the first session through the end date of the last session within the academic term. For the
Return of Title IV, the evaluation period and academic term charges include the entire period in which the
student registered.
ADJUSTMENT OF CHARGES
In accordance with school policy, when the student withdraws from school, the school will earn tuition and fees as
follows, based on the week in which the student withdraws:
Quarter Starts:
Week One: 0%
Weeks Two and Three: 30%
Weeks Four and Five: 60%
After Week Five: 100%
Mid-Quarter Starts:
Week One: 0%
Week Two: 50%
After Week Two: 100%
REFUND POLICY FOR ONLINE COURSE WITHDRAWAL
Students who withdraw from a Session I or Session II online class after the add/drop period are treated the same
as if they withdrew from an on-ground class. Session II classes begin approximately the day after Session I classes
end and run approximately five and one-half (5 ½) weeks. The ending date of Session II classes may not coincide
with the ending date of on-ground classes.
Page 69 of 183
OFFICIAL AND UNOFFICIAL WITHDRAWAL
To officially withdraw, the student will need to notify the Office of the Registrar in person or in writing. The
registrar will assist the student to complete the withdrawal process and will determine the last date of attendance
and the date of determination. The date of determination would be the earlier of the date the student begins the
school’s withdrawal process or the date the student provides notice. For students who unofficially withdraw, the
Registrar will determine the last date of attendance using attendance records. The refund policies shall apply in
the event that a student withdraws, is suspended, or is terminated from school.
A student who withdraws from a program before the end of week nine (9) of an eleven (11) week term (before the
end of week four (4) of a five and one-half (5 1/2) week term) will be assigned a “W” code for each course within
that quarter. Every course for which a student receives an “F”, a “UF”, or a “W” grade/code must be repeated and
completed with a passing grade in order to graduate. The original grade/code and the subsequent passing grade(s)
will remain on the record for reference purposes. However, when a course is successfully repeated, only the
passing grade will be computed in the grade point average. Tuition is charged for repeated courses.
When a final course grade has been established and recorded in the student record, the grade may not be changed
without approval by the Academic Director or Chair and the Dean of Academic Affairs. Withdrawals and failed
courses can affect the student’s Incremental Completion Rate and ability to succeed.
For the purpose of determining a refund, a student is deemed to have withdrawn from a course of instruction
when any of the following occur:
1. The student notifies the school of withdrawal or of the date of withdrawal.
2. The school terminates the student’s enrollment in accordance with institutional policies.
3. The student exceeds the number of absences allowed in accordance with institutional policies, and must
be withdrawn from school. The date of withdrawal shall be deemed the last date of recorded attendance.
4. All refunds and return of funds will be made within thirty (30) calendar days of the date of determination.
KITS, COMPONENTS OF THE KIT, BOOKS, OR SUPPLIES RETURN POLICY
If kits, components of the kit, books, or supplies, are returned to the bookstore in re-salable condition within
twenty-one (21) calendar days of withdrawal or ten (10) calendar days of withdraw if student started mid-quarter,
a credit will be given.
All refunds and return of funds will be made within thirty (30) calendar days of the date the student notifies the
school of the withdrawal.
RETURN OF FEDERAL TITLE IV AID
In compliance with Federal regulations, the school will determine how much Federal student financial assistance
the student has earned or not earned when a student who is a Title IV recipient withdraws from school.
The school will calculate the percentage and amount of awarded Federal student financial assistance that the
student has earned if the student withdraws up through the sixty (60) percent point of the term or session if the
student is only attending a session. If the student has completed more than sixty (60) percent of the term, the
student earns one hundred (100) percent of the Federal student financial assistance.
The amount earned will be based on the percentage of the term that was completed in days up to and including
the last date of attendance. To calculate the amount earned, the school will determine the percentage by dividing
the number of calendar days completed in the term up to and including the last date of attendance by the total
number of calendar days in the term. If there is a scheduled break of five (5) or more days, it will reduce the term
length. If the scheduled break is before the student’s last date of attendance (LDA), it will also reduce the calendar
days completed. If the student received more than the amount of Federal student financial assistance earned, the
difference will be returned to the Federal student financial assistance programs from which funds were received in
the following order: Federal Unsubsidized Direct Loans, Federal Subsidized Direct Loans, Federal Perkins Loans,
Federal PLUS Loans, Federal Pell Grant, Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant. Funds will be
returned to the aid source within forty-five (45) calendar days of the date that the school determines that the
student has withdrawn.
Page 70 of 183
If more Federal student financial assistance has been earned than has been received, the student may be eligible
for a post-withdrawal disbursement. The school will notify the student of any post-withdrawal disbursement loan
funds for which the student may be eligible and what steps need to be taken for the Federal financial assistance
funds to be received. The student or parent, in the case of the Federal PLUS Loans, needs to provide permission
before any loan funds may be disbursed on the student’s account or disbursed to the student or parent. However,
the school may automatically use all or a portion of the post-withdrawal disbursement of grant funds for tuition,
fees, and room and board charges (as contracted with the school), and, with the student’s authorization, the
school may automatically use the grant funds for other educationally-related charges. Any balance of grant funds
that may be available will be offered to the student.
If Federal student financial assistance funds need to be returned, the institution must return a portion or all of the
unearned funds equal to the lesser of:
· The institutional charges multiplied by the percentage of the unearned Federal student financial assistance funds;
or
· The entire amount of unearned funds.
If there are remaining unearned Federal financial aid funds to be returned, the student must return any loan funds
that remain to be returned in accordance with the terms and conditions of the promissory note. If the remaining
amount of funds to be returned includes grant funds, the student must return any amount of the overpayment
that is more than half of the grant funds received. The school will notify the student as to the amount owed and
how and where it should be returned.
If students are only scheduled to attend Session I or Session II, the Return of Title IV calculation as described in the
Enrollment Agreement will be applied to the applicable session attended using the session start and end dates.
FINANCIAL AID REFUND DISTRIBUTION POLICY
All students receiving financial aid who withdraw from the program may have to return any refund amount to the
appropriate Student Financial Aid Program in accordance with the refund distribution schedule which follows:
1.
Federal Unsubsidized Direct Loan
2.
Federal Subsidized Direct Loan
3.
Federal Perkins Loan
4.
Federal PLUS
5.
Federal Pell Grant
6.
Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant
7.
Other federal, state, private, or institutional aid programs, if required by the program
8.
Students
Vocational Rehabilitation Programs
Every state has programs to help people with physical and mental disabilities. Some states offer retraining
programs for people who have been out of the job market for a length of time, for example. Eligibility criteria and
amounts vary according to federal, state and private agency regulations. Students must apply directly to and be
approved for benefits through the appropriate federal, state, or private agency. For more information, contact
your local vocational rehabilitation office, unemployment office, or your state department of human resources.
Veterans Education Act
The Veterans Education Act provides varying levels of assistance to eligible veterans, disabled veterans, and their
dependents. If you are a veteran or the dependent of a veteran, contact the local Veterans Affairs office in your
region, visit www.gibill.va.gov .
U.S. Departments of Veterans Affairs and Defense Education Benefits
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale has been approved by the Bureau of State Approving for Veterans’ Training
Florida Department of Veterans Affairs for the training of veterans and eligible veterans’ dependents. Where
Page 71 of 183
applicable, students utilizing the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA) education benefits may receive assistance
from the School Certifying Official in the filing of appropriate forms. These students must maintain satisfactory
attendance and academic progress (refer to the Academic Affairs section of the catalog for more information).
Students receiving veterans’ benefits must report prior education and training The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale
will evaluate prior credit and accept that which is appropriate. In accordance with Florida state approving agency
policy, it is required that all transcripts are on file and all prior learning has been evaluated for transfer into the
student’s educational program by the completion of two (2) academic terms. Failure to have an evaluation
completed by this timeframe will result in a suspension of the student’s certified attendance to the VA until an
evaluation is complete. Students with questions should contact the Bureau of State Approving for Veterans’
Training Florida Department of Veterans Affairs, 9500 Bay Pines Boulevard, Room214, Bay Pines, Florida 33744,
Phone 727-319-7402, Fax 727-319-7781, http://floridavets.org/.
For students using Veterans Affairs (VA) education benefits, any complaint against the school should be routed
through the VA GI Bill® Feedback System by going to the following website:
http://www.benefits.va.gov/GIBILL/Feedback.asp . The VA will then follow up through the appropriate channels to
investigate the complaint and resolve it satisfactorily.
As a Department of Defense Memorandum of Understanding education institution participant and signatory, The
Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale is approved for Tuition Assistance. Eligibility for Tuition Assistance varies by military
branch. Military spouses may also be eligible to use Department of Defense educational benefits under the
Military Spouse Career Advancement Scholarship (MyCAA) program. Service members or military spouses wishing
to use Department of Defense education benefits must obtain approval from their respective military branch or
the Department of Defense prior to starting the course.
While benefit and eligibility information is provided by The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale ,the ultimate approval
of a student’s ability to use a particular benefit is determined by the respective government agency offering the
benefit.
Eligible service members, veterans and dependents may contact the Student Financial Services
department at The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale to learn more about these programs and participation. For
additional information, visit https://www.artinstitutes.edu/fort-lauderdale.
GI Bill® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs (VA). More information about
education benefits offered by VA is available at the official U.S. government Web site at
http://www.benefits.va.gov/GIBILL/Trademark_Terms_of_Use.asp.
Minimum Academic Achievement Standards for Student Receiving Department of Defense
Tuition Assistance:
In addition to the College’s Standards of Satisfactory Academic Progress Policy, in order for a Service member
student to continue to receive Tuition Assistance (TA) military education benefits for TA-funded courses, the
following minimum academic standards must be achieved.
The Department of Defense requires reimbursement from the Service member if a successful course completion is
not obtained. For the purpose of reimbursement, a successful course completion is defined as a grade of ‘‘C’’ or
higher for undergraduate courses, a ‘‘B’’ or higher for graduate courses and a ‘‘Pass’’ for ‘‘Pass/Fail’’ grades.
Reimbursement will also be required from the Service member if he or she fails to make up a grade of ‘‘I’’ for
incomplete within the time limits stipulated by the educational institution or 6 months after the completion of the
class, whichever comes first.
Students using TA must maintain a cumulative grade point average (GPA) of 2.0 or higher after completing 15
semester hours/23 quarter hours, or equivalent, in undergraduate studies, or a GPA of 3.0 or higher after
completing 6 semester hours/9 quarter hours, or equivalent, in graduate studies, on a 4.0 grading scale. If the GPA
for TA funded courses falls below these minimum GPA limits, TA will not be authorized and Service members will
Page 72 of 183
use alternative funding (such as financial aid or personal funds) to enroll in courses to raise the cumulative GPA to
2.0 for undergraduate studies or 3.0 for graduate studies.
The Secretary of the Military Department will establish recoupment processes with the Service member directly
for unsuccessful completion of courses.
College Services
Nevin C. Meinhardt Memorial Library
The Nevin C. Meinhardt Memorial Library is a vibrant, single location for students to access the resources they
need to succeed as a student and to develop as a knowledgeable industry professional.
The library contains a collection of over 9,600 books, 85 magazine titles, 3,040 audiovisual media , and thousands
of unique items.
The library also subscribes to a core of online resources including digitized journal articles, fashion forecasting
resources, stock images, software training tutorials, market research reports, company information, and art
information.
Access to these resources and the library’s online catalog are available to students through the Student Portal and
then through the library’s online website.
Development of the library collection is based on careful evaluation of the curriculum needs of each academic
program, current industry trends, and industry resources.
Resources beyond the libraries holdings are available to students through our memberships in the local library
consortium, OCLC (Online Computer Library Center). Our OCLC WorldCat membership offers students use of many
of the participating academic libraries individually, regionally and nationally. Membership in OCLC provides
students access to the collections (through interlibrary loan) from over 65,000 libraries. The service oriented
library staff offers one-on-one assistance to students in person, via phone, chat, or email. The Librarian holds a
Master of Arts in Library and Information Science and partners with faculty in the academic departments with
library presentations: resource teaching sessions both in library and in-class sessions which provide students
targeted information-gathering skills.
Bookstore
The Art Institute’s bookstore is located on the first floor of the Main Building. This is the location for picking up
student supply kits, which are custom built for each program. The bookstore carries textbooks, general supplies,
art supplies, media storage and portable hard drives. Free parking permits can also be picked up at this location
when you register your vehicle. A parking permit is required for all non-visitor vehicles parking on The Art Institute
grounds.
Alumni Association
The mission of the Alumni Association of The Art Institute to promote relations among The Art Institute, its alumni,
and its current students for the purpose of supporting growth through networking, mentoring, continuing
education seminars, and community awareness.
Under the leadership of the Alumni Coordinator and in conjunction with the Alumni Committee, The Art Institute
provides the following services to its alumni: reunions, newsletters, alumni seminars, alumni merchandise, career
resources, events calendar, recognition awards, guest speaker opportunities, gallery exhibitions, and art-judging
opportunities. The national Art Institutes alumni web site is http:// www.alumniconnections.com/artinstitutes.
This site features an online directory, career resources tools, success stories, and an events calendar.
Mark K. Wheeler Gallery
Having a gallery space to display artwork is a tremendous asset to The Art Institute. On a regular basis, the Mark K.
Wheeler Gallery (named for the founder of The Art Institute) hosts exhibits for the students and public to view.
Page 73 of 183
The exhibits are carefully selected and are used to demonstrate professional accomplishments, challenge students
to explore new mediums, and showcase The Art Institute’s impressive resources and talents.
Many faculty members incorporate visits to the gallery into their curriculum, teaching students to appreciate and
critique works of art.
The Art Institute Mark K. Wheeler Gallery serves as a non-commercial exhibition space that reflects and
exemplifies the artwork of professionals, faculty, students, and graduates in their fields.
The goals of the gallery are to inspire and challenge students through examples of accomplished artists and
designers, enrich the learning community at The Art Institute through exhibitions, demonstrate high levels of
excellence, provide opportunities to increase public awareness of The Art Institute and its importance in the art
and design community, and expose the local community to relevant faculty, student, and professional work. A
sampling of the exhibitions include juried student art shows, faculty exhibitions, and visiting artists.
The gallery is located on the first floor of the Main Building and is open Monday through Thursday from 8 a.m. to
11 p.m., Friday from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., and Saturday from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. The gallery is closed on Sundays and
holidays.
Technology Services
Technology at The Art Institute continues to grow to keep pace with the demanding applications used throughout
each program. The Art Institute currently supports Macintoshes and PCs in 32 computer labs, all with internet
access. Extended hours are available in an open lab in the Main Building from 8 a.m. to 10 p.m. Monday through
Saturday.
Policy on Student’s Use of Electronic Resources
Although the use of technology is available for students and faculty in the labs, classrooms, and resource areas,
students and faculty are requested not to attach any devices that have not met the approval of their specific
department requirements (students should consult with their department chairs for a list of approved devices) to
equipment in any of the school’s computer or production classrooms. Those who do not follow this policy may be
subject to disciplinary action.
The Art Institute requires all students using The Art Institute’s technology and networks to abide by the Policy on
Students’ Use of Electronic Resources. Technology and networks covered under this policy include but are not
limited to the following:
1. electronic mail
2. local databases
3. games
4. CD-ROMs
5. photographs
6. digitized information
7. any recorded media
8. externally accessed databases
A copy of the Policy on Students’ Use of Electronic Resources statement may be obtained from the Student
Handbook available at http://www.artinstitutes.edu/ fort-lauderdale/pdf/student-handbook.pdf or by contacting
the Director of Technology.
General Facilities & Equipment
The Art Institute occupies approximately 95,000 square feet of space in two separate buildings. The main facility,
located at 1799 SE 17th Street, is a 75,000-square-foot, four-story building designed specifically to house The Art
Institute.
Page 74 of 183
The fourth floor contains computer labs, a computer- networking room, drawing classrooms, and office space for
the Graphic Design, Advertising, and Illustration faculty. The third floor is shared by the faculty of the Digital
Filmmaking & Video Production, Fashion Design, and Photography programs. The video post-production labs
occupy 3,000 square feet and are equipped with editing stationsThe Fashion Design area consists of four sewing
rooms containing power sewing machines, cutting tables, power cutters, dressmakers forms, and steam irons. In
addition, there is a design lab equipped with computer-driven design workstations. The third floor also contains
the commercial photography studio and equipment checkout.
The second floor houses the Registrar, Accounting, Student Financial Services, Admissions, Student Services, and
Administrative offices.
Located on the first floor are a television production studio, a special effects studio equipped with a full-body
cyclorama wall for high-end visual effects photography, an audio recording studio, The Art Institute bookstore, and
a café . The Mark K. Wheeler Gallery is located just off the main lobby.
The Harbor Walk building, located directly southwest of the Main Building at 1650 SE 17th Street, is a four-story
building comprising approximately 19,000 square feet.
The first floor houses the Chef’s Palette restaurant and the Culinary Arts and Industrial Design programs. The
Culinary Arts Department is composed of four fully equipped commercial kitchens, teaching/service bar, classroom
space, walk-in refrigerators, and freezers.
The Industrial Design area has a ventilated shop equipped with power saws, grinders, sanders, lathes, a paint-spray
room, work benches, and a tool crib with all the necessary hand tools.
Page 75 of 183
ACADEMIC PROGRAMS
Bachelor of Science (BS) Degrees
Advertising
Culinary Management
Digital Filmmaking & Video Production
Fashion Design
Game Art & Design
Graphic Design
Illustration (No longer accepting new enrollments)
Industrial Design
Instructional Technology & Design
Interior Design
Marketing & Entertainment Management
Photography
Professional Writing for Creative Arts
Software Development for Creative Technologies
Visual Effects & Motion Graphics
Associate of Science (AS) Degrees
Baking & Pastry
Culinary Arts
Fashion Design
Graphic Design
Interior Design
Photography
Video Production
Diploma Programs
Baking & Pastry
Culinary Arts
Fashion Retailing
Web Design & Interactive Communications
For all programs, please visit our Student Consumer Information page to find the average time to completion for
continuously enrolled students for each credential level offered. This data is available at the average credit load,
full-time or at full load. Changing programs, beginning programs at the mid-term start date, taking remedial
courses, taking time off from coursework, registering for fewer hours or unsuccessful attempts at course
completion will increase the total length of the program and overall cost of education from what is disclosed.
Transfer credits awarded toward your program will likely decrease the overall length and cost of education.
All courses are 3 credits unless otherwise noted. See Department Director or Coordinator, or contact an
Academic Advisor for elective choices.
Page 76 of 183
ADVERTISING
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Advertising program is designed to prepare students to meet the greatly expanding
need for advertising and marketing professionals with interdisciplinary training and new media savvy. The program
is designed to prepare graduates to confront the challenging strategic questions posed by developing
opportunities in the advertising marketplace by seeking entry-level positions including marketing coordinator/
assistant, graphic designer, sales/marketing promotion representative, and assistant account executive. The
program is meant to bridge the gap between technologies, artists, and marketing professionals. The length of the
program is twelve [12], eleven [11] week quarters.
Gainful Employment Information
Please visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/451 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt,
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Advertising program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ADV1000
Advertising Industry Survey
ADV3105C
Advertising Copywriting
ADV4710C
Advertising Portfolio
ADV4804C
Digital Media Campaigns
ADV4806
Senior Project - Integrated Marketing
Campaigns
ART1201C
Design Basics
CGS2800C
Basic Web Design
DIG2201C
Desktop Video
FIN3400
Financial Management
GEB2011
Fundamentals of Business
GEB2216
Business Communications
GRA1103C
Introduction to Visual Design Applications
GRA1120C
Layout
GRA1121C
Art for Reproduction
GRA1190C
Concept Development
GRA1852C
Computer Graphics
GRA1853C
Typography
GRA2199C
Signs, Symbols, & Ciphers
GRA2412
Media Law
GRA2841C
Fundamentals of Web Design
GRA3816C
Conceptual Thinking
GRA4196C
Information Media Production
GRA4591C
Art Direction and Creative Process
MAN4801
Entrepreneurship
MAN4871
Strategic Management
MAR1010
Fundamentals of Marketing
MAR2411
Personal Selling
MAR2612
Principles of Marketing Research
MAR3322C
Campaign Advertising
MAR3323
Media Planning and Buying
MAR3500
Consumer Behavior
MAR4800
Brand Marketing
&Strategy
PGY1103C
Photography Techniques
PGY2803C
Digital Imaging
PUR3008
Public Relations and Promotion
RTV2107C
Writing for Interactive Media
SLS3355
Professional Development
SLS4943
Internship - Bachelor
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Four Program Elective Courses
GENERAL EDUCATION COURSES AND ELECTIVES
ARH2050
Art History - Ancient to Medieval
ARH2051
or Art History - Renaissance to Present
BSC1001
Fundamentals of Biological Science
ISC1004
or Fundamentals of Physical Science
MET1001
or Weather and Climate
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
or Foundations of Physics
CLP1006
Psychology of Personal Effectiveness
COM1041
Interpersonal Communication
ECO2013
Principles of Macroeconomics
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
Introduction to Literature
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
or Arthurian literature
LIT3326
or Fairytales and Archetypes
ENC1145
Topics for Composition
MGF1211
General College Math
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
Principles of Aesthetics
PSY2012
Introduction to Psychology
PSY3025
Psychology of Color
SPC1608
Principles of Public Speaking
SYA3330
Research Methods in Action
SYG2000
Introduction to Sociology
SYP3322
Advertising and Society
Two General Education Elective Course
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
GENERAL EDUCATION COURSES
Credits Required
TOTAL CREDITS REQUIRED FOR GRADUATION
114
12
54
180
Page 77 of 183
MEDIA ARTS & ANIMATION
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Media Arts & Animation program is designed to refine and synthesize the students’
competencies in the field of computer animation. Students will have the opportunity to apply advanced techniques
in drawing, characterization, animation in both 2D and 3D computerized environments, and interactive
technologies. Students may focus on their chosen area of animation specialization. Art direction and project
management are emphasized. Students have the opportunity to develop a graduate project which represents a
unique style and demonstrates conceptual abilities. The Media Arts & Animation Bachelor of Science degree
program is designed to prepare graduates to seek entry-level positions such as 2D animators, 3D animators, special
effects animators, broadcast graphic artist, or other animation and art specialties. The length of the program is
twelve [12] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Media Arts & Animation program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1201C Design Basics
ART1300C Drawing and Perspective
ART1331C Drawing and Anatomy
ART2205C Color Application
ART2330C Life Drawing
ART2373C Drawing for Animation
ART2701C Sculpting I: Foundations
ART3710C Sculpting II: Character Design
ART4951C Media Arts Portfolio Preparation
ART4952C Media Arts Portfolio Development
DIG1022
History of Animation
DIG2321C 3D Modeling I: Foundations
DIG3114C Broadcast Graphics II: Compositing
DIG3306C 3D Animation I: Principles
DIG3308C Web Animation
DIG3323C 3D Modeling II: Character Modeling
DIG3326C 3D Modeling III: Designing Environments
DIG3343C Broadcast Graphics 1: Animated Text & Logo
Design
DIG3354C 3D Animation II: Applications
DIG3362C 3D Animation III: Staging and Interaction
DIG3371C 3D Character Rigging
DIG3542C Animatics & Previsualization
DIG4367C 3D Animation Scripting
DIG4369C 3D Animation IV: Acting and Dialogue
DIG4373C 3D Lighting & Textures I
DIG4376C 3D Lighting & Textures II
DIG4956C Media Arts Portfolio Presentation
FIL1104C
Scripting/Storyboarding
FIL2723C
2D Animation II: Applications
GRA1762C Maps, Mattes, Masks
GRA1852C Computer Graphics
GRA2412
Media Law
GRA2854C 2D Animation I: Principles
GRA3521C Creative Web Development
PGY1103C Photography Techniques
RTV1224C
or Principles of Lighting
PGY2803C Digital Imaging
SLS3355
SLS4943
TPP1500C
Acting and Movement
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Three Program Elective Courses
GENERAL EDUCATION COURSES & ELECTIVES
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
THE2000
or Theatre Appreciation
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
or Interpersonal Communications
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
or Arthurian Literature
LIT3326
ENC1145
FIL2000
Film Appreciation
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PHY2020
Foundations of Physics
SPC1608
SYG2000
PSY2012
or Introduction to Psychology
WOH2012
Ancient and Medieval Civilization
WOH2022
or Modern and Post-Modern Civilization
Three General Education Elective Courses
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
117
9
54
180
Page 78 of 183
CULINARY ARTS
ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE
Participation in this program may be limited by local drinking age requirements. Please contact your campus Dean
for information.
The Associate of Science in Culinary Arts program is designed to prepare students with a market-driven,
competency-based education delivered by faculty with appropriate credentials and industry experience. This
program is designed to prepare graduates to seek entry-level positions such as baking and pastry cook, garde
manger cook, and station chef. The length of the program is six [6] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Science in Culinary Arts program.
PROGRAM COURSES
FSS1010
Concepts and Theories of Culinary
Techniques
FSS1290C
Garde Manger (6 credits)
FSS1743C
Fundamentals of Classical Techniques (6
credits)
FSS1744C
Latin Cuisine
FSS1745C
American Regional Cuisine (6 credits)
FSS1747C
Asian Cuisine
FSS2067C
Introduction to Baking & Pastry
Techniques (6 credits)
FSS2292C
Classical European Cuisines
FSS2746C
World Cuisines
HFT2009
Career Development and Supervision
HFT2454
Food and Beverage Operations
Management
HFT2821
Sustainable Purchasing & Controlling Costs
HFT2842C
A la Carte and Dining Room Operations (6
credits)
HFT2852
Management by Menu
HFT3191C
Art Culinaire
HFT3915
Culinary Capstone
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
CLP1006
CGS1160C
Computer Science
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
or Interpersonal Communication
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
HUN2204
Nutrition
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Mathematics
WOH2012
Ancient and Medieval Civilizations
WOH2022
or Modern and Post-Modern
Civilizations
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
63
Credits Required
27
TOTAL CREDITS REQUIRED FOR GRADUATION:
90
Page 79 of 183
CULINARY MANAGEMENT
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
for information.
The Bachelor of Science in Culinary Management program is designed to prepare graduates to seek foodservicerelated entry level opportunities in management and supervisory trainee positions. The program is designed to
provide an opportunity for students to become competent in the identified priorities of the foodservice industry:
communication, training, leadership, motivation, management, human resources, technology, accounting,
marketing, and customer relations. These skills prepare graduates to seek entry-level positions, including assistant
front-of- the-house manager, assistant kitchen manager, management trainee, assistant department manager, and
sous chef. The length of the program is twelve [12] eleven [11]-week quarters.
Please visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/457 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Culinary Management
program.
PROGRAM COURSES
FSS1010
Concepts and Theories of Culinary Techniques
FSS1290C
Garde Manger (6 credits)
FSS1743C
Fundamentals of Classical Techniques (6
credits)
FSS1744C
Latin Cuisine
FSS1745C
FSS1747C
Asian Cuisine
FSS2067C
Introduction to Baking & Pastry Techniques (6
credits)
FSS2292C
Classical European Cuisines
FSS2746C
World Cuisines
HFT2009
HFT2454
Food and Beverage Operations Management
HFT2821
HFT2842C
A la Carte and Dining Room Operations (6
credits)
HFT2852
Management by Menu
HFT3191C
Art Culinaire
HFT3915
Culinary Capstone
HFT4221
Human Resource Management
HFT4284
Quality Service Management & Training
HFT4285
Global Management & Operations in the
Hospitality Industry
HFT4292
Innovation & Entrepreneurship
HFT4295
Leadership and Organizational Development
HFT4343
Facilities and Management Design
HFT4403
Introduction to Accounting Principles
HFT4474
Foodservice Financial Management
HFT4493
Foodservice Technology and Information
HFT4503
Hospitality Marketing
HFT4603
Legal Issues and Ethics for Culinarians
HFT4802
Catering and Event Management
HFT4865
Exploring Wines and the Culinary Arts
HFT4916
Culinary Capstone/Portfolio
HFT4943
Management Externship
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Six Program Elective Courses
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
HUN2204
Nutrition
LIT1020
The Short Story
ENC1102
or Introduction to Literature
IT3132
or Arthurian Literature
LIT3326
MGF1211
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
MAC1105
or College Algebra
PSY2012
SYG2000
or Introduction to Sociology
SPC1608
SYO3370
Working in America
WOH2012
WOH2022
or Modern and Post-Modern Civilizations
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
108
18
54
180
Page 80 of 183
BAKING & PASTRY
for information.
The Associate of Science in Baking & Pastry program provides students with culinary skills combined with a focus
on baking and pastry skills. The program is designed to enhance the students’ ability to meet the challenges of an
increasingly demanding and rapidly changing field. Students have the opportunity to develop competencies in
breads, plated and restaurant desserts, cake production, and buffet centerpieces. The program focuses on both
production and individual skills necessary to seek entry-level employment in bakeries, restaurants, hotels, resorts,
and other catering or foodservice institutional settings. The program prepares graduates to seek entry-level
employment in the professional foodservice industry and management areas including pastry chef, assistant pastry
chef, retail cake decorator, retail pastry chef, and baker.
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Science in Baking & Pastry program.
PROGRAM COURSES
FSS1010
FSS1743C
Fundamentals of Classical Techniques (6 credits)
FSS1745C
FSS2067C
Introduction to Baking and Pastry Techniques (6 credits)
FSS2068C
Artisan Breads and Baking Production (6 credits)
FSS2069C
Advanced Patisserie and Display Cakes (6 credits)
FSS2298C
European Cakes and Tortes
FSS2299C
Chocolate, Confections, and Centerpieces (6 credits)
HFT2009
HFT2454
HFT2821
Sustainable Purchasing & Control Costs
HFT2842C
A la Carte and Dining Room Operations (6 credits)
HFT2852
Management by Menu
HFT3915
Culinary Capstone
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
HUN2204
Nutrition
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Mathematics
WOH2012
WOH2022
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
Credits Required
TOTAL CREDITS REQUIRED FOR GRADUATION:
63
27
90
Page 81 of 183
CULINARY ARTS
DIPLOMA
for information.
Students study the fundamentals of cooking, baking, knife skills, nutrition, sanitation, safety, food production,
kitchen operations, and food selection and purchasing. They have an opportunity to learn about modern, regional,
and classic cuisine, covering a variety of international styles, practicing these skills in professional kitchens.
Students also have an opportunity to learn basic management skills.
Culinary Arts students also have the opportunity to spend time working in The Chef’s Palette, the studentoperated public dining lab, where students prepare and serve lunch or dinner and can learn to become foodservice
professionals who meet the needs of their guests.
Graduates are prepared to seek entry-level positions such as prep cooks, line cooks, first cooks, assistant pastry
chefs, sauciers, bakers, sous chefs, and pastry chefs. They can pursue employment opportunities in entertainment
establishments, restaurants, hotels, clubs, resorts, food companies, hospitals and other health care institutions,
convention centers, and cruise ships.
Objectives: Upon completion of the program, graduates should be able to:
1. Cook and present various ethnic cuisines professionally.
2. Work as a professional team member.
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Culinary Arts Diploma program.
PROGRAM COURSES
FSS1010
FSS1290C
Garde Manger (6 Credits)
FSS1743C
Fundamentals of Classical Techniques (6 Credits)
FSS1744C
Latin Cuisine
FSS1745C
American Regional Cuisine (6 Credits)
FSS1747C
Asian Cuisine
FSS2067C
Introduction to Baking & Pastry Techniques (6 Credits)
FSS2746C
World Cuisines
HFT2009
HFT2454
HFT2821
HFT2842C
A la Carte and Dining Room Operations (6 Credits)
HUN2204
Nutrition
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
54
54
Page 82 of 183
BAKING & PASTRY
DIPLOMA
for information.
The program is designed to emphasize culinary skills as well as core baking and pastry courses. The program
focuses on both production and individualized skills necessary to seek entry-level employment in bakeries,
restaurants, and other catering or institutional settings. In addition to technical skills, the program offers food
safety and sanitation, nutrition and kitchen supervision/career development and related business courses to
support their professional skills for employment. Upon completion of the program, graduates may seek entry-level
positions such as line cooks, pastry cooks, caterers or cake decorators.
Objectives: Upon completion of the program, graduates should be able to:
1. Produce a wide variety of artisan breads, pastries and plated desserts.
2. Create sugar, chocolate and pastillage centerpieces.
3. Produce complex pastries and cakes involving multiple skills and techniques.
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Baking & Pastry Diploma program.
PROGRAM COURSES
FSS1010
FSS1743C
Fundamentals of Classical Techniques (6 Credits)
FSS1744C
Latin Cuisine
FSS1745C
American Regional Cuisine (6 Credits)
FSS2067C
Introduction to Baking & Pastry Techniques (6 Credits)
FSS2068C
Artisan Breads and Baking Production (6 Credits)
FSS2069C
Advanced Patisserie and Display Cakes (6 Credits)
FSS2298C
European Cakes and Tortes
FSS2299C
Chocolate Confections, and Centerpieces (6 Credits)
HFT2009
HFT2821
HUN2204
Nutrition
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
54
54
Page 83 of 183
DIGITAL FILMMAKING & VIDEO PRODUCTION
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Using digital video and audio equipment, students in the Bachelor of Science in Digital Filmmaking & Video
Production program have the opportunity to create sophisticated projects with a wide array of content ranging
from commercials and short news pieces to longer-form digital films and documentaries. Students have the
opportunity to gain a basic understanding of delivery media, including broadcast, cable, broadband, the internet,
CD, DVD, and digital theaters, and design each project specifically for distribution via one of these media.
Graduates of the Digital Filmmaking & Video Production Bachelor of Science program are prepared to seek entrylevel opportunities such as assistant video producer, digital film production assistant, digital camera operator,
nonlinear editor, assistant sound designer, and scriptwriter. The length of the program is twelve [12] eleven [11]week quarters.
Please visit ge.artinstitutes.edu/programoffering/458 for program duration, tuition, fees, other costs, median debt, salary data,
alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Digital Filmmaking & Video Production program.
PROGRAM COURSES
FIL1552C
Fundamentals of Editing
FIL2108
Media Interpretation & Adaptation
FIL2553C
Nonlinear Editing
FIL3485C
Art of Directing
FIL3545C
Advanced Sound Design
FIL3700C
Introduction to Digital Video Effects
FIL4363C
Digital Film and Documentary
FIL4471C
Digital Video Effects
FIL4575C
Management of Post-Production
FIL4600
Media Business
FIL4746C
Digital Cinematography
FIL4951C
Digital Filmmaking Portfolio Preparation
FIL4971C
Digital Filmmaking Portfolio and Defense
FIL4972C
Digital Filmmaking Senior Project Production
FIL4973C
Digital Filmmaking Senior Project PostProduction
GRA3521C
Creative Web Development
MAR1010
MMC1124
Media Concept Development
MMC3008
Media Delivery Systems & Distribution
PGY1401C
Photography Techniques for Graphic Design
PGY1892C
Digital Graphic Production
RTV1100
Scriptwriting
RTV1213C
Introduction to Audio Recording
RTV1224C
Principles of Lighting
RTV1241C
Introduction to Video Production
RTV2205C
Broadcast Media Production
RTV2214C
Digital Audio Production
RTV2245C
Videography
RTV2248C
Television Studio Production
RTV2250C
Post Production
RTV3203C
Video Producing & Directing
RTV3217C
Digital Audio Post-Production
RTV3255C
Advanced Nonlinear Editing
RTV3262C
Advanced Camera & Lighting
RTV4227C
Team Media Production
RTV4268C
Digital Interactive Authoring
RTV4280C
Web Broadcasting Design & Delivery
SLS3355
SLS4943
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
THE2000
or Theater Appreciation
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
LIT3326
ENC1145
FIL2000
Film Appreciation
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PHY2020
SPC1608
SYG2000
PSY2012
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
117
9
54
180
Page 84 of 183
FASHION DESIGN
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Fashion Design program is designed to prepare students to meet the current needs of the fashion
industry for creative designers who can develop fashion apparel and accessories for a specific target market. Along with
foundation-level technical skills, students have the opportunity to develop competencies such as research skills, visioning, and
critiquing, through manual and computer work. These skills prepare graduates to seek entry- level employment with fashion
design production houses or with retailers who market private- label merchandise. Graduates of the Bachelor of Science in
Fashion Design program are prepared to seek entry-level employment opportunities such as assistant designers, design
technicians, textile designers, illustrators, sourcing specialists, merchandise managers, and product development specialists.
The length of the program is twelve [12] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Fashion Design program.
PROGRAM COURSES
CTE1313C
Fundamentals of Apparel Construction
CTE1400C
Fundamentals of Apparel Textiles
CTE1510
Fashion History
CTE1708C
Fashion Digital Design Fundamentals
CTE1730C
Technical Drawing for Fashion
CTE1732C
Fashion Illustration
CTE1740C
Fundamentals of Apparel Patternmaking
CTE1741C
Apparel Pattern Details
CTE1760
Manufacturing Apparel Concepts
CTE2342C
Children’s Wear
CTE2465C
Textile and Apparel Design
CTE2720C
Fashion Design Studio
CTE2735C
Illustration & Stylized Drawing
CTE2747C
Specialized Patternmaking
CTE2750C
Advanced Apparel Draping
CTE2765C
Fashion Product Development
CTE2770C
Swimwear Design
CTE2771C
Computerized Apparel Pattern Systems
CTE2772C
Computerized Apparel Patternmaking
CTE2778C
Computer Fashion Design
CTE2893C
Fashion Design Portfolio
CTE3351C
Menswear/Tailoring
CTE3412C
Textile Surface Design
CTE3413C
Advanced Digital Textile Design
CTE3533C
Fashion Research & Sourcing
CTE3775C
Active Sportswear
CTE3786C
Product Data Management
CTE4746C
Technical Design
CTE4813
Fashion Entrepreneurship
CTE4895C
Advanced Fashion Portfolio
CTE4896C
Digital Fashion Portfolio
CTE4936C
Senior Studio-Concepts
CTE4937C
Senior Studio-Technical
CTE4938C
Senior Studio-Production
MAN2024
Fashion Business Management Practices
MAR3414C
Design Sales
SLS3355
SLS4943
Internship – Bachelor
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
LIT3326
ENC1145
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PSY2012
SYG2000
SPC1608
WOH2012
Ancient & Medieval Civilizations
WOH2022
Modern & Postmodern Civilizations
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
114
12
54
180
Page 85 of 183
FASHION DESIGN
The Associate of Science in Fashion Design program is designed to prepare students with skills in research, concept
development, and garment design and production in the apparel-manufacturing industry. Emphasis is placed on
technical aspects, with a concentration on computer-aided design, providing readiness for the needs of the
industry. Graduates are prepared to seek entry-level positions in apparel design, pattern making, grading, and
production management. The length of the program is six [6] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Science in Fashion Design program.
PROGRAM COURSES
CTE1313C
Fundamentals of Apparel Construction
CTE1400C
CTE1510
Fashion History
CTE1708C
CTE1730C
Technical Drawing for Fashion
CTE1732C
Fashion Illustration
CTE1740C
Fundamentals of Apparel Patternmaking
CTE1741C
Apparel Pattern Details
CTE1760
CTE2342C
Children’s Wear
CTE2465C
Textile and Apparel Design
CTE2720C
Fashion Design Studio
CTE2765C
CTE2770C
Swimwear Design
CTE2771C
Computerized Apparel Pattern Systems
CTE2772C
Computerized Apparel Patternmaking
CTE2778C
CTE2893C
Fashion Design Portfolio
MAN2024
SLS3355
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
BSC1001C
Fundamentals Biological Science
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CGS1160C
Computer Science
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
MGF1211
General College Mathematics
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PSY2012
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
SPC1608
or Principles of Public Speaking
WOH2012
WOH2022
or Modern and Post-Modern
Civilizations
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
One Program Elective Course
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
60
3
27
90
Page 86 of 183
FASHION MERCHANDISING
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Fashion Merchandising program is designed to provide a foundation of knowledge including
technical skills, fashion history and trends, current history practices, and applications. At the foundation level, students have
the opportunity to engage in both conceptual and applied coursework as well as hands-on technological applications. Strategic
planning in business, marketing, and merchandising are key elements of the program in which students have the opportunity to
practice higher-level skills of synthesis and evaluation by developing numerous business plan projects targeted to specific
clients and fashion areas as assigned by instructors. The program is designed for the students to take a more active role in
critiquing each other’s work to compare and discriminate between solutions to design problems. The program is designed to
allow student to become more attuned to project management through a number of merchandising and marketing courses as
well as the three-part Senior Project series to develop a fashion concept from initial concept to implementation-ready
projections and strategies. The program is designed to prepare graduates to seek entry-level positions including visual
merchandiser, assistant store manager, assistant buyer, and stylist. The length of the program is twelve [12] eleven [11]-week
quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Fashion Merchandising
program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ADV4804C
BUL3130
Business Law
CTE1400C
CTE1510
Fashion History
CTE1600
Trends & Concepts in Apparel
CTE1708C
CTE1760
CTE1841C
Apparel Evaluation & Production
CTE2765C
CTE2778C
CTE2810
Elements of Retail Operations
CTE2821C
Merchandise Mathematics
CTE2827C
Merchandise Buying
CTE2894C
Graphic Communication in Fashion
CTE3110C
Fashion Styling for Photography
CTE3464
Tariff, Trade, and Resourcing
CTE3533C
Fashion Research & Sourcing
CTE3786C
Product Data Management
CTE3850C
Fashion Show Production
CTE3865C
Strategic Merchandise Management
CTE4813
Fashion Entrepreneurship
CTE4933
Senior Merchandising Project-Planning
CTE4934C
Senior Merchandising Project-Development
CTE4935C
Senior Merchandising Project-Presentation
GRA3521C
MAN2024
MAN3143
Business Management - Leadership
MAR1010
MAR3414C
Design Sales
MAR3156
International Marketing
MAR3500
Consumer Behavior
MAR3939
Current Topics in Fashion Marketing
MAR4800
Brand Marketing & Strategy
MKA1041
Introduction to Retailing
MKA2100C
Visual Merchandising
MKA3101C
Store Planning
PUR3008
SLS3355
SLS4943
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CLP1006
CGS1160C
Computer Science
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
MGF1211
General College Mathematics
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PSY3025
Psychology of Color
SPC1608
SYG2000
PSY2010
WOH2012
Four General Education Elective Courses
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
117
9
54
180
Page 87 of 183
FASHION RETAILING
DIPLOMA
The Fashion Retailing Diploma program is designed to teach students how to use their combined creative and
business skills to display, market, and sell fashion merchandise. Graduates should be able to effectively understand
and meet the customer’s needs, and ultimately encourage sales. This can be accomplished by having a keen
awareness of the changing needs of the consumer, learning how to identify and predict new style trends, and by
being able to conceptualize and promote fashion displays and sales campaigns. Individuals in Fashion Retailing will
have the opportunity to learn how to evaluate apparel construction, identify appropriate characteristics and uses
of different textiles. They can also gain knowledge of consumer behavior, retail operations, visual merchandising,
the larger marketplace, and business skills.
The general objectives for the program are to:
1. Define retailing, to include “bricks-and-mortar,” “clicks-and-mortar,” direct marketers with clicksand-mortar retailing operations, and bricks-and-mortar retailers, relate them to the marketing
concept with an emphasis on the total retail experience.
2. Discuss why customer and channel relationships must be nurtured in today’s highly competitive
marketplace.
3. Explain the steps in strategic planning for retailers, to include: situation analysis, objectives, and
identification of consumers, overall strategy, specific activities, control and feedback.
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Fashion Retailing Diploma program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ADV4804C
CTE1400C
CTE1600
Trends & Concepts in Apparel
CTE1760
CTE1841C
Apparel Evaluation & Production
CTE2810
Elements of Retail Operations
MAN2024
MAN3143
Business Management – Leadership
MAR1010
MAR3414C
Design Sales
MAR3500
Consumer Behavior
MAR3939
Current Topics in Fashion Marketing
MAR4800
Brand Marketing & Strategy
MKA1041
Introduction to Retailing
MKA2100C
Visual Merchandising
PUR3008
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
48
48
Page 88 of 183
GAME ART & DESIGN
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Game Art & Design program offers students an opportunity to design and create their
own video and multimedia games. With studies in computer animation, architecture, and character building,
students have the opportunity to progress through a program that can result in one or more game prototypes
upon graduation. Graduates of the Game Art & Design program are prepared to seek entry-level opportunities
such as character animators, texture artists, modelers, character riggers, and level designers. The length of the
program is twelve [12] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Game Art & Design program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1201C
Design Basics
ART1300C
Drawing and Perspective
ART1331C
Drawing and Anatomy
ART2205C
Color Application
ART2330C
Life Drawing
ART2701C
Sculpting I: Foundations
COP2363C
Introduction to Programming with C++
CRW3713
Scriptwriting for Games
DIG1711C
Game Design & Game Play
DIG1717
Introduction to Game Development
DIG2363C
Character Modeling
DIG2790C
Texturing for Games
DIG2791C
Game Modeling
DIG3343C
Broadcast Graphics I: Animated Text & Logo
DIG3368C
3D Game Animation
DIG3371C
3D Character Rigging
DIG3372C
Modeling with Subdivision Surfaces
DIG3723C
3D Game Scripting
DIG3724C
Advanced 3D Game Scripting
DIG3792C
Texture/Lighting for Gaming
DIG3793C
Level Design
DIG3794C
Advanced Level Design
DIG3797C
Designing Interior Spaces and Worlds
DIG4383C
Advanced 3D Game Animation
DIG4566C
Interactive Game Prototyping
DIG4567C
Advanced Game Prototyping
DIG4568C
Game Project Planning
DIG4795C
Game Production I
DIG4796C
Game Production II
DIG4798C
Hard Surface & Organic Modeling
DIG4799C
Advanced Materials and Lighting
DIG4953C
Game Art Portfolio Preparation
DIG4955C
Game Art Portfolio Presentation
DIG4957C
Game Art Portfolio Development
GRA1106C
Graphics
GRA2854C
2D Animation I: Principles
GRA3521C
SLS4943
SLS3355
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
FIL2000
or Film Appreciation
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
LIT3326
ENC1145
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PHY2020
SPC1608
SYG2000
PSY2012
WOH2012
WOH2022
or Modern and Post Modern Civilizations
Four General Education Elective Courses
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
117
9
54
180
Page 89 of 183
GRAPHIC DESIGN
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Graphic Design program is designed to prepare students with competencies in the field
of graphic design. The program is designed to stress technical skills, reasoning, analytical, and problem-solving
abilities of the student. These skills prepare graduates to seek entry-level positions including production manager,
art director, creative director, or studio manager. Both traditional and computer-based techniques are integrated
into the curriculum. The length of the program is twelve [12] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Graphic Design program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1201C
ART3614C
CGS2800C
CGS3803C
GRA1103C
GRA1120C
GRA1190C
GRA1121C
GRA1852C
GRA1853C
GRA2109C
GRA2125C
GRA2171C
GRA2175C
GRA2177C
GRA2199C
GRA2195C
GRA2508C
GRA2584C
GRA2841C
GRA2858C
GRA3176C
GRA3202C
GRA3224C
GRA3816C
GRA3867C
GRA4139C
GRA4178C
GRA4591C
GRA4951C
GRA4952C
GRA4953C
MAN4801
MAR3322C
PGY1103C
PGY2803C
SLS3355
SLS4943
Design Basics
Electronic Design
Basic Web Design
Intermediate Web Design
Layout
Concept Development
Computer Graphics
Typography
History of Graphic Design
Graphic Design Applications
Package Design
Promotional Design
Corporate Identification
Advertising Design
Color Systems for Graphic Design
Digital Media Production
Desktop Publishing
Collateral Design
Contemporary Typography
Print Production Techniques
Conceptual Thinking
Photography/Art Direction
Time-Based Design
Corporate Communications
Art Direction and Creative Process
Graphic Design Portfolio Preparation
Graphic Design Portfolio Presentation
Senior Project
Entrepreneurship
Campaign Advertising
Digital Imaging
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
ARH2050
Art History: Ancient to Medieval
ARH2051
or Art History: Renaissance to Present
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
SPC1608
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
LIT3326
ENC1145
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PSY2012
SYA3330
SYG2000
SYP3322
WOH2012
WOH2022
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
114
12
54
180
Page 90 of 183
GRAPHIC DESIGN
The Associate of Science in Graphic Design program is designed to prepare the student to seek an entry-level
position in the ever changing and diverse field of advertising, publishing, and communications through technical
and aesthetic skills. Students have the opportunity to develop these skills through hands-on experience with
illustration, graphic design, computer graphics, desktop publishing, designing with type, production, and
photography. The Associate of Science in Graphic Design program prepares students to seek entry-level positions
such as assistant designer, graphic designer, production artist, and layout artist. The length of the program is six [6]
eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Science in Graphic Design program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1201C
Design Basics
CGS2800C
Basic Web Design
GRA1103C
GRA1120C
Layout
GRA1121C
GRA1190C
Concept Development
GRA1852C
Computer Graphics
GRA1853C
Typography
GRA2125C
Graphic Design Applications
GRA2171C
Package Design
GRA2175C
Promotional Design
GRA2177C
Corporate Identification
GRA2199C
GRA2508C
Color Systems for Graphic Design
GRA2841C
GRA2584C
GRA2858C
Desktop Publishing
GRA2950C
Graphic Design Portfolio/ Professional
Development
PGY1103C
PGY2803C
Digital Imaging
ARH2050
Art History: Ancient to Medieval
ARH2051
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
SPC1608
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
SYG2000
PSY2012
SYP3322
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
One Program Elective Course
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
60
3
27
90
Page 91 of 183
ILLUSTRATION
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
No longer accepting new enrollments.
The Bachelor of Science in Illustration program is designed to produce graduates who can develop and produce images for
visual communications. Graduates can apply skills from communication design and the fine arts to develop the creative vision
necessary to seek entry-level employment in the field. Students have the opportunity to learn to integrate communications,
goals, and visual messages as part of a creative team. The program is designed to prepare students with the necessary skills to
seek entry-level positions including concept artist, storyboard artist, graphic novelist, 2D artist, book illustrator, specialty
illustrator, and art director by providing an opportunity to learn; foundation in drawing, painting, and illustration techniques for
both traditional and emerging data, as well as working knowledge of graphic design production. The length of the program is
twelve [12] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Illustration program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ARH2726C
ART1201C
ART1300C
ART1331C
ART2203C
ART2205C
ART2251C
ART2330C
ART2500C
ART3161C
ART3270C
ART3271C
ART3272C
ART3273C
ART3339C
ART3384C
ART3504C
ART3560C
ART4255C
ART4274C
ART4505C
DIG4954C
ART4954C
ART4955C
DIG3139C
GRA1190C
GRA1120C
GRA1121C
GRA1762C
GRA1852C
GRA1853C
GRA2199C
GRA2412
GRA2841C
GRA3521C
MAN4801
PGY1401C
PGY2803C
SLS3355
SLS4943
History of Illustration
Design Basics
Drawing and Anatomy
Design Basics 3D
Color Application
Illustration
Life Drawing
Fundamentals of Painting
Experimental Media
Specialty Illustration
Sequential Illustration
Conceptual Editorial Illustration
Product Display Illustration
Drawing the Clothed Model
Animal Drawing
Intermediate Painting
Figure Painting
Traditional Illustration Studio
Advanced Digital Illustration
Advanced Painting
Illustration Digital Portfolio
Illustration Portfolio Preparation
Illustration Portfolio Presentation
Electronic Illustration
Concept Development
Layout
Maps/Mattes/Masks
Computer Graphics
Typography
Signs, Symbols, & Cyphers
Media Law
or Creative Web Development
Entrepreneurship
Digital Imaging
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
ARH2050
Art History - Ancient to Medieval
ARH2051
Art History - Renaissance to Present
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
LIT3326
ENC1145
FIL2000
Film Appreciation
THE2000
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PSY2012
SYG2000
WOH2012
WOH2022
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
117
9
54
180
Page 92 of 183
INDUSTRIAL DESIGN
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Industrial Design program is designed to offer technical knowledge and application, and
to enhance professional skills. The curriculum is designed to emphasize process rather than style, thus allowing the
individual design process to evolve and emerge in conjunction with creativity, technical information, historic and
current ideological influences, and production and communication skills, which are all working components of the
industrial design process. The Industrial Design program prepares graduates to seek entry-level positions in many
areas, including consultant designer, product designer, furniture designer, automotive designer, and toy designer.
The length of the program is twelve [12] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Industrial Design program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1331C
Drawing and Anatomy
ETD1106C
Mechanical Drawing
ETD2320C
Computer Aided Drafting
ETD2343C
Computer Aided Modeling
IDD1031C
Drawing and Rendering
IDD1032C
Industrial Rendering
IDD1033C
Advanced Industrial Rendering
IDD1100C
Introduction to Industrial Design
IDD1101C
Product Design
IDD1130C
Exhibit Design
IDD1200C
Modelmaking
IDD1310C
Materials and Processes
IDD1400
History of Industrial Design
IDD1520C
Development of Form
IDD1600C
Human Factors in Design
IDD2220C
Model Shop
IDD3020C
Computer Aided Industrial Design
IDD3045C
Computer Design and Graphics
IDD3102C
Intermediate Product Design
IDD3103C
Advanced Product Design
IDD3140C
Environmental Design
IDD3151C
Packaging and Point of Purchase Design
IDD3300C
Structural Design
IDD3320C
Principles of Mechanical Engineering
IDD3601C
Anatomy Drawing for Industrial Design
IDD4022C
Advanced Computer Application
IDD4900C
Graduate Project Application
& Defense (6 credits)
IDD4905C
Graduate Project Research
and Programming (6 credits)
IDD4910C
Industrial Design Portfolio
IDD4950C
Industrial Design Portfolio Preparation
IND1020C
Design Fundamentals
IND1024C
Design Basics/Color
IND1403C
Drawing Types
SLS3355
SLS4943
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Five Program Elective Courses
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1041
COM1442
or Team Effectiveness
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
LIT3326
ENC1145
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PHY2020
SPC1608
SYG2000
PSY2012
WOH2012
WOH2022
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
111
15
54
180
Page 93 of 183
INSTRUCTIONAL TECHNOLOGY & DESIGN
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Program Description
The Bachelor of Science degree in Instructional Technology & Design program is a twelve-quarter, 180-credit
program designed to educate students in the creation of digital learning environments, merging digital design and
curriculum development. Students have the opportunity to design effective and innovative learning solutions and
environments intended to facilitate optimum learning opportunities for a range of audiences and purposes.
The Instructional Technology & Design degree program emphasizes hands-on learning and utilizes industry-related
technology and software. Topics covered in the Technology & Design degree program include learning theories,
instructional strategies, curriculum development, learning management systems, typography, interface design,
user experience design and web development.
The Instructional Technology & Design program is designed to prepare graduates to seek entry-level employment
in the creative development of learning and training resources. Initially, students have the opportunity to develop
an understanding of the elements of learning theory and its practical application, instructional design, curriculum
development, learning management system design and emerging technology. Students are trained in creative
problem solving and have the opportunity to learn to offer solutions that are effective in the instructional design
field applicable on various mediums. Throughout the program students can gain an understanding of the analysis,
design, development, implementation, and evaluation of training and instructional materials.
With an Instructional Technology & Design degree, graduates are prepared to pursue entry-level jobs such
Instructional Technologist and Instructional Designer.
Program Mission
The mission of the Instructional Technology & Design degree program is to provide a focus on the design and
creation of effective learning delivery systems while developing skills in curriculum development and web
development. The Instructional Technology & Design program is designed to prepare graduates to meet the
challenges of the continually changing marketplace and profession.
Program Objectives
The Bachelor of Science degree in Instructional Technology & Design program is designed to give students the
opportunity to:
1. Learn to utilize existing and emerging learning technologies to creative technology-based learning
environments
2. Gain an understanding of User Experience Design (UXD) and how it applies to online educational formats
3. Possess an advanced understanding of elements of learning theory and its practical application
4. Know how to develop and implement instructional strategies intended to meet the educational needs of
specific audiences
5. Learn advanced competencies for the integration of various multimedia components and materials into
online instructional frameworks
6. Learn essential skills in the development of course and program curricula
SEQUENCE
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Instructional Technology
& Design program.
Page 94 of 183
PROGRAM COURSES
DFVA208
Media Business Practices
FND105
Design Fundamentals
FND135
Image Manipulation
FND150
Digital Color Theory
GADA302
Mobile & Social Game Design
GWDA101
Applications & Industry
GWDA111
Introduction to Layout Design
GWDA112
Typography- Traditional
GWDA122
Typography- Hierarchy
GWDA132
Information Architecture
GWDA133
GWDA202
Interface Design
GWDA204
Introduction to Writing for Interactive
Media
GWDA243
Object-Oriented Scripting
GWDA273
GWDA303
Interactive Motion Graphics
GWDA353
Server-Side Scripting
INSA103
Instructional Technology Integration
INSA105
Psychology of Learning
INSA115
Learning Theories & Strategies
INSA125
Foundations of Instructional Design
INSA202
Curriculum Design
INSA205
Developing Instructional Materials I
INSA207
Evaluation, Assessment & Analysis of
Learning
INSA212
Advanced Instructional Design
INSA215
Developing Instructional Materials II
INSA217
Interaction Management
INSA302
User Experience Design
INSA303
INSA305
Foundations of Game-Based Learning
INSA307
Introduction to Research Methods
INSA313
Learning Management Systems
INSA317
Project
Management
INSA327
Capstone I
INSA402
Capstone II
INSA412
Special Topics in Instructional
Technology & Design
INSA409
Portfolio
INSA406 OR
Internship
Elective
OR
Program Elective
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
BSC1001
Fundamentals of Biological Science OR
EVS2001
Environmental Science OR
HUN2204
Nutrition OR
ISC1004
Fundamentals of Physical Science OR
OCB1010
Marine Biology OR
OCE2001
Oceanography OR
PHY2020
Foundations of Physics OR
MET1001
Weather and Climate
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
Psychology for Personal Effectiveness
COM1041
Interpersonal Communications OR
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
ENC1102
Introduction to Literature OR
LIT1020
The Short Story OR
LIT3132
Arthurian Literature OR
LIT3326
Fairytales and Archetypes OR
LIT2100
Survey of World Literature OR
LIT2190
Survey of Caribbean Literature OR
CRW2000
Introduction to Creative Writing OR
CRW2100
Introduction to Fiction Writing OR
CRW3310
Creative Writing: Poetry
MGF1211
PHI3800
SPC1608
SYG2000
Introduction to Sociology OR
PSY2012
WOH2012
Ancient and Medieval Civilizations OR
WOH202
Modern and Post-Modern Civilizations
Four General Education Electives
Program Elective Courses
ART4274C
Advanced Digital Illustration
DIG2201C
Desktop Video
GRA1190C
Concept Development
GRA2412
Media Law
GRA3154C
Advanced Digital Imagery
MAN4801
Entrepreneurship
MAR1010
PGY1103C
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
114
12
54
180
Page 95 of 183
INTERIOR DESIGN
The Associate of Science in Interior Design program offers a curriculum of 90 quarter credit hours, 27 of which are
dedicated to general education. The Associate of Science in Interior Design program is designed to produce
practitioners with the competences needed to perform in residential and commercial projects with coursework
and studio projects in design process, space planning, human factors, preparing scale drawings, computer-aided
designs, renderings, project presentations, and professional practices. Graduates are able to solve problems,
communicate effectively, and to contribute to the creative team. Graduates are prepared to seek entry-level
positions such as assistant designer, project manager, manual or digital draftsperson/ renderer, among other
positions. Graduates are eligible to meet the educational requirements for state licensure as Registered Interior
Designer by the Florida Board of Architecture and Interior Design. The University does not guarantee third-party
certification/licensure. Outside agencies control the requirements for certifications and licensure and are subject
to change without notice to the University. The length of the associate’s degree program is six [6], eleven [11]week quarters.
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Science in Interior Design program.
PROGRAM COURSES
FND105
Design Fundamentals
FND110
Observational Drawing
FND120
Perspective Drawing
FND150
INTA101
Architectural Drafting
INTA102
Introduction to Interior Design
INTA103
CAD I
INTA105
Sketching & Ideation
INTA107
History of Architecture, Interiors &
Furniture I
INTA111
Space Planning
INTA112
Design Basics 3D
INTA122
Textiles
INTA201
Materials & Specifications
INTA202
Presentation Techniques
INTA203
CAD II
INTA211
Codes & Regulations
INTA212
Residential Design I
INTA242
Commercial Design I
INTA262
Construction Documents I
INTA306
Professional Practice
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
MGF1211
General College Math or
MAD1104
Discrete Math or
MAC1105
College Algebra
SPC1608
WOH2012
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
60
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
3
Credits Required
27
TOTAL CREDITS REQUIRED FOR GRADUATION: 90
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
One Program Elective or SLS2943 Internship-Associates
PROGRAM ELECTIVE (Choose one)
GRA1103C
IND3104
Survey of Architecture
MAN4801
Entrepreneurship
PGY1103C
PGY2803C
Digital Imaging
Page 96 of 183
INTERIOR DESIGN
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Interior Design program is designed for students who wish to enhance their interior design skills. The
program offers technical knowledge and application. Graduates are eligible to meet the educational requirements of the Board of
Architecture and Interior Design, Department of Professional Regulations, State of Florida. The University does not guarantee thirdparty certification/licensure. Outside agencies control the requirements for certifications and licensure and are subject to change
without notice to the University. The curriculum is designed to emphasize the design process rather than style and to encourage the
individual design process to evolve and emerge in conjunction with creativity, technical information, historical and current ideological
influences, and production and communication skills, all working components of the design process. Interior Design graduates are
prepared to seek entry-level opportunities as residential planners, design consultants, junior designers, and project managers, among
others. The length of the Bachelor of Science degree program is twelve [12] eleven [11]-week quarters.
The Interior Design program leading to the Bachelor of Science degree is accredited by the Council for Interior Design
Accreditation, www.accredit-id.org, 206 Grandville Avenue, Suite 350, Grand Rapids, MI 49503.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Interior Design program.
PROGRAM COURSES
FND105
Design Fundamentals
FND110
Observational Drawing
FND120
Perspective Drawing
FND150
INTA101
Architectural Drafting
INTA102
Introduction to Interior Design
INTA103
CAD I
INTA105
Sketching & Ideation
History of Architecture, Interiors & Furniture I
INTA107
INTA111
Space Planning
INTA112
Design Basics 3D
INTA122
Textiles
INTA201
Materials & Specifications
INTA202
Presentation Techniques
INTA203
CAD II
History of Architecture, Interiors &Furniture II
INTA207
INTA211
Codes & Regulations
INTA212
Residential Design I
INTA222
Human Factors
INTA232
Lighting Design
INTA242
Commercial Design I
INTA252
Interior Detailing
INTA262
Construction Documents I
INTA302
Residential Design II
INTA303
Digital Modeling I
INTA306
Professional Practice
INTA312
Global Design
INTA313
Digital Modeling II
INTA322
Building & Mechanical Systems
INTA332
Environmental & Sustainable Design
INTA342
Commercial Design II
INTA352
Hospitality Design
INTA402
Senior Studio I
INTA406
Internship
INTA409
Portfolio
INTA412
Institutional Design
INTA422
Senior Studio II
INTA432
Construction Documents II
PROGRAM ELECTIVE (Choose 4)
GRA1103C
IND3104
Survey of Architecture
MAN4801
PGY1103C
PGY2803C
Entrepreneurship
Digital Imaging
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
BSC1001
Fundamentals of Biological Science or
OCE2001
Oceanography or
ISC1004
Fundamentals of Physical
Science or
MET1001
Weather and Climate or
OCB1010
Marine Biology or
PHY2020
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
LIT1020
The Short Story or
ENC1102 Introduction to Literature or
LIT3132 Arthurian Literature or
LIT3326 Fairytales and Archetypes
MGF1211
General College Math or
MAD1104
Discreet Math or
MAC1105
College Algebra
PHI3800
SPC1608
SYG2000
Introduction to Sociology or
PSY2012
WOH2012
Ancient and Medieval Civilizations or
WOH2022
Modern and Post-Modern
Civilizations
There are Three General Education Elective Courses
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
114
12
54
180
Page 97 of 183
MARKETING & ENTERTAINMENT MANAGEMENT
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Program Description
The Bachelor of Science degree in Marketing & Entertainment Management program is a twelve-quarter, 180-credit,
program designed to provide students interested in entry-level employment in the entertainment industry with the
opportunity to learn about the management of entertainment professionals, projects, and personnel as well as key skills
in messaging, branding, and marketing of events and individuals. The program also incorporates key business
management competencies
The Marketing & Entertainment Management degree program emphasizes hands-on learning and utilizes industryrelated technology and software. Topics covered in the Marketing & Entertainment Management degree program
include business communications and practices, marketing and public relations, event management, copywriting,
networking and client management, online community management and brand strategy.
The Marketing & Entertainment Management program is designed to prepare graduates to seek entry-level employment
in the development of creative messaging, branding, and marketing solutions. Initially, students have the opportunity to
develop an understanding of fundamental business concepts and practices and begin to develop written and verbal
communication skills. Students can learn aspects of consumer outreach and engagement and learn how to market to and
target messages at specific audiences. Throughout the Marketing & Entertainment Management program students can
gain in-depth knowledge of industry-specific news, developments, trends, and key players and can also gain strong
knowledge of finances and logistics related to specific entertainment industries and events. Students also have the
opportunity to gain experience in working with and communicating effectively to the press and various media outlets.
With a Marketing & Entertainment Management degree, graduates are prepared to pursue entry-level jobs such as
Communications Specialist, Marketing and Promotions Manager, Marketing Director, Marketing Manager, Promotions
Director, and Project Manager.
Program Mission
The mission of Marketing & Entertainment Management degree program is to provide a focus on the development of
creative messaging, branding, and marketing of institutions, individuals and events. The Marketing & Entertainment
Management program is designed to prepare graduates to meet the challenges of the continually changing marketplace
and profession.
Program Objectives
The Bachelor of Science in Marketing & Entertainment Management program is designed to give students the
opportunity to:
1.
Gain a strong understanding of fundamental business concepts and practices and their application in a
variety of entertainment-related career options
2.
Learn to write press releases and prepare information for media distribution
3.
Become aware of legal issues relevant to the entertainment industry, including aspects of intellectual
property and copyright considerations
4.
Become proficient in aspects of consumer outreach and engagement, learning how to market to and target
messages at specific audiences
5.
Understand the delivery of effective communication in representation of an individual, event, or
organization
6.
Understand management techniques related to both for-profit and not-for-profit organizations
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Marketing & Entertainment
Management program.
Page 98 of 183
PROGRAM COURSES
ADVA101
Fundamentals of Advertising
ADVA201
ADVA204
Consumer Behavior & Persuasive Sales
Techniques
ADVA208
Principles of Marketing Research
ADVA214
ADVA303
Interactive Advertising
ADVA307
Brand Strategy
ADVA322
ADVA328
Public Relations
ADVA402
Online Community Management
DFVA208
Media Business Practices
FADA308
Fundamentals of Business
GWDA101
MRKA101
Survey of Marketing & Entertainment
Management
MRKA104
Business Communications
MRKA111
Office Systems
MRKA121
Networking & Client Management
MRKA141
Entertainment Business Accounting
MRKA203
Project Management
MRKA204
Scriptwriting for Event Management
MRKA205
Marketing & Promotions in the
Entertainment Industry
MRKA213
Preproduction
MRKA214
Public Relations Writing
MRKA223
Producing & Production
MRKA233
Artist Management
MRKA305
Business for the Entrepreneur I
MRKA306
Event Management I: Music & Theater
MRKA315
Business for the Entrepreneur II
MRKA316
Event Management II: Television & Film
MRKA326
Event Management III: Conferences
MRKA336
Internship or
MRKA346
Marketing & Entertainment
Workshop
MRKA406
Senior Project
MRKA408
Advanced Promotions
MRKA409
Portfolio I
MRKA418
Media Business Practices II
MRKA419
Portfolio II
PHOA101
Principles of Photography
PHOA222
Web Design for Non-Majors
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
BSC1001
EVS2001
HUN2204
Nutrition OR
ISC1004
OCB1010
Marine Biology OR
OCE2001
Oceanography OR
PHY2020
MET1001
Weather and Climate
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1041
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
ENC1102
LIT1020
The Short Story OR
LIT3132
LIT3326
LIT2100
LIT2190
CRW2000
CRW2100
CRW3310
MGF1211
PHI3800
SPC1608
SYG2000
PSY2012
WOH2012
WOH202
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
TOTAL CREDITS REQUIRED FOR
GRADUATION
114
12
54
180
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Page 99 of 183
PHOTOGRAPHY
The Associate of Science in Photography program is designed to prepare graduates to seek entry-level positions in
the photographic and imaging industries. This is accomplished through a contemporary curriculum that involves
hands-on utilization of equipment and materials and is built on communications theory and the fundamentals of
visual design. The Associate of Science in Photography program prepares graduates to seek entry-level positions
such as photographer’s assistant, imaging technician, studio manager, and consumer, editorial, corporate, or
advertising photographer. The length of the program is six (6) eleven (11)-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Science in Photography program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1211C
Electronic Color Application
GRA2412
Media Law
PGY1050
Survey of Photography
PGY1150C
Large Format Photography
PGY1201C
Lighting
PGY1800C
Principles of Photography with Digital
Technology
PGY1801C
Introduction to Electronic Imaging
Applications
PGY1806C
Photographic Design
PGY1811C
Color Management and Applications
PGY2202C
Advanced Lighting
PGY2210C
Portraiture
PGY2221C
Advertising Photography
SLS2943
or Internship - Associates
PGY2224C
Location Photography
PGY2232C
Consumer Photography
SLS2943
PGY2273
The Business of Photography
PGY2274
Advanced Business of Photography
PGY2470C
Photography Portfolio Preparation
PGY2600C
Photojournalism
PGY2650C
Editorial Photography
SLS2943
PGY2802C
Intermediate Electronic Imaging Applications
PGY2830C
Printing
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
THE2000
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CGS1160
Computer Science
CLP1006
Psychology of Personal Effectivness
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
SPC1608
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
Credits Required
63
27
90
Page 100 of 183
PHOTOGRAPHY
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Photography program is designed to provide graduates the education and practical
experience needed to be marketable in an industry that demands increasingly varied skills and knowledge. The
curriculum reflects the continued impact of technology on photography and imaging, and is designed to prepare
graduates to seek entry-level industry positions, including photographer’s assistant, imaging technician, studio
manager, and consumer, editorial, corporate, or advertising photographer. The program is designed to provide
graduates with strong technical skills and knowledge while enabling them to develop sophisticated visions
representative of their unique imaging styles. The length of the program is twelve (12) eleven (11)-week quarters.
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Photography program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1211C
GRA1120C
GRA1121C
GRA2412
GRA3521C
PGY1050
PGY1150C
PGY1201C
PGY1800C
PGY1801C
PGY1806C
PGY1811C
PGY2202C
PGY2210C
PGY2221C
PGY2224C
PGY2232C
PGY2273
PGY2274
PGY2470C
PGY2600C
PGY2650C
PGY2802C
PGY2830C
PGY3006
PGY3205C
PGY3234C
PGY3275
PGY3278C
PGY3823C
PGY4104
PGY4277C
PGY4476C
PGY4477C
PGY4484C
PGY4821C
PGY4953C
RTV1241C
SLS3355
SLS4943
Layout
Media Law
Survey of Photography
Large Format Photography
Lighting
Principles of Photography with Digital
Technology
Introduction to Electronic Imaging Applications
Photographic Design
Color Management and Application
Advanced Lighting
Portraiture
Advertising Photography
Location Photography
Conmsumer Photography
The Business of Photography
Advanced Business of Photography
Photography Portfolio Preparation
Photojournalism
Editorial Photography
Intermediate Electronic Imaging Applications
Printing
History of Photography
Lighting Applications
Fashion Photography
Assisting for Photographers
Image Management and Presentation
Advanced Electronic Imaging Applications
Creative Concepts
Business Operations and Management
Photography Portfolio Refinement
Art Directed Photography
Exhibition Printing
Special Effects and Imaging Techniques
Photography Portfolio Presentation
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Two Program Elective Courses
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
THE2000
ARH2050
Art History: Ancient to Medeival
ARH2051
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
ECO2013
ECO2023
or Principles of Microeconomics
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
LIT3326
ENC1145
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PSY2012
SYG2000
PSY3025
Psychology of Color
SPC1608
SYO3370
Working in America
SYP3322
WOH2012
WOH2022
or Modern and Post Modern Civilizations
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
120
6
54
180
Page 101 of 183
PROFESSIONAL WRITING FOR CREATIVE ARTS
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Program Description
The Bachelor of Science degree in Professional Writing for Creative Arts program is a twelve-quarter, 180-credit,
program designed to cultivate in students the necessary skills and competencies for; writing engaging and
captivating content and narratives, ably identifying target audiences and the specific message requirements
needed to reach these audiences, and writing and creating messages in a way that captures the audience.
The Professional Writing for Creative Arts degree program emphasizes the development of content for
advertisements, books, magazines, websites, performing arts scripts, and other publications. Topics covered in the
Professional Writing for Creative Arts degree program include business writing, technical writing, marketing and
corporate communications, quantitative and qualitative research methods, copyediting, scriptwriting and social
media management.
The Professional Writing for Creative Arts program is designed to prepare graduates for entry-level employment in
writing creativity. Initially, students have the opportunity to develop advanced competencies in English
composition and learn the fundamentals of narrative and storytelling structure and technique. The program is
designed to train students in the application of writing in various industries to meet specific needs and purposes of
those industries. Students will have the opportunity to focus on writing, editing, and critiquing content for specific
purposes, and learn to write creatively in different styles and techniques to achieve different results, emotions,
audience relations, etc.
With a Professional Writing for Creative Arts degree, graduates are prepared to pursue entry-level jobs such as
Advertising Copy Writer, Advertising Writer, Communications Specialist, Copy Writer, Freelance Copy Writer,
Narrative Writer, Technical Communicator, Technical Writer, and Web Content Writer.
Program Mission
The mission of the Professional Writing for Creative Arts degree program is to provide a focus on the development,
strategy, marketing and curation of content and to enable students to successfully write narrative or informative
content for multiple media platforms and purposes.. The Professional Writing for Creative Arts program is
designed to prepare graduates to meet the challenges of the continually changing marketplace and profession.
Program Objectives
The Bachelor of Science degree in Professional Writing for Creative Arts program is designed to give students the
opportunity to:
1.
Gain advanced competencies in English composition
2.
Learn the fundamentals of narrative and storytelling structure and technique
3.
Understand the application of writing in various industries to meet specific needs and purposes
4.
Learn research techniques required to obtain information relevant to their topic
5.
Write, edit, and critique content for specific purposes
6.
Learn to write creatively in different styles and techniques to achieve different results, emotions,
audience relations, etc.
7.
Successfully write narrative or informative content for multiple media platforms and purposes
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Professional Writing for
Creative Arts program.
Page 102 of 183
PROGRAM COURSES
ADVA201
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
ADVA214
BSC1001
ADVA215
Advertising Storyboarding & Scriptwriting
EVS2001
ADVA328
Public Relations
HUN2204
Nutrition OR
DFVA201
Fundamentals of Scriptwriting
ISC1004
DFVA214
Scriptwriting
OCB1010
Marine Biology OR
GWDA101
OCE2001
Oceanography OR
GWDA132
Information Architecture
PHY2020
GWDA133
MET1001
Weather and Climate
GWDA204
Introduction to Writing for Interactive
CGS1160C
Computer Science
Media
CLP1006
INSA307
Introduction to Research Methods
COM1041
PRWA101
Principles of Rhetoric
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
PRWA102
Journalism (4 Credits)
ECO2013
PRWA103
Foundations of Professional Writing
ENC1101
English Composition
PRWA104
Marketing Communications
ENC1145
PRWA107
Myth & Symbol (4 Credits)
ENC1102
PRWA111
Introduction to Literary Studies (4 Credits)
LIT1020
The Short Story OR
PRWA121
Creative Writing (4 Credits)
LIT3132
PRWA202
The Language of Business
LIT3326
PRWA203
Introduction to Copyediting
LIT2100
PRWA212
Story Writing (4 Credits)
LIT2190
PRWA213
Content Management for Web Media
CRW2100
PRWA222
Lifestyle Writing
CRW3310
PRWA302
The Editorial Process
MGF1211
PRWA303
The Publication Process
PHI3800
PRWA304
Communication in the Global Marketplace SPC1608
PRWA305
Senior Thesis: Concept & Development
SYG2000
PRWA307
Ethics in Professional Writing
PSY2012
PRWA312
Creative Nonfiction Writing (4 Credits)
WOH2012
PRWA322
Grant & Proposal Writing
WOH202
PRWA402
Writing for Health, Science & Technology
PRWA403
Senior Thesis: Content Creation
PRWA408
The Writers Marketplace
PRWA409
Portfolio
PRWA413
Senior Thesis: Revision & Defense
PRWA406
Internship OR
PROGRAM COURSES
Program Elective
Credits Required
114
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
12
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
GENERAL
EDUCATION
COURSES
Credits Required
54
GRADUATION
180
Page 103 of 183
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT FOR CREATIVE TECHNOLOGIES
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Program Description
The Bachelor of Science degree in Software Development for Creative Technologies program is a twelve-quarter, 180credit, program designed to educate students in skills necessary to create, modify, and test programming codes and
scripts utilized in the functional operation of computer systems and applications as well as the implementation of these
codes in the design and development of various software solutions. Specific emphasis will be applied to programming
and development skills for creative media, technologies, and software.
The Software Development for Creative Technologies degree program emphasizes hands-on learning and utilizes
industry-related technology and software. Topics covered in the Software Development for Creative Technologies degree
program include software design, user interface design, mobile device programming, computer networking, artificial
intelligence, design patterns and data structures, e-commerce and operating and file systems.
The Software Development for Creative Technologies program is designed to prepare graduates to seek entry-level
employment in the creative development of unique software and programming solutions. Initially, students have the
opportunity to develop an understanding of numerous programming languages and their uses. Students can learn to
apply programming and development abilities to various multimedia projects and learn about the uses of various
software solutions for different creative industry goals. Throughout the Software Development for Creative Technologies
program students can gain an understanding of the of the scope of the software development process, including
planning, design and development, programming and testing, and maintenance and develop strong knowledge of math
and physics skills required to program code and algorithms for multimedia and digital design programming.
With a Software Development for Creative Technologies degree, graduates are prepared to pursue entry-level jobs such
as an Applications Developer, Computer Programmer, Java Developer, Programmer, Software Developer, Web
Programmer, and Web Developer.
Program Mission
The mission of the Software Development for Creative Technologies degree program is to provide a focus on the
development of unique software and programming solutions utilizing creative thinking skills. The Software Development
for Creative Technologies program is designed to prepare graduates to meet the challenges of the continually changing
marketplace and profession.
Program Objectives
The Bachelor of Science degree in Software Development for Creative Technologies program is designed to give students
the opportunity to:
1.
Learn the use of one or more common programming languages (C++, C#, Java, etc.)
2.
Gain an understanding of numerous additional programming languages (Python, PHP, SQL, etc.) and
their uses
3.
Learn to apply programming and development abilities to various multimedia projects
4.
Understand the software development process, including planning, design and development,
programming and testing, and maintenance
5.
Learn about the uses of various software solutions for different creative industry goals and to
understand how to implement them appropriately
6.
Develop knowledge of math and physics skills required to program code and algorithms required for
multimedia and digital design programming
7.
Learn to utilize creative thinking skills in development of unique software and programming solutions
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Software Development
for Creative Technologies program.
Page 104 of 183
PROGRAM COURSES
GWDA123
Programming Logic
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
GWDA133
BSC1001
GWDA243
Object-Oriented Scripting
EVS2001
GWDA273
HUN2204
Nutrition OR
GWDA283
Advanced Web Design
ISC1004
MAAA213
3D Modeling
OCB1010
Marine Biology OR
MAAA232
3D Animation
OCE2001
Oceanography OR
SDVA101
Survey of Software Development
PHY2020
SDVA102
Design for Programmers
MET1001
Weather and Climate
SDVA103
C++ Programming I
CGS1160C
Computer Science
SDVA202
Software Design & User Interface I
CLP1006
SDVA203
C++ Programming II
COM1041
SDVA212
Software Design & User Interface II
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
SDVA213
C++ Programming III
ECO2013
SDVA223
Databases I
ENC1101
English Composition
SDVA233
Databases II
ENC1145
SDVA243
Secondary Languages I
ENC1102
SDVA303
Team Management & Software Lifecycle
LIT1020
The Short Story OR
SDVA306
Team Production I
LIT3132
SDVA313
Mobile Device Programming I
LIT3326
SDVA316
Team Production II
LIT2100
SDVA323
Computer Networking I
LIT2190
SDVA333
Secondary Languages II
CRW2000
SDVA343
Mobile Device Programming II
CRW2100
SDVA353
Computer Networking II
CRW3310
SDVA363
E-Commerce
MGF1211
SDVA373
Software Instrumentation & Analysis
PHI3800
SDVA383
Alternative Languages I
SPC1608
SDVA393
Operating Systems & File Systems Programming
SYG2000
SDVA403
Game Engine Scripting
PSY2012
SDVA409
Portfolio I
WOH2012
SDVA413
Alternative Languages II
WOH202
SDVA419
Portfolio II
SDVA423
Artificial Intelligence
VGPA107
Discrete Mathematics
VGPA117
Geometry for Computer Graphics
VGPA203
Design Patterns & Data Structures
VGPA207
Continuous Mathematics for Applications PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
114
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
12
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
54
GRADUATION
180
Page 105 of 183
VIDEO PRODUCTION
The Associate of Science in Video Production program is designed to prepare graduates to seek entry-level
positions in the field of video production, including production assistant, editor, camera operator/videographer,
video tape operator, and audio/visual technician. Students have the opportunity to develop the skills and
competencies necessary for studio and location production, lighting, editing, camera operations, and electronic
news gathering. Students also have the opportunity to learn to develop the critical-thinking and problem-solving
skills needed to be a part of a creative production team. The length of the program is six [6] eleven [11]-week
quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Science in Video Production program.
PROGRAM COURSES
FIL1552C
FIL2553C
Nonlinear Editing
FIL2950C
Video Production Portfolio Preparation
FIL2970C
Video Production Portfolio
FIL4600
Media Business
PGY1892C
Digital Graphic Production
RTV1100
Scriptwriting
RTV1213C
Introduction to Audio Recording
RTV1224C
RTV1241C
RTV2205C
Broadcast Media Production
RTV2214C
Digital Audio Production
RTV2245C
Videography
RTV2248C
Television Studio Production
RTV2250C
Post Production
RTV3203C
Video Producing and Directing
RTV3262C
Advanced Camera & Lighting
SLS3355
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
PHY2020
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
COM1041
SPC1608
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
FIL2000
Film Appreciation
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Two Program Elective Courses and
Program Elective or SLS2943 Internship - Associate
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
54
9
27
90
Page 106 of 183
VISUAL EFFECTS & MOTION GRAPHICS
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Visual Effects & Motion Graphics program is designed to prepare graduates with the
technological and design foundations to develop a digital portfolio with which to seek entry-level positions in fields
such as visual effects, compositing, motion graphics, digital display, commercials, and corporate communication.
These roles support the demands of television, film, the internet, and other media outlets that rely on animated
graphic design and seamlessly composited digital video. The program is designed to provide students with
aesthetic and design awareness, technical knowledge and skills, and lifelong learning strategies that assist them in
seeking entry-level employment. The length of the program is twelve [12] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Visual Effects & Motion
Graphics program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1201C
ART1211C
ART1300C
ART2623C
ART2624C
ART2626C
DIG1021
DIG2340C
DIG3114C
DIG3307C
DIG3343C
DIG3344C
DIG3345C
DIG3346C
DIG3356C
DIG3392C
DIG3394C
DIG3542C
DIG4951C
DIG4952C
DIG4958C
FIL1104C
FIL1552C
FIL2553C
GRA1762C
GRA1852C
GRA1853C
GRA2199C
GRA2412
GRA3521C
MAN4801
PGY1401C
PGY2803C
RTV1100
RTV1224C
RTV1241C
RTV4227C
SLS3355
SLS4943
Design Basics
Introduction to 3D Modeling
Modeling and Animation
Motion/Lighting/Texture Mapping
Introduction to Visual Effects and Motion
Graphics
Painting and Rotoscoping
Broadcast Graphics II: Compositing
VFX Fundamentals
Broadcast Graphics I: Animated Text & Logo
Design
Keying and Color Correcting
CGI and Compositing
Motion Tracking
Matte Painting
Three-Dimensional Effects
Motion Graphics: Advanced Compositing
Animatics & Previsualization
Visual Effects Portfolio Preparation
Visual Effects Portfolio Development
Visual Effects Portfolio Presentation
Scripting/Storyboarding
Nonlinear Editing
Maps, Mattes, Masks
Computer Graphics
Typography
Signs, Symbols, & Cyphers
Media Law
Entrepreneurship
Digital Imaging
Scriptwriting
Team Media Production
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
ARH2000
Art Appreciation
THE2000
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
CGS1160C
Computer Science
CLP1006
COM1041
COM1442
or Team Effectiveness
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
LIT3326
ENC1145
FIL2000
Film Appreciation
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PHI3800
PHY2020
PSY2012
SYG2000
SPC1608
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
117
9
54
180
Page 107 of 183
WEB DESIGN & INTERACTIVE MEDIA
The Associate of Science in Web Design & Interactive Media program is designed to prepare graduates to seek
entry-level positions in many diverse areas such as multimedia scriptwriter, multimedia production assistant, web
designer, and web programmer. The program is designed to give students a solid foundation in design skills, with
an emphasis on interactive and PC screen design. Graduates are also prepared to use the tools necessary to create
interactive content that plays on disk or on a web browser. An introduction to scripting and programming skills
related to content development is covered. The length of the program is six [6] eleven [11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Associate of Science in Web Design & Interactive
Media program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1201C
Design Basics
CGS2800C
Basic Web Design
CGS3803C
CGS3875C
COP1845C
Introduction to Scripting and Programming
Languages
DIG1135C
Design Concepts for Interactive Media
DIG1561
Project Management
DIG2201C
Desktop Video
DIG2250C
Audio for Interactive Design
DIG2590C
Digital Media/Interactive Portfolio
DIG3103C
Interface Design
GRA1852C
Computer Graphics
GRA1853C
Typography
GRA2130C
Introduction to User Centered Design
GRA2412
Media Law
MAR2720
Web Marketing
PGY2803C
Digital Imaging
RTV2107C
SLS3355
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Two Program Elective Course
ARH2050
ARH2051
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
PHY2020
or Foundation of Physics
CLP1006
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1145
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Math
PSY2012
SYG2000
SYP3322
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
57
6
27
90
Page 108 of 183
WEB DESIGN & INTERACTIVE MEDIA
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The Bachelor of Science in Web Design & Interactive Media program is designed to prepare graduates to seek
entry-level positions such as multimedia producer, multimedia programmer, multimedia scriptwriter, computerbased training designer, web designer, and web programmer. The program is designed to give students a solid
foundation in design skills with an emphasis on interactive and PC screen design. Graduates are also prepared to
use the tools necessary to create interactive content that plays on disk or web browser. Scripting and
programming skills related to content development are utilized. The length of the program is twelve [12] eleven
[11]-week quarters.
salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Bachelor of Science in Web Design & Interactive
Media program.
PROGRAM COURSES
ART1201C
Design Basics
CAP4970C
Senior Project - Research and
Programming
CAP4971C
Senior Project - Application and Defense
CAP4972C
Digital Media/Interactive Digital Portfolio
CGS2540C
Database Concepts
CGS2800C
Basic Web Design
CGS3803C
CGS3875C
COP1845C
Introduction to Scripting
and Programming Languages
COP3846C
Introduction to Dynamic Scripting
COP4111C
Intermediate Web Scripting
COP4813C
Advanced Web Scripting
DIG1135C
DIG1561
Project Management
DIG2201C
Desktop Video
DIG2250C
DIG3103C
Interface Design
DIG4123C
Designing for Dynamic Sites
DIG4144C
Net Broadcasting
DIG4315C
Interactive Action Scripting
DIG4591C
Multimedia Production and Design Group
DIG4593C
Advanced Web Design
DIG4594C
Application Quality and Assurance
DIG4781C
Advanced Interface Design
DIG4784C
Interactive Motion Scripting
GRA1852C
Computer Graphics
GRA1853C
Typography
GRA2130C
GRA2412
Media Law
MAR2720
Web Marketing
PGY2803C
Digital Imaging
RTV2107C
SLS3355
SLS4943
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Eight Program Elective Courses
ARH2050
ARH2051
BSC1001
ISC1004
MET1001
OCB1010
or Marine Biology
OCE2001
or Oceanography
CLP1006
ECO2013
ENC1101
English Composition
ENC1102
LIT1020
or The Short Story
LIT3132
LIT3326
ENC1145
MGF1211
MAC1105
or College Algebra
MAD1104
or Discrete Mathematic
PHI3800
PSY2012
PHY2020
COM1442
Team Effectiveness
SPC1608
COM1041
SYA3330
SYG2000
SYP3322
Two General Education Elective Courses
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
PROGRAM ELECTIVES
Credits Required
Credits Required
102
24
54
180
Page 109 of 183
WEB DESIGN & INTERACTIVE COMMUNICATIONS
DIPLOMA
The Web Design & Interactive Communications Diploma program is designed to teach students how to create the
look, feel and functionality of World Wide Web pages for client Web sites with a specific emphasis on professional
standards and practical deployment. This course of study extends foundation principles in visual communications
and interactive media as related to dynamic delivery through multiple channels, including mobile technologies.
Students have the opportunity to develop abilities in computer languages, usability principles and information
architecture in a team-oriented environment that prepares them for the professional world. Students also have
the opportunity to be trained in current web technologies and in project management on assignments that will
enhance their personal portfolio.
1. Demonstrate the use of appropriate visual elements and visual communication skills for
interactive media.
2. Create applications that solve specified problems through a variety of scripting techniques.
3. Critique and evaluate appropriate design solutions.
4. Design and develop media marketing and business plans.
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Web Design & Interactive Communications
Diploma program.
PROGRAM COURSES
CGS2800C
Basic Web Design
CGS3803C
CGS3875C
COP1845C
Introduction to Scripting and Programming Languages
COP3846C
DIG2201C
Desktop Video
DIG2250C
DIG2590C
DIG3103C
Interface Design
DIG3343C
Broadcast Graphics I: Animated Text & Logo Design
GRA2130C
PGY2803C
Digital Imaging
Program Elective
Program Elective
Program Elective
Program Elective
ROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
48
48
Page 110 of 183
WEB DESIGN & DEVELOPMENT
DIPLOMA
The Web Design & Development Diploma program is designed to teach students how to create the look, feel and
functionality of World Wide Web pages for client Web sites. Students have the opportunity to develop a design
that effectively communicates the ideas being promoted by the Web sites, and focus on the ways in which the
Web sites function for optimum information delivery. The program will also focus on the design and development
of mobile device applications.
Students have the opportunity to develop abilities in aspects of Web design, computer languages, and multimedia
skills, along with developing a professional portfolio. Students will also have the opportunity to learn to adapt
industry-relevant programs, techniques and standards in a field that is quickly and continuously changing.
5. Demonstrate professional visual communication skills through the use of graphic illustrations,
photography and typography
6. Integrate composition and design in support of concept
7. Demonstrate the ability to program and code to functional requirements of media project(s)
8. Apply critical thinking and needs analysis to concept design and in developing media marketing
9. Apply presentation and communication skills to produce design and business solutions
appropriate to a particular client or target audience
debt, salary data, alumni success, and other important info on the Web Design & Development Diploma program.
PROGRAM COURSES
CGS2800C
Basic Web Design
CGS3803C
CGS3875C
COP1845C
Introduction to Scripting and Programming Languages
COP3846C
DIG1135C
DIG2201C
Desktop Video
DIG2250C
DIG2590C
DIG3103C
Interface Design
DIG3343C
Broadcast Graphics I: Animated Text & Logo Design
GRA1120C
Layout
GRA1852C
Computer Graphics
GRA1853C
Typography
GRA2130C
PGY2803C
Digital Imaging
PROGRAM COURSES
Credits Required
48
48
Page 111 of 183
COURSE DESCRIPTIONS
ALL COURSES ARE 3 CREDITS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. Prerequisites may be waived by the Academic
Department Director or Program Coordinator. General Education courses are listed at the end of this section.
Where no prerequisite is provided none is required. Course descriptions describe the learning opportunities that
are provided through the classroom and coursework. It is each student’s responsibility to participate in the
activities that will lead to successfully meeting the learning outcomes.
ADV1000 ADVERTISING INDUSTRY
SURVEY
This course is a basic introduction to
advertising, its history, potential, and
limitations. Students examine the role of
advertising and different methods of
communication, as well as the advertising
spiral, advertising objectives, advertising
copy, and federal regulations. Students also
analyze media choices and strategies,
research, target audiences, and creating
campaigns. The course also helps the
student to recognize emerging trends and
to capitalize on them.
ADV3105C ADVERTISING COPYWRITING
Students develop copywriting skills while
exploring the foundations of writing copy
for advertising. Students also apply
copywriting principles to a variety of
products and services. The course focuses
on developing effective verbiage and
advertising strategies that underlie and
enable creative executions while cultivating
solid concepts and writing skills.
(prereq: ENC1145)
ADV3702C HONORS PROJECTS IN
PLANNING
Students study how to function in an
advertising agency as a specialist and as a
member of an agency team. The course
culminates in the final production of
completed marketing campaign elements,
enabling students to have published
samples for their portfolios. (prereq:
acceptance into the Honors Program.
ADV3702C & ADV3910C to be taken
concurrently)
RESEARCH
Students work in an actual advertising
agency working on projects for real-world
businesses and organizations seeking design
and direction within the graphic design and
advertising industry. (prereq: acceptance
into the Honors Program. ADV3702C &
ADV3910C to be taken concurrently)
ADV4710C ADVERTISING PORTFOLIO
In preparation for job interviews, students
write, design, and refine an advertising
portfolio. Working individually with the
instructor, each student selects
representative pieces that showcase
written, marketing, presentation, business,
design, and conceptual competencies that
meet the requirements of the Advertising in
Bachelor Design program. (prereq:
ADV4806)
ADV4804C DIGITAL MEDIA CAMPAIGNS
Students design and implement advanced
marketing campaigns utilizing emerging
digital media concepts, paradigms, and
business models. Students combine and
integrate interactive business models using
both online and offline media. Students
integrate knowledge of e-commerce and
interactive media to include emerging
technologies such as mobile marketing,
social media marketing (SMM), viral
advertising, and video and user generated
content (UGC). (Prereq: MAR1010 or
MAR2720)
ADV4806 SENIOR PROJECT - INTEGRATED
MARKETING CAMPAIGNS
The creation of an integrated marketing
campaign is the focus of the class. The
student works with a real client developing
all facets such as promotion opportunity
analysis, branding, creative brief media
planning, budgeting, and evaluating results.
In the following portfolio class, the student
will create all of the advertising
components for the integrated media
campaign. (prereq: MAN4871)
PRESENTATION
Students become part of an advertising
agency acting as a specialist (account
management, creative, media, traffic,
production) and as a member of an agency
team. Students work with actual clients in
real assignments and are required to
participate in client meetings, generate
contact reports, conduct research, develop
strategies, write media plans, ideate
concepts, and product creative elements.
(prereq: acceptance into the Honors
Program. ADV4808C & ADV4809C to be
taken concurrently)
DEVELOPMENT AND PRODUCTION
Students become part of advertising
agency, acting as a specialist (account
management, creative, media, traffic,
production) and as a member of an agency
team. Students work with actual clients in
real assignments and are required to
participate in client meetings, generate
contact reports, conduct research, develop
strategies, write media plans, ideate
concepts, and produce creative elements.
(prereq: acceptance into the Honors
Program. ADV4808C & ADV4809C to be
taken concurrently)
ADVA101 FUNDAMENTALS OF
ADVERTISING
Examines various methods, objectives and
types of advertising and marketing
communications in the context of current
and emerging trends and cultural influences
necessary to produce a variety of
advertising campaigns.
ADVA201 FUNDAMENTALS OF MARKETING
The fundamental concepts and principles of
marketing. The overview of marketing
provided here will help students place their
knowledge in a framework and understand
how each component contributes to the
strength and utility of a marketing plan.
Students will also learn how to identify the
ways in which world events and cultural
assumptions influence marketing.
ADVA204 CONSUMER BEHAVIOR &
PERSUASIVE SALES TECHNIQUES
Examine the cultural, social, psychological
and individual variables involved in
consumer behavior. Review marketing
practices that influence buyer decisions.
Focus on the essential skills and persuasive
techniques to affect a sales cycle. (prereq:
ADVA201)
ADVA208 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING
RESEARCH
Marketing research as a tool for developing
strategies. The source of data, sampling
procedures, questionnaire design, data
collection and analysis.
ADVA214 ADVERTISING COPYWRITING
Developing effective advertising strategies
and copy executions that underlie and
enable creative marketing and advertising
campaigns and cultivate clear, logical, and
creative copywriting skills. The unique
Page 112 of 183
characteristics of digital media and the
creation of copy for digital media will be
explored. (prereq: ENC1101)
ADVA215 ADVERTISING STORYBOARDING
& SCRIPTWRITING
Basic storyboard layouts and techniques are
examined and practiced. Students write
scripts that convey messages in a clear,
effective style that communicates to
specific audiences. Emphasis is placed on
developing concepts and researching,
planning and writing scripts for broadcast
commercials, public service announcements
and interactive media communications.
(prereq: ADVA214)
ADVA303 INTERACTIVE ADVERTISING
Students compare and contrast traditional
and interactive outlets in order to develop a
clear understanding of the demand for
advertising and marketing on-line. Students
discover and apply new methodologies in
developing and working with interactive ecommerce. Students learn the unique
characteristics and techniques of media
writing and apply them to interactive media
production. (prereq: MRKA204)
ADVA307 BRAND STRATEGY
The role of branding and brand identity.
Examines brand value, framework and
positioning and their importance to building
strong, enduring brands. (prereq: FADA308)
ADVA322 DIGITAL MEDIA CAMPAIGNS
Students design and implement advanced
marketing campaigns utilizing emerging
digital media concepts, paradigms, and
business models. Students combine and
integrate interactive business models using
both online and offline media. Students
integrate knowledge of e-commerce and
interactive media to include emerging
technologies such as mobile marketing,
social media marketing (SMM), viral
advertising, and video and user generated
content (UGC). (prereq: ADVA201)
ADVA328 PUBLIC RELATIONS
Examines the role of public relations;
showing the principles, methods and means
of influencing public opinion.
ADVA402 ONLINE COMMUNITY
MANAGEMENT
Focus is on developing the knowledge and
skills and how to design, create and manage
online communities as a business model for
relationship marketing. Build and maintain
a fan base using social networking tools and
engage participants in ongoing conversation
around a brand or idea. (prereq: MRKA205)
ARH2726C HISTORY OF ILLUSTRATION
This course begins with an overview of the
history of illustration with an emphasis on
the various illustration techniques in their
historical contexts. It explores the unique
role illustration has played in Western
society and culture. It continues with
discussions of new developments and
future trends in the illustration industry and
career opportunities within them.
ART1201C DESIGN BASICS
This course explores the realm of visual
communication with a concerned focus on
elements that form the basics of twodimensional design. It focuses on
developing these concepts as a means of
expressing ideas as well as the terminology
used in describing them.
ART1211C ELECTRONIC COLOR
APPLICATION
Students develop the foundation to apply
basic color design principles to a variety of
visual effects. Students study the basics of
color as it applies to video and film.
Students also explore color theory,
including additive and subtractive color.
ART1300C DRAWING AND PERSPECTIVE
Through the observation and application of
one-, two-, and multiple-point perspective
techniques, students render threedimensional forms as they relate to product
and commercial illustrations. The
fundamentals of light and shadow, line,
form, and value are explored through the
use of various media.
ART1331C DRAWING AND ANATOMY
This course focuses on reproducing life
forms in space. Emphasis is placed on the
basic anatomical structure of human and
animal forms.
ART2203C DESIGN BASICS 3D
This studio course explores threedimensional form and space and introduces
students to the materials, techniques, and
ideas that constitute the three-dimensional
world of natural and man-made objects.
The process begins with the concept,
materials, or observations and continues
through lectures, demonstrations, critical
analysis, and class discussion.
(prereq: ART1201C)
ART2205C COLOR APPLICATION
This course is an exploration of color theory
and its application in design. The expressive
nature of color, spatial characteristics, color
relationships, color mixing, and their uses in
traditional media and digital design are
explored. (prereq: ART1201C)
ART2251C ILLUSTRATION
This course introduces the philosophy
behind illustration and its uses in industry.
Assignments focus on black-and-white
and/or color techniques using contrast,
values, composition, and function.
(prereq: ART2205C & ART2330C)
ART2330C LIFE DRAWING
This course introduces the student to
drawing the human figure from life. The
course focuses on drawing the figure in
proportion in a manner that is anatomically
convincing, with attention to rendering and
shading. Concepts of gesture and contour
drawing, negative and positive space,
sighting, and contrast are reviewed.
(prereq: ART1300C)
ART2373C DRAWING FOR ANIMATION
This course emphasizes the importance of
the “quick sketch” approach to creating
animation key drawings. Emphasis is placed
on exercising good anatomical drawing
skills, capturing the nuances of form and
action in the human figure and creating
expression and character with fast,
deliberate sketching techniques. (prereq:
FIL2723C, TPP1500C)
ART2500C FUNDAMENTALS OF PAINTING
Students begin the study of the use of paint
media to represent form, value and color
and the manipulation of pigment on a
prepared surface. (prereq: ART2205C)
ART2540C WATERCOLOR
Students concentrate on the creative
exploration of watercolor techniques and
media with an emphasis on composition.
(prereq: ART1201C, ART1300C)
ART2606C 3D ORGANIC MODELING
In this introductory course to organic
modeling, students integrate their previous
three-dimensional knowledge and creativity
with new tools. Basic principles of organic
modeling are explored. (prereq: ART3326C)
ART2623C INTRODUCTION TO 3D
MODELING
This course introduces basic concepts of
computer-based modeling environments.
The course covers topics such as 3D
coordinate systems, orthographic drawing,
primitives, shapes into wireframes, lofting
and surface revolution, and transforming
3D objects. The basics of surface mapping
and three-point lighting are covered, as
well. Students create original models based
on photographs. (prereq: PGY2803C)
ART2624C MODELING AND ANIMATION
This course explores the various techniques
used to create animation in a 3D
environment. Focus is placed on creating
animated logo designs for use in broadcast
Page 113 of 183
and corporate presentation venues. The
course also explores various methods of
compositing and compositing concepts to
enhance and expand productivity. Specific
animation features and functions of the
given software are discussed and applied to
the production of short 3D animation
projects. Emphasis is placed on the ability
to break down a scene into various layers
and integrate those layers into a completed,
seamless product. (prereq: ART2623C)
ART2626C MOTION/LIGHTING/ TEXTURE
MAPPING
This course develops and refines
competencies in texture mapping and
lighting techniques. Focus is on the
correlation between reality and computer
rendition, stressing the disparity between
real light and the technical facsimile of
artificial lighting to set moods and
atmosphere. (prereq: ART2624C)
ART2627 CHARACTER DEVELOPMENT AND
ACTING
This is a hands-on class in which students
use scenes from various plays to identify
and work on the process of building a
character. Issues such as body movement,
subtext, and psychological examination are
explored through improvisation. Emphasis
is on animated character development.
(prereq: TPP1500C)
ART2701C SCULPTING I: FOUNDATIONS
A study of the principles, practices, and
applications of sculpting the human figure
in clay. The course covers armature
construction, anatomy structure, modeling
the head and bust, and modeling the full
figure. (prereq: ART1331C)
ART3161C EXPERIMENTAL MEDIA
This course explores the use of
nontraditional media and mixed media. The
2D and 3D work produced in this class
functions as an illustration or may be
incorporated into a variety of applied
designs. (prereq: PGY2803C)
ART3270C SPECIALTY ILLUSTRATION
Students explore and execute descriptive
representational art applied to subject
matter such as technical, scientific, medical,
and legal illustration. (prereq: ART2251C)
ART3271C SEQUENTIAL ILLUSTRATION
This course introduces students to the use
of sequential art and graphic narrative as a
dynamic means of storytelling and
communication. Both the historical roots
and modern trends in visual storytelling are
discussed and examined in depth. Students
become familiar with and produce works in
the various forms of graphic narrative,
including comic books, graphic novels,
comic strips, and picture books. (prereq:
ART2251C)
comprehensive overview of the animal
world. (prereq: ART1331C)
ART3272C CONCEPTUAL EDITORIAL
ILLUSTRATION
Students produce illustrations that interpret
written content. Students research current
evolving cultures, both domestic and
international, then apply these images to
create original illustrations in the genre of
fantasy, humor, cartoons, and editorial
commentary. Research and personal
references along with an exploration of
appropriate media, imagery and style
support the interpretation of the author’s
message.
(prereq: ART3161C)
ART3504C INTERMEDIATE PAINTING
This course is a continuation of
Fundamentals of Painting. Emphasis
includes painting the human form, using
light and expanding the repertoire of
techniques. (prereq: ART2500C)
ART3273C PRODUCT DISPLAY
ILLUSTRATION
This course defines the role of illustration in
the context of package, product, and
display design. Students examine the
unique challenges of adopting illustration,
typography, design, and materials to the
three-dimensional form. Research includes
marketing objectives, structural integrity,
and display aesthetics. (prereq: GRA1121C)
ART3614C ELECTRONIC DESIGN
This advanced course in design is a
conceptually oriented computer class.
Students develop strong visual ideas which
are then produced digitally using a variety
of software to achieve professional level
results. Concepts from theoretical readings
are translated into practical applications in
projects in direct or indirect ways. (prereq:
GRA2858C)
ART3339C DRAWING THE CLOTHED MODEL
In this course, the students apply skills
developed in previous drawing and figure
classes to render clothing and drapery. This
course focuses on realistic interpretations
of the clothed human figure. Students
explore the basic rules of drawing
believable drapery as well as methods for
simplifying the complex abstract patterns of
draped cloth for use in 2D animation.
Techniques for researching and designing
historically based costumes are introduced.
The importance of clothing in terms of
establishing mood and reinforcing the
physical and emotional attributes of a
character is discussed. Students are also
shown how lighting can be utilized as a tool
to reveal and accentuate the intricacies of
the clothing and the person wearing them.
(prereq: ART1331C)
ART3710C SCULPTING II: CHARACTER
DESIGN
This course focuses on designing and
sculpting characters or objects for
animation. Attention is given to appropriate
proportion and form for an animated
character or object. Course assignments
include gesture drawing action poses,
turnarounds, and the creation of 3D
characters or objects. (prereq: ART2701C)
ART3384C ANIMAL DRAWING
In this course, the student continues to
develop the skills learned in Drawing &
Anatomy and Advanced Life Drawing &
Painting. The focus is on the study
of basic animal anatomy and locomotion as
it relates to animation and character design.
Students sketch from life as well as from
anatomical drawings, video footage, and
photos of animals. The importance of
developing observational and analytical
skills is discussed and implemented through
research assignments and field trips. The
structure of mammals, reptiles, marine life,
birds and insects is compared and
contrasted, giving students a
ART3560C FIGURE PAINTING
In this course students use the figure as a
central theme, exploring composition,
anatomy, color relationships, environment,
and mixing flesh tones. The student
develops an individual approach to the
figure. [prereq: ART2500C or GRA2761C]
ART4255C TRADITIONAL ILLUSTRATION
STUDIO
Through the use of traditional media,
students produce industry-quality
illustrations. Students also develop an
individual illustration style through the use
of studio setups, photography and model
sessions. (prereq: ART3270C)
ART4274C ADVANCED DIGITAL
ILLUSTRATION
Students generate advanced vector-based
artwork that builds on and enhances digital
illustration skills and develop an individual
illustration style using digital media.
Students explore a wide range of illustration
styles and how they are created in vectorbased programs. Advanced concepts
include complex logo creation, object and
portrait realism, drawing with perspective,
advanced shading techniques, advanced
text effects and advanced masking
techniques. (prereq: FND150 or GRA1852C)
Page 114 of 183
ART4505C ADVANCED PAINTING
This course develops advanced painting
skills and further explore various painting
media. Students are encouraged to begin
developing an individual style for
illustration. (prereq: ART3504C)
ART4951C MEDIA ARTS PORTFOLIO
PREPARATION
This course identifies and organizes
elements of the student’s body of work in
preparation for portfolio development and
presentation. Students develop an action
plan and begin its implementation. Working
closely with the instructor, areas of focus
are defined, areas of improvement are
targeted, and project management is
emphasized. Print and digital portfolio
requirements are delineated. Industry
professionals participate in evaluation,
demonstration, and preparation.
Professional demo reels are shown and
analyzed. (prereq: DIG4367C) (coreq:
DIG3542C)
ART4952C MEDIA ARTS PORTFOLIO
DEVELOPMENT
This course continues the refinement of the
student’s digital portfolio. Students focus
on meeting digital portfolio requirements
and showcasing their individual strengths
and areas of specialization.
(prereq: ART4951C)
ART4954C ILLUSTRATION PORTFOLIO
PREPARATION
Students develop an illustration portfolio in
preparation for job interviews. Working
individually with the instructor, each
student selects representative pieces that
showcase a unique style and demonstrate
overall conceptual abilities and technical
competencies meeting the requirements of
the program. (prereq: completion of 150
credit hours in program)
ART4955C ILLUSTRATION PORTFOLIO
PRESENTATION
Students complete an illustration portfolio
in preparation for job interviews. Working
student selects representative pieces that
showcase a unique style and demonstrate
overall conceptual abilities and technical
competencies meeting the requirements of
the degree program. (prereq: ART4954C)
BUL3130 BUSINESS LAW
This course includes issues such as
contracts, torts, legal/political/economic
aspects of ethics and the law, U.C.C.,
antitrust law, employment law,
administrative law, securities law, and
international business law topics. (offered
SP & FA quarters) (prereq: MAN2024)
CAP4970C SENIOR PROJECT- RESEARCH
AND PROGRAMMING
This course is the first in a 3-tier step
towards completion of a student’s portfolio.
Students will work with a real client and
complete a project that showcases effective
use of interface design, programming,
videography, photography, object modeling
and e-commerce as necessary. In this initial
phase, students develop design
documentation for the proposed project
with emphasis on qualitative and
quantitative research, scheduling of the
project, methods of presentation and
qualitative results. (prereq: MAR2720 or
MAN4871)
CAP4971C SENIOR PROJECT - APPLICATION
AND DEFENSE
This course is a continuation of the Senior
Project- Research and Programming course
and the second tier toward completion of a
student’s portfolio. Students continue to
work with an actual client and complete a
project that showcases effective use of
interface design, programming,
videography, photography, object
modeling and e-commerce as necessary.
Students create the professional Interactive
Media solution for the client based on the
research and parameters established in
CAP4970C that showcases skills learned
throughout the program. The project’s
design incorporates both elements from a
client- needs analysis and specified
competency requirements from the
instructor. (prereq: CAP4970C)
Students also begin the design
documentation process.
CGS3803C INTERMEDIATE WEB DESIGN
Students move beyond basic web design
skills and acquire intermediate design skills
for web development. HTML/HTML5 and
CSS/CSS3 are applied. Students continue to
refine design documentation skills. (Prereq:
CGS2800C)
CGS3875C INTERACTIVE MOTION
GRAPHICS
This is an intermediate level course focusing
on motion graphics as an interactive design
solution. The course focuses on designing
and delivering low-bandwidth animations,
presentations, and web sites. It also
introduces students to scripting capabilities.
The course covers design, standards,
procedures, and delivery. Emphasis is
placed on industry standards, ensuring
compatibility (browser/platform), and
developing a complete product from
concept to delivery. (prereq: COP1845C)
COP1845C INTRODUCTION TO SCRIPTING
AND PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES
Students acquire basic programming skills
needed to design, develop, and produce
practical applications with a specific
scripting or programming language. The
course addresses good programming
practices, structured logic, and objectoriented concepts, including methods,
properties, events, and handlers. (Prereq:
CGS3803C)
CAP4972C DIGITAL MEDIA/ INTERACTIVE
DIGITAL PORTFOLIO
This is the third tier and the final step for
the development of a market-current
portfolio. Presentation techniques and selfpromotion are also covered. (prereq:
CAP4971C)
COP2363C INTRODUCTION TO
PROGRAMMING WITH C++
Programming with C++ students study basic
programming skills needed to design,
develop, and produce practical applications
using the C++ programming language.
(prereq: CGS1160C)
CGS2540C DATABASE CONCEPTS
Using a commonly available database
program, students practice the theory of
database design by normalizing data,
defining integrity relationships, and creating
tables. Students also develop forms,
reports, and search queries (SQL) as they
learn how to manage and manipulate data
within a database. (prereq: COP1845C)
COP3846C INTRODUCTION TO DYNAMIC
SCRIPTING
This course provides an introduction to
designing dynamic sites. Students study the
fundamentals of what software makes up a
web server, the differences between serversided and client-sided authoring and basic
scripting that uses this information to help
design more dynamic sites. This course is
the first in a series of three dynamic web
courses that help the student to implement
scripting with WYSIWYG editors and vector
animation programs for the web.
(prereq: CGS3875C, CGS3803C)
CGS2800C BASIC WEB DESIGN
Students acquire the skills needed to
develop, design, and produce basic web
pages, including conceptualization and
design of a simple web site. HTML is studied
as the basis for all web page layout, design
and delivery. Additionally, the course
examines the use of protocols over the
internet, web browser functionalities, file
transfer utilities and domain name services.
COP4111C INTERMEDIATE WEB SCRIPTING
Through this course, students refine and
enhance programming skills. The student
gains experience developing advanced
Page 115 of 183
applications using specific computer
languages. (prereq: COP1845C)
COP4813C ADVANCED WEB SCRIPTING
Through this course, students refine and
enhance programming skills. The student
gains experience developing advanced
languages. Students apply the
fundamentals of interactive web design
with a focus on active server pages
programming. The course introduces
students to concepts related to web site
creations based on server side processing.
(prereq: DIG4593C, COP4111C)
CRW3713 SCRIPTWRITING FOR GAMES
This course covers the creative process of
developing and integrating storytelling and
character development in games. Topics
covered include the distinction between
traditional and game specific storytelling,
game character archetypes, character
triangles and arcs, game settings, game
genres, and the intersection of gameplay
and story. Students develop original game
stories, characters, and concepts, and work
in teams to integrate their ideas into a
game story treatment, a three- level script,
and a game design document. (prereq:
DIG1711C)
CTE1313C FUNDAMENTALS OF APPAREL
CONSTRUCTION
Students analyze construction standards
and learn sewing techniques as applied to
the apparel industry. Students are given a
foundation to build upon in future projects.
TEXTILES
This course surveys textile terminology and
properties to enable students to make
appropriate choices in textile selection for a
product.
CTE1510 FASHION HISTORY
A study of current apparel designers,
philosophies, inspirational basis and
markets acquaint and equip students with
the basic knowledge and vocabulary of
fashion styles, details, and specific periods
of costume. The course is designed to assist
students to better understand basic apparel
silhouettes, detailed fabrications and
fashion cycles, and fashion trends
throughout the course of western
civilization to present.
CTE1600 TRENDS & CONCEPTS IN APPAREL
This course offers a comprehensive study of
trend forecasting, demographics, and social
issues that affect fashion and related
industries. Students analyze the importance
of clothing with an emphasis on the
twentieth-century period.
CTE1708C FASHION DIGITAL DESIGN
FUNDAMENTALS
This course explores the realm of visual
communication in fashion using digital and
emerging technologies with a concerned
focus on elements that form the basics of
two-dimensional design. The focus is on
development of these concepts as a means
of expressing ideas as well as the
terminology used in describing them.
(prereq: CGS1160C)
CTE2342C CHILDREN’S WEAR
Students demonstrate a working knowledge
of basic and advanced construction
techniques as they apply to complex
garments. Students identify and analyze
principles of garment fit. (prereq:
CTE1741C)
CTE1730C TECHNICAL DRAWING FOR
FASHION
This course covers manual, mechanical, and
technical sketching with an emphasis on flat
garment drawing for specification sheets.
(prereq: CTE1313C, CTE1732C)
CTE2465C TEXTILE AND APPAREL DESIGN
This course focuses on the identification of
laws and regulations that apply to the
textile and apparel industry. Students
identify general international and trade
practices, with a concentration on
researching and sourcing textile
manufacturers and mills in a global market
relevant to product development. (prereq:
CTE2778C, CTE1760C)
CTE1732C FASHION ILLUSTRATION
Students learn proportions and techniques
of garment illustration of fashion figures
using a variety of media.
CTE2720C FASHION DESIGN STUDIO
Students develop a collection in a
specialized area of apparel. (prereq:
CTE2342C, CTE2770C)
PATTERNMAKING
This course provides an introduction to the
basic techniques of patternmaking. These
skills include measurement taking, pattern
drafting, pattern draping, and problem
solving. Students implement the most
appropriate method for a given design.
(prereq: CTE1313C, CTE1732C)
CTE2735C ILLUSTRATION & STYLIZED
DRAWING
Students further explore advanced
techniques of fashion illustration for design
communication. (offered SU & WI quarters)
(prereq: CTE1732C)
CTE1741C APPAREL PATTERN DETAILS
Flat pattern techniques are taught in
accordance with approved garment trade
practices. Students draft and manipulate
the various garment components and
construct muslin samples. (prereq:
CTE1740C, CTE1730C)
CTE1760 MANUFACTURING
APPAREL CONCEPTS
This course introduces students to
manufacturing processes. Students develop
a working knowledge of terms, methods,
and an understanding of production
operations. By the end of the course,
students are able to apply these concepts to
their own uses. Students study various
production-time and quality-assurance
methods. Participation facilitates students
in generating decisions in production
operations.
CTE1841C APPAREL EVALUATION
& PRODUCTION
Students analyze construction standards
and techniques used in the ready-to- wear
industry. Research serves as the foundation
for developing skills in garment
specifications, assembly, and finishing.
(prereq: CTE1760)
CTE2747C SPECIALIZED PATTERNMAKING
This course reinforces students’
understanding of the art of draping
patternmaking and diverse methods the
industry uses to create production patterns.
Analytical thinking and hands-on class
experiences strengthen students’ skills,
enabling them to expand on their creativity
and provide proper fit to their creations.
(offered WI & SU quarters)
(prereq: CTE2772C)
CTE2750C ADVANCED APPAREL DRAPING
Students execute their own designs using
advanced draping techniques including style
lines, fit, and balance. Additionally, students
explore the couture market with its
advanced construction and finishing
processes. (prereq: CTE2342C, CTE2770C)
CTE2765C FASHION PRODUCT
DEVELOPMENT
Students implement design concepts from
product inception to completion. Specific
target markets, industry standards, and
global manufacturing sources are analyzed.
(prereq: CTE2465C or CTE2827C)
CTE2770C SWIMWEAR DESIGN
Students research and analyze the
swimwear market, creating a line from
concept to garment production. (prereq:
CTE1741C)
Page 116 of 183
CTE2771C COMPUTERIZED APPAREL
PATTERN SYSTEMS
Students develop patternmaking skills using
industry-specific CAD programs. Computer
patternmaking tools and input and output
devices are used in a laboratory setting.
(prereq: CTE1741C)
CTE2772C COMPUTERIZED APPAREL
PATTERNMAKING
Students use industry-specific CAD software
to study the theory and creation of
garments. Using skills learned in the
prerequisite course, students create a
garment of their choice. Markers and
patterns from spec sheets are also
produced. (prereq: CTE2771C)
CTE2778C COMPUTER FASHION DESIGN
This course is a comprehensive study of
vector- and raster-based software used in
creating and rendering flats, worksheets,
and other fashion design-related
promotional aids. Internet trend forecasting
and sourcing are also covered. Other topics
include the examination of social issues,
demographics, and historical references
that affect the fashion and related
industries. (prereq: CTE1510, CTE1708C)
CTE2810 ELEMENTS OF RETAIL
OPERATIONS
This course examines the overall retail
environment. Emphasis is placed on
consumer behavior, traditional store layout,
e-commerce, and the importance of
signage. The course also develops the
student’s knowledge and practical
experience through field experience, text,
and group projects. (prereq: MKA1041)
CTE2821C MERCHANDISE MATHEMATICS
A survey of quantitative skills necessary for
merchandise planning in the wholesale and
retail business environment. (prereq:
MGF1211 or MAD1104 or MAC1105)
CTE2827C MERCHANDISE BUYING
This course provides a foundation for the
study of retail buying. Theories are
analyzed through the study of merchandise
classifications and the calculation of opento-buys. (offered SP & FA quarters) (prereq:
CTE2821C)
CTE2893C FASHION DESIGN PORTFOLIO
This course focuses on the completion of
the portfolio and enables the student to
begin their career search. Instruction
emphasis is on enhancing portfolio quality
and content. The student also completes a
professional resume and begins the job
search. (prereq: CTE2342C, CTE2770C)
CTE2894C GRAPHIC COMMUNICATION IN
FASHION
This course is a workshop in which students
study the use of the computer as the tool of
the fashion merchandiser and designer. An
overview of vector-based programs and
image manipulation gives students a
greater understanding of the immense
power and control of computer hardware
and software available to create graphic
marketing materials and solutions. (prereq:
CTE2778C)
CTE3110C FASHION STYLING FOR
PHOTOGRAPHY
Through visual examples, assignments, and
critiques, this course introduces students to
the field of fashion styling and fashion
photography. With the use of location and
studio assignments, students develop a
basic understanding of the styling and art
direction techniques required in the fashion
photography industry and gain experience
in sourcing models, clothing, and
accessories.
CTE33221C INDIVIDUAL FASHION STYLE
DEVELOPMENT
Students study how to develop an
adaptable basic wardrobe to use as a guide
when selecting clothing for themselves or
for a client by analyzing the body separate
from clothing, then choosing clothing and
accessory designs that are in harmony with
the body’s design pattern.
CTE3351C MENSWEAR/TAILORING
Students design and construct apparel for
the menswear market with special
emphasis on tailoring techniques. (offered
WI & SU quarters) (prereq: CTE2750C)
CTE3383C EMBROIDERY DESIGN
The study of machine embroidery design as
related to the garment, textile, and home
furnishing industry. In this laboratory class,
students develop and implement designs
using computerize embroidery design
software and equipment. (prereq:
CTE2893C)
CTE3412C TEXTILE SURFACE DESIGN
This course explores textile design as
related to the garment, textile, and home
furnishing industry. In this laboratory
course, students develop and implement
designs using a variety of dyeing and
painting techniques. (offered WI & SU
quarters) (prereq: CTE2893C)
CTE3413C ADVANCED DIGITAL TEXTILE
DESIGN
This course enables students to identify the
major categories of textiles, including knits
and wovens for digital rendering. Special
emphasis is placed on accurately rendering
fibers, fabrics, and prints and the
appropriate selection for a variety of end
uses, including apparel and home
furnishings. Items are rendered in
proprietary software for use in digital textile
printing, traditional textile printing
methods, and fabric construction. (offered
FA & SP quarters)
(prereq: CTE3412C)
CTE3464 TARIFF, TRADE, AND RESOURCING
Students examine basic policies of
import/export trade regulations, tariff laws,
and the enforcement of quotas. Current
world trade disputes and U.S.
import/export policies are studied from the
perspective of the manufacturer and
retailer. (offered SU & WI quarters) (prereq:
ECO2013, MAR3156)
CTE3533C FASHION RESEARCH &
SOURCING
Through a variety of in-depth research and
analysis, students make appropriate
selections of silhouettes, fabrications,
colors, details, and findings. In addition,
students explore various presentation
methods appropriate for their chosen
collection. (prereq: CTE2765C)
CTE3727C ACCESSORIES DESIGN
This course provides students with a
working knowledge of the design and
execution of fashion accessories. A strong
emphasis is placed on the changing fashion
image and the importance of accessories in
creating a “total fashion look.”
Manufacturing and production processes
are discussed. Students are taught
techniques for working with suitable
materials used for fashion accessories.
Decorative production methods are also
covered. Emphasis is on the correct use of
Swarovski product line.
CTE3775C ACTIVE SPORTSWEAR
Students design and construct apparel for
the active sportswear market. (offered FA &
SP quarters) (prereq: CTE2750C)
CTE3786C PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT
Students study how to manage the flow of
garment construction and costing from
concept to shipping using both specialized
and standard computer software programs.
(offered WI & SU quarters) (prereq:
CTE3533C)
CTE3850C FASHION SHOW PRODUCTION
Students plan and execute a major fashion
show. Hands-on experience is stressed as
students take responsibility for coordinating
activities to generate a theme, identify a
target market, and implement successful
publicity.
Page 117 of 183
CTE3865C STRATEGIC MERCHANDISE
MANAGEMENT
An advanced course in the study of stock
control and managing open-to-buys which
provides a practicum in buying and in
utilizing computer spreadsheets for data
analysis. (offered WI & SU quarters)
(prereq: CTE2827C)
CTE3931C COSTUME-CONCEPTS
Costuming is a three-part course series
allowing students to develop and
implement their own costume collection
from concept to completion, focusing on a
special event, wearable art, or themed
location. Students complete research,
develop concepts, and begin sourcing
materials for their collection.
CTE4411C SCREEN PRINT DESIGN FOR
TEXTILE INDUSTRY
Students develop and implement their own
screen print designs from concept to
completion, focusing on contemporary
industrial requirements. Students develop
artwork, make color separations, and
produce actual screen prints for their
portfolios.
CTE4746C TECHNICAL DESIGN
This course focuses on the principles of
grading patterns to achieve size variations.
Students develop a grade table based on
specifications and practice their application
to different size scale categories. Both
manual and computer techniques are used.
(offered WI & SU quarters)
(prereq: CTE3533C)
CTE4813 FASHION ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Students create a business plan for the
opening of a fashion business. The plan
includes market research, financial
planning, inventory planning, and staffing.
(prereq: CTE3533C)
CTE4895C ADVANCED FASHION
PORTFOLIO
The student assembles a formal portfolio to
represent their skills along with special
interests they have developed throughout
the program. (offered WI & SU quarters)
(prereq: CTE4936C)
CTE4896C DIGITAL FASHION PORTFOLIO
Students convert their design portfolio into
digital format. (offered FA & SP quarters)
(prereq: CTE4895C)
CTE4930C COSTUME-TECHNICAL
Costuming is a three-part course series
implement their own costume collection
from concept to completion, focusing on a
special event, wearable art, or themed
location. Students complete the technical
portion of their designs, including technical
drawings, specifications, and
patternmaking. (prereq: CTE3931C)
CTE4933 SENIOR MERCHANDISING
PROJECT-PLANNING
Senior Project is a three-part course series
implement their own fashion marketing and
merchandising project from concept to
completion. In Senior Merchandising
Project-Planning, students complete market
research, develop concepts, and begin
strategic planning for their project. (prereq:
CTE2894C)
CTE4934C SENIOR MERCHANDISING
PROJECT-DEVELOPMENT
implement their own fashion marketing and
Project-Development, students complete
the planning portion of their project
including objectives, strategies, sourcing
and financing. (prereq: CTE4933)
CTE4935C SENIOR MERCHANDISING
PROJECT-PRESENTATION
implement their fashion marketing and
Project-Presentation, students concentrate
on the presentation of their project,
presenting it a special Senior Show.
(prereq: CTE4934C)
CTE4936C SENIOR STUDIO-CONCEPTS
Senior Studio is a three-part course series
implement their own 6-10 piece garment
collection from concept to completion. In
Senior Studio- Concepts, students complete
market research, develop concepts, and
begin sourcing materials for their collection.
(offered FA & SP quarters) (prereq:
CTE3533C)
CTE4937C SENIOR STUDIO-TECHNICAL
Senior Studio-Technical, students complete
the technical portion of their designs
including technical drawings, specifications,
and patternmaking. (offered WI & SU
quarters) (prereq: CTE4936C)
CTE4938C SENIOR STUDIO- PRODUCTION
Senior Studio- Production, students
concentrate on the construction of their
collection, presenting final garments in a
special Senior Show. Students must earn a
“C” or higher to exit this course. (offered FA
& SP quarters)
(prereq: CTE4937C)
DFVA201 FUNDAMENTALS OF
SCRIPTWRITING
Students explore the writing and creative
elements needed to create scripts. They will
also acquire knowledge of all elements from
research to proposal to treatment to script.
(prereq: DFVA105 or PRWA212)
DFVA208 MEDIA BUSINESS PRACTICES
Addresses basic business theory and
practices for the media professional, as well
as key legal requirements for artistic
industries.
DFVA214 SCRIPTWRITING
A presentation of the professional
scriptwriting process, from pitching,
through treatment, and the development
process to final draft. (prereq: DFVA201)
DIG1021 INTRODUCTION TO VISUAL
EFFECTS AND MOTION GRAPHICS
history of visual effects with emphasis on
the various effects processes in their
historical contexts. It continues with
discussions of the field of postproduction,
animation, and broadcast graphics and
analysis of major sectors of those industries
and career opportunities with them.
DIG1022 HISTORY OF ANIMATION
history of animation with emphasis on the
various animation processes in their
discussions of new developments and
future trends in the animation industry and
analysis of major sectors of the animation
industry and career opportunities within
them.
DIG1135C DESIGN CONCEPTS FOR
INTERACTIVE MEDIA
Students are introduced to layout and
organizational design elements and explore
basic graphic design principles for a variety
of visual effects. In addition, students
explore the basics of color and related
design variables. This course also examines
the adaptation of typography for different
information delivery systems including print
and electronic media. (prereq: PGY1892C or
PGY2803C or GRA1106C or PGY1801C)
Page 118 of 183
DIG1257C PRODUCTION SOUND
RECORDING
This is a course in the science and art of
production sound. Students learn how to
use microphones, field mixers, and digital
sound equipment to record dialogue and
sound effects in a variety of settings. The
fundamentals of sound editing and mixing
for picture are introduced. (prereq:
RTV1213C)
DIG1561 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Students working independently and in
groups are introduced to the interactive
design, IT project-management process,
and development of the project team as the
key to successful achievement of interactive
design project goals. The process examines
the main elements required in every
proposal/plan, time frames and budgeting.
Key areas of interactive project design
teams serve to support the fundamental
approach that every project team is tailored
to achieve project results efficiently and
effectively.
DIG1711C GAME DESIGN
& GAME PLAY
A well-designed game is an integration of
artistic and technological components that
must have
a clearly defined goal, a set of game criteria,
and rules for gameplay. Students study the
fundamentals of what makes a game
enjoyable, playable, challenging, and
marketable. (prereq: ENC1145)
DIG1717 INTRODUCTION TO GAME
DEVELOPMENT
history of video games with emphasis on
the various gaming processes in their
discussions of the various game genres and
analysis of major sectors of those industries
and career opportunities within them.
DIG2201C DESKTOP VIDEO
Students examine advances in desktop
video, computer graphics, special effects,
editing, and the important role these new
technologies play in digital video
production. (prereq: FND135 or PGY1892C
or PGY2803C or PGY1801C)
DIG2250C AUDIO FOR INTERACTIVE
DESIGN
Students are introduced to the principles
and practices of digital audio in an
interactive and/ or design setting. Students
learn to prepare and use current digital
audio and video programs for recording,
editing, sequencing, and mixing for
a variety of outputs and applications.
Emphasis is placed on the implementation
via scripting in an interactive authoring
application. (prereq: CGS3875C)
DIG2321C 3D MODELING I: FOUNDATIONS
In this introductory course to 3D computergenerated images, students integrate their
technical knowledge and creativity in a
three-dimensional environment. Students
apply design principles using the computer
as a tool to further their understanding of
the creative process in developing threedimensional models and environments.
(prereq: PGY2803C, coreq: GRA1762C)
DIG2340C PAINTING AND ROTOSCOPING
This course explores various techniques to
create and implement CGI into live action.
Utilizing various painting and compositing
packages, students study the principles of
rotoscoping and digital painting as applied
to rig removal and special effects. (prereq:
DIG3343C)
DIG2363C CHARACTER MODELING
Students create low-polygon characters for
use in game prototypes and levels. This
class focuses on facial definition and
anatomical balance in biped, quadruped,
and poly-ped characters. During coursework
the student demonstrates low-polygon
modeling and conversions of polygon
counts to fit various requirements.
(prereq: DIG2791C & ART1331C)
DIG2590C DIGITAL MEDIA/ INTERACTIVE
PORTFOLIO
This course begins the student’s
development of a market-current portfolio.
Presentation techniques and self-promotion
are also covered. (prereq: DIG2250C or
approval of Dept. Chair)
DIG2790C TEXTURING FOR GAMES
In this course students develop and refine
competencies in texture creation
techniques specific to gaming applications.
Focus is placed on the correlation between
reality and computer rendition, stressing
the disparity between real texture and
facsimile of artificial texture to set mood.
(prereq: GRA1106C or ART1211C)
DIG2791C GAME MODELING
Students work with the game industry
standard 3D software package to create 3D
models for use in future game prototypes.
Students also create low-polygon and highpolygon models and practice conversions of
polygon counts to fit various requirements.
(coreq: CGS1160C)
DIG3103C INTERFACE DESIGN
In this course, students produce advanced
conceptual, aesthetic and production
design strategies utilizing web authoring
WYSIWYG editors. Students develop and
manage the issues of project management,
design development and documentation,
navigation, and plan implementation.
Students create plans and designs that
ensure cross browser compatibility.
(prereq: CGS3803C, GRA2130C)
DIG3114C BROADCAST GRAPHICS II:
COMPOSITING
This course exposes students to the
disciplines used in finalizing a video or
animation project using compositing
software. The course reinforces
compositing concepts, techniques, and
vocabulary that were learned in previous
courses and introduces more sophisticated
tools and techniques. Each student
produces a final edited project using these
skills. (prereq: DIG3343C)
DIG3139C ELECTRONIC ILLUSTRATION
This course refines the student’s
competencies in the techniques of image
manipulation and natural media electronic
illustration. Assignments are designed to
explore surface qualities, texture, image
cloning and layering, color mixing with light,
and digitizing. Cell animation is explored.
Hardcopy and reproduction are
emphasized. (prereq: PGY2803C or
GRA1762C or DIG2790C)
DIG3306C 3D ANIMATION I: PRINCIPLES
This animation course builds on tools,
concepts and techniques learned in the 3D
modeling course. Techniques in animation
are developed. This course provides a solid
understanding of 3D computer animation.
(prereq: DIG2321C, GRA2854C)
DIG3307C VFX FUNDAMENTALS
This course explores basic techniques in
digital compositing. Compositing techniques
such as alpha mattes, blending modes, color
correction, keying, rotoscoping, procedural
matte extraction, and multi-pass rendering
are explored. (prereq: GRA1762C)
DIG3308C WEB ANIMATION
This course develops familiarity and skill in
applying animation to the internet.
Students move from the level of the
creation of web projects with HTML and
web editors through the addition of motion
graphics to those projects. (prereq:
GRA2854C, CGS1160C)
DIG3313C 2D ANIMATION TECHNIQUE
This course expands the exploration of 2D
animation, utilizing skills learned in previous
courses and examines new techniques.
Concepts are integrated to create a single
2D animated piece that demonstrates
balance, weight, appeal and dialogue.
(prereq: FIL2723C)
Page 119 of 183
DIG3314C ADVANCED 2D ANIMATION
This course continues the development of
2D animation skill through the use of a
computer and a professional 2D animation
software package. The course applies the
concept of short animation production from
the beginning to the end. (prereq:
FIL2723C)
DIG3323C 3D MODELING II: CHARACTER
MODELING
This course introduces new tools, concepts,
and techniques. Students apply and
implement 3D modeling techniques learned
in previous 3D courses and explore more
sophisticated techniques. Primary focus is
on 3D character modeling.
(prereq: DIG2321C, ART1331C)
DIG3326C 3D MODELING III: DESIGNING
ENVIRONMENTS
This course expands the students’
knowledge of 3D modeling concepts and
techniques. By applying advanced 3D
modeling techniques learned in previous 3D
courses, students produce original 3D
environments. (prereq: DIG4373C)
DIG3343C BROADCAST GRAPHICS I:
ANIMATED TEXT & LOGO DESIGN
This course provides an overview of the
working aspects of the broadcast industry
and how broadcast integrates animation.
Topics include production needs,
equipment, and computer graphics and
how they are used in a variety of broadcast
content. Students create animation
sequences for news, industrial, educational/
informational, and training programs
including station ID, opening sequences,
titling, and slates. (prereq: GRA1762C or
[PGY1892C or DIG2790C] or PGY2803C)
DIG3344C KEYING AND COLOR
CORRECTING
disciplines used in creating and compositing
video shot on a blue- or green-screen. More
sophisticated methods are introduced for
color correcting and adjusting video to
produce seamless composites. The course
reinforces compositing concepts,
techniques, and vocabulary that students
have learned in previous courses.
Each student produces a final edited project
utilizing these skills. Concepts presented
include various methods of keying, matte
extraction, garbage matting, track mattes,
traveling mattes, RGB color space, and color
correction. (prereq: DIG2340C)
DIG3345C CGI AND COMPOSITING
This course explores various techniques to
create and implement CGI into live action
as well as various methods of compositing
and compositing concepts to enhance and
expand productivity. Specific animation
features and functions of the given
software are discussed and applied to the
production of short 3D animation projects.
The course emphasizes creation of CG
environments and integration of elements
into live action. (prereq: DIG3114C)
DIG3346C MOTION TRACKING
This course introduces students to the
various methods of matching the motion
shot on a live-action plate and applying that
motion to a digital element. The course
introduces 2D and 3D tracking methods.
(prereq: DIG3114C)
DIG3354C 3D ANIMATION II:
APPLICATIONS
This course improves on the tools,
concepts, and techniques developed in the
previous 3D animation courses. Students
apply techniques to 3D character
animation. (prereq: DIG3306)
DIG3356C MATTE PAINTING
Students study the art and craft of matte
painting. Students focus on the history and
evolution of matte painting from its origins
to its current form. 2D matte paintings are
created using photographs provided by the
instructor or from the student’s research.
Students take photographs and create a
visual record of the process. (prereq:
GRA1762C)
DIG3362C 3D ANIMATION III: STAGING
AND INTERACTION
Building on previous 3D animation
experience, students apply their knowledge
of the principles of animation in order to
demonstrate an advanced understanding of
character action and acting. Multi-character
interaction, cycles, animation-to-audio, and
concrete animation will be covered.
(prereq: DIG3354C)
DIG3368C 3D GAME ANIMATION
Students apply traditional animation
techniques to 3D characters created
specifically for a video game environment.
Concepts such rigging, forward kinematics,
inverse kinematics and are discussed and
implemented. Students rig and develop
skills in animating low polygon 3D
geometry. (prereq: DIG3371C)
DIG3371C 3D CHARACTER RIGGING
Students learn to attach control
mechanisms on biped and quadruped
characters so that the 3D mesh can be
animated for use in level modifications.
Various methods and skeletal systems used
in rigging a character are explored. The
students also learn to use character
constraints such as inverse kinematics.
(prereq: DIG2363C or DIG3323C)
DIG3372C MODELING WITH SUBDIVISION
SURFACES
Students create low and high polygon
characters. This class focuses on facial
definition and anatomical imbalance in the
facial structure and anatomy of characters
and creatures. Students create high quality
displacement and normal maps for use in
3D game applications. Students explore the
uses of materials, textures, paint, and
illustration tools as well.
(prereq: DIG2363C)
DIG3392C THREE- DIMENSIONAL EFFECTS
This course focuses on creating digital
effects for TV and film. Topics covered are
modeling, lighting, texturing, dynamics,
particles, and particle systems. (prereq:
ART2626C)
DIG3394C MOTION GRAPHICS: ADVANCED
COMPOSITING
This course focuses on techniques in
creating high-end motion graphics. The
student is exposed to more advanced
techniques that include 3D modeling,
texturing, lighting, particles, and
compositing. Students utilize this course to
create motion graphics for their final
portfolio.
DIG3542C ANIMATICS &
PREVISUALIZATION
This course examines the necessary tasks in
the pre-production phase of an animation
project. Students utilize artistic and editing
skills for creating storyboards, video
animatics and basic scene timing, and
layout. A working model of their final demo
reel is produced. (prereq: DIG3343C)
(coreq: DIG4951C or ART4951C)
DIG3722C 2D DIGITAL AUTHORING
Game design students develop an
interactive 2D internet-based game site
displaying levels, 3D animations and graphic
design files of their work. Students acquire
skills in HTML, CSS and java coding, graphic
rules, site layout, and FTP. File formats for
displaying game files and optimization
of graphics, video, and sound for the web
are discussed as well as methods to display
the site on the web. Students develop a
functioning internet site displaying their
works.
DIG3723C 3D GAME SCRIPTING
This course introduces the student to game
scripting. The student becomes familiar
with compiling and scripting to modify ingame play. This class employs a nextgeneration game engine. The student
modifies existing scripts to create a custom
weapon, health sphere, vehicle, decoration,
Page 120 of 183
and character. (prereq: COP2363C and
DIG3793C)
animation and game characters. (prereq:
DIG3794C)
DIG3724C ADVANCED 3D GAME SCRIPTING
This course is a continuation of 3D game
scripting with a focus on advanced
techniques of scripting inside a game
engine. Students study how to customize
attributes of game assets including
animation, vehicle, cameras, etc., and to
modify play parameter and elements of
content, while maintaining clean and legible
code. (prereq: DIG3723C)
DIG4123C DESIGNING FOR DYNAMIC SITES
Students plan and apply user-centered
design principles, database structures, and
server side scripting to construct dynamic
web sites. Students analyze the specific
design issues relating to the display of
dynamic content on the screen and
strategize on effective methods for how
that dynamic content will be delivered.
Students then use this data to improve
and/or present finalized design and
programming modules. (prereq: DIG3103C,
COP3846C)
DIG3743C INTERFACE DESIGN
In this course students apply the value and
techniques of creating efficient interfaces
for interactivity. Concepts covered include
user friendliness, images as language issues,
and coherent design principles. Students
develop an appropriate interface for their
work and study the coding to make it
interactive. (prereq: DIG3722C)
DIG3792C TEXTURE/ LIGHTING FOR
GAMING
This course develops and refines
competencies in texture mapping and
lighting techniques used in making video
games. Emphasis is placed on creating the
illusion of high detail with low polygon
models. The student is also exposed to the
limitations of lighting for video games and
alternative techniques used to compensate
for these limitations. (prereq: DIG2791C)
DIG3793C LEVEL DESIGN
Students are introduced to the level editor
for an existing game engine. Working with
the elements and tools within the editor,
students create and modify aspects of a
game level. Using learned concepts from
the Game Design & Game Play course,
students analyze, break down, and improve
upon the game play aspects of the level.
(prereq: DIG1711C)
DIG3794C ADVANCED LEVEL DESIGN
Building upon skills learned in the Level
Design course, students continue work with
the level editor. Students begin to build
more advanced levels using static meshes,
karma and collision while still maintaining
focus on the gameplay aspects of the level.
(prereq: DIG3793C, DIG3792C, DIG2363C)
DIG3797C DESIGNING INTERIOR SPACES
AND WORLDS
Most levels of popular games are designed
as building interiors and contain
characteristics common to interior design
layouts. This course provides the
opportunity for students to create
architectural interiors representing houses,
buildings, and entire worlds contained
under a roof in which to place their
DIG4144C NET BROADCASTING
Students analyze the practical application of
a variety of software, hardware, and
management issues relating to broadcasting
video and audio online. Students plan and
construct projects that use streaming audio,
video, and other multimedia elements for
delivery over the internet.
(prereq:DIG3103C,DIG2201C,CGS3803C)
DIG4263C SOUND FOR NEW MEDIA
The main emphasis in this course is on
developing sound for new forms through
sound installation, interactive media,
digitalization, improvisation, and acoustic
experimentation. (prereq: RTV4268C)
DIG4315C INTERACTIVE ACTION SCRIPTING
In this course students present and manage
advanced interactive dynamic scripting with
animation. Students construct and program
applications involving dynamically updating
animations, web sites and data. They must
determine effective methods of sending
and receiving dynamic data and must
defend effective design in a dynamic
setting. (prereq: DIG4123C)
DIG4316C ADVANCED WEB ANIMATION
In this course, students construct complex
web animations utilizing programming
through use of HTML, web editors and web
animation software. Students program
these animations through the addition of
scripting languages to these projects.
(prereq: DIG3308C)
DIG4367C 3D ANIMATION SCRIPTING
This course builds on all previous 3D
courses, concentrating on advanced topics
relating to 3D scripting language in relation
to character animation and rendering.
(prereq: DIG4376C)
DIG4369C 3D ANIMATION IV: ACTING AND
DIALOGUE
This course focuses on expanding students’
knowledge of creating animation
performances with character and emotion.
Students delve into the intricacies of
character acting through animation and lipsynch to dialogue. Students produce 3D
character animation scenes that develop
their ability to make acting choices, show
thoughts and emotions of character, and
reinforce applying the principles of
animation to the scene. Components of the
course include phonemes and visimes,
facial landmarking, emotional transitions,
blinks and solid facial animation
procedures. (prereq: DIG3362C)
DIG4373C 3D LIGHTING & TEXTURES I
This course improves on the tools, concepts
and techniques taught in previous 3D
animation courses. Students apply lighting
and surface attributes, improving previous
work using techniques developed in this
class. (prereq: DIG3323C)
DIG4376C 3D LIGHTING & TEXTURES II
In this class students expand their
knowledge of materials, textures and
lighting strategies to add detail and realism
to objects without adding complexity to the
model. Students simulate real world
surfaces containing reflection, radiosity,
and other effects. (prereq: DIG4373C)
DIG4381C PARTICLES/ DYNAMICS/PAINT
EFFECTS
This course improves on the tools,
concepts, and techniques learned in
previous 3D animation courses. Students
analyze advanced animation techniques
involving particle and dynamic systems.
Students research basic compositing
techniques. (prereq: DIG3354C)
DIG4383C ADVANCED 3D GAME
ANIMATION
Students continue to develop animation
skills for use in a video game environment.
Students study facial animation for low
polygon characters. Students also study the
basics of a physics engine to apply realworld motion to objects and characters
such as gravity, mass, fluids, cloth, and soft
and rigid body objects. Students develop
research methods specific to video game
creation. (prereq: DIG3368C)
DIG4525C PRODUCTION STUDIO 1
Students build upon previously learned
foundation skills in broadcast design and
visual effects by simulating a real-world
production environment. The course
emphasizes both the competitive and
collaborative aspects of production as well
as various professional methods,
procedures, techniques, skills, resources,
and equipment. (prereq: DIG3394C)
Page 121 of 183
DIG4526C PRODUCTION STUDIO 2
disciplines used in compositing, broadcast
design, animation, and related industries.
Students continue to work as a production
team in developing a finished professional
product for use in their portfolio.
(prereq: DIG4525C)
DIG4566C INTERACTIVE GAME
PROTOTYPING
Students work in a controlled production
environment and are exposed to production
pipeline processes including naming
conventions, work flow processes, and tight
deadlines. Students develop and use
problem-solving skills to handle real-world
production issues that arise in every game
development cycle. (prereq: DIG3797C)
DIG4567C ADVANCED GAME
PROTOTYPING
In this continuation of Interactive Game
Prototyping, students work in teams to
create and produce a stand-alone game
prototype demonstrating game design
principles acquired in preceding courses.
The culmination of course work is the finetuning of designs, scripting, storyboarding,
and production skills. (prereq: DIG4566C)
DIG4568C GAME PROJECT PLANNING
The student is part of a design team of their
choosing that creates a game document
and production plan for a game of their
creation. The game concept and documents
are presented to a panel of faculty and/or
department chairs for approval. (coreq:
DIG4567C)
DIG4591C MULTIMEDIA PRODUCTION AND
DESIGN GROUP
This course is the application and
implementation of business, design, and
programming skills students have acquired.
Students work in production groups to
examine business problems and must
determine the source problem, ascertain a
working solution, and implement a
functional model complete with proposals,
design, technical, and quality assurance
documentation. Design solutions
appropriate to a targeted market are
emphasized. Critical analysis, problem
identification, and idea refinement are the
focus in producing a portfolio quality
project.
(prereq: COP4813C or DIG4123C)
DIG4593C ADVANCED WEB DESIGN
Students plan, construct and program
advanced interactive media presentations
utilizing CSS and AJAX to be delivered over
the internet. Students further analyze the
expectations of the business community in
areas such as server implementations and
security implications. Students also
research further strategies in advanced
scripting. (prereq: CGS3803C)
DIG4594C APPLICATION QUALITY AND
ASSURANCE
In this course students implement the
concepts and techniques used in testing,
managing, deploying and supporting
interactive media applications. Through
theories presented, students construct
testing procedures, effective
communication/production protocols, and
support issues surrounding production.
(prereq: CAP4970C )
DIG4781C ADVANCED INTERFACE DESIGN
Students will implement advanced
computer interface design models. This will
include the theoretical principles of the
human-computer interface, practical
techniques for designing and delivering
effective interfaces, and working in a target
user driven project environment. (prereq:
DIG3103C and CGS3875C)
DIG4784C INTERACTIVE MOTION
SCRIPTING
This is an advanced course that applies
motion graphics as an integrated interactive
solution; students script interaction,
sequencing, and motion for interactive
projects. Optimization is a critical
consideration in the creation of the usercentered experience. (prereq: DIG2250C)
DIG4795C GAME PRODUCTION I
Using the game documents and production
plan approved in the game project planning
course, the design team begins the
production of 1-3 working levels of the
game of their creation. (prereq: DIG4568C)
DIG4796C GAME PRODUCTION II
Continuing the production of the 1-3
working levels from Game Production I, the
design team must finish and present their
game to a panel of academic professionals
and/ or professionals from the gaming
industry. (prereq: DIG4795C)
DIG4798C HARD SURFACE
& ORGANIC MODELING
In this advanced modeling course for the
gaming industry, students create game
assets with a focus on polygon and/or face
count. Research plays an integral part in
modeling for the gaming industry and in this
course students demonstrate an
understanding of creating game assets
within a specific context and technical
guidelines. (prereq: DIG3372C)
DIG4799C ADVANCED MATERIALS AND
LIGHTING
This is an advanced level design course with
a specific focus on lighting techniques and
advanced material application within a
game engine. Concepts covered in this
course include alpha channels, specularity
maps, cube maps, UVW wrapping, and
baking textures. (prereq: DIG3792C)
DIG4951C VISUAL EFFECTS PORTFOLIO
PREPARATION
Students create treatments, scripts,
storyboards, and shooting schedules for the
acquisition of source material for their final
portfolio. (prereq: completion of 135 credit
hours In program) (coreq: DIG3542C)
DEVELOPMENT
This course continues the refinement of the
student’s digital portfolio. Students focus
on meeting digital portfolio requirements
and showcasing their individual strengths
and areas of specialization. Students apply
time-management, technical, and artistic
skills to complete a final video. (prereq:
DIG4951C)
DIG4953C GAME ART PORTFOLIO
PREPARATION
This course identifies and organizes
elements of the student’s body of work in
preparation for portfolio development and
presentation. Students develop an action
plan and begin its implementation. Working
closely with the instructor, areas of focus
are defined, areas of improvement are
targeted and project management
emphasized. Students continue to build
upon their level design and creation skills
based on principles acquired in preceding
courses. Using scripts combined with
animation skills, students work with more
complex elements within the level. (prereq:
Completion of 135 credit hours in program)
DIG4954C ILLUSTRATION DIGITAL
PORTFOLIO
The student creates a digitally based
portfolio and website. Multimedia
presentation techniques and self-promotion
are covered showcasing the individual
students area of specialization. (prereq:
GRA1852C)
PRESENTATION
This course completes the presentation of a
cohesive and professional working demo
and game document requirement for
graduation. Industry professionals
participate in evaluations. Students finalize
and present their portfolios to the
instructor and a faculty committee for
review and critique. (prereq: DIG4957C)
Page 122 of 183
DIG4956C MEDIA ARTS PORTFOLIO
PRESENTATION
This course completes the presentation of a
cohesive and professional print and digital
portfolio that meets requirements for
graduation. Industry professionals
participate in evaluations. Students finalize
and present their portfolio to the instructor
and a faculty committee for review and
critique. (prereq: ART4952C)
DEVELOPMENT
This course focuses on the refinement of
the student’s portfolio to meet portfolio
requirements while showcasing their
individual strengths and areas of
specialization. (prereq: DIG4953C)
PRESENTATION
Students compile the digital portion of their
portfolio to assess its strengths and
weaknesses, to correct those weaknesses,
and to augment the student’s strengths to
produce a professional demo. The student
applies time- and resource- management
principles to the development and
production of visual special effects projects.
(prereq: Permission by Director or faculty)
ENC0020 INTRODUCTION TO
COMPOSITION
This course focuses on strengthening
grammatical, mechanical and usage skills in
writing. The course provides basic
instruction and practice in writing oneparagraph and multi-paragraph essays. (3
credits. Does not count toward
degree/diploma)
ETD1106C MECHANICAL DRAWING
Requiring students’ knowledge of basic
drafting skills, the course stresses isometric
and oblique representations, sections, and
auxiliary views. (offered SP & FA quarters)
(prereq: IDD1100C)
ETD2320C COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
This course introduces students to
mechanical drafting using computer
software through lectures, demonstration,
and hands-on experience. Sketches are
transformed into accurate layouts for
production. The course explores the uses
and influences of the computer in industrial
design. (offered FA & SP quarters) (prereq:
[CGS1160C or ETD1102C]
ETD2343 COMPUTER AIDED MODELING
Computer-aided design and drafting are
applied to the development of 3D models
and layouts for prototypes. The course
introduces coordinate systems, solid
modeling, and computer rendering. (offered
WI & SU quarters) (prereq: ETD1106C &
CGS1160C)
FADA308 FUNDAMENTALS OF BUSINESS
This course is structured to investigate the
wide ranges of both traditional and
emerging business topics and
considerations, preparing students as they
transition into a media and design
profession. Concepts of professionalism,
expected business needs, an understanding
of self-marketing, proposals and project
management, and intellectual property and
contractual issues will be addressed.
FIL1104C SCRIPTING/STORYBOARDING
the production phase of an animation
project and explores the creation of
graphics, animation, and special effects in
film and video. The computer is utilized as a
pre-production tool for writing,
[treatments, scripts, and storyboard
descriptions] creating images, designing
storyboards, real-time animations, and
combining written and visual formats. A
brief history of 2D and 3D animation is
presented, with videotaped examples of
critical evaluation. (prereq: ART1300C)
FIL1552C FUNDAMENTALS OF EDITING
This course introduces students to video
editing of visuals and sound using video
recorders and players. Students practice the
techniques of dubbing, assembling, and
inserting visuals and sound from source to
source and the fundamentals of non-linear
editing. (prereq: CGS1160C)
FIL2108 MEDIA INTERPRETATION
& ADAPTATION
This course focuses on interpreting media
content and adapting original literary and
nonfiction work for media production.
Students employ critical thinking, problemsolving, research, and organizational skills
to create or recreate scripts for media
production. (offered WI & SU quarters)
FIL2553C NONLINEAR EDITING
This course covers the process of nonlinear
video editing. Using a computer and
appropriate software, students explore the
essentials of editing video and audio in a
digital environment, from digitizing to
outputting to videotape.
FIL2723C 2D ANIMATION II: APPLICATIONS
This course presents the techniques
necessary to produce an animation with a
purpose. Addition of multiple characters
increases the level of complexity and
necessitates a short storyline. Use of a
capture device, pencil tests, inking, and
other 2D animation skills are explored.
(prereq: GRA2854C & FIL1104C)
FIL2950C VIDEO PRODUCTION PORTFOLIO
PREPARATION
This course explores client-based
production from idea conception to
shooting of the project. Special emphasis is
placed on professional conduct as well as
on the application of high-end professional
video production techniques.
FIL2970C VIDEO PRODUCTION PORTFOLIO
Students compile their written and visual
pieces into a final portfolio. They complete
the shooting, editing, audio mixing, and
integration of graphic elements and special
effects for their video projects. Emphasis is
placed on the creative and professional
packaging of their portfolios. (prereq:
FIL2950C)
FIL3485C ART OF DIRECTING
This course provides an overall view of the
director in television, video, film, and
animation productions. Students take on
the tasks of a director in directing the
talent, script, camera, and production crew;
they experience production challenges
including keeping the production on
schedule and on time. Students also direct
short movies in class.
FIL3545C ADVANCED SOUND DESIGN
This course explores the methods and
techniques adopted by digital video
production professionals in the final design
and multi-track mixing process. Students
focus on automated dialogue replacement,
sound effects creation, and the final
layering and mixing process. (prereq:
RTV3217C)
FIL3700C INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL
VIDEO EFFECTS
This course covers the fundamental
concepts, terminology, and techniques of
special effects. From pre-visualization to
compositing, students explore the history of
engaging visual imagery in film, TV, and
business media. Classes consist of lectures,
demonstrations, and hands-on projects that
focus on the integration of live action
footage and special effects. (prereq:
RTV3203C)
FIL4363C DIGITAL FILM ANDAND
DOCUMENTARY
Students work in teams to produce a digital
drama or documentary film. Using an
original or adapted script, students must
plan out the whole process of production
but may choose to produce one or more
episodes of the long-form work. (offered SP
& FA quarters)
Page 123 of 183
FIL4471C DIGITAL VIDEO EFFECTS
This course focuses on designing and
creating special effects in media content
and delivery. Special effects elements are
employed to enhance storytelling and the
overall communication process. Working in
groups, students apply lens and filter
effects, professional camera mounts, digital
editing techniques, and compositing skills to
a variety of projects. (prereq: FIL3700C)
FIL4575C MANAGEMENT OF POSTPRODUCTION
This course covers the advanced technical,
theoretical, and aesthetic principles of
management of the post-production
process used in the editing of TV
documentaries and other programming.
The focus is on developing continuity,
building sequences, refining dramatic
structure, narration, and special effects.
RTV3255C)
FIL4600 MEDIA BUSINESS
This course examines the business side of
production in the TV, film, video, and
related electronic media industries.
Emphasis is placed on legal issues such as
copyright laws, permits, and contracts.
Students are also taught basic marketing,
sales, and budgetary constraints as they
relate to media.
FIL4746C DIGITAL CINEMATOGRAPHY
Students study and apply advanced
cinematic camera techniques and concepts
as they relate to various media applications.
Emphasis is placed on mastering specific
skills as they relate to single camera field
and studio productions. Students focus on
specific shooting situations that may
require specific support or camera gear and
are exposed to various camera systems and
shooting formats. (offered WI & SU
quarters) (prereq: RTV3203C)
FIL4951C DIGITAL FILMMAKING
PORTFOLIO PREPARATION
In this first portfolio course, students assess
personal strengths to establish a career goal
and decide how to organize their media
design and production work in a graduation
portfolio. Guided by faculty members, each
student assembles a preliminary portfolio
and identifies areas for more work and/or
content enhancement.
FIL4971C DIGITAL FILMMAKING
PORTFOLIO AND DEFENSE
Built on the preliminary collection of work
from Portfolio Preparation, this course
allows students to determine and design
the final organization and presentation of
the graduation portfolio. Each student
verbally presents their portfolio and
addresses audience questions as a format
of defense. (prereq: FIL4951C)
FIL4972C DIGITAL FILMMAKING SENIOR
PROJECT PRODUCTION
Students employ cumulative skills to
produce a significant, sophisticated digital
film in a chosen genre. Projects are
produced individually or in groups based on
the needs of the class as determined by the
instructor. (prereq: RTV3203)
FIL4973C DIGITAL FILMMAKING SENIOR
PROJECT POST-PRODUCTION
Students complete the comprehensive
project begun in Senior Project Production.
Students employ cumulative skills to edit
and post-produce a significant,
sophisticated digital film in a chosen genre.
(prereq: FIL4972C)
FIN3400 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
This course examines budgeting, shortterm and long-term financing, billing and
the economics of financial markets. (prereq:
GEB2011)
FND105 Design Fundamentals
This introductory course will explore the
principles of design, and introduce and
develop the creative process. Design
elements and relationships will be identified
and employed to establish a basis for
aesthetic sensitivity and critical analysis.
Design will be presented as a tool of
communication.
FND110 Observational Drawing
This course involves the observation and
translation of three-dimensional form into
two-dimensional drawings. Starting with
simple shapes and progressing to more
complex organic forms, students will build
skill levels in composition, line quality,
through the use of tone light and shadow.
FND120 Perspective Drawing
This course is a fundamental drawing
course where the students will explore
various art and media and learn to use a
variety of drawing tools with an emphasis
on perspective, where the students will
draw three-dimensional objects in one-,
two-, and three-point perspective. (prereq.:
FND110 Observational Drawing)
FND135 IMAGE MANIPULATION
In this introduction to raster-based digital
image manipulation, students become
acquainted with the concepts, hardware,
and software, related to digital image
acquisition, image editing, manipulation,
color management basics, masking,
layering, retouching, scanning and output.
FND150 Digital Color Theory
Introduction to the principles of color and
an exploration of color theory as it relates
to media.
FSS1010 CONCEPTS AND THEORIES OF
CULINARY TECHNIQUES
The fundamental concepts, skills, and
techniques involved in basic cookery are
covered in this course. Special emphasis is
given to the study of ingredients and
cooking theories. Lectures teach
organization skills in the kitchen and work
coordination. The basics of stocks, soups,
sauces, vegetable cookery, starch cookery,
meat, and poultry are covered. Emphasis is
given to basic cooking techniques such as
sauteing, roasting, poaching, braising, and
frying. (coreq: completion of TAPS or
current certificate documenting completion
of at least 15 hours of instruction in food
safety and sanitation)
Various wines and spirits are used as part of
the curriculum. These products are tightly
controlled and monitored in the storeroom
and kitchen. Participation in this program
may be limited by local drinking age
requirements. Please contact your campus
Dean for information.
FSS1290C GARDE MANGER
This course provides students with skills and
knowledge of the organization, equipment,
and responsibilities of the “cold kitchen.”
Students are introduced to and prepare
cold hors d’oeuvres, sandwiches, salads, as
well as basic charcuterie items while
focusing on the total utilization of product.
Reception foods and buffet arrangements
are introduced. (6 credits) (prereq:
FSS1743C and completion of TAPS or
safety and sanitation)
FSS1743C FUNDAMENTALS OF CLASSICAL
TECHNIQUES
The fundamental concepts, skills, and
techniques involved in basic cookery are
covered in this course. Special emphasis is
given to the study of ingredients, cooking
theories, and the preparation of stocks,
broth, glazes, and soups, thickening agents,
the grand sauces and emulsion sauces.
Lectures and demonstrations teach
organization skills in the kitchen, work
Page 124 of 183
coordination, and knife skills. The basics of
vegetable cookery, starch cookery, meat
and poultry are covered. Emphasis is given
to basic cooking techniques such as
sauteing, roasting, poaching, braising, and
frying. (6 credits) (prereq: FSS1010)
FSS1744C LATIN CUISINE
This course emphasizes both the influences
and ingredients that create the unique
character of selected Latin cuisines.
Students prepare, taste, serve, and evaluate
traditional, regional dishes of Mexico, South
America, and the Caribbean Islands.
Importance is placed on ingredients, flavor
profiles, preparations, and techniques
representative of these cuisines. (prereq:
FSS1743C or Approval of Dept. Director)
FSS1745C AMERICAN REGIONAL CUISINE
The course reinforces the knowledge and
skill learned in the preceding classes and
helps students build confidence in the
techniques of basic cookery. The
development of knife skills is accented.
American Regional Cuisine explores the use
of indigenous ingredients in the preparation
of traditional and contemporary American
specialties. The concepts of mise en place,
timelines, plate presentation, and
teamwork in a production setting are
introduced and accentuated. Timing and
organization skills are emphasized. (6
credits) (prereq: FSS1743C)
FSS1747C ASIAN CUISINE
character of selected Asian cuisines.
traditional, regional dishes of the four
regions of China, Japan, Korea, Vietnam,
Thailand, and Indonesia. Importance is
placed on ingredients, flavor profiles,
preparations, and techniques
representative of these cuisines. (prereq:
FSS1743C or approval of Dept. Director)
FSS2067C INTRODUCTION TO BAKING &
PASTRY TECHNIQUES
This course is a combination of theory,
lecture, demonstration, and hands-on
production to provide an introduction to
baking and pastry techniques for use in a
commercial kitchen. Special focus is placed
on the study of ingredient functions,
product identification, and weights and
measures as applied to baking and pastry
techniques. Instruction is provided on the
preparation of yeast-raised dough mixing
methods, fillings, icings, pastry cream, and
finishing techniques. Emphasis is also
placed on dessert plating and presentation.
(6 credits) (prereq: completion of TAPS or
safety and sanitation).)
FSS2068C ARTISAN BREADS AND BAKING
PRODUCTION
Students are introduced to the fundamental
concepts, skills, and techniques of hearth
breads and the production of a working
bakery. Special significance is placed on the
study of ingredient functions, product
identification, and weights and measures as
applied to Artisan breads. Lectures and
demonstrations teach pre-fermentation,
sponges, and sourdoughs. (6 credits)
(prereq: FSS2067C or approval of Dept.
Director)
FSS2069C ADVANCED PATISSERIE AND
DISPLAY CAKES
Students explore the techniques of plated
desserts and the theory behind building
edible art for a la carte service, competition,
and banquet functions. Students also study
decorating techniques to produce a variety
of specialty decorated cakes. The proper
use of a pastry bag with various shape tips
to produce shells, stars, rosettes, and butter
cream roses are taught as well as the
design, assembly, and decorating of
wedding cakes. (6 credits) (prereq:
FSS2067C or approval of Dept. Director)
FSS2292C CLASSICAL EUROPEAN CUISINES
Through lectures, research,
demonstrations, and hands-on cooking,
students are introduced to the history,
menu terminology, cooking techniques,
ingredients, and presentation unique to
Classical French Cuisine. Timing,
organizations, mise en place, and plate
presentations are stressed. (prereq:
FSS1743C)
FSS2298C EUROPEAN CAKES AND TORTES
concepts, skills and techniques of European
cakes and tortes. Special significance is
placed on the study of ingredient functions,
product identification and weights and
measures as applied to pastry. Lectures and
demonstrations teach cake mixing methods,
filling, and techniques on finishing classical
tortes with various ingredient
such as marzipan, ganache and glazes.
(prereq: FSS2067C)
FSS2299C CHOCOLATE, CONFECTIONS,
AND CENTERPIECES
concepts, skills and techniques of
chocolates and confections. Special
significance is placed on the study of
ingredient functions, product identification,
and weights and measures as applied to
confections. Lectures and demonstrations
teach chocolate tempering, candy
production, and the rules that apply when
Page 125 of 183
creating centerpieces. (6 credits) (prereq:
FSS2067C)
image/photographic manipulation, and
page layout. (prereq: none)
GRA1106C GRAPHICS
This course explores vector-and rasterbased illustration, typographic skills, and
image manipulation. Students study
scanning, tracing, typography, and
illustration. Computer skills are used to
define and solve a variety of creative and
conceptual problems. Students also study
the use of vector and raster images for use
in digital design. (prereq: CGS1160C)
FSS2746C WORLD CUISINES
character of selected International cuisines.
traditional, regional dishes of Europe,
Africa, the Mediterranean, and Latin
America. Importance is placed on
ingredients, flavor profiles, preparations,
and techniques representative of these
cuisines. (prereq: FSS1743C)
GADA302 MOBILE & SOCIAL GAME DESIGN
Students will learn to create custom
solutions for content delivery on mobile
devices by developing web application and
device application user interface tools
optimized for delivery on mobile devices.
Students will work in class with mobile
devices to learn needs and restrictions of
designing for mobile devices as well as test
student-designed interfaces. (prereq:
GADA243 or VGPA213 or INSA305)
GEB2011 FUNDAMENTALS OF BUSINESS
In this course, students are introduced to
the fundamentals of business.
Macroeconomics, labor relations, time
management, human resources
management, budgeting and basic
marketing principles are covered.
GEB2216 BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS
This course focuses on the need to
communicate professionally in a general
business environment. Students will
develop their written communication skills
by learning to write memos, letters,
proposals, presentations and various
electronic communications clearly and
effectively. Oral presentations and team
communication skills will be practiced.
(prereq: ENC1101 and [COM1041,
COM1442 or SPC1608])
GRA1103C INTRODUCTION TO VISUAL
DESIGN APPLICATIONS
This course is designed to provide an
introduction to the industry-related graphic
software applications currently used in the
design professions. Students will be
introduced to basic skills and technical
devices for electronic production of visual
communication. The three areas of
concentration are digital illustration,
GRA1120C LAYOUT
The student uses a variety of design media
to develop an awareness of the use of visual
elements in design.
GRA1121C ART FOR REPRODUCTION
This course introduces the student to
computer-based page layout and the
printing process. Students study
terminology used in the industry, page
design and layout, digital typography, and
preparing files for print. (Prereq: GRA1120C
& PGY2803C or GRA1120C & PGY1801C)
GRA1190C CONCEPT DEVELOPMENT
This course identifies the components of
the design process and focuses on creative
problem identification, research methods,
and creative solutions. The course includes
design purpose and function and a
concentration on creative solution
generating exercises.
GRA1762C MAPS, MATTES, MASKS
This course continues the development of
digital imaging skills with an emphasis on
advanced techniques in masking, maps,
channels, and compositing. (prereq:
ART1211C or GRA1106C or PGY2803C)
GRA1852C COMPUTER GRAPHICS
This course explores vector-based
illustration and typographic skills. Students
develop their skills in scanning, tracing,
typography, and illustration. Computer skills
define and solve a variety of creative and
conceptual problems.
GRA1853C TYPOGRAPHY
The focus of this course is the application of
historical and digitally current trends in
typography within the context of symbolic
communication. The use of type in relation
to graphic design elements is explored.
(coreq: GRA1852C)
GRA2109C HISTORY OF GRAPHIC DESIGN
This course examines the influences of
societal trends, historical events,
technological developments, and the fine
arts on contemporary graphic design,
illustration, typographic design, and
photography. The students insight into a
variety of major design influences through
lectures, supplied visual examples, and
independent research. (prereq: ENC1145 or
LIT1020)
GRA2125C GRAPHIC DESIGN
APPLICATIONS
This course concentrates on practical
industry applications of design principles
and theory. Professionalism and attention
to detail in creating production-ready art
are emphasized and refined. (prereq:
GRA2858C)
GRA2130C INTRODUCTION TO USER
CENTERED DESIGN
This course examines the design and
implementation of the computer-user
interface to create effective interactive
media content. The student creates
compelling and potent designs using
advanced interface elements such as color
and organization of content. This course is
an application approach to practical theory.
GRA2159C GRAPHIC SYMBOLISM
This course examines the importance of
graphic symbols in design. Logos and other
symbolic images are examined in historic
and contemporary contexts. Graphic
elements including typography, simplified
imagery, and abstract shapes are then
utilized to create individual symbolic
designs and compositions. (prereq:
ART1201C or DIG1132C & GRA1852C)
GRA2171C PACKAGE DESIGN
This course defines the role of packaging in
product identification, presentation, and
production. The unique challenges of
adapting typography, illustration, design,
and materials to three-dimensional forms
are explored. Research includes marketing
objectives, structural integrity, and display
aesthetics. (prereq: GRA1852C &
PGY2803C)
GRA2175C PROMOTIONAL DESIGN
The emphasis of this course is on the role of
design in creating promotional materials
through the use of folders, brochures,
flyers, and unconventional media.
Marketing research, objectives and
strategies are explored and applied.
(prereq: GRA2177C)
GRA2177C CORPORATE IDENTIFICATION
This course explores the application of a
company logo onto business-related items
and how to reinforce perception and
awareness in the industry. Students acquire
an understanding of corporate graphics and
company image creation. (prereq:
GRA2199C)
Page 126 of 183
GRA2199C SIGNS, SYMBOLS, & CIPHERS
Students examine and create signs and
symbols, marks, gestures, and words that
represent abstract ideas and concrete
images. Students explore the use of
symbols in art and communication.
Additionally, students study the history of
symbolism.
(prereq: GRA1852C)
GRA2854C 2D ANIMATION I: PRINCIPLES
the production phase of an animation.
concepts of traditional [cel] animation.
These concepts are applied through
storyboarding and character studies
including the production of a short original
2D animation. (prereq: ART1331C)
GRA2195C ADVERTISING DESIGN
This course defines the role of design in an
advertising context. Advertising strategy
based on media and marketing realities is
investigated and applied. Students explore
specific areas of advertising, including
consumer goods, consumer service, and
public service. (prereq: GRA2177C)
GRA2858C DESKTOP PUBLISHING
In this intermediate course, the student
focuses on competencies in computerbased page layout. Emphasis is placed on
design, multiple page layout, type
management, high-end output file
management, and production. (prereq:
GRA1121C, PGY2803C)
GRA2412 MEDIA LAW
This course closely analyzes current laws
affecting media works including copyright
law, trademark law, and laws regarding
libel, slander, publicity rights, privacy rights,
misappropriation, unfair competition,
moral rights, and trade disparagement.
(prereq: ENC1101)
GRA2931C DESIGN HONORS
This course focuses on practical industry
design solutions using a variety of media.
The Design Honors Group is a functioning
advertising agency and works on in-house
projects as well as projects for nonprofit
organizations. Students are selected to
participate in the group based on high
grade point averages and recommendations
from instructors. (Prereq: 3.0 CGPA and
instructor approval)
GRA2508C COLOR SYSTEMS FOR GRAPHIC
DESIGN
This course explores the nature and use of
color as it applies to art and design
Emphasis will be placed on the examination
of color systems and models, the physical
and expressive uses of color, color
relationships and practical applications.
(prereq: GRA1852C )
GRA2584C DIGITAL MEDIA PRODUCTION
This course explores alternative methods of
page compositions and functions, utilizing
various layout and presentation
applications for interactive media such as
forms and interactive files which include
information, graphics, music, and video.
Through hands-on projects, the student
navigates through the applications while
employing complex issues relating to print
verses web production.
(prereq: GRA1121C)
GRA2841C FUNDAMENTALS OF WEB
DESIGN
This course focuses on the fundamentals of
web site creation and usage. Differences
and limitations of browsers, hosting
services, internet terminology, file transfer
utilities, domain name services and internet
usage are covered. Introduction to the
basics of HTML are discussed as well as on
overview of graphic web applications such
as a WYSIWYG editor in the development of
an introductory web site. This course is for
students outside the Web Design &
Interactive Media. (prereq: Approval of
Department Director)
GRA2950C GRAPHIC DESIGN
PORTFOLIO/PROFESSIONAL
DEVELOPMENT
The student completes a graphic design
portfolio in preparation for job interviews.
Working individually with the instructor,
each student selects representative pieces
that showcase a unique style and
demonstrate overall conceptual abilities
and technical competencies meeting the
requirements of the Associate of Science in
Graphic Design program. (prereq:
completion of 72 credit hours in program)
GRA2954C DESKTOP PORTFOLIO
In preparation for job interviews, students
complete a graphic design portfolio.
each student selects representative pieces
that showcase a unique style and
demonstrate overall conceptual abilities
and technical competencies to meet the
requirements of the Associate of Science in
Graphic Design degree program. (prereq:
completion of 27 credit hours in program)
GRA3154C ADVANCED DIGITAL IMAGERY
This course enhances the students overall
illustration skills and reviews various styles
that combine traditional concepts with
computer technology. Discussions include a
more comprehensive knowledge base in
2D computergenerated techniques with
an emphasis on creating original imagery as
well as the manipulation of imported
images. (prereq: FND135 or PGY2803C)
GRA3176C COLLATERAL DESIGN
The role that collateral design plays in the
support of advertising campaigns is
introduced and developed. The student
explores various collateral design
techniques, direct mail, business-tobusiness, business- to-consumer, nonprofit,
and trade. The process of multiplepresentation techniques and media formats
are emphasized.
(prereq: GRA2125C)
GRA3202C CONTEMPORARY TYPOGRAPHY
Students study corporate and industrial
photography and the application of images
for the purpose of internal and public
relations. Through the production of inplant and location images students expand
their understanding of corporate and
industrial imagery. Students prepare the
images for print and digital delivery and
focus on meeting the corporate needs of
their clients. (prereq: GRA1853C &
GRA2125C)
GRA3224C PRINT PRODUCTION
TECHNIQUES
This advanced course in practical industry
design principles and theories focuses on
design and print situations. The emphasis is
on identifying production problems and
finding and preparing files for a service
bureau in a time-constrained industry.
Additional focus is placed on paper choice,
cross-platform use, and implementation of
multiple software programs to complete
numerous pieces in various design medias.
(prereq: GRA2125C)
GRA3521C CREATIVE WEB DEVELOPMENT
This course explores alternative methods of
web design, including typography, imaging,
and advanced asset management. Upon
completion of this course, students use the
web page user interface program to
effectively create pages with wellstructured HTML content. Emphasis is
placed on the design of multi-page layout
for various types of web sites. Through
hands- on projects, students navigate
through the program, while understanding
complex issues. (prereq: [PGY2803C or
PGY1801C or GRA1762C or PGY1892C or
DIG2790C or CTE2894C])
GRA3816C CONCEPTUAL THINKING
This course focuses on personal creative
problem solving and strategic thinking that
strengthen and expand the student’s
conceptual processes. Exercises and
industry-level projects in creative problem
solving and strategic thinking are employed
to develop the student’s conceptual
Page 127 of 183
processes. The focus is on critical analysis,
problem identification, and idea
refinement. (prereq: GRA1190C)
GRA3867C PHOTOGRAPHY/ ART
DIRECTION
This course provides a comprehensive
review of the role of the art director in the
visual marketplace. The primary focus is
placed on designing layouts using
photography to create editorial pages, and
ads that meet the specific needs of the
clients. (Prereq: PGY1103C and GRA2858C)
GRA4139 TIME-BASED DESIGN
Using industry standard tools, students
develop a body of work with an emphasis
on interactive animated web sites and
applications. Students are encouraged to
explore interactivity through the eyes of the
producer as well as the viewer and create a
positive user experience. During this course,
students will discuss and evaluate design
examples to further develop critical thinking
skills. Technical considerations such as
scripting, online distribution, dynamic
content and the integration of sound and
video are examined. (prereq: GRA2841C or
GRA3521C)
GRA4178C CORPORATE
COMMUNICATIONS
This advanced design course deals primarily
with the development of corporate imaging
and annual reports. Building on
competencies developed in Corporate
Identification, further development of the
corporate ID and its place in the graphic
standards manual is employed.
Understanding a corporate “look” in which
all aspects of a company’s communication is
unified (both graphic and otherwise) is the
objective. (prereq: GRA2858C)
GRA4196C INFORMATION MEDIA
PRODUCTION
This course prepares students to prepare
and present information to professional
audiences. Students acquire skills necessary
to develop, prepare and present graphics,
charts, copy and data. Professionalism and
presentation techniques are also covered.
(prereq: DIG2201C)
GRA4591C ART DIRECTION AND CREATIVE
PROCESS
The role of the art director in producing
multi- faceted design projects is examined.
A team environment further enhances
leadership, communication, and negotiation
skills. Emphasis is placed upon coordinating
creative efforts from concept to finished
product. (prereq: GRA3816C)
GRA4725C INTERMEDIATE INTERFACE
DESIGN
This course is a continuation of the skills
introduced in Creative Interface Design.
Advanced concepts and techniques of
interactive web-based multimedia
presentations incorporating action, script,
sound, graphics, and video are explored.
(prereq: GRA3873C)
GRA4930C HONORS STUDIO
Students execute advanced design concepts
based on various media. Using a
multidisciplinary approach, students
employ principles of design and interactivity
appropriate for the client and/or target
audience.(prereq: 3.0 CPGA and instructor
recommendation)
GRA4950C DIGITAL PORTFOLIO
This course begins the student’s
development of a digitally based portfolio.
Multimedia presentation techniques and
self-promotion are also covered. (prereq:
PGY2803C) Associate students only.
GRA4951C GRAPHIC DESIGN PORTFOLIO
PREPARATION
The student develops a graphic design
portfolio in preparation for a job interview.
each student begins the selection of
representative pieces that showcase a
unique style and demonstrate overall
conceptual abilities and technical
competencies that meet the requirements
of the Bachelor of Science in Graphic Design
program. (prereq: completion of 150 credit
hours in program)
GRA4952C GRAPHIC DESIGN PORTFOLIO
PRESENTATION
In preparation for job interviews, a graphic
design print and digital portfolio is
completed in this course. Working
student will select representative pieces to
discuss and refine. Emphasis is on
showcasing a unique style and
demonstration of conceptual abilities and
technical competencies that meet the
requirements of the Bachelors in the
Graphic Design program. (prereq:
GRA4951C)
GRA4953C SENIOR PROJECT
Students select an area of design and
develop a research project. The course
emphasizes quantitative research,
scheduling the project, methods of
presentation, and qualitative results.
Students present and defend a project
suitable for professional presentation.
(prereq: completion of 135 credit hours in
program)
GWDA101 APPLICATIONS & INDUSTRY
Web design and graphic design
applications, tools, and industry practices.
Includes file management practices, basics
of markup language and styling.
Introduction to illustration and image
manipulation software relevant to the web
design and graphic design industries.
GWDA111 INTRODUCTION TO LAYOUT
DESIGN
This class will concentrate on utilizing
design principles and theories in problem
solving, focusing on the importance of
layout composition. Emphasis will be on the
process of design development from
thumbnails to comprehensives, layout, and
the use of grid systems for multicomponent layouts. (prereq: GWDA112)
GWDA112 TYPOGRAPHY- TRADITIONAL
This course is an introduction of lettering
skills and the history and foundation of
letterforms. The placement of display and
text type in a formatted space, and the
relationship between the appearance and
readability of letterforms, are also studied.
Students will work in a traditional context
of hand-rendering type and will also be
introduced to contemporary typesetting
technology.
GWDA122 TYPOGRAPHY- HIERARCHY
This course is a continuation of the study of
traditional typography. Exercises and
projects focus on the hierarchical qualities
of typography. The development of
marketable, original, and creative problem
solving solutions will also be examined with
an emphasis on creative techniques.
Industry standard software will be used in
the development of digital typography and
hierarchal skills. (prereq: GWDA112)
GWDA123 PROGRAMMING LOGIC
Students acquire basic programming skills
needed to design, develop, and produce
practical applications with a specific
scripting or programming language. The
course addresses sound programming
practices, structured logic, and objectoriented concepts, including methods,
properties, events, and handlers. (prereq:
GWDA133)
GWDA132 INFORMATION ARCHITECTURE
An introduction to the concepts and
processes of planning interactive projects
that solve business and user needs.
Students research users, goals, competition,
and content, and develop the navigation
structure, process flow, layouts and labeling
systems that best address these needs.
They prepare and present a professional
information architecture proposal. (prereq:
GWDA133)
Page 128 of 183
GWDA133 FUNDAMENTALS OF WEB
DESIGN
An introduction to the terms, technologies,
trends, and best practices of the interactive
design industry. Students design, develop,
and upload a simple web site using HTML
and basic CSS. The importance of writing
valid and semantic code is emphasized.
Basic web site production stages and
requirements such as naming conventions,
file organization, project development life
cycle, and image optimization are also
covered.
GWDA202 INTERFACE DESIGN
An exploration of the synthesis of visual and
information design principles. This course
will examine the conceptual and practical
design of interfaces. Students discuss
interface design heuristics and user
interface patterns and explain their
importance. The components of the
interface design process such as sketches,
mood boards, wireframes, visual
comprehensives, and prototypes are
executed. (prereq: GWDA111)
GWDA204 INTRODUCTION TO WRITING
FOR INTERACTIVE MEDIA
This course covers the process of
copywriting for interactive media. Students
explore the role of the writer as an
individual or as a member of the creative
team.
GWDA243 OBJECT-ORIENTED SCRIPTING
Students will be introduced to JavaScript
utilizing the Document Object Model.
Refining and enhance programming skills
will be employed. The student gains
experience developing advanced
languages. (prereq: GWDA27)
GWDA273 INTERMEDIATE WEB DESIGN
Students expand their prior knowledge of
HTML and CSS by learning additional
methods for structuring and styling web
page content. The ability to style multicolumn layouts and various interface
components is explored. Students
participate in visual design critiques,
evaluate the designs and code of existing
websites, and use CSS to visually design the
presentation of HTML content. (prereq:
GWDA133)
GWDA283 ADVANCED WEB DESIGN
An exploration of advanced methods for
styling websites and creating page layouts.
This course will examine the practical
application of styling web page content,
understanding cross-browser compatibility,
and creating designs that display effectively
on various devices. (prereq: GWDA273)
GWDA303 INTERACTIVE MOTION
GRAPHICS
Students expand on the narrative structure
in a time-based environment. The advanced
principles and practices of digital audio &
media in an interactive design setting are
explored. Preparing and using current
digital audio and video programs for
delivery online is employed. Emphasis is
placed on the implementation via scripting
in an interactive authoring application.
(prereq: GWDA273)
GWDA353 SERVER-SIDE SCRIPTING
Through this course students learn
advanced programming skills. Students will
gain experience developing web
languages. Application in fundamentals of
Interactive Web development will be
explored. Students will be introduced to
concepts related to data-driven dynamic
web site creation based on Server Side
processing. Emphasis is placed on forms
and content management. (prereq:
GWDA273)
HFT2009 CAREER DEVELOPMENT AND
SUPERVISION
This course focuses on managing people
from the hospitality supervisor’s viewpoint.
The emphasis is on techniques for
increasing productivity, controlling labor
costs, time management, and managing
change. It also stresses effective
communication and explains the
responsibilities of a supervisor in the
foodservice operation. Students develop
techniques and strategies for marketing
themselves in their chosen fields. Emphasis
is placed on student’s assessing their more
marketable skills, developing a network
of contacts, generating interviews, writing
cover letters and resumes, preparing for
their employment interview, developing a
professional appearance, and closing and
follow-up.
HFT2454 FOOD AND BEVERAGE
OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
This course addresses front-of-the-house
operations and is designed to provide
students with an introduction from a
managerial perspective of providing
exceptional service to increasingly
sophisticated and demanding guests.
Included is a survey of the world’s leading
wines classified by type, as well as other
distilled beverages. Topics include the
management and training of personnel to
be responsible, professional alcohol servers,
product knowledge, the income statement,
job descriptions, sales forecasting, and cost
control. Students produce a complete
dining room and bar operation manual. This
project should be saved on disk or jump
drive, as it will be used during the Capstone
course or the development of a business
plan.
HFT2821 SUSTAINABLE PURCHASING &
CONTROLLING COSTS
This course introduces the student to the
methodologies and tools used to control
costs and purchase supplies. This course
helps the student value the purchasing,
planning, and control processes in the food
and beverage industry. Primary focus is on
supplier selection, planning, and controlling
costs, with an emphasis on the study of
sustainable products and approaches.
Topics include planning and controlling
costs using budgeting techniques, standard
costing, standardized recipes, performance
measurements, and food, beverage, and
labor cost controls.
HFT2842C A LA CARTE AND DINING ROOM
OPERATIONS
Introduces students to the A La Carte
kitchen, emphasis is on “a la minute”
method of food preparation and dining
room service standards. Industry
terminology, correct application of culinary
skills, plate presentation, organization and
timing in producing items off both a fixedprice menu and a la carte menu are
stressed. The principles of dining room
service are practiced and emphasized. The
philosophy of food is explored and
examined in light of today’s understanding
of food, nutrition and presentation.
(6 credits) (prereq: FSS1743C, FSS1745C,
FSS2067C, and HFT2454)
HFT2852 MANAGEMENT BY MENU
This course prepares future foodservice
managers by giving a clear picture of the
important role menu planning plays within
operations. It covers topics ranging from
menu development, pricing, and evaluation
to facilities design and layout. Students
benefit because good menu development is
crucial to the success of any foodservice
operation, i.e., a planning tool, a source of
operational information, and a
merchandising method for reaching
patrons.
Page 129 of 183
HFT3191C ART CULINAIRE
This course celebrates the culinary styles,
restaurants, restaurateur, and chefs who
are in the current industry spotlight. Their
style, substance, and quality are discussed
and examined. During the hands-on
production aspect of the class, students
have the opportunity to be exposed to
specialty produce and products. (prereq:
FSS1744C)
HFT3277 CLUB OPERATIONS
MANAGEMENT
This course provides students the basic
understanding of the organization and
management of various types of private
clubs including city, country, and other
recreational and social clubs. It also covers
the unique sensitivities required in
managing and operating the increasingly
lucrative club management market.
HFT3845 FUNDAMENTALS OF
PROFESSIONAL SERVICE
This introductory course provides students
with the basic skills required to serve guests
within various types of hospitality
environments. These skills include
technology, service styles, organization
skills, handling and storage procedures for
food and beverages and other supplies.
Communication methods between the front
and back of the house are also be
addressed. Emphasis is be is placed on
classic service techniques and how they
have evolved in the modern context.
HFT3915 CULINARY CAPSTONE
Through competencies developed with
previous related studies course work,
students develop a business plan for a
minimum one hundred-seat restaurant
focusing on operational aspects. The project
includes: Market Analysis and Marketing
Strategy, Operating Budget, Sales
Projections, Opening Inventories, Capital
Equipment, Standardized Recipes and
Costing for all standardized recipes, and
Menu and Facilities Design. The course
covers techniques for developing and
presenting sections of the plan. (prereq:
Approval of Department Chair)
HFT4221 HUMAN RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT
This course introduces the principles and
practices of human resources management
relevant to hospitality organizations with
emphasis on the entry-level manager’s role.
Topics covered include employment laws,
workforce management, compensation and
benefits administration, labor unions,
employee safety, diversity, and ethics.
HFT4284 QUALITY SERVICE MANAGEMENT
& TRAINING
This class examines the role of service in the
foodservice industry and explores how to
give quality customer service. Service
systems and training programs in quality
operations are examined through the use of
case studies and hypothetical scenarios.
The course covers employee training and
development from both a strategic and
operational perspective. The class
culminates by examining Charlie Trotter’s
service standards in what is often the bestrated restaurant in the United States.
HFT4285 GLOBAL MANAGEMENT
& OPERATIONS IN THE HOSPITALITY
INDUSTRY
This course provides students with an
introduction to the dimensions and nature
of the international hospitality industry. It is
designed to review the principles of
management and to apply management
theory to the global marketplace. Students
examine the social, cultural, political, and
economic environments within which
international hospitality operators compete
for survival and growth. Topics emphasized
include cultural dimensions of
management, international management
strategy, international marketing, and
international human resource
management.
HFT4292 INNOVATION &
ENTREPRENEURSHIP
This course provides an introductory
overview to the knowledge and skills
needed for entrepreneurship. The course
offers a chance to gain new knowledge and
skills about how to identify and pursue
entrepreneurial opportunities that can be
applied to a student’s own interests. Topics
include: how entrepreneurs find, screen,
and evaluate ideas and new business
opportunities. Creativity: imagination,
ingenuity; the ability to create; the act of
relating previously unrelated things; the
application of a person’s mental ability and
curiosity to discover something new.
Innovation: the introduction of something
new; the development of new processes,
methods, devices, products, and services
for use by oneself and/or others.
Entrepreneurship: the pursuit of
opportunity without regard to resources
currently controlled; the process of creating
value by combining resources in unique
ways to exploit opportunity. Involves taking
responsibility for implementing innovative
concepts.
HFT4295 LEADERSHIP AND
ORGANIZATIONAL DEVELOPMENT
Students examine leadership,
organizational management, and culture
with focus on the role of the mangers as
facilitators of change within the
organizations. The course emphasizes
the concepts of motivation, interpersonal
relationships, group dynamics, leadership,
and organization culture. Examination of
leadership styles, development of strategic
plans, and critical problem solving in the
hospitality industry are covered in the
course.
HFT4343 FACILITIES AND MANAGEMENT
DESIGN
This course provides students with
information related to hospitality facility
design and maintenance. Foodservice
layout and design is related to operating
issues, new building construction, and
renovations. Planning and design of
facilities including equipment, space and
functional relationships, cost and operating
efficiencies; emphasis on maintenance
programs, safety regulations, building code
requirements, and energy conservation.
HFT4403 INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING
PRINCIPLES
This course introduces the basic concepts of
financial accounting including the principles
upon which the determination of a
company’s net income and financial
position are based. The course presents the
accounting cycle, recording process,
financial statements, budgetary planning,
and performance evaluation. Basic financial
statements are introduced, the items
included in these reports, and the economic
events and accounting related to them. The
course provides information to facilitate
how to use and interpret accounting
information.
HFT4474 FOODSERVICE FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
In this course, students develop a working
knowledge of the current theories, issues,
and challenges involved with financial
management. Students are introduced to
the tools and skills that financial managers
Page 130 of 183
use in effective decision making. Topics
include budgeting, cash management, cost
concepts and behavior, investment analysis,
borrowing funds, and financial forecasting.
HFT4493 FOODSERVICE TECHNOLOGY AND
INFORMATION
This course is a survey course in foodservice
Information Systems and Technology (IS&T)
designed to introduce students to the many
diverse facets of IS&T in the foodservice
industry. Current systems and issues of
major importance in the field of IS&T are
considered as they relate to the foodservice
industry. Emphasis is placed on the
managerial and business aspects of IS&T,
rather then the technical perspectives. Core
topics include key foodservice systems (e.g.,
accounting and property management
systems, point-of-sale, sales and catering,
etc.), guest service and customer
relationship management (CRM),
knowledge management, and IS&T strategy.
HFT4503 HOSPITALITY MARKETING
This course is an introduction to service
marketing as applied to the hospitality
industry. The course covers the application
of basic marketing concepts, research
methods, and design and delivery of
marketing components for a hospitality
business. Topics included but not limited to
unique attributes of service marketing,
consumer orientation, consumer behavior,
market segmentation principles, target
marketing, product planning, promotion
planning, market research, and competitor
analysis.
HFT4603 LEGAL ISSUES AND ETHICS FOR
CULINARIANS
The course is designed to give the student
an overview of legal issues arising in the
foodservice environment. Students examine
laws pertinent to the
hospitality/foodservice industry and
investigate the relationship of these laws to
the administration of a service organization.
This course also identifies common ethical
dilemmas encountered by culinarians and
introduces the student to the foundations,
purpose, and content of ethical codes, and
approaches to ethical decision making.
HFT4802 CATERING AND EVENT
MANAGEMENT
fundamentals of catering, special events,
and sales in the hospitality industry. The
course focuses on understanding the
catering role within the hospitality industry
and the various catering disciplines.
Students also discuss topics such as
contracts, checklists, legal considerations,
staffing and training, food production, and
sanitation. This course is project driven
which requires significant creative and
independent work.
HFT4943 MANAGEMENT EXTERNSHIP
Students observe and participate in the
supervisory operation of a successful
foodservice business. They apply their
professional skills to gain experience in
order to enter and become successful in the
foodservice business. Emphasis is placed on
developing hospitality management skills.
HFT4865 EXPLORING WINES AND THE
CULINARY ARTS
This course provides an introduction to the
production of wine from vineyard to bottle
as well as a review of the basic grape
varietals that are used to make wine.
Through lectures, research, and tasting,
students are exposed to different types,
styles, and quality levels of wine. Students
become familiar with the world’s most
important wine regions and study the
common criteria by which wines from these
different regions are evaluated. This course
is designed to teach students the applied
approach to matching wine and food and
using flavors, textures, and components
present in food and wine as complementing
strategies. The course emphasizes menu
planning, preparation of foods, cooking
methods, and tasting wines with food.
HFT4916 CULINARY CAPSTONE/PORTFOLIO
Students continue and build on the
development of the operational aspects a
business plan started in the Associates level
Culinary Capstone course for a minimum
one hundred-seat restaurant by focusing on
the managerial aspects. The project
includes: Market Analysis and Marketing
Strategy, Operating Budget, Sales
Projections, Opening Inventories, Capital
Equipment, Balance Sheet, Income
Statement, and Cost Analysis, Standardized
Recipes and Costing for all standardized
recipes, Menu and Facilities Design. The
course covers techniques for developing
and presenting sections of the plan.
Business related competencies are
reviewed as necessary for completion of the
project. (prereq: Approval of Department
Chair)
IDD1031C DRAWING AND RENDERING
In this course students examine freehand
drawing techniques of industrial objects
using a variety of media such as pencil, ink,
and markers. Also, one-and two-point
perspective renderings of industrial objects
are applied to student designs. (offered FA
&SP quarters) (prereq: IND1403C)
IDD1032C INDUSTRIAL RENDERING
This course is an introduction to the
rendering techniques required for Industrial
Designers. Students apply various media
(markers, pastel, pencil) to realistically
visualize form, materials, and composition.
The emphasis is placed on communicating
design ideas and preparing client
presentations. (offered WI & SU quarters)
(prereq: IDD1031C)
IDD1033C ADVANCED INDUSTRIAL
RENDERING
In this course, students apply visualization
and presentation techniques used in the
industrial design profession. This course
promotes the skill of drawing quickly by
emphasizing visual note taking, generating
visual ideas, working from non-visual
sources, and establishing a method for
accurate freehand and perspective drawing.
(offered SP & FA quarters) (prereq:
IDD1032C)
IDD1100C INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL
DESIGN
This course introduces the concept of the
design process and how it is used in the
field of Industrial Design. The core elements
of problem solving, form development and
communication are introduced. The course
explores effective critiquing techniques to
help evaluate the effectiveness of designs.
Basic drafting using mechanical drawing
tools to refine elementary drafting skills,
including perception of scale and dimension
is covered.
Page 131 of 183
IDD1101C PRODUCT DESIGN
Students investigate the processes of
universal product design. They examine
how products are developed, incorporating
concept, working drawings, and model
making. Prototype development, mass
production, and marketability are covered.
IDD1520C, IDD1031C)
IDD3020C COMPUTER AIDED INDUSTRIAL
DESIGN
This course explores the utilization of
design software to create realistic product
models. Emphasis is placed on tools that
allow the student to consider requirements
for form development and manufacturing.
ETD2343C)
IDD1130C EXHIBIT DESIGN
In this design and detailing course, students
create exhibits for commercial trade shows,
retail stores, and stage sets involving
product display, signage, graphics, lighting,
and traffic flow. (offered SP & FA quarters)
(prereq: IDD1101C)
IDD3021C COMPUTER MODELING FOR
MANUFACTURING
In this course, students utilize computer
software to create three-dimensional
models of products. Emphasis is placed
interpreting design intent while creating
surfaces that would be appropriate for
product manufacturing processes.
(prereq: ETD2320C)
IDD1200C MODELMAKING
The principles of modelmaking are
introduced using paperboard, wood, plastic,
metal, and other media. Students become
familiar with a variety of current tools and
techniques. (offered WI & SU quarters)
(prereq: IDD1100)
IDD1310C MATERIALS AND PROCESSES
Students explore the various materials and
their properties used in today’s products.
This includes plastics, metals, and natural
materials. Production methods associated
with manufactured products are examined
for their application and selection in the
design process. (offered SP & FA quarters)
(prereq: IDD1200C)
IDD1400 HISTORY OF INDUSTRIAL DESIGN
Students explore industrial design history,
evolution, and application. (offered WI & SU
quarters)
IDD1520C DEVELOPMENT OF FORM
Introduction to the understanding and
development of visual and tactile forms,
emphasizing the transformation of concept
sketches into three- dimensional form
studies utilizing a variety of materials.
(offered SP & FA quarters)
(prereq: IND1020C, IND1403C)
IDD1600C HUMAN FACTORS IN DESIGN
This course involves the study and use of
proper psychological and physical factors
that affect humans on a daily basis while
interacting with products, facilities, and the
environment. (offered WI & SU quarters)
(prereq: IDD1100C)
IDD2220C MODEL SHOP
This course focuses on the execution of
finished, painted, and detailed models from
original ideas developed in Intermediate
Product Design. Finished scale models are
made from wood, plastic, metal, and hard
foam. (offered FA & SP quarters) (prereq:
IDD1200C)
IDD3044C DIGITAL PRODUCT
ILLUSTRATION
Students explore and apply twodimensional graphic design techniques
through the utilization of the computer,
scanner, and various software programs to
better explain their products for portfolio
presentation. (prereq: IDD1101C,
IDD3045C)
IDD3045C COMPUTER DESIGN AND
GRAPHICS
This course explores practical applications
of graphics software for the Industrial
Design field. Students create twodimensional computer graphics to
emphasize product form imitating
traditional rendering techniques. Students
produce illustrations, drawings, logos, and
graphic layouts that can be used in project
presentations. (offered FA & SP quarters)
(prereq: CGS1160C, IDD1032C, or
IND1304C)
IDD3102C INTERMEDIATE PRODUCT
DESIGN
This course explores creative design
methods, problem identification, research,
setting objectives, and extensive problem
solving through conceptual ideation,
renderings, and finished models in scale.
IDD1032C, IDD1101C)
IDD3103C ADVANCED PRODUCT DESIGN
This advanced course utilizes the
experience gathered from previous courses
while emphasizing an extensive
understanding of the product development
and teamwork processes. The course
culminates with a finished model or
prototype. (offered SP & FA quarters)
(prereq: IDD3102C, IDD3020C, IDD1033C)
IDD3104C DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING
This course explores the design process
with real-world emphasis on
manufacturing. Students develop an
awareness of form and design elements
within the constraints of mass production
requirements. A product is developed
through the use of sketches, research,
detail drawings, models, and product
presentation. (prereq: IDD3102C,
IDD3020C)
IDD3105C GAME & TOY DESIGN
Through researching child and adult
attitudes and activities, students design and
develop action toys and games for
education and entertainment. Finished
concepts are presented through scale
models and prototypes of various materials
and media.
IDD3120C AUTOMOTIVE DESIGN
In this course, students use the methods of
the Automotive Designer to develop a
vehicle design. Lifestyle research is utilized
to evaluate a current vehicle package to
create a unique concept. Marker renderings
lead to a fifth-scale line drawing and clay
model for presentation. (prereq: IDD1101C)
IDD3140C ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN
In this design and detailing course, students
create shelters, pavilions, zoos,
playgrounds, landscape features, and
outdoor accessories. Emphasis is placed on
signage and both natural and man-made
lighting. (offered SP & FA quarters) (prereq:
IDD1101C)
IDD3150C PACKAGE DESIGN
FOR PRODUCTION
Design packaging is created through the use
of a good layout, images, typography, and
color in a cost-effective way. Students
explore the associations and the attributes
that customers think of when they see the
brand name of a product.
(prereq: IDD1101C, IDD3045C)
IDD3151C PACKAGING AND POINT OF
PURCHASE DESIGN
This course examines the concepts and
application of two-and three-dimensional
principles related to the design of
packaging, point-of-purchase, and
merchandising systems. (offered WI & SU
quarters) (prereq: IDD1101C, IDD3045C)
IDD3166C RECREATIONAL BOAT DESIGN
Students research the needs and desires of
people who use boating for recreational
purposes. A finished concept is presented
using the criteria developed in the research.
(prereq: IDD1101C)
Page 132 of 183
IDD3167C PERSONAL WATER CRAFT
DESIGN
The unique characteristics of personal
watercraft are studied in comparison to
traditional boat design. New concepts are
developed, considering the lifestyles and
activities of the boat enthusiast. (prereq:
IDD1101C)
IDD3190C PRODUCT BRAND DESIGN
Students explore brand identity, including
brand name, logo, positioning, brand
association, and brand personality. (prereq:
IDD3045C, IDD1101C)
IDD3300C STRUCTURAL DESIGN
principles and application of structure as
they relate to the design of products,
packaging, displays, and facilities via mockups in foam, cardboard, and wood. (offered
WI & SU quarters) (prereq: IDD1200C)
IDD3320C PRINCIPLES OF MECHANICAL
ENGINEERING
This course examines the principles of
engineering that help industrial designers
understand the mechanical properties of
the products they design. Fundamentals are
observed through test models and the
application to design principles. (offered SP
& FA quarters)
IDD3601C ANATOMY DRAWING FOR
INDUSTRIAL DESIGN
This course utilizes developed drawing skills
as they pertain to human factors in
relationships to products. (offered FA & SP
quarters) (prereq: ART1331C)
IDD4022C ADVANCED COMPUTER
APPLICATION
Students render complex shapes, 3D
models, and computer-generated
presentation of products, packages, and
displays. (offered SP & FA quarters) (prereq:
ETD2343C)
IDD4110C FURNITURE DESIGN
In this course, lifestyles and functional
considerations are examined to develop
furniture pieces for a particular
environment. Students design and
construct prototype pieces. (prereq:
IDD1101C)
IDD4112C CONVERTIBLE FURNITURE
DESIGN
In this course, students consider style and
function to design furniture for small living
spaces or multi- se areas. Design solutions
consider ergonomics, manufacturing
techniques and use of applicable hardware.
(prereq: IDD1101C)
IDD4180C ECOLOGY AND DESIGN
In this course, issues related to the
environmental impact of products are
discussed. The implications of man-made
and natural materials used in today’s
products and packaging are explored.
Students consider the creative reutilization and/or substitution of
manufacturing materials to promote a
sustainable environment (prereq:
IDD1101C)
IDD4900C GRADUATE PROJECT
APPLICATION & DEFENSE
In a continuation of Graduate Project
Research & Programming, students
prepare, present, and defend a graduate
project suitable for professional
presentation and address the preparation
of final portfolio projects. (6 credits)
(prereq: IDD4905C)
IDD4905C GRADUATE PROJECT
RESEARCH AND PROGRAMMING
Selecting an area from Industrial Design,
students research and program graduate
projects. Emphasis is placed on quantitative
and qualitative research, project scheduling,
methods of presentation, and qualitative
results. (6 credits) (prereq: completion of
135 credits)
IDD4910C INDUSTRIAL DESIGN PORTFOLIO
This course emphasizes graphic
presentation techniques with particular
focus on the development of a professionallevel portfolio utilizing various media.
Verbal presentations, resume/business card
preparation, and related presentation
techniques are also discussed and explored.
(graduation quarter)
IDD4950C INDUSTRIAL DESIGN PORTFOLIO
PREPARATION
Students determine the proper applications
to illustrate design ideas. Techniques for
effective design communication are
discussed. Drawings, renderings, and
photos are prepared for the graduation
portfolio. (offered WI & SU quarters)
(prereq: IDD3045C)
IDS2990 TRANSFER CREDIT MATHEMATICS/COMPUTER SCIENCE
This course number and prefix indicate the
award of prior learning credit in
Mathematics or Computer Science. This
course is repeatable up to 12 credits.
IDS2996 TRANSFER CREDIT - PROGRAM
ELECTIVE
This course number and prefix indicate the
award of prior learning credit in a program
area. (prereq: approval of program Chair)
IND1020C DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS
This course in graphic representation is
concerned with the structure of our
environment as the ultimate source of
form, and with effective communication in
the orld of art.
IND1024C DESIGN BASICS/COLOR
Students gain a working ability on which to
base design studies by combining the basic
principles and elements of 2D design with
color theory. Illustrated lectures and
applied projects enhance the creative
process. (prereq: IND1020C)
IND1403C DRAWING TYPES
Through the observation and application of
one-, two-, and multiple-point techniques,
students render three-dimensional forms as
they relate to form and space installations.
The fundamentals of light and shadow, line,
form, and value are explored through the
use of various drawing mediums.
IND1605C ERGONOMICS
This in-depth study of residential
components is an investigation of the
impact that physical dimensions, clients,
and functional requirements have on a
given design. (prereq: IND1405C, IND1024C)
IND3104 SURVEY OF ARCHITECTURE
Students learn the historical evolution of
architecture and how architectural forms
are affected by materials, religion,
government, technology, and weather.
IND3456C RENOVATION/ WORKING
DRAWINGS
Students produce a comprehensive set of
working drawings illustrating demolition as
well as new construction. (prereq:
ARC2461C)
IND4322C ADVANCED DELINEATION
This course is a further and continuous
study of drawing, construction, and media
application to rendered presentation
drawings. The work is individualized to
meet and address student requirements.
(prereq: IND1400C, IND1335C, IND1304C)
IND4472C AUTOCAD ADVANCED
PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES
This course uses the previously learned
advanced techniques to produce
presentation drawings both in 2D and 3D
format. Presentation drawings are rendered
using CAD advance technology. This course
also reinforces and further develops the
graphics and technical skills introduced in
Interior Design communications. Students
become proficient in computer rendering
and perspective, and have the opportunity
to work with various schematic design level
3D virtual reality and walk-through
Page 133 of 183
animations. Students customize AutoCAD to
increase speed and accuracy in operation.
Drawings are imported and manipulate in
other software (Word/Excel/
PowerPoint/Photoshop) and into the web.
(prereq: IND4469C)
INSA103 INSTRUCTIONAL TECHNOLOGY
INTEGRATION
This course explores the application of
technology in education and training and
covers strategies for effective integration of
technology into curriculum to meet the
needs of the audience or learner. Students
focus on the study of learning theories and
how they relate to the role of technology in
learning. Students learn to integrate
software, hardware, and a variety of
technologies in instruction. (prereq:
GWDA101)
INSA105 PSYCHOLOGY OF LEARNING
In this course students are introduced to
the psychological principles of human
learning: memory, conceptual processes,
motivation, and individual differences.
Current psychological and educational
models supporting learning goals,
retention, and mastery are discussed.
INSA115 LEARNING THEORIES &
STRATEGIES
In this course students explore the main
principles, concepts, research findings, and
practical applications of key learning
theories. Topics include historical
perspectives and contemporary influences
relevant to developing technology-based
learning environments for diverse learners.
(prereq: INSA105)
INSA125 FOUNDATIONS OF
INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN
This course explores instructional design
history, methods, models, and terminology.
Students learn to apply instructional design
principles to the development of instruction
appropriate to a specific audience. This
project-oriented course culminates in a
proposal for an instructional product
including prototype development and
testing methods. (prereq: INSA115)
INSA202 CURRICULUM DESIGN
development of skills essential for
curriculum design, planning, and
implementation. Emphasis is placed on
instructional strategies, learning styles,
instructional delivery methods, and
curriculum assessment. Students analyze,
develop, assess, and evaluate existing
curriculum with respect to relevant theory,
research, and practices. (prereq: INSA125)
INSA205 DEVELOPING INSTRUCTIONAL
MATERIALS I
This course identifies and describes
effective instructional materials used for
the delivery of curriculum in a variety of
educational settings. Students examine the
relationship between quality materials and
instructional goals and objectives. Students
create effective materials designed to
facilitate learning using a variety of digital
media to achieve instructional goals.
(prereq: GWDA111)
INSA302 USER EXPERIENCE DESIGN
An exploration of user experience design
focused on creating user-centered
experiences and developing products that
demonstrate current industry standards
and principles for experience design.
Students learn how to create user flow
documentation, wireframes for feedback
loops, and interface systems for multiplatform delivery. Students explore best
practices for user testing techniques.
(prereq: GWDA202)
INSA207 EVALUATION, ASSESSMENT &
ANALYSIS OF LEARNING
This course examines the basic principles of
assessment and evaluation of instruction.
Students develop conceptual frameworks
for authentic learning assessment, and
assess and evaluate knowledge and
problem solving strategies and tools.
Students employ formative and summative
evaluations for different learning
environments. They learn to determine
reliable and informative assessments of
student learning outcomes. (prereq:
INSA212)
INSA303 DIGITAL MEDIA PRODUCTION
This course examines the process of using
various media and technology to
communicate messages and tell stories.
Students apply the concepts of design,
audio, video, motion graphics, and still
photography for instructional purposes.
(prereq: GWDA101)
INSA212 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONAL
DESIGN
This course is a continuation of principles
and practices of instructional design.
Students learn to select, design, develop,
and manage online and multimedia based
instruction to meet the learning needs of
specific audiences. Disciplined approaches
incorporating learning theories, emerging
technologies, and instructional strategies
are covered. (prereq: INSA125)
INSA215 DEVELOPING INSTRUCTIONAL
MATERIALS II
Students further explore and create
instructional materials used in the delivery
of curriculum for a variety of instructional
settings. This course uses a variety of digital
media and delivery methods to provide
engaging and interactive experiences
designed to achieve specific goals and
objectives. Students focus on interaction
design and communicating effectively with
specific audiences. (prereq: INSA205)
INSA217 INTERACTION MANAGEMENT
This course compares and evaluates
techniques used to keep learners engaged
in curriculum delivered through online,
hybrid, and on-ground instructional models.
Students identify and discuss strategies that
address the management of learning
environments for diverse learners. Students
examine solutions for optimal interaction
and leaning outcomes. (prereq: INSA105)
INSA305 FOUNDATIONS OF GAME-BASED
LEARNING
This course examines the theory and the
design process of creating educational
games and explores the social and cultural
implications of using educational games.
Students learn to apply pedagogical
elements into the narrative as well as
understand the other key elements such as
mechanics, technology, and aesthetics in
the game design process. (prereq: INSA302)
INSA307 INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH
METHODS
This introductory course to research
methods and practices provides students
with an overview of research terminology,
data collection, data analysis, and ethics.
Focus is placed on an introduction to
various research designs including
experimental, non-experimental,
quantitative, and qualitative research
methods. Emphasis is placed on research
methods and instruments of measurement.
(prereq: ENC1101)
INSA313 LEARNING MANAGEMENT
SYSTEMS
This course is an overview of learning
management systems. Students work in a
learning management system to plan,
implement, and assess a specific learning
process, as well as create and deliver
content, monitor user participation, and
assess user performance. (prereq:
GWDA353)
INSA317 INSTRUCTIONAL TECHNOLOGY &
DESIGN PROJECT MANAGEMENT
This course is an examination of the key
components of instructional design project
management; project needs analysis,
implementation, integration, timeline, and
cost management of instructional design
Page 134 of 183
projects. Students study initial project
planning through development,
implementation, and reassessment.
(prereq: INSA313)
DESIGN CAPSTONE I
This capstone course focuses on the
application and integration of skills and
knowledge learned in courses within the
Instructional Technology & Design program
to real world situations. Students create a
formal capstone project which includes a
creative brief, objectives, strategies, and
assessments for learning. This course allows
students to apply the theories/principles of
learning, instructional strategies, learner
characteristics, and appropriate technology
to extend learning. (prereq: INSA317)
DESIGN CAPSTONE II
In this course students develop and
evaluate the capstone project prototype
designed in Instructional Technology &
Design Capstone I. Execute a sessional
presentation of the prototype through a
panel of faculty and industry professional
committee defense, public presentation of
the capstone project. Proficiency
demonstrated in both core and general
education courses through a written, oral,
and visual presentation. (prereq: INSA327)
INSA406 INTERNSHIP
Through a field internship experience,
students will be able to apply their skills in a
real and practical situation. The main
objectives of the internship are to allow
students the opportunity to observe and
participate in the operation of successful
businesses related to their fields of study.
The students will gain the experience they
need to enter the field when they graduate.
(prereq: By Permission)
INSA409 PORTFOLIO
This course prepares students for the
transition to the professional world by
helping them compile a professional
portfolio, apply marketing techniques,
strategies, and creativity to showcase
conceptual abilities and technical
competencies in their chosen fields.
Working individually with an instructor,
each student will select representative
projects showcasing work that reflects a
unique style and developing them further
as needed. Particular emphasis is placed on
the assessment of marketable skills,
designing storyboards, creating professional
design layouts, creating interfaces,
audio/video elements, resumes, and print
materials to support their interactive
portfolios. (prereq: INSA402)
INSA412 SPECIAL TOPICS IN
INSTRUCTIONAL TECHNOLOGY & DESIGN
This course examines emerging concepts
and methodologies used in instructional
design. Students will research and discuss
the potential impact on technological,
social, and cultural change. Students will
research differences in demands in
instructional design by geographic market.
INTA101 ARCHITECTURAL DRAFTING
This course is an introduction to the basic
drafting techniques, terminology, and
symbols used on drawings, including use of
drafting equipment, lettering, plan and
elevation construction with an emphasis on
proper line weight, quality, and scale.
INTA102 INTRODUCTION TO INTERIOR
DESIGN
Students are introduced to the
responsibilities of today’s interior design
professional. Assignments require the
application of the elements and principles
of design for interior spaces to create
aesthetic solutions. Basic lessons in
ergonomics, space planning, and human
factors introduce the skills used to make
functional and purposeful design decisions.
INTA103 CAD I
principles and operation of computer-aided
drafting to produce floor plans, elevations
and other components of construction
drawings. (prereq.: INTA101)
INTA105 SKETCHING & IDEATION
Students visually conceptualize design
solutions through rapid sketching in this
course. (prereq.: FND120)
INTA107 HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE,
INTERIORS & FURNITURE I
This course covers the evolution of
architecture, interiors, furniture, and design
from the ancient world to the mid-19th
Century. The cultural, political, social,
and/or economic conditions of the times
are included.
INTA111 SPACE PLANNING
This course begins the design series by
introducing the interior design process
including programming, schematics, design
development, space planning and alternate
design solutions. (prereq.: INTA101)
INTA112 DESIGN BASICS 3D
This course explores the basic elements and
principles of three-dimensional design.
Students will use traditional and /or digital
tools to help them visualize their designs
volumetrically and apply 3D design
elements to the spatial envelope. (prereq.:
INTA101)
INTA122 TEXTILES
This course explores the nature of manmade and natural materials used to
produce textiles for use in interior design.
Content includes discussion of fibers, yarn,
fabrics, finishes, design methods,
construction, and proper application of
these materials from technical,
environmental, and aesthetic approaches.
INTA201 MATERIALS & SPECIFICATIONS
This course explores materials and finishes
utilized in interior applications through
lecture, demonstrations, and/or field trips.
Various methods of specification and
estimation are covered. Students research
and assess performance criteria including
aesthetics, function, and environmental
factors. (prereq: INTA122)
INTA202 PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES
This course explores alternate methods of
creating and producing interior design
presentations. Combining a variety of
software, reproduction methods, and digital
rendering techniques, students explore
ways to manipulate images into a cohesive
graphic presentation. (prereq.: INTA103)
INTA203 CAD II
Students will enhance their CAD skills while
increasing their speed and problem solving
capabilities. Students will gain proficiency in
computer-assisted drafting through
progressively complex applications.
(prereq.: INTA103)
INTA207 HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE,
INTERIORS & FURNITURE II
This course covers the development of
architecture, interiors, furniture, and design
from the Industrial Revolution to the
present. The cultural, political, social,
and/or economic conditions of the times
are included. Assignments provide
opportunities to recognize how the styles of
the past continue to influence design today.
INTA211 CODES & REGULATIONS
This course studies the principles, policies,
and practices required by regulatory bodies
and jurisdictions having authority over
interior construction building, fire codes
and ADA regulations as they apply to
interior design projects.
INTA212 RESIDENTIAL DESIGN I
This course explores the design of
residential interiors as a problem solving
process, with applications to a variety of
residential interiors. Areas of study include
concept development, human factors,
programming and space planning, color,
furniture and finish selection as well as
Page 135 of 183
concepts of universal design and
sustainability. (prereq.: INTA111)
INTA222 HUMAN FACTORS
This course covers the principles and
considerations related to human factors,
universal design, anthropometrics,
ergonomics and the psychological response
of users to interior spaces.
INTA232 LIGHTING DESIGN
This course covers a comprehensive study
of the various natural and artificial lighting
techniques as they apply to interior
environments. (prereq.: INTA111)
INTA242 COMMERCIAL DESIGN I
This course is the design and presentation
of a commercial project with emphasis on
the workplace environment. (prereq.:
INTA111)
INTA252 INTERIOR DETAILING
In this course students study the materials
and fabrication techniques involved in the
design and construction of interior details.
(prereq.: INTA203)
INTA262 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS I
contract document process for interior
spaces. (prereq.: INTA203)
INTA302 RESIDENTIAL DESIGN II
of a complex residential project with an
emphasis on historic precedent. (prereq.:
INTA212)
INTA303 DIGITAL MODELING I
This course introduces students to 3D
modeling software as a communication
tool. Students produce design solutions
volumetrically as part of the design process.
(prereq.: INTA202)
INTA306 PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE
This course presents the principles
governing the business, legal, and
contractual aspects of the interior design
profession. (prereq.: Approval of
Department Director/Program Coordinator)
INTA312 GLOBAL DESIGN
This course covers the research and
application of global design and the study of
different cultures as they relate to design
issues and concerns. (prereq.;: INTA111)
INTA313 DIGITAL MODELING II
This course compliments the skills gained in
3D Modeling. Students apply camera and
lighting techniques as it applies to interior
environments. (prereq.: INTA303)
INTA322 BUILDING & MECHANICAL
SYSTEMS
This course is a study of the materials,
principles and sustainable concepts utilized
in basic construction, building, and
mechanical systems for interiors. (prereq.:
INTA211)
INTA332 ENVIRONMENTAL &
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN
This course covers the principles and
practices of sustainable and environmental
design as applied to a design project.
(prereq.: INTA242)
INTA342 COMMERCIAL DESIGN II
of a complex commercial project with
emphasis on universal and barrier free
design. (prereq.: INTA242)
INTA352 HOSPITALITY DESIGN
of team-based hospitality project with
emphasis on innovation and creativity.
(prereq.: INTA342)
INTA402 SENIOR STUDIO I
Students select a subject based on their
individual career aspirations and develop a
project of a substantial scope. Emphasis is
on real-world needs that could be better
met through more responsible interior
design and architecture. Content includes
problem identification, analysis of user
needs, observation and information
gathering. Ultimately a design program and
schematic solution are prepared that will be
further developed into a complete design
solution in Senior Studio II for an interior
environment that will better support the
psychological and physiological health,
safety and welfare of the public. (prereq.:
Approval of Department Director/Program
Coordinator)
INTA406 INTERNSHIP
(prereq.: Approval of Department
Director/Program Coordinator)
INTA409 PORTFOLIO
This course aims to prepare students to
seek entry-level employment within the
industry by assisting them with the
development and presentation of an
interior design portfolio that reflects the
stated exit competencies. Students will
demonstrate an advanced skill-set in areas
as process, conceptual thinking, design,
web design, craftsmanship, and other skills,
as projects are refined and assembled into a
cohesive, comprehensive body of work.
Particular emphasis will be placed on
identifying short- and long-term
professional employment goals, industry
and professional related resources and
standards, portfolio development and
presentation strategies. (prereq.: Approval
of Department Director/Program
Coordinator)
INTA412 INSTITUTIONAL DESIGN
of an Institutional Project with emphasis on
anthropometrics, human factors, and
human behavior. (prereq.: INTA342)
INTA422 SENIOR STUDIO II
In this culminating studio course, students
continue the development of a viable
solution for the project initiated in Senior
Studio I. Skills from the entire program are
leveraged into a final portfolio project
motivated by environmentally sound, costeffective and responsible design practices.
(prereq.: INTA402)
INTA432 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS II
This course expands upon the concepts
examined Construction Documents I.
Students produce an advanced set of design
drawings to support their senior studio.
(prereq.:INTA262)
MAAA213 3D MODELING
Through critical analysis, the student will
apply basic design principles to the solution
of visual problems using elements of 3D
design. The student will conceptualize 3D
coordinate systems, construct 3D models,
and apply them to geometric construction.
(prereq: FND150 or FND135 or SDVA102)
MAAA232 3D ANIMATION
Students are introduced to basic 3D
animation techniques. Topics to be covered
include hierarchical linking, keyframing,
function curves, animated modifiers, basic
morphing, animated cameras, and an
introduction to character animation.
(prereq: MAAA213)
MAN2024 FASHION BUSINESS
MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
This course develops the student’s
knowledge and practical experience in
current business theory and business
practices. (prereq: CTE1760, ENC1145, or
Approval of Dept. Chair)
MAN3143 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT –
LEADERSHIP
A study of human resources management
from the perspective of influencing and
Page 136 of 183
motivating others. (offered WI & SU
quarters) (prereq: MAN2024)
MAN3240 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR
This course is an examination of human
relations theory and individual, group, and
organizational performance in relation to
the organizational structures of
contemporary businesses and public
agencies. (prereq: PSY2012)
MAN4801 ENTREPRENEURSHIP
The organization, management, and
promotion of a business is examined with a
focus on the development of professional
skills in client interaction, contracts,
estimates and invoicing, budget, taxes and
legal issues. Emphasis
is on the process of developing career goals
and actions to reach the potential of
successful freelance or an outright business.
(prereq: ENC1145)
MAN4871 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
This course focuses on the management
strategies designed to integrate the basic
disciplines of business through case analysis
and other methods. The course also helps
students discover how to establish goals
based on long-term and short-term
strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and
threats. (prereq: MAR2612)
MAR1010 FUNDAMENTALS OF
MARKETING
This course addresses the fundamental
concepts and principles of marketing. The
overview of marketing provided helps
students place their knowledge in a
framework to understand how each
component contributes to the strength and
utility of a marketing plan. Students also
learn how to identify how world events and
cultural assumptions influence marketing
and advertising.
MAR2411 PERSONAL SELLING
This course focuses on the essential skills
and knowledge one needs to effect a sale,
as well as the ways that the sales pitch can
be focused to solve customer problems.
This course also covers persuasive
communication techniques in the area of
advertising.
MAR2612 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING
RESEARCH
The use of the marketing research process
as a tool for solving advertising problems is
the focus of this course. The source of data,
sampling procedures, questionnaire design,
data collection and analysis, and who uses
the information and how is covered.
(prereq: MAR1010)
MAR2720 WEB MARKETING
This course focuses primarily on marketing
on the web, addressing the elements and
requirements of information distribution,
advertising or sales in the Interactive Media
medium. Students study how to use
traditional marketing theories and
strategies as well as how to modify those
strategies for utilization within the demands
and opportunities unique to the Web.
MAR3156 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING
This course examines global marketing
opportunities, problems, and strategies that
impact the international environment. In
addition, students study international
marketing concepts, cross-cultural
sensitivities, political and legal influences,
economic considerations, and how these
concepts relate to decision making in an
international environment. (prereq:
MAR1010)
MAR3322C CAMPAIGN ADVERTISING
This course defines the role of design media
in an advertising context. Students are
introduced to informational and
administrative approaches in the
development of advertising that include
marketing objectives and goals. Campaign
strategies and class projects are based on
marketing realities as applied to print,
broadcast, out-of-home, and other media
applications. A final project in which teams
create an entire ad campaign is presented
to an audience of faculty, peers, and field
professionals. (prereq: (GRA3867C &
GRA2195C) or (MAR2612 & RTV2107C)
MAR3323 MEDIA PLANNING AND BUYING
Media as part of a delivery channel for a
marketing message is the focus of this
course. Topics include media as critical to
the fulfillment of the overall marketing
strategy, cost effectiveness, and alternative
and new media. (prereq: MAR1010)
MAR3414C DESIGN SALES
Students explore techniques in the selling
process, focusing on the marketing and
merchandising of design products.
Students investigate consumer motivation
and lifestyle influences and prepare a
formal sales presentation based on this
research. Students develop skills in
communication, acquire in-depth product
knowledge, study how to differentiate
between features and benefits, prepare for
sales calls, explore various presentation
methods, including multi-media formats,
and practice techniques for overcoming
objections and closing the sale. (prereq:
MAN2024)
MAR3500 CONSUMER BEHAVIOR
This course examines the cultural, social,
and individual variables involved in
consumer behavior. It also reviews how
they are incorporated into buyer decision
processes and marketing practices. Areas
covered include emotional hot buttons,
mass appeal, snob appeal, and the
bandwagon effect. (prereq: MAR1010)
MAR3730 E-COMMERCE BUSINESS
Students compare traditional and electronic
sales outlets to develop a clear
understanding of the differences and
similarities between businesses in this new
environment. Students apply traditional
principles where appropriate and discover
and apply a new fundamental
understanding to developing e-Commerce
environments. Marketing on the Web,
addressing the elements and requirements
of information distribution, advertising, and
sales are also covered. This course is based
on intensive case studies of sites on the
web as well as lecture.
MAR3939 CURRENT TOPICS IN FASHION
MARKETING
This course examines specific, current areas
of fashion marketing (i.e., niche marketing)
and gives students an opportunity to look at
this area in-depth. Students study through
lecture, field trips, hands-on experience,
and experimentation. A final project is
created in the specific area studied. (offered
SU & WI quarters) (prereq: MAR1010)
MAR4800 BRAND MARKETING
& STRATEGY
This advanced course focuses on the
essential concepts, skills, and strategies of
brand marketing. Emphasis is placed on
understanding consumer needs and
motivations in a changing marketplace to
support sales, increase brand recall,
recognition, awareness and repositioning.
In addition, the factors that make a brand
successful, such as price pressure,
fragmented markets and media, and
proliferating competition are discussed.
(prereq: MAR1010)
MKA1041 INTRODUCTION TO RETAILING
This course provides an overview of the
retail environment. It examines and
addresses basic terminology and concepts
related to retail trends, traditional and nonstore retailing, operations, and planning.
MKA2100C VISUAL MERCHANDISING
Students develop creative merchandise
presentations to strengthen brand image
and build sales of merchandise.
MKA3101C STORE PLANNING
Students implement and evaluate the
elements that combine to make a
successful store layout: traffic patterns,
Page 137 of 183
furnishings, fixtures, and security. (prereq:
MKA2100C and CTE2810)
MMC1124 MEDIA CONCEPT
DEVELOPMENT
This course covers the fundamentals of
media script writing, development of visual
elements, and the entire process of
creating, designing, and producing media
content for targeted audiences and
intended delivery systems.
(prereq: ENC1101)
MMC3008 MEDIA DELIVERY SYSTEMS &
DISTRIBUTION
This course addresses the end part of media
production: delivery and distribution.
Students study a variety of media delivery
methods and examine the relationship
between delivery systems and distribution
methods. They also evaluate the relative
efficiency, cost, and effectiveness of each.
(offered SP & FA quarters) (prereq:
MAR1010)
MRKA101 SURVEY OF MARKETING &
ENTERTAINMENT MANAGEMENT
This course is designed to introduce the
definition, function, process, and scope of
event and media management. Key
entertainment industries are investigated
and entry-level employment opportunities
and career paths are examined.
MRKA104 BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS
This course will explore the strategies and
techniques of writing various types of
professional quality business
communications including letters, memos,
proposals and reports. Students will
examine methods for organizing ideas,
clarifying purpose and communicating
appropriately with a target audience. An
emphasis will also be placed on the ethical
and cultural challenges of international
business communications. (prereq:
ENC1101)
MRKA111 OFFICE SYSTEMS
This course is designed to teach the
Microsoft Office Suite; specifically Word,
Excel, PowerPoint and Outlook. Students
will explore building, editing and
manipulating documents and business
presentations and employ proper file
management techniques.
MRKA121 NETWORKING & CLIENT
MANAGEMENT
This course prepares students to become
effective networkers and communicators in
the entertainment industry, as a means to
acquire new clients, as well maintain
sustainable business relationships. Creative
thinking and interpersonal skills will be
explored through the stages of client
research, outreach and follow-through.
Person-to-person and digital methods will
be employed to develop a strategy that
addresses the needs of the client.
MRKA141 ENTERTAINMENT BUSINESS
ACCOUNTING
This course will examine the nature and
purpose of financial principles as they relate
to the entertainment industry. Particular
emphasis will be placed on the accounting
cycle and analyzing year end income
statements. (prereq: FADA308)
MRKA203 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
This course will introduce the student to the
basic concepts of managing projects of
different type and scale, which could
include leading cross-functional teams and
managing vendors, consultants, artists and
agents, internal staff, external team
members and other key partners. The
course will provide students with an
appreciation of the role and responsibilities
of a project manager and the skills needed
to initiate, plan, budget, collaborate with
others and successfully lead projects
through to completion. (prereq: MRKA111)
MRKA204 SCRIPTWRITING FOR EVENT
MANAGEMENT
This course offers an introduction into
scriptwriting for special events. The course
will define events and events marketing and
the different types of writing that may be
required in the successful planning and
accomplishment of events. Students will
practice different types of writing and
scriptwriting for events through example
scenarios and a final project. (prereq:
MRKA104)
MRKA205 MARKETING & PROMOTIONS IN
THE ENTERTAINMENT INDUSTRY
This course is designed to introduce
students to the use of marketing and
promotional strategies within the
entertainment industry. Students will
explore the use of integrated marketing
communications to be able to promote and
market celebrities, television, film, theater
and live performances as well as attractions
and experiences. (prereq: ADVA208)
MRKA213 PREPRODUCTION
Students are introduced to various
preproduction processes, including script
analysis, talent auditions and selection, site
selection, production scheduling (daily and
overall), equipment planning, legal and
marketing considerations, costing out a
project, creating a budget, and using project
management techniques and problem
solving. Developing teams and support
personnel is also examined in relation to
the preproduction process. (prereq:
MRKA141)
MRKA214 PUBLIC RELATIONS WRITING
This course will examine the basic forms of
persuasive public relations writing to
prepare students for the different types of
public relations activities that may be
required in any industry, from events and
media management, the arts and the
corporate world to other types of business.
(prereq: ENC1101)
MRKA223 PRODUCING & PRODUCTION
This course will provide an examination of
the producing practices necessary to
translate preproduction plans into
production outcomes. An entertainment
event simulation will promote the
examination and implementation of
production business, marketing,
advertising, legal, rehearsal, and
performance processes and procedures.
(prereq: MRKA213)
MRKA233 ARTIST MANAGEMENT
This course examines the role and scope of
the Artist Manager, by exploring the
research, organization, vision, planning,
negotiating and management skills needed.
Students will learn how the Manager acts
on the Artist’s behalf by maintaining brand
image, seeking out professional
opportunities, conducting business and
contracting with professional partners.
(prereq: MRKA121)
MRKA305 BUSINESS FOR THE
ENTREPRENEUR I
In this course, current paradigms of sole
proprietorships and other relevant models
of entrepreneurship are studied. Students
learn the basic principles and concepts of
the business, legal, and pricing aspects that
are specific to the entertainment manager
who assumes the responsibilities and risks
of a business. (prereq: FADA308)
MRKA306 EVENT MANAGEMENT I: MUSIC
& THEATER
This course explores the skills required to
research, plan and produce music and
theater special events. Students will
investigate career opportunities and key
interpersonal skills necessary for music and
theater event management. Creative
direction and business practices will be
applied to partnering the technical and
performing aspects of the event, within a
given framework. Tools and techniques will
be explored for researching, planning,
visualizing and budgeting. (prereq:
MRKA223)
Page 138 of 183
MRKA315 BUSINESS FOR THE
ENTREPRENEUR II
This course is an advanced practicum
focused on writing and presenting a
business plan targeted toward investors
using established business practices,
necessary legal requirements, and strategic
marketing concepts and principles. (prereq:
MRKA305)
MRKA316 EVENT MANAGEMENT II:
TELEVISION & FILM
In this course students will perform as
producer to create television and film
events that are based on pre-determined
parameters for budget and venue. The
process of production will be practiced from
early meetings and planning through the
final shoots. (prereq: MRKA306)
MRKA326 EVENT MANAGEMENT III:
CONFERENCES
In this course students will perform as
producer to create a corporate meeting
event that is based on pre-determined
parameters for budget and venue. The
process of production will be practiced from
early production meetings and planning
through the execution of the meeting.
(prereq: MRKA316)
MRKA336 INTERNSHIP
MRKA346 MARKETING & ENTERTAINMENT
WORKSHOP
Students in this workshop course will deal
with real clients, who are typically
representatives of non-profit organizations.
Guided by faculty, students meet with the
client to determine expectations and work
in a team to plan and produce all necessary
facets of an event. (prereq: MRKA223)
MRKA406 SENIOR PROJECT
Students will employ cumulative skills to
take a large-scale event from proposal
through production and create a capstone
work that demonstrates end competency
outcomes. Projects will be carried out
individually or in groups based on the needs
of the class as determined by the instructor.
(prereq: MRKA326)
MRKA408 ADVANCED PROMOTIONS
This course will explore advanced methods
of promoting a brand and developing media
strategies. Client/agency relations as well
as ethical considerations will be examined.
Students will also evaluate the effectiveness
of promotion strategies. (prereq: MRKA205)
MRKA409 PORTFOLIO I
Working with faculty, each student will
select representative projects, showcasing
work that reflects their personal style.
Particular emphasis is placed on identifying
professional employment and business
goals, as well as related strategies and
resources. A self-marketing campaign is
developed to include collateral promotional
materials and using select media resources
(prereq: MRKA326)
MRKA418 MEDIA BUSINESS PRACTICES II
This course will provide an advanced
examination of the laws governing the
marketing and entertainment industries.
Particular emphasis will be placed on
intellectual property rights, copyright
infringement, defamation, discrimination,
digital and international piracy, contracts
and unions. (prereq: DFVA208)
MRKA419 PORTFOLIO II
This course will guide students through the
process of compiling their work into
presentation media, integrating the thesis
project and business plan. It will also stress
the importance of professional
development and help students complete
their initial job search requirements and
business plans and to implement the final
phase of their self-marketing plan. (prereq:
MRKA409)
PGY1050 SURVEY OF PHOTOGRAPHY
This course is designed as an overview of
the history of photography and current
trends in the industry, including specialty
fields available to professional
photographers. Students begin to explore
the selection of their own areas of interest.
PGY1103C PHOTOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES
Students discover and explore the basic
principles of photography and its use in
graphic design through the creative
technical uses of the camera. Fundamental
functions, exposure, effect of the shutter
and aperture, composition for impact, lens
selection, and the qualities of light will be
covered. Students create images for their
own stock photography library including
backgrounds and textures. (prereq: none)
PGY1150C LARGE FORMAT PHOTOGRAPHY
Students become familiar with large format
photography and the view camera. Through
hands-on projects students begin to gain an
understanding of and technical proficiency
with the control and operation of the view
camera. (prereq: PGY1800C)
PGY1201C LIGHTING
Students are introduced to basic aspects of
lighting as it relates to photography and the
photographic process. Emphasis is placed
on quality, direction, measurement and
control of light and the effect on the
photograph. Basic techniques, applications,
and variations are demonstrated and
students acquire knowledge and skills
through the use of visuals, assignments, and
critiques. (prereq: PGY1150C, PGY1806C)
PGY1401C PHOTOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES
FOR GRAPHIC DESIGN
Students discover and explore the basic
principles of photography and its use in
graphic design through the creative
technical uses of the DSLR camera.
Fundamental functions, exposure, effect of
the shutter and aperture, film selection,
composition for impact, lens selection, and
the qualities of light are covered. Students
create images for their own stock
photography library including backgrounds
and textures.
PGY1800C PRINCIPLES OF PHOTOGRAPHY
WITH DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY
In this foundational course, students
identify the basic photographic tools of the
digital age and their intended purposes.
Students explore the principles of camera
operation to control photographic exposure
and image aesthetics while employing the
proper use of digital camera systems and
light meters. Additionally, students examine
photographs to identify their attributes and
learn to replicate these on their own
images. (coreq: PGY1806C)
PGY1801C INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONIC
IMAGING APPLICATIONS
While studying basic integrated media
capture and image manipulation using
industry- standard applications and
programs, students are introduced to
current operating system platforms.
Students utilize the internet as well as basic
archiving and storing of digital files. (prereq:
PGY1806C)
PGY1806C PHOTOGRAPHIC DESIGN
Students study the fundamentals of image
processing and explore timeless elements
that form the foundations of all design arts.
Using contemporary technology to produce
images, students become familiar
with basic production techniques and begin
to develop creative expression. Through
class discussion students examine their
own color images to identify components
that make images aesthetically pleasing.
(coreq: PGY1800C)
Page 139 of 183
PGY1811C COLOR MANAGEMENT AND
APPLICATIONS
Students explore basic color theory as it
relates to the optical characteristics of light.
Expansion on this foundation encompasses
the various color models used in electronic
imagery such as RGB, CMKY, and indexed
and LAB color. Color correction and
retouching techniques are refined. System
color management is stressed in all aspects
of the course. (prereq: PGY1801C)
PGY1892C DIGITAL GRAPHIC PRODUCTION
This course presents digital imaging input
and output techniques. Students study how
to digitize and capture images and produce
digital files for reproduction.
PGY2202C ADVANCED LIGHTING
Expanding skills developed in Lighting, this
course emphasizes advanced lighting and
metering techniques. Students study the
color qualities of light under various
conditions while focusing on using light to
create a mood, to tell a story, or to
communicate effectively.
(prereq: PGY1201C)
PGY2210C PORTRAITURE
This course introduces the student to basic
portrait techniques which are applicable
not only to general photography but any
field which includes photographing people.
The class practices classical posing and
lighting techniques in both studio and
outdoor situations. (prereq: PGY1201C)
PGY2221C ADVERTISING PHOTOGRAPHY
Students study the advertising industry and
the application of images for the purpose of
selling. Through the production of images
for magazine, billboard, point-of-sale, and
other advertising uses students expand
their understanding of advertising imagery
and shooting to layout. Students prepare
the images for print and digital delivery and
focus on meeting the advertising needs of
their clients. (prereq: PGY1050 and
PGY2202C)
PGY2223C CORPORATE AND INDUSTRIAL
PHOTOGRAPHY
Students study corporate and industrial
photography and the application of images
for the purpose of internal and public
relations. Through the production of inplant and location images students expand
their understanding of corporate and
industrial imagery. Students prepare the
focus on meeting the corporate needs of
their clients. (prereq: PGY1050 and
PGY2202C)
PGY2224C LOCATION PHOTOGRAPHY
This course is designed to familiarize
students with location photography
through the use of SLR, medium format,
and large format cameras. It offers students
an opportunity to gain technical proficiency
in the control and operation of various
location lighting equipment with emphasis
on portable electronic flash systems.
(prereq: PGY2202C)
PGY2232C CONSUMER PHOTOGRAPHY
Students study the consumer industry and
the creation of images for the purpose of
personal or private use. Through the
production of portraits, event photographs,
and photographs for other consumer uses
students expand their understanding of
consumer imagery. Students prepare the
focus on meeting the needs of their clients.
(prereq: PGY2202C)
PGY2271C STUDIO OPERATIONS
MANAGEMENT
Important business management skills and
a range of practical, legal, and ethical issues
for the self-employed professional
photographer form the basis of this course.
Students learn how to set up a business,
research potential clients and contacts, put
together price lists and invoices, and gain a
general understanding of client needs.
Course material includes
promotion, pricing, accounting, studio
overhead, and the development of a
business plan. (prereq: PGY2273)
PGY2273 THE BUSINESS OF PHOTOGRAPHY
In this course students study the basic
concepts of running a photographic-related
business. Emphasis is placed on legal and
pricing aspects that are peculiar to the
photographic industry. (prereq: Approval of
Dept. Chair)
PGY2274 ADVANCED BUSINESS OF
PHOTOGRAPHY
This course explores professional
development tools including resumes, cover
letters, networking, and interviewing.
Students develop individual plans for
marketing their talents and finding work
after graduation with an emphasis on
targeting markets to suit their personal
goals. (prereq: PGY2273)
PGY2470C PHOTOGRAPHY PORTFOLIO
PREPARATION
Portfolio Preparation provides students
guidance and direction in producing images
for their graduation portfolios. Creating
unique images that collectively
demonstrate a clear application of technical
skills and vision is emphasized throughout
the portfolio process. (prereq: Approval of
Dept. Chair)
PGY2600C PHOTOJOURNALISM
Students apply the basics of setting up and
shooting news, features, sports, and photo
essays in this course that focuses on
photojournalism within the editorial
market. Students study professional
examples of photojournalism to acquire an
understanding of the elements required in
each category. Each student creates a
picture story that demonstrates news
writing, photo editing, and layout skills
and delivers it to an FTP site for publication.
(prereq: PGY1201C)
PGY2650C EDITORIAL PHOTOGRAPHY
Students study the editorial industry and
the application of images for the purpose of
illustration. Through the production of
images for magazine, newspaper, and other
illustrative uses students expand their
understanding of editorial imagery.
Students prepare the images for print and
digital delivery and focus on meeting the
illustrative needs of their clients.
(prereq: PGY1050, PGY2202C)
PGY2802C INTERMEDIATE ELECTRONIC
Using techniques and skills developed in the
introductory course, this course allows
students to expand their skills in
contemporary and emerging technologies
of imaging. Students are expected to
integrate previously learned techniques and
skills with newly acquired information and
design skills to produce unique images.
(prereq: PGY1801C)
PGY2803C DIGITAL IMAGING
This course explores the realm of digital
image manipulation. Students learn to
manipulate photographic and other images
to create concise advertising and graphics.
The focus includes scanning, photo
restoration, working in layers, and special
effects overlay
PGY2830C PRINTING
Printing expands on the competencies of
color management and applications by
integrating a variety of current output
methods commensurate with industry
needs. Students apply their contemporary
output knowledge and skills to refine black
and white printing skills and utilize print
theory to create a benchmark for quality
digital output. Students acquire
proficiencies in file preparation, image
resolution selection, device profiling, paper
selection, and soft-proofing techniques.
(prereq: PGY1811C)
Page 140 of 183
PGY3006 HISTORY OF PHOTOGRAPHY
Students study the development of
photographic processes from the origins of
the craft to contemporary technology. They
research key people that contributed to the
development of photography as an artistic
medium and how their influences drove
movements within the photographic
industry. Ultimately, students develop an
understanding of varied photographic
techniques in historical context and how
they apply to individual styles and then
create final projects that demonstrate the
connection between historical references
and commercial photography.
PGY3205C LIGHTING APPLICATIONS
Students solve lighting problems that arise
in the advertising, editorial, consumer, and
corporate and industrial markets. Students
apply combinations of lighting techniques
and light sources both in the studio and on
location. By studying existing commercial
images and researching available resources,
students create lighting schemes that
produce commercially viable images.
(prereq: PGY2202C)
PGY3217C CONTEMPORARY PORTRAITURE
Students apply the experience, skills, and
techniques acquired in Portraiture. To
further develop their visions, students
research a conceptual and stylistic approach
to props and location elements in
portraiture and produce portraits that
engage the viewer and convey meaning
through image style. (prereq: PGY2210C)
PGY3229 WEDDING AND EVENT
PHOTOGRAPHY
This course is an exploration of the history,
current trends, and photographic
techniques utilized in wedding and socialevent photography. This is accomplished by
lecture, demonstration, guest speakers, and
field trips. Students observe at least two
actual weddings (or one wedding and one
Bar Mitzvah). (prereq: PGY2273)
PGY3233C ARCHITECTURAL
PHOTOGRAPHY
Students study architectural photography
including planning, lighting, and
photographing interiors and exteriors. By
researching methodology, equipment,
aesthetics, and client needs students
determine the most advantageous
approaches to photographing a variety of
architectural challenges. Class participants
implement combinations of natural and
artificial lighting while managing
composition, styling, and use of props to
maintain integrity of architectural moods
and elements. (prereq: PGY3205)
PGY3234C FASHION PHOTOGRAPHY
While implementing their technical and
photographic skills students produce
commercially viable images of clothing and
accessories. Students research industry
trends and apply what they have discovered
in the creation of their own fashion images
designed to meet client expectations. Each
student develops an awareness of and the
ability to create mood through makeup,
lighting, and set design in the studio and on
location. (prereq: PGY2202C)
PGY3275 ASSISTING FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
This course helps the student refine their
knowledge of the transition process from
student to working assistant and on to
emerging photographer. The course covers
methodology, equipment, aesthetic
approaches, client needs and relations,
portfolio, professional rates, and other
business issues. The course provides
practical experience in solving various real
problems encountered by studio and
location photographers as well as the major
disciplines of the industry.
(prereq: PGY2274)
PGY3278C IMAGE MANAGEMENT AND
PRESENTATION
While implementing the digital capture
workflow process, students develop
strategies to manage and present image
files. Through visual examples, assignments,
and critiques, students analyze many of the
technological challenges faced in today’s
photographic industry when managing an
assignment and preparing images for client
delivery; the students create solutions for
each challenge. Students use location and
studio assignments to improve their
understanding of the technology and
processes required for maintaining
sophisticated digital asset management
(DAM). (prereq: Approval of Dept. Chair)
PGY3823C ADVANCED ELECTRONIC
Using techniques and skills developed in
Intermediate Electronic Imaging
Applications, students explore advanced
emerging technologies and the various
professional uses of advanced digital
imaging. Students are expected to combine
previously learned techniques and skills
with newly acquired information and design
skills to produce unique digital images.
(prereq: PGY2802C)
PGY4104 CREATIVE CONCEPTS
Students concentrate on the exploration of
image concepts, content, symbolism, and
the narrative potential of photography as
they relate to culture and society. They
research and promote alternatives to the
single documentary style traditional
approach to photography. Students are
challenged to determine a wide range of
photographic solutions to problems that
arise while creating images for
communication and self-expression and
that reflect current industry trends and
contemporary culture. (prereq: PGY3006)
PGY4277C BUSINESS OPERATIONS AND
MANAGEMENT
Important business management skills and
a range of practical, legal, and ethical issues
for the self-employed professional
photographer form the basis of this course.
Students examine how to set up a business,
research potential clients and contacts, put
together price lists and invoices, and gain a
general recognition
of client needs. Course material includes
promotion, pricing, accounting, studio
overhead, and the development of a
business plan.
(prereq: PGY2274)
REFINEMENT
Through independent advisement, students
complete their graduating portfolios and
presentation materials in their designated
market of interest. (prereq: PGY4953C)
PGY4477C ART DIRECTED PHOTOGRAPHY
Students synthesize their image creation
talents with a production team to develop a
concept from inception to final product. In
collaborative exercises that present the
dynamics and complexities experienced
when involved with creative teams,
students must strategize with each other to
achieve their collective goal. Students
defend their roles in an environment where
the art director, not the photographer, is
responsible for the final outcome of the
assignment. (prereq: GRA1121C, PGY3205C)
PGY4484C EXHIBITION PRINTING
In this laboratory class participants produce
final portfolio and exhibition prints of
gallery quality. Attention is paid to quality
control as demonstrated in effective dust
and artifact- aberration, tonal and color
adjustment, archival preparation, and
gallery-quality presentation.
(Prereq: PGY4821C)
PGY4821C SPECIAL EFFECTS AND IMAGING
TECHNIQUES
Students continue to implement previously
learned imaging techniques and apply their
visual communication skills through the
application of sophisticated special effects.
They research, analyze, and plan visual
solutions to challenges associated with
imaging projects using a variety of software
and analog technology.
(prereq: PGY3823C)
Page 141 of 183
PRESENTATION
Continuing the portfolio construction
process, students prepare for transition
from the role of student to active
participant as an assistant or employee in
the photographic industry. Each student
develops methods and media to present
their work in a manner that meets
professional and creative goals.
(Prereq: PGY2470C)
PHOA101 PRINCIPLES OF PHOTOGRAPHY
Students will identify basic photographic
tools and their intended purposes, including
the proper use of aperture, shutter speed,
ISO, focal length, and light metering.
Students will analyze photographs and
produce their own visually compelling
images by employing professional
photographic techniques and digital
workflow.
PHOA222 WEB DESIGN FOR NON-MAJORS
Introduces some of the techniques, tools,
software applications, and technologies
associated with web development and
interactive design for web. Students learn
how to build a basic website using current
HTML standards while incorporating an
object-oriented programming language,
various multimedia, or other interactive
solutions. (prereq: PHOA102 or GWDA101)
PRWA101 PRINCIPLES OF RHETORIC
This course focuses on the concepts and
purposes of why we write, introducing a
historic overview, spanning from classical to
contemporary rhetoric, and applying
common principles of rhetoric. Students
engage in the creation of rhetorical
practices specific to oral, print, and
electronic/digital technologies and explore
rhetoric as both a productive and
interpretive art, including the concept of
visual rhetoric.
PRWA102 JOURNALISM
This course provides students with a
foundation in the skills and concepts of
journalism, including reporting, writing,
editing, design, and ethics for print and
electronic media. Students focus on the
philosophy of ethical journalism and its
function in society. Students build
teamwork, writing and analytical skills while
gaining a greater understanding of the
structural and business aspects of
journalism. In addition, students will
continue to hone their language skills,
focusing on grammatical nuances relevant
to journalists. 4 credits (prereq: ENC1101)
PRWA103 FOUNDATIONS OF
PROFESSIONAL WRITING
This course examines characteristics and
genres of professional and technical writing
through workplace models. Students
develop clear, persuasive documents by
employing successful rhetorical strategies
and building knowledge of English grammar
and usage. This course formulates writing
tasks as informational design and
presentation, and also addresses basic
computer skills, problem-solving skills, and
editing skills. (prereq: PRWA101)
PRWA104 MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS
This introductory course on marketing
communication provides an overview and
application of marketing communication
principles and strategies. Learners acquire a
wide variety of writing skills to effectively
communicate across traditional and new
media platforms. This course focuses on key
concepts and useful frameworks for
creating and managing an integrated
marketing communication plan. (prereq:
ADVA201)
PRWA107 MYTH & SYMBOL
Through reading and discussion of the
myths and symbols of ancient,
preindustrial, and contemporary societies,
students focus on diverse systems for
organizing human experience. The course
works within an interdisciplinary framework
drawing from anthropology, psychology,
literature, and religion as questions of
origins and the hero unfold. Students
explore the mythological patterns at work
in modern society and artwork. 4 credits
(prereq: ENC1101)
PRWA111 INTRODUCTION TO LITERARY
STUDIES
In this course students explore the basic
elements of fiction, poetry, and drama.
Emphasis is on reading literature to
perceive the techniques used in each genre,
to understand the basic theoretical
approaches to literature, to acquire the
vocabulary associated with literary
criticism, and to analyze and evaluate
literature. 4 credits
PRWA121 CREATIVE WRITING
Students critically address works of fiction,
including poetry and the short story form,
both formally and aesthetically, as well as
create their own original works using a
variety of formats. Emphasis is placed on
developing an understanding of narrative
components, structure, and complexity.
Students synthesize the critical thinking
skills and writing response skills developed
in English Composition. Discussion,
interpretation, and both creative and
critical written responses are emphasized in
this student-based course. 4 credits
(prereq: ENC1101)
PRWA202 THE LANGUAGE OF BUSINESS
This course is an overview of the
appropriate language of business
communications. Students learn best
practices for conducting negotiations, and
for writing professional reports, emails and
letters with a focus on specific rhetorical
situations. Students develop critical thinking
and problem solving skills through the
consideration of various real life business
situation scenarios. (prereq: PRWA103)
PRWA203 INTRODUCTION TO
COPYEDITING
This introductory course focuses on the
process and techniques of professional
copyediting. Students are introduced to the
role of the Copy Editor, as well as the skills
and knowledge of the practices, techniques
and various technologies used during the
editing process. ¶(prereq: PRWA103)
PRWA212 STORY WRITING
Students explore the role of author and
audience in the development of narrative
and character. Narrative issues such as
theme, character, conflict, imagery, and
story arc are explored through reading,
analysis, and writing of short stories.
Students cultivate their own storytelling
voice. 4 credits (prereq: ENC1101)
PRWA213 CONTENT MANAGEMENT FOR
WEB MEDIA
This advanced course focuses on writing for
web-based media outlets and how to use
content management systems for
organizing, managing, and sharing content.
Students learn how to establish a web
presence through an author platform using
platforms and social media for
advertisements, building readership, and
becoming part of web communities.
(prereq: PRWA222)
PRWA222 LIFESTYLE WRITING
This course introduces students to multiple
topics and approaches to lifestyle and
feature writing for various media platforms.
Students develop further understanding of
structure, story, narrative, and general
interest. They apply methods of
interviewing, observation, and research
skills necessary to successful feature
writing. (prereq: ENC1101)
PRWA302 THE EDITORIAL PROCESS
The course covers the process of editing
from typescript through final proof.
Students focus on the skills and knowledge
of the practices, techniques and various
technologies required of the professional
editor to prepare and arrange manuscripts
Page 142 of 183
for publication. Students work
independently and collaboratively as an
editor in response to project demands.
(prereq: PRWA203)
PRWA303 THE PUBLICATION PROCESS
In this course students design and produce
a publication. Strategies of promotion and
distribution will be introduced. Students
examine publishing in the context of 21st
century technologies, including publication
software and e-publishing. (prereq:
PRWA302)
PRWA304 COMMUNICATION IN THE
GLOBAL MARKETPLACE
In this course students adopt a multidimensional view on the similarities and
differences in the way people from
different cultures think, act, and
communicate. This course introduces
theories of differences in belief, cultural
practices, values, and ethics. Emphasize
audience, purpose, and tone in
communication between politically,
culturally, and ethnically diverse people.
(prereq: PRWA103)
PRWA305 SENIOR THESIS: CONCEPT &
DEVELOPMENT
Develop a concept and initial strategy for a
professional creative manuscript of literary
merit under the guidance and mentorship
of a faculty member. This class will function
primarily as a think tank dedicated to
defining, examining, discussing, and
furthering the ideas presented, culminating
in a thesis proposal that must be approved
by thesis committee. (prereq: By
Permission)
PRWA307 ETHICS IN PROFESSIONAL
WRITING
In this course students examine
professional writing through ethical and
practical perspectives. They assess the
responsibilities of rhetoric and analyze how
technology influences reading, writing, and
the formation of writing communities
through applied rhetoric. Students also
evaluate social and ethical issues facing
technical and professional writers and
create sponsors of literacy. (prereq:
PRWA102)
PRWA312 CREATIVE NONFICTION WRITING
This course introduces the practices and
craft of creative writing, focusing on
nonfiction. Emphasis on translating
personal experience into effective
nonfiction prose, analysis of nonfiction
works across broad spectrum for content
and form, and ethical considerations that
emerge when writing from “real” life. 4
credits (prereq: ENC1101)
PRWA322 GRANT & PROPOSAL WRITING
This course concentrates on comprehensive
formal documents, specifically proposals,
grants, and reports, found in a variety of
organizations. Students explore the
synthesis of business, education,
government and non-profit organizations.
(prereq: PRWA103)
PRWA402 WRITING FOR HEALTH, SCIENCE
& TECHNOLOGY
Students are introduced to the art of
writing feature stories for various media,
focusing on contemporary issues of and
interests in health, science, and technology.
Students employ both traditional and new
media forms of communicating scientific
knowledge. (prereq: PRWA222)
PRWA403 SENIOR THESIS: CONTENT
CREATION
Students will create a draft manuscript of
literary merit under the guidance and
mentorship of a faculty member. The thesis
will develop from a proposal and reading
list and include an artist statement. A draft
will be reviewed and discussed in
preparation for Senior Thesis: Revision &
Defense. (prereq: PRWA305)
PRWA406 INTERNSHIP
PRWA408 THE WRITERS MARKETPLACE
This course explores the challenges and
various approaches to developing and
maintaining a professional writing life in a
range of contexts. Students explore
publishing opportunities and venues, how
to pitch work to editors and agents, and
preparing manuscripts for publishing.
(prereq: PRWA305)
PRWA409 PORTFOLIO
This course prepares students for entrylevel employment within the industry by
assisting them with the development and
presentation of a writing portfolio that
reflects the stated exit competencies.
Students demonstrate an advanced skill-set
in areas as process, conceptual thinking,
design, editing, craftsmanship, and other
skills, as projects are refined and assembled
into a cohesive, comprehensive body of
work. Particular emphasis is placed on
identifying short-term and long-term
standards, portfolio development and
presentation strategies. (prereq: PRWA403)
PRWA413 SENIOR THESIS: REVISION &
DEFENSE
Students revise their manuscript project
drafted in Senior Thesis: Content Creation
that culminates in a committee defense,
public reading, and/or other form of
display. (prereq: PRWA403)
PUR3008 PUBLIC RELATIONS AND
PROMOTION
This course examines the historical
development of public relations, showing
the principles, methods, and means of
influencing public opinion. (prereq:
ENC1102 or ENC1145 or Approval of
RTV1100 SCRIPTWRITING
This course focuses on the planning,
storyboarding, and scripting of video, radio,
and narrative film. Scripts are developed
with an emphasis on characterization,
plotting, writing for specific target
audiences, messages, and script format.
(prereq: ENC1101)
RTV1213C INTRODUCTION TO AUDIO
RECORDING
Students study the principles of audio
recording. Students examine the tools and
techniques used in digital multi-track
recording and mixing. This course includes
the basics of critical listening, microphone
technique, digital recorder and console
operation, signal flow, signal processing,
and general studio operations.
RTV1218 AUDIO TECHNOLOGY I
This course examines the principles of audio
signals and the equipment used to record,
process, and distribute audio content.
Students begin to develop an understanding
of signal flow of audio systems using block
diagrams. A survey of audio transmission,
manipulation, and delivery systems
including cables, connectors, basic stereo
mixers, microphones, amplifiers, and
loudspeakers are presented. (prereq:
RTV1213C )
RTV1224C PRINCIPLES OF LIGHTING
The student studies and applies lighting
techniques and concepts as they relate to
various media applications. Emphasis is
placed on mastering the skills required to
make appropriate lighting decisions under
a variety of field and studio situations.
There is also a focus on pre-production skills
as well as problem solving on the set.
Page 143 of 183
RTV1241C INTRODUCTION TO VIDEO
PRODUCTION
Students gain knowledge of the technical
terms of video production and industry uses
of basic video production equipment and
techniques.
RTV2107C WRITING FOR INTERACTIVE
MEDIA
This is a specialized writing course for
interactive design production. Students
identify the requirements of different types
of writing and the unique characteristics
and techniques of interactive media writing.
Students examine how various forms of
media work together
to reach audiences. Students further
explore how to use interactive media to
express ideas. These techniques are then
applied to various forms of interactive
media. (prereq: ENC1145 or ENC1102 or
LIT1020)
RTV2205C BROADCAST MEDIA
PRODUCTION
Students become responsible for every
phase of a news or magazine format
production, culminating in a broadcast to
the community through cable access,
closed-circuit, or other distribution
avenues. Each student assumes a role on
the production team in the pre-production,
production, and post-production phases of
the shows. (prereq: RTV2248C)
RTV2250C POST PRODUCTION
Students apply previously acquired skills to
digital workflow. A/B roll editing, SMPTE
time code, video effects, audio mastering,
and character generator capabilities
are explored. Aesthetic and technical
considerations are practiced through the
completion of editing projects. (prereq:
FIL1552C)
RTV3203C VIDEO PRODUCING &
DIRECTING
The course focuses on creative and
aesthetic concerns as well as technical skills
a producer and director need to function
successfully in video production. Students
undertake individual and group projects
that explore production budgeting, location
scouting, equipment planning, permits, and
other critical pre-production and
production methods. Documentaries,
commercials, and corporate projects are
scripted, shot, and edited to completion.
(prereq: FIL2553C, RTV3262C)
RTV3217C DIGITAL AUDIO POSTPRODUCTION
Students are responsible for editing,
capturing, enhancing, processing, mixing,
and synchronizing audio for postproduction. Additionally, they integrate
digital audio and video techniques to
create professional broadcast-quality
projects. (prereq: RTV2214C)
RTV2214C DIGITAL AUDIO PRODUCTION
Students record and produce high-quality
audio in interior and exterior field locations
that are then incorporated into a digital
video production. This is mastered onto
a broadcast-quality stereo DVD. (prereq:
RTV1213C)
RTV3255C ADVANCED NONLINEAR
EDITING
This course covers techniques of nonlinear
editing, including layering of video,
integration of graphics, multi-track audio
mixing and equalization, special effects, and
workflow. (prereq: RTV2250C)
RTV2245C VIDEOGRAPHY
video camera as a technical and creative
tool for communication. Students recognize
the principles of visual design for motion
pictures, develop their ability to evaluate
the visual potential of locations, interpret
the technical requirements of motion
picture photography, and operate
professional video cameras.
(prereq: RTV1241C)
RTV3262C ADVANCED CAMERA &
LIGHTING
Students are immersed in the process of
professional video field production in two
styles: ENG and EFP. News encompasses onthe- spot coverage and storytelling in a
spur-of- the-moment reporting format. The
course also examines EFP, single-camera
location shooting as expressed in
documentaries, corporate projects, or
commercials. Both styles are edited to
completion. (prereq: RTV2245C)
RTV2248C TELEVISION STUDIO
PRODUCTION
This course focuses on the theoretical as
well as technical aspects of news or
magazine format television production and
production segments. The study of video
production in the studio takes previously
learned skills and applies them in a
controlled environment.
(prereq: RTV1241C)
RTV4227C TEAM MEDIA PRODUCTION
Students work in teams to plan, design,
develop, and execute media production
projects. Guided by an instructor, students
set up realistic production goals and work
toward full achievement of muliti- camera
and multi-source productions. The course
emphasizes live production techniques.
(prereq: RTV3262C or DIG3346C)
RTV4268C DIGITAL INTERACTIVE
AUTHORING
This course introduces students to the basic
concepts of DVD authoring. The issues of
project requirements, media preparation,
design development, project management,
navigation, and delivery are discussed.
Emphasis is placed on interactivity,
presentation, and industry standards. In
addition, students are introduced to current
trends and possible future technologies in
this field. (prereq: RTV1213C, [PGY1892C or
GRA1762C], [DIG2201C or FIL2553C])
RTV4280C WEB BROADCASTING DESIGN &
DELIVERY
This course addresses the end part of media
production — delivery and distribution.
Students explore a variety of media delivery
methods and systems and determine the
advantages and limitations of each. They
also examine the relationship between
delivery systems and distribution methods
and evaluate the relative efficiency, cost,
and effectiveness of each.
SDVA101 SURVEY OF SOFTWARE
DEVELOPMENT
Students will learn the fundamental
architecture of computers and of the
Internet, and will learn to identify the basic
components and logical flow of a software
program. Students will be exposed to
several of the most commonly used
software languages, and will be able to
distinguish between them and discuss their
relative merits. Students will learn to
distinguish decimal, binary, and
hexadecimal forms of numbers, and to
convert between decimal and binary forms.
Students will learn to recognize and
differentiate basic procedural and objectoriented pseudo-code.
SDVA102 DESIGN FOR PROGRAMMERS
This course provides an introduction to
basic design concepts and theories, with a
particular focus on usability and the
importance of programmers and designers
working together to create the best
experience for users.
SDVA103 C++ PROGRAMMING I
This course introduces the student to C++
programming concepts. Students will use
the concepts of program specification and
design, algorithm development, coding and
testing using a modern software
development environment. Topics covered
include fundamentals of algorithms,
flowcharts, problem solving, programming
concepts, control structures, arrays, and
strings.
Page 144 of 183
SDVA202 SOFTWARE DESIGN & USER
INTERFACE I
This course explores the application of
computer programming language(s) to the
development of computer software with an
emphasis on internet software user
interfaces. (prereq: GWDA273)
SDVA203 C++ PROGRAMMING II
This course is designed to teach students
programming language and intermediate
programming concepts with examples and
applications using the C++ language.
Students will also study key concepts
related to computer programming for
scientific and game applications. (prereq:
SDVA103)
SDVA212 SOFTWARE DESIGN & USER
INTERFACE II
This course will explore the application of
computer programming language(s) to the
development of computer software with an
emphasis on desktop software user
interfaces. (prereq: SDVA202)
SDVA213 C++ PROGRAMMING III
This course explores the concepts and
principles of writing object-oriented
programs. The course will also cover the
application of Windows programming
techniques, including designing graphical
user interface (GUI). (prereq: SDVA203)
SDVA223 DATABASES I
Databases are an essential component in
every information system regardless of the
field or business you are in. This course
presents the fundamental concepts of
database design and use. It provides a study
of data models, data description languages,
and query facilities including relational
algebra and SQL, data normalization,
transactions and their properties, physical
data organization and indexing, security
issues and object databases. (prereq:
GWDA123)
SDVA233 DATABASES II
The landscape of Database Management
Systems (DBMSs) has expanded to include
SQL, NoSQL, and NewSQL systems. The
"one size fits all" mentality of big vendors is
no longer appropriate. This course will
introduce a few broad classes of these nonstandard database systems, which includes
Parallel systems (for OLTP), Cloud-based
systems, and the so-called "NoSQL" systems
(for web applications). (prereq: SDVA223)
SDVA243 SECONDARY LANGUAGES I
This course will explore the essential
concepts and techniques of object-oriented
programming with Java and/or C#. (prereq:
SDVA213)
SDVA303 TEAM MANAGEMENT &
SOFTWARE LIFECYCLE
This course introduces software
development as a professional practice that
includes a body of knowledge that exceeds
programming alone. Topics include SDLC,
methodologies, patterns, testing,
requirements gathering and effective
communication. (prereq: VGPA203)
SDVA306 TEAM PRODUCTION I
In this course students will assume a
specific role on the production team and,
acting in a professional capacity, ensure
that a software development project is
completed by deadline. Teams of students
will conceptualize and begin to create and
refine a professional quality computer
application to be completed in Team
Production II. (prereq: SDVA303)
SDVA313 MOBILE DEVICE PROGRAMMING
I
This course focuses on developing apps for
mobile devices with an emphasis on hybrid
development technologies. (prereq:
GWDA243)
SDVA316 TEAM PRODUCTION II
In this course, students will continue their
role on the production team to complete
the professional quality computer
application started in Team Production I.
(prereq: SDVA306)
SDVA323 COMPUTER NETWORKING I
This course will examine computer network
programming utilizing C++ and text network
communications. (prereq: SDVA213)
SDVA333 SECONDARY LANGUAGES II
Intermediate and advanced object-oriented
programming with Java and/or C#. (prereq:
SDVA243)
SDVA343 MOBILE DEVICE PROGRAMMING
II
This course focuses on developing apps for
mobile devices with an emphasis on native
development technologies. (prereq:
SDVA333)
SDVA353 COMPUTER NETWORKING II
This course will examine computer network
programming utilizing C++ and binary
network communications. (prereq:
SDVA323)
SDVA363 E-COMMERCE
This course will introduce the concepts and
principles of electronic commerce, security
in E-commerce transactions, Internet
technologies and tools for implementing Ecommerce applications; and implement
some basic secure E-commerce applications
to gain hands on experience. (prereq:
GWDA283)
SDVA373 SOFTWARE INSTRUMENTATION
& ANALYSIS
transition from student programmer to
professional programmer. The course will
cover several methods and tools that will
enable them to produce “productionaware” code. A subset of the most
commonly used revision control systems
will be discussed, and students will be able
to explain the relative merits of each and
demonstrate proficiency in one of these by
the end of the term. Commonly-employed
instrumentation and analysis techniques –
debugging, tracing, exception handling,
performance monitoring, and data logging –
will be covered, and students will learn to
employ these techniques in a professional
setting. (prereq: SDVA303)
SDVA383 ALTERNATIVE LANGUAGES I
This course focuses on creating server-side
components for web applications. The
course will explore the web server
infrastructure and enable students to
create functional web applications with
data-driven components. (prereq:
GWDA283)
SDVA393 OPERATING SYSTEMS & FILE
SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING
This is an introductory course on the
fundamental principles of modern
operating systems. Specifically, this course
will cover core concepts such as systems
programming, design issues in process,
memory, and file system management,
networking, system administration and
security. This course also serves as an
introduction to the most common operating
systems running on servers and
workstations (MS Windows a UNIX).
(prereq: SDVA323)
SDVA403 GAME ENGINE SCRIPTING
This course will enable students to leverage
their existing programming knowledge to
create an original game, utilizing a game
engine. The course will cover several
methods and techniques that will enable
students to produce a distribution-ready
game. The anatomy of common game
engines will be discussed, and the student
will utilize one game engine (chosen by
instructor) to produce a game (for PC, Mac,
or mobile) for their final project. (prereq:
SDVA333)
SDVA406 INTERNSHIP
Page 145 of 183
SDVA409 PORTFOLIO I
transition to the professional world.
Students will demonstrate their conceptual,
design and technical skills as they assemble
and refine their assets. Working individually
with an instructor, each student will select
representative work that reflects their
unique style and abilities. Emphasis is also
placed on identifying short- and long-term
portfolio development strategies. (prereq:
SDVA316)
SDVA413 ALTERNATIVE LANGUAGES II
This course focuses on developing advanced
web-based applications using server-side
components, with a particular focus on
security, performance and scalability.
(prereq: SDVA383)
SDVA419 PORTFOLIO II
This course continues to prepare students
for the transition to the professional world.
Working individually with an instructor,
each student will continue to refine their
selected assets to reflect their unique style.
Students will also continue to enhance their
web presence and professional resources.
(prereq: SDVA409)
SDVA423 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
This course explores the techniques of
artificial intelligence, including problems
and problem spaces, heuristic search
techniques, knowledge representation,
game theory and probabilistic reasoning.
(prereq: SDVA403)
SLS2943 INTERNSHIP - ASSOCIATE
This course is for students in their final
quarter(s) of an associate’s degree program
and provides students the opportunity to
study within an established, industryrelated business. By working as an intern
within their chosen fields, students expand
their knowledge and acquire experience in
current business practices. Successful
completion of internship prepares students
to seek employment upon graduation.
(Repeatable two times for up to six [6]
credits) (prereq: approval of Student
Services, Sponsor, Program Chair, and if
applicable, International Advisor.)
SLS3355 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT
development of public relations, showing
the principles, methods, and means of
influencing public opinion. (prereq:
ENC1102 or ENC1145 or Approval of
SLS4943 INTERNSHIP - BACHELOR
This course is for students in their final
quarter(s) to gain additional experience
within an outside business establishment.
Students may secure their own positions,
with approval of the program chair, or they
may work through the Student Services
employment office. A faculty member
coordinates the program and evaluates
student performance. (Repeatable two
times for up to six [6] credits) (prereq:
SL3355, approval of Student Services,
Sponsor, Program Chair, and, if applicable,
International Advisor.)
TPP1500C ACTING AND MOVEMENT
perception and rendition of movement in
animation through references in the real
world. The student learns to observe and
reproduce movement, human or otherwise,
in a convincing manner and transcribes
those motions to 2D and 3D environments.
VGPA107 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS
This course teaches discrete math and
applications in programming. It covers the
following major topics: set theory,
induction, functions, counting and
probability, and graphs. The objectives are
to develop a clear understanding of these
concepts and apply them in algorithm
designs and game problem solving. (prereq:
MGF1211)
VGPA117 GEOMETRY FOR COMPUTER
GRAPHICS
Focused on geometrical concepts and
operations as related to computer graphics,
this course covers mathematical
representations of position, motion, and
shape, matrices and matrix operations,
calculation of perspective and projective
transformations, and methods to model
curves and surfaces. Principles of
differential and integral calculus will also be
addressed. (prereq: VGPA107)
VGPA203 DESIGN PATTERNS & DATA
STRUCTURES
Organizing, storing, and efficiently accessing
large amounts of data are integral to
software applications. It is important to
keep the software source code manageable
as the projects increase in size and power.
In this course, students learn the
fundamental toolset for software structure
as they build simple programs and more
complicated applications. (prereq:
SDVA213)
VGPA207 CONTINUOUS MATHEMATICS
FOR APPLICATIONS
This course covers topics in real analysis
that have wide application in game-related
fields. With the concept of functions and
their properties as the foundation, students
study concepts from trigonometry,
differential and integral calculus, and
analytic geometry and how to apply them.
Objectives are a clear understanding of the
principles and facility with the calculations,
rather than mathematical rigor. (prereq:
VGPA107)
ARH2000 ART APPRECIATION
This course is a comparative and interactive
study of the arts from prehistoric to
modern times, with emphasis on cultural
relationships in the world to the visual arts:
two-dimensional (painting, printmaking,
and photography), three-dimensional
(sculpture and architecture), and
experiential (theatre and film).
ARH2050 ART HISTORY - ANCIENT TO
MEDIEVAL
development of painting, sculpture, and
architecture, and compares the visual arts
from different time periods and cultures.
The chronological progression of techniques
and the evolving styles of artistic expression
are covered as well. Beginning with the art
of ancient cultures, the course proceeds
through early Western art to the Italian
Renaissance. (prereq: ENC1101, ENC1145)
ARH2051 ART HISTORY - RENAISSANCE TO
PRESENT
development of painting, sculpture, and
architecture, and compares the visual arts
from different time periods and cultures.
The chronological progression of techniques
and the evolving styles of artistic expression
are covered as well. Beginning with the art
of the Italian Renaissance to the PostModern era. (prereq: ENC1101, ENC1145)
BSC1001 FUNDAMENTALS OF BIOLOGICAL
SCIENCE
This course introduces biological principles
such as taxonomy, cellular and molecular
levels of organization, reproduction,
development, and genetics as they relate to
the human organism. Fundamentals of
ecology are also addressed.
CGS1160C COMPUTER SCIENCE
This course explores foundational computer
concepts along with hands-on use of the
internet and popular office applications.
Students complete projects utilizing word
Page 146 of 183
processing, spreadsheet, and presentation
software. Course topics include identifying
the major sub-systems of a personal
computer, practical use of a computer in a
networked environment, and exercises for
effectively searching the internet.
CLP1006 PSYCHOLOGY OF PERSONAL
EFFECTIVENESS
This course provides an understanding of
the principles of effective human behavior
and their application to the areas of
personal awareness, interpersonal
relations, communication, and work/career
developments. (prereq: None)
CLP3144 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY
This course covers many areas of
psychological dysfunction, including panic
disorder, post- traumatic stress disorder,
rape trauma, and autistic disorder. This
course is a fascinating study of behaviors,
thought processes, and many challenges
faced by those who struggle with
psychological disorders. (prereqs: PSY2012)
COM1041 INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION
Students explore human interaction and its
impact on the development of self- identity
and relationships, both personal and
professional. Students discover ways to
improve communication techniques.
COM1442 TEAM EFFECTIVENESS
Students study the required communication
skills for effective discussion to achieve
positive outcomes within formal and
informal groups. This course focuses on
problem solving, decision making,
leadership, and interpersonal
communication within small groups.
CRW2000 INTRODUCTION TO CREATIVE
WRITING
Students experiment with a variety of
writing genres. They also read within a
variety of genres to determine which
techniques work and which ones do not.
Students participate in a variety of prewriting exercises, create rough drafts, and
learn revision techniques. (prereq: ENC1101
and [ENC1102, ENC1145, or LIT1020])
CRW2100 INTRODUCTION TO FICTION
WRITING
Students study to write a complete story
with a beginning, middle, and end. Students
read examples of successful pieces of fiction
and write their own, which are critiqued in
a workshop environment. (prereq:
ENC1101)
CRW3310 CREATIVE WRITING: POETRY
Students experiment with a variety of
poems. They also read a variety of poems to
learn what techniques work with their
writing skills and which ones do not,
participate in a variety of pre-writing
exercises, create rough drafts, and learn
revision techniques.
DEP2004 HUMAN GROWTH AND
DEVELOPMENT
This course explores brain development and
human behavior across the human
development cycle, from infancy to
adolescence to adulthood through to old
age. Students examine the social, cognitive,
linguistic, and biophysical developments
across the life cycle. (prereq: PSY2012)
ECO2013 PRINCIPLES OF
MACROECONOMICS
concepts behind economic systems within
the United States. Students discuss current
economic issues including unemployment
and inflation, economic cycles, interest
rates and their impact on households and
national income, and the Federal Reserve
System policies.
ECO2023 PRINCIPLES OF
MICROECONOMICS
The student will study the economic
behavior of individuals and firms. Students
will examine why firms maximize profits
and consumers maximize satisfaction.
Students will learn supply
& demand for small business, price
elasticity, & how these affect the
profitability of individual market sectors
within a larger market.
ENC1101 ENGLISH COMPOSITION
This course centers on the development of
the student’s writing skills including a study
of prewriting techniques, syntax,
introductory, body, and concluding
paragraphs, and various methods of essay
development.
ENC1102 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE
Students study various types of literature,
including fiction and non-fiction works, the
short story, various types of poetry, and
drama. (prereq: ENC1101)
ENC1145 TOPICS FOR COMPOSITION
This course develops the student’s
expository and argumentative writing skills.
Students are required to think creatively
and critically about a specific topic selected
by the instructor and then incorporate such
ideas into various writing assignments.
(prereq: ENC1101)
EVS2001 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Students examine environmental problems
from a scientific perspective. Focus is on
South Florida ecosystems with particular
attention on hydrology, pollution, global
warming, and increasing human population
pressures on the environment.
FIL2000 FILM APPRECIATION
This course is designed to provide an
introduction to film as an art form, cultural
product, and social artifact. It includes the
understanding of basic analytical and
technical forms, concepts, issues and
development of critical analysis skills. It also
includes the history, development, theory,
and criticism of the basic principles of
filmmaking and film production.
HUM3530 CREATIVITY: THINKING OUTSIDE
THE BOX
This course defines and explores the
concept of creativity in the areas of art,
psychology, and design. The course includes
intellectual problem solving, literary word
games, and mixed media art projects.
(prereq: ENC1101)
HUN2204 NUTRITION
This course centers on an explanation of the
basic principles of nutrition and their
relationship to health. The structure,
functions, and source of nutrients—
including proteins, carbohydrates, fats,
vitamins, minerals, and water—are
discussed. Current issues in nutrition are
reviewed including dietary guidelines,
energy balance, vitamin supplements, and
food fats.
ISC1004 FUNDAMENTALS OF PHYSICAL
SCIENCE
This course introduces students to physics,
chemistry, astronomy, meteorology, and
geology. The course has elements of history
and philosophy of science as well as the
interrelationships among the sciences and
with science and other disciplines. Much
of the course is devoted to the application
of these concepts to solving problems
related to everyday experiences.
LIT1020 THE SHORT STORY
Students examine elements of the short
story. Students are introduced to
structural components of the short story
including plot, setting, characterization,
symbols, point of view, and theme. (prereq:
ENC1101)
LIT2100 SURVEY OF WORLD LITERATURE
A study of literature across the globe.
(prereq: ENC1101)
LIT3132 ARTHURIAN LITERATURE
This class explores the legend of King
Arthur, looks at subsequent retellings, and
examines how these elements are familiar
in the modern world. (prereq: ENC1101)
Page 147 of 183
LIT3326 FAIRYTALES AND ARCHETYPES
Students examine the more popular
fairytales compiled by the Brothers Grimm
in terms of the archetypal messages they
contain. Students scrutinize the truths
embodied in these tales and determine
their relevance in the contemporary world.
Students are encouraged to re-construct
their favorite tales and components to
more closely reflect their own truths.
(prereq: ENC1101)
MAC1105 COLLEGE ALGEBRA
This course expands on concepts of algebra
studied in high school. By thinking
abstractly, students solve, graph, and apply
equations and inequalities.
MAD1104 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS
This course uses mathematical models to
explore practical, real-world problems in
two branches of discrete mathematics:
management science and social choice
theory. In management science, students
employ graph theory models to find
efficient solutions to routing problems, and
to solve scheduling problems using the
critical path method. Students also
investigate the mathematics of social
choice, including voting theory and fair
division problems.
MET1001 WEATHER AND CLIMATE
An introductory course on weather patterns
and the climate and an introduction to the
atmosphere of the earth.
MGF1211 GENERAL COLLEGE MATH
Generalized topics of mathematics are
presented covering set theory, logic,
numeration systems, number theory,
computing, algebra, measurement,
geometry, probability, and statistics.
Students practice solving related
mathematical problems and investigate the
application of math in their field of study
and in everyday life.
world.
PHI2010 INTRODUCTION TO PHILOSOPHY
This course is an in-depth study of
prominent philosophies, major
philosophers and major philosophical
movements emphasizing their contributions
to the world of thought and demonstrating
the importance of reason in the
contemporary world.
PHI2630 INTRODUCTION TO ETHICS
This course is presented in modules
covering the following areas: morality,
methods of reasoning, environmental and
business ethics, bioethics, and ethical
questions such as taking of human life,
abortion, mercy death, and human
sexuality. (prereq: ARH2000 or THE2000)
PHI3800 PRINCIPLES OF AESTHETICS
Aesthetics is the philosophical study of the
nature of art. Students examine various
aspects of “art,” including the relationship
between various arts and concepts of
beauty, the creative process, principles of
art criticism, style, and symbolism.
PHY2020 FOUNDATIONS OF PHYSICS
Students examine phenomena and
technology encountered in daily life from a
physics perspective. The course emphasizes
the conceptual foundations of physics.
Topics include fluids, waves,
thermodynamics, electricity, magnetism,
optics, heat, musical instruments,
telecommunications, sports, energy
sources, transportation, and computers.
(prereq: MGF1211 or MAD1104 or
MAC1105)
PSY2012 INTRODUCTION TO PSYCHOLOGY
This course introduces students to the basic
concepts of human behavior, personality
development, emotion, perception,
motivation, and adjustment to conflict.
MTG2206 GEOMETRY
The student investigates how to become a
better problem solver through the use of
geometry. Constructions, coordinate
geometry in two and three dimensions, and
transformation geometry are introduced
and used as tools. Students apply concepts
from this course to their other course work
and to their future vocations. [prereq:
MGF1115 or MAD1104 or MAC1105]
PSY3025 PSYCHOLOGY OF COLOR
This course is a review of the fundamental
elements of psychology as applied to
human response to color. Color responses
derived from environmental and applied
psychology, human physiology,
societal/cultural experiences as stimuli are
emphasized. Illustrated lectures and applied
projects support the learning process.
(prereq: PSY2012 or SYG2000)
OCB1010 MARINE BIOLOGY
An introduction to the major groups of
living marine organisms that inhabit the
oceans of the world.
SOP2332 PSYCHOLOGY OF DRUGS AND
ADDICTION
This course examines the psychological,
social, and biological issues involved with
substance abuse. In this course, we explore
problems associated with abusing
substances and their impact on both the
individual and society. We take an in-depth
OCE2001 OCEANOGRAPHY
An introduction to the chemical, biological,
and geological features of the oceans of the
look at drugs of abuse, the history of
substance use/abuse, prevention,
intervention, and treatment.
SPC1608 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC SPEAKING
This course helps students develop the skills
necessary to make presentations before an
audience. The course introduces students
to speechmaking, the steps necessary to
develop a well-organized speech with the
necessary supporting material, and the
process for the development and use of
visuals needed for an effective
presentation.
SYA3330 RESEARCH METHODS IN ACTION
Students are introduced to the survey
method for conducting research and its
many applications in the real world. The
course looks at how research is used to
determine public opinion and identify
trends. Students collect and analyze data
and draw conclusions about how to apply
their results. [prereq: ENC1101 and
[MGF1211, MAD1104, or MAC1105])
SYD3704 SOCIOLOGY OF RACE AND
ETHNICITY
Students study the sociological perspective
in minority-majority relations, assimilation
ideologies, dynamics of prejudice and
discrimination as well as biological,
historical, and sociological explanations of
ethnicity. Emphasis is placed on the
definition and understanding of how race
and ethnicity are constructed, the
importance of culture, and the experiences
of various racial and ethnic groups. (prereq:
PSY2012 or SYG2000)
SYD3800 SOCIETY AND SEXUALITY
Students explore the sociological
perspective on human sexuality (as
opposed to the biological or the
psychological explanation). The course
discusses contemporary controversies
regarding sexual issues, i.e., viewpoints on
norms, pop psychology, culture, research
methods, communication skills, therapeutic
approaches, diseases, and the
commercialization of sex. (prereq:
[SYG2000 or PSY2012] and COM1442)
SYG2000 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY
Students explore the dynamics and
structure of human society. The
fundamental structures and processes
responsible for the social organization of
behavior are examined. Topics include
culture, socialization, deviance, social
structure, social stratification, and
institutions. Current issues in society are
also addressed.
Page 148 of 183
SYO3100 SOCIOLOGY OF MARRIAGE AND
FAMILY
general theories on marriage and family
relations in the U.S. and other countries.
Special emphasis is placed on the role of
women around the world within the
context of marriage and family. (prereq:
PSY2012 or SYG2000)
SYO3370 WORKING IN AMERICA
Students take a realistic look at and critical
evaluation of working life in the United
States from a sociological perspective.
Possible topics include racism, sexism and
homophobia at work, unemployment, job
dissatisfaction, workplace violence, stress,
and small business ownership.
(prereq: SYG2000 or PSY2012)
SYP3322 ADVERTISING AND SOCIETY
Students examine the criticisms and
benefits of advertising in society. A main
theme of the course is to evaluate whether
advertising channels desire or creates
desire. Topics discussed include sexual
images in advertising, sexism and racism,
images of children, ethnic advertising,
adcult, and false needs. (prereqs: ENC1101
and [MGF1211 or MAD1104 or MAC1105])
SYP3600 ART AND SOCIETY
Students explore what art is and why some
people are considered an art genius while
others’ work is looked down upon, what
makes art vulnerable and indispensable to
modern societies, and whether the arts
promote social change or reproduce the
status quo. The course focuses on diverse
understandings and approaches, social
conditions, institutions, media, technology,
and production and consumption of the
arts. (prereq: PSY2012 or SYG2000)
WOH2022 MODERN AND POST- MODERN
CIVILIZATIONS
Students explore the Reformation through
Post-Modern eras from the African, Asian,
European, Latin American, and AngloAmerican perspectives. Students examine
such issues as ethnicity, gender, work and
social order, spirituality, religion and the
state, scientific and technological invention,
along with various art forms from each
civilization.
THE2000 THEATRE APPRECIATION
historical and technical components of the
performing arts. Students examine the
elements critical to an effective production
and the aesthetics, background, and origins
of those elements.
WOH2012 ANCIENT AND MEDIEVAL
CIVILIZATIONS
Students explore the origins of civilizations
through the Renaissance from the African,
Asian, European, and Native American
perspectives. Students examine such issues
as ethnicity, gender, work and social order,
spirituality, religion and the state, material
invention, and the environment along with
various art forms from each civilization.
Page 149 of 183
POLICIES AND REGULATIONS
COLLEGE POLICIES AND GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS
Non-Discrimination Policy
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale does not discriminate or harass on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex,
gender, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, age, religion, veteran’s status, genetic marker,
or any other characteristic protected by state, local or federal law, in our programs and activities. The Art Institute
of Fort Lauderdale provides reasonable accommodations to qualified individuals with disabilities. The Art Institute
of Fort Lauderdale will not retaliate against persons bringing forward allegations of harassment or discrimination.
The following person has been designated to handle inquiries and coordinate the school’s compliance efforts
regarding the Non-Discrimination Policy: The Dean of Student Services (954-308-2601) has been designated to
handle inquiries and coordinate the institution’s compliance efforts regarding the non-discrimination policy.
No Harassment Policy
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale is committed to providing workplaces and learning environments that are free
from harassment on the basis of any protected classification including, but not limited to race, sex, gender, color,
religion, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, age, national origin, disability, medical condition, marital
status, veteran status, genetic marker or on any other basis protected by law. Such conduct is unprofessional,
unproductive, illegal, and generally considered bad for business. Consequently, all conduct of this nature is
expressly prohibited, regardless of whether it violates any law. (Please note that sexual harassment is more
thoroughly addressed in the Sexual Misconduct & Relationship Violence Policy.)
Anti-Hazing Policy
Hazing involving The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale students or student groups is strictly prohibited. Hazing is
defined as any action or situation that recklessly or intentionally endangers the mental or physical health or safety
of a student for the purpose of initiation or admission into or affiliation with any club or organization operating
under the sanction of an institution of higher education.
For purposes of this definition, any activity as described in this definition that the initiation or admission into or
affiliation with a club or organization is directly or indirectly conditioned shall be presumed to be “forced” activity,
the willingness of an individual to participate in such activity notwithstanding. This policy is applicable to all
students and members of a student club or organization at The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale. Every student and
member of a student club or organization is responsible for complying with this policy.
Individuals and/or student clubs that force, require, and/or endorse violations will be held directly responsible
through the College’s student conduct process and if appropriate, through local authorities, which may pursue
criminal action. Students who wish to make a complaint under this policy should contact the Dean of Student
Services. The negligence or consent of a student or any assumption of risk by the student is not a defense to an
action brought pursuant to this policy. Student club activities or programs must not interfere with the rights and
activities of others and should always reflect the best interests of the members of the organization it represents
and the College community as a whole. In all cases of alleged violations of this policy, faculty and staff advisors and
the national/international headquarters, if applicable, of any organization will be notified
Non-Fraternization Policy
Because of the unequal status that exists between faculty and students and the possibility of favoritism, dating
and/or sexual relationships between faculty and the students they teach or may teach are prohibited.
Student Conduct Policy
SECTION I. GUIDING PRINCIPLES.
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale recognizes its students as responsible and dedicated men and women who are
preparing for career employment. An integral part of their career and professional development is the expectation
Page 150 of 183
that they conduct themselves during the education process in the same manner as will be expected in all
employment situations.
As members of the College community, students have responsibilities and duties commensurate with their rights
and privileges. In this policy, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale provides guidance to students regarding those
standards of student conduct and behavior that it considers essential to its educational mission. This policy also
provides guidance regarding the types of conduct that infringe upon the fulfillment of the Institute's mission.
SECTION II. SCOPE.
This Student Conduct Policy applies to all students and student organizations at The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale.
SECTION III. REACH.
The Student Conduct Policy shall apply to student conduct that occurs on College premises including online
platforms, at College-sponsored activities, student organization sponsored events or in College Housing. At the
discretion of the (Dean of Student Services, , Dean of Academic Affairs or a delegate as appointed by the President
of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale), the Policy also shall apply to off-campus student conduct when the
conduct, as alleged, adversely affects a substantial college interest and potentially violates a campus policy.
SECTION IV. RESPONSIBILITIES OF DUAL MEMBERSHIP.
Students are both members of the College community and citizens of the state. As citizens, students are
responsible to the community of which they are a part, and, as students, they are responsible to the academic
community of the College and to other individuals who make up the community. By enforcing its Student Conduct
Policy, the College neither substitutes for nor interferes with other civil or criminal legal processes. When a student
is charged in both jurisdictions, the College will decide on the basis of its interests, the interests of affected
students, and the interests of the community whether to proceed with its disciplinary process or to defer action.
SECTION V. DISCIPLINARY OFFENSES.
The offenses listed below are given as examples only. The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale may sanction other
conduct not specifically included on this list.
A. Scholastic Dishonesty
a. Plagiarism
b. Cheating on assignments or examinations
c. Engaging in unauthorized collaboration on academic work
d. Taking, acquiring or using test materials without faculty permission
e. Submitting false or incomplete records of academic achievement;
f. Altering, forging or misusing a College academic record;
g. Fabricating or falsifying data, research procedures, or data analysis;
h. Deceiving the College and/or its officials.
a)
B. Illegal or Unauthorized Possession or Use of Weapons
Possession or use of firearms, explosives, dangerous chemicals, or other weapons, likenesses of weapons,
on college property, school sponsored housing or at college sponsored functions, except where
possession is required by law.
C. Sexual Assault or Nonconsensual Contact
a. Any form of unwanted sexual attention or unwanted sexual contact
D. Threatening, Violent or Aggressive Conduct
a) Assault, battery, or any other form of physical abuse of a student or college employee
b) Fighting or physical altercation
Page 151 of 183
c)
Conveyance of threats by any means of communication including, but not limited to, threats of physical
abuse and threats to damage or destroy college property or the property of other students or college
employees
d) Any conduct that threatens the health or safety of another individual, one’s own self, or another
individual. Threats to commit self-harm and/ or actual incidents of self-harm by any student
E. Theft, Property Damage and Vandalism
Theft, attempted theft, vandalism/damage, or defacing of college property, college controlled property or
the property of another student, faculty, staff member or guests.
b) Extortion
c) Setting fires, tampering with fire safety and/or fire fighting equipment
a)
F.
b.
Disruptive or Disorderly Conduct Disruptive Behavior, such as, Interference with the normal
operations of the college (i.e., disruption of teaching and administrative functions, disciplinary
procedures, pedestrian or vehicular traffic, or other college activities)
a. Disruptive Classroom Conduct, such as,
i. Engaging in behavior that substantially or repeatedly interrupts either the instructor’s
ability to teach or student learning. The classroom extends to any setting where a
student is engaged in work toward academic credit or satisfaction of program-based
requirements or related activities, or
ii. Use of cell phones and pagers during scheduled classroom times
Disorderly Conduct, such as,
i. Disorderly, lewd, indecent, or obscene conduct. This would include but is not limited to
any type of clothing, gang colors, gang symbols or materials worn or brought onto the
premises by any student or guest deemed to be lewd, indecent or obscene as
determined by college officials
ii. Breach of peace on college property or at any college-sponsored or supervised program
iii. Any in-school or off-campus act considered inappropriate or as an example of
misconduct that adversely affects the interests The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale
and/or its reputation
G. Illegal or Unauthorized Possession or Use of Drugs or Alcohol
a) Use, sale, possession or distribution of illegal or controlled substances, drug or drug paraphernalia on
college property or at any function sponsored or supervised by the college.
b) Being under the influence of illegal or controlled substances on college property, or at any college
function
c) Use, sale, possession or distribution of alcoholic beverages on college property or at any function
sponsored or supervised by the college.
d) Being under the influence of alcohol on college property or at any college function is also prohibited
1.
H. Verbal Assault, Defamation and Harassment
I. Verbal abuse of a student or college employee
II. Harassment by any means of any individual, including coercion and personal abuse. Harassment
includes but is not limited to, written or verbal acts or uses of technology, which have the effect
of harassing or intimidating a person
III. Harassment based on sex, race, color, national origin, religion, sexual orientation, age, disability
or any other criteria protected by state, federal or local law.
I. Hazing
Any form of "hazing" and any act that endangers the safety of a student, or that destroys or removes
public or private property, for the purpose of initiation, admission into, affiliation with, or as a condition
for continued membership in a group or organization. "Hazing" includes any method of initiation or preinitiation into a student club or any pastime or amusement engaged in with respect to such a club that
Page 152 of 183
1.
causes, or is likely to cause, bodily danger, physical harm, or personal degradation or disgrace resulting in
physical or mental harm, to any student or other person attending the college.
J. Falsification
a. Willfully providing college officials with false, misleading or incomplete information
b. Forgery, falsification, alteration or misuse of college documents, records or
identification with the intent to injure, defraud, or misinform.
K. Abuse of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale disciplinary system, including but not limited to:
1. Failure to obey the summons of a disciplinary body or college official
2. Falsification, distortion, or misrepresentation of information before a disciplinary body or
college official
3. Disruption or interference with the orderly conduct of a disciplinary proceeding
4. Attempting to influence the impartiality of a member of a disciplinary body prior to and/or
during the course of the disciplinary proceeding
5. Verbal or physical harassment and/or intimidation of a member of a disciplinary body prior
to, during, and/or after the disciplinary proceeding
6. Failure to comply with the sanction(s) imposed under the student conduct policy
7. Influencing or attempting to influence another person to commit an abuse of the disciplinary
system
L. Unauthorized Use or Misuse of College Facilities
Unauthorized entry into, unauthorized use of, or misuse of college property, including computers and data
and voice communication networks.
M. Violation of Federal or State Laws
(1) Violation of federal, state or local laws and college rules and regulations on college property or at
college-sanctioned or college-sponsored functions
N. Insubordination
a) Persistent or gross acts of willful disobedience or defiance toward college personnel
b) Failure to comply with direction of college officials, faculty, staff or security officers who are acting in the
performance of their duties
c) Failure to exit during fire drill,
d) Failure to identify oneself when on college property or at a college- sponsored or supervised functions,
upon request of college official acting in the performance of his/her duties
O. Violations of College Rules
• Violations by guest of a student on college property. Students are responsible for the actions of their
guests
• Violation of school safety regulations, including but not limited to setting fires, tampering with fire safety
and/or firefighting equipment, failure to exit during fire drill, turning in false fire alarms and bomb threats
• Smoking in classrooms or other college buildings or areas unless designated as a smoking area
• Any violation of the student housing license agreement, rules and regulations and/or the collegesponsored housing student handbook
• Any violation of the institutions policies on the responsible use of technology including but not limited to
A. The theft or abuse of computer, email, Internet or Intranet resources
B. Unauthorized entry into a file, to use, read, or change the contents, of for any other purpose
C. Unauthorized transfer of a file
D. Unauthorized downloading of copyrighted materials in violation of law
E. Unauthorized use of another individual's identification and/or password
F. Use of computing facilities to interfere with the work of another student, faculty member, or
school official
G. Use of computing facilities to send obscene or abusive messages
H. Use of computing facilities to interfere with normal operation of the school's computing system
I. Failure to satisfy school financial obligations
Page 153 of 183
The above list is illustrative only, and The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale may sanction other conduct not
specifically included on this list.
SECTION VI. SANCTIONS.
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale may impose sanctions for violations of the student conduct policy. The type of
sanction imposed may vary depending upon the seriousness of the violation(s). The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale reserves the right to immediately impose the most severe sanction if circumstances merit.
Although not exhaustive, the following list represents the types of sanctions that may be imposed upon any
student or student organization found to have violated the student conduct policy:
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
Warning: A notice in writing that a student has failed to meet some aspect of the school's standards and
expectations
Probation: Probation is used for repeated violations or a specific violation of a serious nature as a first
course of action. The Chief Conduct Officer or his/her delegate defines the terms of probation.
Discretionary Sanctions: The student will be required to complete an educational service, attend
counseling, or have restricted privileges.
Removal from Sponsored Housing: The student will be immediately dismissed from school-sponsored
housing. The student will be required to vacate the premises according to the terms of the sanction.
Suspension: Separation of the student from the school for a pre-determined period of time. The student
may be able to return to school once specified conditions for readmission are met. The student may not
attend classes, visit college-sponsored housing, use school facilities, participate in or attend college
activities, or be employed by the school during his/her suspension.
Expulsion: The student will be expelled from The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale immediately. The
student will not be permitted to continue his or her studies at the college and may not return to the
college or to college-sponsored housing or activities at any time or for any reason.
Restitution: Compensation for loss or damage to property leased, owned or controlled by the school. This
may take the form of monetary or material replacement.
The above list is only a general guideline. Some sanctions may be omitted, and other sanctions not listed above
may be used.
SECTION VII. DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURES:
Complaint
Any member of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale community may file a complaint against any student for
misconduct or for otherwise being in violation of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale policies.
a) The complaint shall be prepared in writing or in an incident report and directed to the Dean of Student
Services or his/her delegate.
b) The written complaint or incident report should include the nature of the offense, date, approximate time
and location of incident. The name of the victim, offender and any witness/s may be included.
c) Complaints or incident reports should be submitted within 48 hours after the alleged violation occurred
unless there are extenuating circumstances requiring a longer timeframe.
The Dean of Student Servicesor a delegate may review and investigate the complaint to determine if the
allegations have factual merit, to identify violations of the student conduct policy, and to impose sanctions for such
violations.
Generally, the accused should be given the opportunity to tell his or her account of the situation and to provide
this information, in writing, unless The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale determines that the circumstances do not
warrant disclosure of some or all of the facts.
Page 154 of 183
Search of Student's Property
Students have no expectation of privacy in their personal property while on campus. The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale reserves the right to search the contents of students' personal property or belongings at any time and
for any reason, including when there is reasonable suspicion on the part of the Institute staff that a risk to the
health, safety or welfare of students, and/or the school community exists and including searches pursuant to an
investigation of potential wrong doing. This includes but is not limited to vehicles brought onto property leased,
owned or controlled by the school, backpacks, portfolios and clothing. This policy also applies to student property
in school-sponsored housing, student e-mail and/or computers.
Notification and Determination of violations that warrant Disciplinary Meeting
a) The Dean of Student Services or a delegate may choose to conduct a disciplinary meeting. Potential
attendees include a student or students, the Dean of Student Services or his/her delegate and others who
may have relevant information. The student should receive advance notice of the allegations and the
reason for the meeting. After the meeting,
b) The Dean of Student Services or his/her delegate will determine whether it is more likely than not that a
violation occurred, may render and communicate the decision to the student in writing, which shall
describe the violation and the sanctions imposed, if any, and the student’s right to appeal. If the Dean of
Student Services determines that there was no violation, that decision may be documented in writing to
the student as well.
a) If a student fails to appear for the meeting, the Dean of Student Services or his/her delegate may
make a determination of violations of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale policies on the basis of
the information available, and impose sanctions for such violations.
Notification and Determination of violations that warrant Disciplinary Hearing
In some cases, involving serious violations, the Dean of Student Services or delegate, hereby referred to as
“Hearing Officer”, in his or her sole discretion, may choose to assemble a disciplinary panel to adjudicate the
process.
a) The Hearing Officer may immediately (before a hearing takes place) remove the student from the campus
community pursuant to an Interim Suspension until the Disciplinary Panel is convened. (see interim
suspension)
b) The Student should receive advance notice of the allegations and the reason for the meeting. A student
may forgo attendance at the hearing and a determination of the sanction will be made by the Disciplinary
Panel
c) Hearings normally shall be conducted in private. The Disciplinary Hearing is an academic hearing, not a
legal hearing. Therefore, legal counsel is not allowed at the hearing.
d) The student may be accompanied by one person (family member, friend, etc) to provide support. The
committee may prohibit from attending or remove any person who disrupts the proceedings of the
committee
e) In Hearings involving more than one student , the Hearing Officer, in his or her discretion, may permit the
hearing concerning each student to be conducted separately.
f) The Disciplinary Panel may hear from any person who may have relevant information and the Panel may
review any documents presented to them.
a. Pertinent records, documents and written statements may be considered by the Hearing Officer at his/her
discretion
b. The Disciplinary Panel may ask questions and may seek information not provided to it.
g) The Disciplinary Panel may determine whether it is more likely than not that a violation occurred The
Panel should communicate to the Hearing Officer its decision and its recommended sanction, if any.
h) After the Hearing, the Hearing Officer will issue a written decision to the accused student which identifies
the accusations and the panel’s conclusions, any sanctions, and the student's right of appeal.
i) In general, the accused should have access to the documentation reviewed by the panel, however
identifying names and information may be removed from the documentation when necessary to protect
other student’s privacy rights.
Page 155 of 183
Disciplinary Panel
A Disciplinary Panel may consist of members of the college Executive Committee, Campus Staff, Faculty or Student
Body. When students are permitted on the panel, the accused student should sign a form granting permission to
release his/her educational records to a student serving on the panel. Failure to sign the permission constitutes an
agreement to have no student on the panel.
Administrative Interim Suspension
Students may be administratively suspended on an interim basis when:
A. serious allegations are being investigated
B. serious allegations are pending before a disciplinary panel
C. in advance of a disciplinary panel hearing; or
D. when a student potentially poses a threat of harm to himself, to others, or to property of the Institute
or a member of the Institute community
During the interim suspension, students are denied access to college-sponsored housing and/or to the school
(including classes, labs, library) and/or all other school activities or privileges for which the student might
otherwise be eligible, as the Dean of Student Services or designee may determine to be appropriate. This interim
suspension period should last no longer than three business days, and the Dean of Student Services or delegate
may make reasonable provisions to provide for accommodations of a student in school sponsored housing.
The interim suspension is not to be considered disciplinary, but it is a tool to separate potential adversaries until a
reasoned decision can be made.
SECTION VIII. Appeal Procedures.
Students have a right to appeal disciplinary actions when they believe they have extenuating circumstances or
believe to have been treated in an arbitrary or biased fashion or without adherence to The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale policies and procedures.
a) During an appeal, the student should continue to obey the terms of the decision,
i.e., a student who has been suspended from school may not be on school property,
a student dismissed from school-sponsored housing must leave in accordance with
the directions indicated in the decision
b) The student must write a letter of appeal in the student’s own words, addressed to the
President of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale or his/her delegate. This letter must
clearly state the extenuating circumstances or the grounds for believing the decision
was arbitrary or biased or that it was without adherence to [school name] policies and
procedures, and provide any supporting documentation. It must be delivered to the
President or his/her delegate within seven calendar days following the student’s receipt
of the decision.
c) Students should provide documentation to support the allegations of the appeal.
d) The President or his/her delegate may appoint an ad hoc committee to review
appeals and make a recommendation regarding disposition of the appeal within 30
days of the date of receipt of the appeal. This committee will be comprised of
faculty or staff members not involved in making the initial disciplinary decision.
e) The President and/or the committee may decide to convene an appeal hearing. The
student will be informed notified in writing of the date and time of the appeal. The
student is expected to attend the meeting, and failure to do so, for other than
documented emergencies, may be considered forfeiture of the right to present
further information regarding the appeal.
f) The student making the appeal may be provided an opportunity to address the
committee in person. The student may be accompanied by one person (family
member, friend, etc) as an observer. The committee may prohibit from attending or
remove any person who disrupts the proceedings of the committee.
Page 156 of 183
g)
The Appeal Committee is an academic hearing, not a legal hearing. Therefore, legal
counsel is not allowed at the meeting.
h) Audio recording of the academic hearing is not permitted. Minutes of the meeting
are confidential.
i) Following appropriate review and deliberation, the committee will report back to
the President or his/her delegate with its recommendation following its review of
the appeal. The President or his/her delegate will render a written decision on the
appeal within thirty calendar days from receipt of the appeal. The decision will be
final.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY POLICY
I.
Purpose or Scope
The unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material, including unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing, may
subject students and individuals to civil and criminal liabilities. Almost all of the music, movies, television shows,
software, games and images found on the Internet are protected by federal copyright law. The owner of the
copyright in these works has the right to control their distribution, modification, reproduction, public display and
public performance. It is therefore generally illegal to use file sharing networks to download and share
copyrighted works without the copyright owner’s permission unless “fair use” or another exemption under
copyright law applies.
Fair use under the federal Copyright Act allows the use without permission of copyrighted material for the purpose
of criticism, comment, news reporting or teaching under certain limited circumstances. There is no blanket
exception from liability for students or employees of educational university, however, and whether the use of
copyrighted material without permission falls with “fair use” or one of the other exceptions in the Act depends on
a very detailed, case-by-case analysis of various factors. Students should be aware that sharing music, videos,
software and other copyrighted materials is very likely not to be considered a “fair use” and therefore may be a
violation of the law. A violation of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’ policy for use of its information technology
system can result in termination of network access for the student and/or other disciplinary action including
removal of the student from The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale.
Summary of Civil and Criminal Penalties for Violation of Federal Copyright Laws
Copyright infringement is the act of exercising, without permission or legal authority, one or more of the exclusive
rights granted to the copyright owner under section 106 of the Copyright Act (Title 17 of the United States Code).
These rights include the right to reproduce or distribute a copyrighted work. In the file-sharing context,
downloading or uploading substantial parts of a copyrighted work without authority constitutes an infringement.
Penalties for copyright infringement include civil and criminal penalties. In general, anyone found liable for civil
copyright infringement may be ordered to pay either actual damages or “statutory” damages affixed at not less
than $750 and not more than $30,000 per work infringed. For “willful” infringement, a court may award up to
$150,000 per work infringed. A court can, in its discretion, also assess costs and attorneys’ fees. For details, see
Title 17, United States Code, Sections 504, 505. Willful copyright infringement can also result in criminal penalties,
including imprisonment of up to five years and fines of up to $250,000 per offense. For more information, please
see the website of the U.S. Copyright Office at www.copyright.gov.
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’ policies in regard to copyright infringement via the Internet prohibit the illegal
downloading or unauthorized distribution of copyrighted materials using The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’
information technology system. The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’ policies prohibit use of The Art Institute of
Fort Lauderdale’ computer network to engage in illegal copying or distribution of copyrighted works such as by
unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing (i.e., the sharing of copyrighted works, typically in digital or electronic files)
without permission.
As a creative community of teachers, artists and scholars, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale is committed to
encouraging the creation of new works, new ideas, and new forms of creative and scholarly expression. This Policy
Page 157 of 183
on Intellectual Property is provided to protect the interests of those who create as well as the interests of The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale itself, which supports this creative and scholarly work.
This document expresses The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’s policy regarding ownership and usage rights with
respect to Intellectual Property (as hereinafter defined). It covers all those who are a part of The Art Institute of
Fort Lauderdale – faculty, staff, students, visiting artists, visiting scholars, or other participants enrolled, employed
or affiliated with The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale, and this Policy governs in all circumstances, unless The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale has modified it through a written agreement connected to a sponsored or
commissioned work or as part of work under a grant or contract. Should there be any conflict between the
provisions of this Policy and the terms of a separate written agreement between The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale and any party, the terms of that separate written agreement will govern. This Policy is not intended to
limit “fair use” as defined by U.S. laws.
II.
Definitions (if applicable)
The following terms are used throughout the Policy and are defined as follows:
A. Copyright - Copyright is the intangible property right granted for a limited period of time by federal
statute (Title 17 of the U.S. Code) for an original work of authorship fixed in any tangible form of
expression. Copyright provides the owner with five exclusive rights, including the exclusive right to
reproduce the work, to prepare derivative works based on the work, to distribute copies of the work
to the public by sale or other transfer of ownership (or by rental, lease, license or lending), to display
the work publicly and to perform the work publicly (if relevant).
B. Commissioned Work - A Commissioned Work is defined as a Work (as defined in paragraph K) that is
produced or created pursuant to a written agreement with the Institution and for Institution
purposes by (a) individuals not under the employ of the Institution or (b) Institutional Employees (as
defined in paragraph D) acting outside the scope of their regular Institution employment, as
determined by their existing Institution employment arrangement or contract.
C. Independent Academic Effort or Creative Activity - Independent Academic Effort or Creative Activity is
defined as the inquiry, investigation, research, or creative activity that is carried out by faculty, staff
and Students of the Institution working on their own, that advances knowledge or the development
of the arts, sciences, humanities, or technology where the specific direction, methodology, and
content of the pursuit is determined by the faculty, staff member(s), or Student(s) without the direct
assignment, supervision, or involvement of the Institution.
D. Institutional Employee - An Institutional Employee is a full-time or part-time faculty member, visiting
faculty, adjunct faculty, artist, scholar, or fellow (as defined in the Faculty Handbook), or a full-time or
part-time staff member (as defined in the Staff Handbook), or Student, who is employed by the
Institution or who is working under an Institution contract, either expressed or implied.
E. Intellectual Property - Means: (i) trademarks, service marks, brand names, trade dress, assumed
names, trade names, slogans, URLs, domain names, logos and other indications of source,
sponsorship or affiliation, together with all associated goodwill (whether the foregoing are registered,
unregistered or the subject of a pending application for registration); (ii) inventions, developments,
improvements, discoveries, know how, concepts and ideas, whether patentable or not, in any
jurisdiction; (iii) patents, patent applications and patent disclosures; (iv) trade secrets and proprietary
or confidential information; (v) writings and other works of authorship, whether subject to copyright
protection or not, in any jurisdiction, including but not limited to literary works (such as books,
scholarly articles, journal articles and other articles, theses, research, course syllabi, curricula, exams,
instructional and evaluation materials for classes, courses, labs or seminars, study guides, student
rosters and attendance forms, grade reports, assessment of student work and projects, course or
program proposals, software, data and databases, lecture and presentation materials); musical works
(including any accompanying words); dramatic works (including any accompanying music);
pantomimes and choreographic works; pictorial, graphic, and sculpture works (including graphic
designs; illustrations, photographs, paintings, sculptures and other works of art); motion pictures and
other audiovisual works (including films, audio and video recordings and multimedia projects); sound
Page 158 of 183
recordings; architectural works; and compilations; and (vi) copyrights, copyright registrations and
applications for registration of copyrights in any jurisdiction.
F. Patent - A United States patent is a grant which gives the owner of the patent the right to exclude all
others from making, using, or selling the claimed invention in the United States for a set period of
time. Similar rights are granted in other countries, but the discussion of Patents in this Policy will
focus specifically on United States patent rights.
G. Sponsored Work - Sponsored Work is a Work (as defined in paragraph K) that is produced or created
under an agreement between the Institution and a sponsor which provides the Institution with
ownership and/or usage rights to the Work and Intellectual Property produced under the agreement.
Sponsored works do not include works created through independent academic effort or creative
activity, even when based on the findings of the sponsored project, so long as an agreement does not
state otherwise.
H. Student - A Student is a regularly registered, full- or part-time, undergraduate or graduate at the
Institution, including students attending the Institution as “special status students”: e.g., as
participants in Professional Institute for Educators (PIE), Continuing Education (CE), the Pre-College or
Saturday programs, or in exchange programs or through special grants or fellowships.
I. Substantial Institutional Resources - Any substantial use of Institution equipment, facilities, time,
personnel, or funds, and use of Institution resources that are not “commonly provided”, is considered
a use of “Substantial Institutional Resources.” This use does not include resources commonly
provided to Institution faculty and staff, such as offices, library facilities, basic artistic facilities, and
everyday telephone, computer, and computer network support. However, substantial time spent in
the use of these latter resources may constitute the use of “Substantial Institutional Resources.”
Resources not considered “commonly provided” include specially procured equipment or space,
additional staffing or personnel, utilization beyond normal work hours of Institution personnel, and
monetary expenditures that require a budget. Faculty may use the basic artistic facilities unless use
infringes on student use of those facilities for coursework.
J. Trademark and Service Mark - A trademark or service mark is any word, phrase, name, symbol, logo,
slogan, device, or any combination thereof that is used in trade to identify and distinguish one party’s
goods or services from those of others.
K. Work - The term “Work” as used in this Policy shall be defined to include all of the items identified in
Sections (i), (ii), (iv) and (v) of the definition of Intellectual Property in paragraph E.
L. Work Made for Hire - A “Work Made for Hire” is defined as a Work (as defined in paragraph K)
prepared by an employee within the scope of his or her employment.
Consistent with the Copyright Act of 1976, as amended, a Work Made for Hire under this Policy also
includes a work specially ordered or commissioned for use as a contribution to a collective work, as a
part of a motion picture or other audiovisual work, as a translation, as a supplementary work, as a
compilation, as an instructional text, as a test, as answer material for a test, or as an atlas, if the
parties expressly agree in a written instrument signed by them that the work shall be considered a
work made for hire.
Examples of works made for hire include software programs created within the scope of an
employee’s duties by a staff programmer, a newspaper article written by a staff journalist for the
newspaper that employs him/her, and a musical arrangement or ditty written for a music company
by a salaried arranger on its staff.
III.
Policy Provisions
A. Faculty, Staff and Student Works
1. General Rule.
Subject to the exceptions noted in this Policy, as a general rule, The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale does not claim ownership of Intellectual Property developed through
Independent Academic Effort or Creative Activity and that is intended to disseminate the
Page 159 of 183
2.
results of academic research and scholarship, and/or to exhibit forms of artistic expression
on the part of faculty, staff, and Students.
Exceptions to the General Rule. Exceptions to the general rule set forth in III.A.1 above include
Intellectual Property developed by faculty, staff, students and Institutional Employees under any of
the following circumstances:
a. The Intellectual Property is developed as a Sponsored Work.
b. The Intellectual Property is developed as a Commissioned Work.
c. The Intellectual Property is developed using Substantial Institutional Resources.
d. The Intellectual Property is developed by the creator within the scope of his or her
employment with The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale and constitutes a Work Made for Hire.
e. The Intellectual Property is developed by a creator who is assigned, directed or funded by
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale to create the Intellectual Property.
f. The Intellectual Property is developed under a grant, program or agreement which provides
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale with ownership rights, in whole or in part, to the
Intellectual Property.
Under the circumstances described in Section III.A.2(a) through (f) above, the Intellectual
Property shall be owned by The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale (or by The Art Institute of
Fort Lauderdale and any other party as specified in any written grant, program or
agreement).
The creator of any Intellectual Property that is or might be owned by The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale under this Policy is required to make reasonable prompt written disclosure of the
Work to an officer designated by The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’s President, and to
execute any document deemed necessary by The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale to perfect
legal rights in The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale and enable The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale to file applications for registration when desired.
3.
Ownership Rights in Specific Types of Works.
For purposes of clarification and without limiting the general rule and exceptions set forth in Sections
III.A.1 and 2 above, ownership rights in the following types of Works are allocated as set forth below:
a. Curricular materials including course outlines, curricula, lesson plans, course handouts,
PowerPoint and other presentation materials (in all forms and media), course content and
syllabi are deemed to be Works Made for Hire and therefore all Intellectual Property
associated therewith is owned by The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale. Likewise, student
rosters, attendance forms, interim grade reports, and assessments of student projects,
including all Intellectual Property associated therewith, belong solely to The Art Institute of
Fort Lauderdale.
b.
Unless developed under the circumstances set forth in Section III.A.2 (a) through (f), or a
written agreement provides otherwise, scholarly articles and papers written for publication
in journals, presentations and scholarly papers prepared for seminars and conferences, and
personal lecture or teaching notes are typically not considered to be owned by The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale as Works Made for Hire or otherwise.
c.
If any Intellectual Property to be owned by The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale under
Section III.A.2 (a) through (f) above is developed jointly with a non-Institution party, the
parties respective ownership and usage rights in the resulting Intellectual Property shall be
set forth in a written agreement.
d.
Where Intellectual Property is to be developed using Substantial Institutional Resources,
authorized representatives of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale will develop a written
agreement with the user of those resources, which must be executed by the parties prior to
Page 160 of 183
use of the resources, to identify the nature and terms of the use, including possible
reimbursements or other systems of compensation back to The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale.
B.
e.
Unless a Work is developed under the circumstances set forth in Section III.A.2 (a) through
(f), or a written agreement provides otherwise, all Intellectual Property created by faculty
during sabbatical are owned by the faculty.
f.
Unless the Work is developed under the circumstances set forth in Section III.A.2 (a) through
(f), or a written agreement provides otherwise, Intellectual Property created by a Student
working on his or her own, or developed in the context of a course, is owned by the Student
and The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale will not use the Student’s Work without the
Student’s permission to do so.
g.
Students working on a project governed by an existing written agreement to which The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale is a party are bound by all terms of that agreement.
h.
Students hired to carry out specific tasks that contribute to Intellectual Property of The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale retain no rights of ownership in whole or in part to that
Intellectual Property or to the Student’s contribution to that work.
i.
Students who wish to work collaboratively with Institutional Employees on projects which
involve the creation of Works and Intellectual Property are required to sign and deliver an
acceptable written agreement to The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale outlining their rights
before commencing work on such projects. Either party has the right to initiate such
agreement.
j.
The rights of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale to a perpetual, worldwide license (exclusive
or non-exclusive, as The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale deems necessary), to use and
reproduce copyrighted materials for educational, research, and promotional purposes must
be included in any agreement with a non- Institution sponsor.
Independent Contractor Works.
As a general rule, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale will own Intellectual Property created by an
independent contractor if a written agreement signed by the parties so provides, or The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale has specially ordered or commissioned the work and such work is
designated as a Work Made for Hire in a signed written agreement between the parties. If The
Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale does not own the Intellectual Property created by an
independent contractor, it shall have a right or license to use any Work produced by the
independent contractor in the course of performance of the contract, in accordance with the
parties’ agreement.
IV.
Institution’s Usage Rights
To the extent that faculty, staff or Institutional Employees retain ownership of Work and Intellectual Property
according to this Policy, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale shall have a permanent, non-exclusive, worldwide,
royalty free right and license to make educational use of such Work and Intellectual Property, including the right to
use, reproduce, distribute, display, perform and modify (i.e. create derivative works) such Work and Intellectual
Property in all forms and media now known or hereafter existing in connection with its curriculum, courses of
instruction and educational programs, and any related accreditation or promotion of The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale. Where practicable, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale will use best efforts to cite the creator of the
Work if The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale exercises such usage rights.
Page 161 of 183
V.
Institution’s Marks
Intellectual Property comprised of or associated with The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’s Trademarks and Service
Marks, including but not limited to its name, logos, slogans, insignia, and other symbols of identity (collectively the
“Marks”) belongs exclusively to The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale and/or its affiliates. This Policy is designed to
protect the reputation of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale and its affiliates, and to prevent the illegal or
unapproved use of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’s Marks.
No Institution Mark may be used without the prior, written authorization of the appropriate authorities of The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale. However, faculty, staff, and Students may identify their status or professional
affiliation with The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale as appropriate, but any use of The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale’s Marks in this regard must avoid any confusing, misleading or false impression of affiliation with, or
sponsorship or endorsement by, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale. No products or services may be marked,
offered, sold, promoted or distributed with or under The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’s Marks without The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale’s prior written permission and compliance with the licensing policies of The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale. All requests for use of Institution Marks must be submitted in writing to an officer
designated by the President. The designated Institution officer retains information concerning what marks, names,
logos, symbols, insignias, and related words, phrases, and images currently comprise The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale’s Marks.
VI.
Substantial Use of Institution Resources
Although “Substantial Institutional Resources” is defined (see Section II. Terminology), it is acknowledged that such
resources and their use may change over time, with changes in technology, physical infrastructure of The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale, modes of employment, etc. Therefore, this Policy allows the Academic Policy Advisory
Committee to review the definition of “substantial use” from time to time and implement any changes or
clarification to the definitions which The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale deems necessary in order to establish an
appropriate standard.
Review Scheme
Questions concerning this Intellectual Property Policy should be addressed to the Dean of Academic Affairs.
VII.
Reservation of Rights
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale reserves the right at any time in its sole discretion to modify and/or make
changes to the Policy as advisable or appropriate. The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale agrees, however, that it will
endeavor to notify the entire Institution community through both print and electronic means of its intention to
make modifications and/or changes to the Policy at least 30 working days prior to their enactment.
VIII.
Effective Date
This Policy supersedes any preexisting Intellectual Property policy of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale and will
remain in effect until modified or revoked by The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale. This Policy will be binding on all
parties who create Intellectual Property after the effective date, and this Policy and other agreements that
represent modifications to this Policy shall remain binding on such creators even after their relationship with The
Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale changes or terminates.
IX.
Governing Law
This Policy shall be governed by and interpreted under applicable federal laws pertaining to intellectual property
and applicable state law, without regard to choice of law provisions.
Crime Awareness Report
The College publishes an annual security report that contains information concerning policies and programs relating to campus
security, crimes and emergencies, the prevention of crimes and sexual offenses, drug and alcohol use, campus law enforcement
and access to campus facilities. The annual security report also includes statistics concerning the occurrence of specified types
of crimes on campus, at certain off-campus locations, and on the public property surrounding the campus. The annual security
report is published each year by October 1 and contains statistics for the three most recent calendar years. The annual security
Page 162 of 183
report is provided to all current students and employees. A copy of the most recent annual security report may be obtained from
the Student Services office during regular business hours. Copies of the Crime Report are available on the College website at
http://www.artinstitutes.edu/fort-lauderdale/pdf/student-handbook.pdf.
The College reports to the campus community concerning the occurrence of any crime includable in the annual security report
that is reported to campus security or local police and that is considered to be a threat to students or employees.
The College reminds all students that they are ultimately responsible for their own actions regarding their safety and welfare.
Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA)
The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, as amended ("FERPA") sets out requirements designed to
afford students certain rights with respect to their education records. In addition, it puts limits on what
information The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale may disclose to third parties without receiving prior written
consent from the student.
I. Procedure to Inspect Education Records
Students have the right under FERPA to inspect and review their education records. A student who wishes to
inspect and review his/her records should submit a written request to the Registrar. The request should identify as
precisely as possible the records the student wishes to inspect. If the requested records are subject to inspection
and review by the student, arrangements for access will be made within a reasonable period of time but in no case
more than 45 days after the request was made, and the student will be notified of the time and place where the
records may be inspected. The school may require the presence of a school official during the inspection and
review of a student's records.
Certain limitations exist on a student's right to inspect and review their own education records. Those limitations
include, for example, the following: (i) financial information submitted by parents; (ii) confidential letters and
recommendations placed in their files prior to January 1, 1975; (iii) confidential letters and recommendations
placed in their files after January 1, 1975 to which the student has waived his or her right to inspect and review
and that are related to the student's admission, application for employment or job placement, or receipt of
honors. In addition, the term "education record" does not include certain types of records such as, by way of
example, records of instructional, supervisory, administrative, and certain educational personnel that are in the
sole possession of the maker thereof, and are not accessible or revealed to any other individual except a
substitute.
When a record contains personally identifiable information about more than one student, the student may inspect
and review only the information that relates to him/her personally.
II. Disclosure of Educational Records
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale generally will not permit disclosure of personally identifiable information from
the records of a student without prior written consent of the student. Personally identifiable information is
disclosed (some items are mandatory, some discretionary) from the records of a student without that student's
prior written consent to the following individuals or institutions or in the following circumstances:
•
•
•
To The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale officials who have been determined by the school to have
legitimate educational interests in the records. A school official is
a person employed by the school or its corporate parent in an administrative, supervisory, academic or
research, or support staff position. This includes, but is not limited to human resources and accounting
staff for purposes of the tuition reimbursement plan; or
a person employed by or under contract to the school to perform specific tasks, such as an auditor,
consultant, or attorney, a person on the Board of Trustees, or a student serving on an official committee
or assisting another school official.
Page 163 of 183
Any school official who needs information about a student in the course of performing instructional, supervisory,
advisory, or administrative duties for The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale has a legitimate educational interest.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
To certain officials of the United States Department of Education, the Comptroller General of the United
States, the Attorney General of the United States, and state and local educational authorities in
connection with state or federally supported educational programs.
In connection with the student's request for, or receipt of, financial aid necessary to determine the
eligibility, amounts or conditions of financial aid, or to enforce the terms and conditions of the aid.
To organizations conducting certain studies for or on behalf of the school.
To accrediting commissions or state licensing or regulatory bodies to carry out their functions.
To parents of a dependent student, as defined in Section 152 of the Internal Revenue Code.
To comply with a judicial order or lawfully issued subpoena.
To appropriate parties in health or safety emergencies.
To officials of another school in which a student seeks or intends to enroll.
To an alleged victim of a crime of violence or a nonforcible sexual offense, the final results of the
disciplinary proceedings conducted by the school against the alleged perpetrator of that crime or offense
with respect to that crime or offense.
To persons in addition to the victim of a crime of violence or nonforcible sexual offense, the final results
of the disciplinary proceedings described in paragraph 10 above but only if the school has determined
that a student is the perpetrator of a crime of violence or nonforcible sexual offense, and with respect to
the allegation made against him or her, the student has committed a violation of the institution’s rules or
policies. (The school, in such instances, may only disclose the name of the perpetrator not the name of
any other student, including a victim or witness without the prior written consent of the other student(s)).
To a parent regarding the student’s violation of any federal, state, or local law or of any rules or policy of
the school governing the use or possession of alcohol or a controlled substance if the school determines
that the student has committed a disciplinary violation with respect to that use or possession, and the
student is under 21 at the time of the disclosure to the parent.
Directory information (see Section IV below).
Student Recruiting Information as requested by the U.S. Military. Student recruiting information includes
ONLY: name, address, telephone listing, age or date of birth, class level, academic major, place of birth,
degrees received and most recent educational institution attended. It does not include and The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale will not provide: social security numbers, race, ethnicity, nationality, GPA,
grades, low performing student lists, religious affiliation, students with loans in default, veteran’s status,
students no longer enrolled. Students who opt out of the directory also opt out of student recruiting
information.
III. Record of Requests for Disclosure
Except with respect to those requests made by the student themselves, those disclosures made with the
written consent of the student, or to requests by or disclosures to The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale officials with
legitimate educational interests and disclosures of directory information (or other exceptions described in the
applicable regulations), The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale will maintain a record indicating the parties who have
requested or obtained personally identifiable information from a student's education records and the legitimate
interests those parties had in requesting or obtaining the information. This record may be inspected by the
student.
IV. Directory Information
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale designates the following information as directory information. (Directory
information is personally identifiable information which may be disclosed without the student's consent):
a) Student's name
b) Address: Local, email and website
c) Telephone number (local)
d) Date and place of birth
Page 164 of 183
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
Program of study
Participation in officially recognized activities
Dates of attendance
Degrees and certificates awarded
Most recent previously attended school
Photograph of the student, if available
Enrollment status (i.e., enrolled, continuing, future enrolled student, reentry, leave of absence, etc.)
Student honors and awards received.
The height and weight of athletic team members
Notice of these categories and of the right of an individual in attendance at The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale to
request that his/her directory information be kept confidential will be given to the student annually. Students may
request nondisclosure of student directory information by specifying nondisclosure, in writing, to the Office of the
th
Registrar, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale, 1799 SE 17 Street, Fort Lauderdale, FL 33316. Failure to request
nondisclosure of directory information will result in routine disclosure of one or more of the above designated
categories of personally identifiable directory information.
V. Correction of Educational Records
Students have the right under FERPA to ask to have records corrected which they believe are inaccurate,
misleading, or in violation of their privacy rights. The following are the procedures for the correction of records:
o A student must ask the Registrar to amend a record. As part of the request, the student should
identify the part of the record they want to have changed and specify why they believe it to be
inaccurate, misleading, or in violation of his/her privacy rights.
o The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale may either amend the record or decide not to amend the
record. If it decides not to amend the record, it will notify the student of its decision and advise
the student of the right to a hearing to challenge the information believed to be inaccurate,
misleading, or in violation of the student's privacy rights.
o Upon request, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale will arrange for a hearing and notify the
student reasonably in advance of the date, place, and time of the hearing. The hearing will be
conducted by an individual who does not have a direct interest in the outcome of the hearing.
That individual may be an official of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale. The student shall be
afforded a forum for the opportunity to present evidence relevant to the issues raised in the
original request to amend the student's education records. The student may be assisted by other
people, including an attorney.
o The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale will prepare a written decision based solely on the evidence
presented at the hearing. The decision will include a summary of the evidence, and the reasons
for the decision.
o If, as a result of the hearing, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale decides that the information is
inaccurate, misleading, or otherwise in violation of the privacy rights of the student, it will (a)
amend the record accordingly; and (b) inform the student of the amendment in writing.
o If, as a result of the hearing, The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale decides that the information in
the education record is not inaccurate, misleading, or otherwise in violation of the privacy rights
of the student, it shall inform the student of the right to place a statement in the record
commenting on the contested information in the record or stating why he or she disagrees with
the decision of the school.
o If a statement is placed in the education records of a student under paragraph 6 above, The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale will: (a) maintain the statement with the contested part of the record
for as long as the record is maintained; and (b) disclose the statement whenever it discloses the
portion of the record to which the statement relates.
Page 165 of 183
VI. Student Right to File Complaint
A student has the right to file a complaint with the United States Department of Education concerning alleged
failures by The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale to comply with the requirements of FERPA. The name and address
of the governmental office that administers FERPA is:
Family Policy Compliance Office
United States Department of Education
400 Maryland Avenue, S.W.
Washington, DC 20202-4605
Jury Waiver And Agreement to Binding, Individual Arbitration
Student and The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale irrevocably waive our rights to a trial by jury and agree instead
that any and all disputes, no matter how described, pleaded or styled, between me and The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale (including its parent and past and present affiliates, employees, agents, and lenders) or related to any
aspect of my relationship with or any act or omission by The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale (“Claim”) shall be
resolved by individual binding arbitration, conducted by the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”) under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules and applicable Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes (“AAA
Rules”) and in accordance with the terms of this Jury Waiver and Agreement to Binding, Individual Arbitration
(“Arbitration Agreement”). Student can obtain a copy of the AAA Rules at www.adr.org or by calling 1-800-7787879. This Arbitration Agreement, however, does not modify Student’s right, if any, to file a grievance with any
state educational licensing agency or accrediting body.
I.
Student is strongly encouraged to first attempt to resolve the Claim by using the General Student
Complaint Procedure outlined in the Catalog.
II.
Neither party shall file or maintain any lawsuit in court against the other, and any suit filed in violation of
this Arbitration Agreement shall be dismissed by the court in favor of arbitration conducted pursuant to
this Arbitration Agreement. The parties agree that the moving party shall be entitled to an award of costs
and fees of compelling arbitration.
III.
The arbitration shall take place before a single, neutral arbitrator in the federal judicial district in which
Student resides, unless the parties agree otherwise.
IV.
Student will be responsible for paying a portion of the AAA filing fee at the time his/her Claim is filed in an
amount equal to $200 or the applicable filing fee of the court of general jurisdiction in the district/circuit
near me, whichever fee is less. The parties shall bear the expense of their own attorneys, experts and
witnesses, unless the applicable law provides, and the arbitrator determines, otherwise.
V.
Student agrees not to combine or consolidate any Claims with those of other students, such as in a class
or mass action, or to have any Claims be arbitrated or litigated jointly or consolidated with any other
person’s claims. Further, the parties agree that the arbitrator shall have no authority to join or
consolidate claims by more than one person. I understand that I may opt out of this single-case
provision by delivering via certified mail return receipt a written statement to that effect to the Vice
President and Senior Counsel of The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale /EDMC at 210 Sixth Avenue, Suite
3300 Pittsburgh, PA 15222 within 30 days of my first execution of an Enrollment Agreement.
VI.
The Federal Arbitration Act (FAA), including all its substantive and procedural provisions, and related
federal decisional law shall govern this Arbitration Agreement to the fullest extent possible. All
determinations as to the scope, enforceability, validity and effect of this Arbitration Agreement shall be
made by the arbitrator, and not by a court. However, any issue concerning the validity of paragraph 5
above must be decided by a court, and an arbitrator does not have authority to consider the validity of
paragraph 5. If for any reason, paragraph 5 is found to be unenforceable, any putative class or mass action
may only be heard in court on a non-jury basis and may not be arbitrated under this Agreement.
Page 166 of 183
VII.
The arbitrator shall have the power to award any remedy that directly benefits the parties to this
Arbitration Agreement (provided the remedy would be available from a court under the law where the
Arbitration Agreement was executed) but not the power to award relief for the benefit of anyone not a
party to this Arbitration Agreement.
VIII.
Judgment on the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in any court having jurisdiction.
IX.
Notwithstanding any provision in the Catalog or Enrollment Agreement, this Arbitration Agreement shall
not be modified except by written agreement signed by both parties. Any or all of the provisions set forth
in this Arbitration Agreement may also be waived by the party against whom the Claim is asserted, but
such waiver shall be in writing, physically signed (not merely electronically signed) by the party waiving,
and specifically identify the provision or provisions being waived. Any such waiver shall not waive or affect
any other portion of the Arbitration Agreement.
X.
This Arbitration Agreement shall survive the termination of Student’s relationship with The Art Institute of
Fort Lauderdale.
XI.
If any part(s) of this Arbitration Agreement are found to be invalid or unenforceable, then such specific
part(s) shall be of no force and effect and shall be severed, but the remainder of the Arbitration
Agreement shall continue in full force and effect.
STUDENT UNDERSTANDS AND ACKNOWLEDGES THAT S/HE IS WAIVING HIS/HER RIGHT TO A JURY TRIAL, TO
ENGAGE IN DISCOVERY (EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THE AAA RULES), AND TO LITIGATE THE DISPUTE OR CLAIM IN
ANY COURT. FURTHER, STUDENT UNDERSTANDS AND ACKNOWLEDGES THAT S/HE WILL NOT HAVE THE RIGHT TO
PARTICIPATE AS A REPRESENTATIVE OR MEMBER OF ANY CLASS ACTION AGAINST THE ART INSTITUTE OF FORT
LAUDERDALE.
General Student Complaint Procedure
If you have a complaint or problem you are encouraged to follow the Student Complaint Procedure.
You should discuss complaints with the individual(s) within the appropriate department. Initial discussion should
be with the person most knowledgeable of the issues involved or with immediate decision-making responsibility.
If you feel that the complaint has not been fully addressed, a written account should be submitted to the Dean of
Student Services if related to non-academic issues or to the Dean of Academic Affairs for academic issues. The
written account should indicate your name, phone number, and ID# and discuss the steps you have taken to
remedy the situation.
The appropriate The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale staff member or department will be notified of the complaint.
A follow-up meeting with you and the Dean of Student Services and/or the Dean of Academic Affairs will be held
within ten school days of the date of the written complaint in an effort to resolve the issue.
If you are not satisfied with the results, you may file an appeal with the President's Office. The appeal should be in
writing and contain your name and phone number. You should summarize the steps you have taken to remedy the
situation and indicate why the results are not satisfactory. You will hear the results of the appeal within ten class
days from the date the appeal is received.
If you follow this complaint procedure and still feel dissatisfied with the results you may send a written copy of the
complaint to:
Page 167 of 183
Commission for Independent Education, Florida Department of Education
325 W. Gaines St., Suite 1414
Tallahassee, FL 32399-0400
1-(888)-224-6684.
or you may contact:
ACICS
750 First Street N.E., Suite 980
Washington DC 20002-4223
202.336.678
Please refer to the school’s Jury Waiver Agreement to Binding, Individual Arbitration Policy for additional
information regarding disputes or claims.
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale Policies to Comply with the Higher Education
Opportunity Act of 2008
The unauthorized distribution of copyrighted material, including unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing, may
subject students and individuals to civil and criminal liabilities. Almost all of the music, movies, television shows,
software, games and images found on the Internet are protected by federal copyright law. The owner of the
copyright in these works has the right to control their distribution, modification, reproduction, public display and
public performance. It is generally illegal therefore to use file sharing networks to download and share
copyrighted works without the copyright owner’s permission unless “fair use” or another exemption under
copyright law applies.
Fair use under the federal Copyright Act allows the use without permission of copyrighted material for the purpose
of criticism, comment, news reporting or teaching under certain limited circumstances. There is no blanket
exception from liability for students or employees of educational institutions, however, and whether the use of
copyrighted material without permission falls within “fair use” or one of the other exceptions in the Act depends
on a very detailed, case-by-case analysis of various factors. Students should be aware that sharing music, videos,
software and other copyrighted materials is very likely not to be considered a ‘fair use” and therefore may be a
violation of the law.
A violation of the institution’s policy for use of its information technology system can result in termination of
network access for the student and/or other disciplinary action including removal of the student from the
institution. Moreover, there are severe civil and criminal penalties for copyright infringement under federal law. A
copyright owner is entitled to recover actual damages and profits resulting from an infringement, but also may
recover statutory damages ranging from $750 to $30,000 per work for a non-willful infringement and up to
$150,000 for a willful infringement, even if there is no proof of actual damages, in addition to court costs and
reasonable attorneys’ fees. The government also can file criminal charges that can result in fines and
imprisonment.
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’s policies in regard to copyright infringement via the Internet prohibit the
illegal downloading or unauthorized distribution of copyrighted materials using the institution’s information
technology system. The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’s policies prohibit use of The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale computer network to engage in illegal copying or distribution of copyrighted works such as by
unauthorized peer-to-peer file sharing (i.e., the sharing of copyrighted works, typically in digital or electronic files,
without permission.
Page 168 of 183
Sexual Misconduct & Relationship Violence Policy; Procedures for Handling Sexual
Misconduct and Relationship Violence Complaints
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale values civility, dignity, diversity, education, honesty, and safety and is firmly
committed to maintaining a campus environment free from all forms of sex discrimination, sexual harassment, and
sexual assault. Sexual Misconduct and Relationship Violence, defined more specifically below, are inconsistent
with these values, violate institutional policy, and will not be tolerated at <<ED SYSTEM and Campus Name>> and
are expressly prohibited. Similarly, retaliation for having brought forward a concern or allegation or for
participating in an investigation of a report of Sexual Misconduct or Relationship Violence is also expressly
prohibited and is grounds for disciplinary action.
This Policy provides information regarding how an individual – whether a student, faculty member, or staff
member – can make a report of Sexual Misconduct or Relationship Violence impacting a student and how The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale will proceed once it is made aware of any such report.
For faculty and staff members who believe they are the victim of sexual misconduct, please follow our No
Harassment policy in the Employee Handbook.
1.
Preliminary Issues & Important Definitions
This Policy prohibits “Sexual Misconduct” and “Relationship Violence,” broad categories encompassing the
conduct defined below. Sexual Misconduct and Relationship Violence can be committed by anyone, including
third parties, and can occur between people of the same sex or different sexes and regardless of one’s
biological sex or transgendered sex. This policy applies to Sexual Misconduct and Relationship Violence that is
committed against a student when that Sexual Misconduct or Relationship Violence occurs: (i) on campus; (ii)
off-campus if in connection with a School-sponsored program or activity or in student housing; or (iii) offcampus if allegedly perpetrated by a fellow student, faculty member, staff member, or third party when the
victim/reporting student reasonably believes that the off-campus conduct has created a hostile educational
environment.
1.
What is “Sexual Misconduct”?
Sexual Misconduct includes:
A. Sexual Assault: Having or attempting to have sexual intercourse, cunnilingus, or fellatio without
Consent (as defined below). Sexual intercourse is defined as anal or vaginal penetration by a penis,
tongue, finger, or inanimate object.
B. Non-Consensual Sexual Contact: Any intentional sexual touching with any body part or object by any
person upon any person without Consent.
C. Sexual Exploitation: An act attempted or committed through the abuse or exploitation of another
person’s sexuality. Examples include, but are not limited to, prostituting another student; inducing a
student into sexual intercourse, sexual contact, or other sexual activity by implicit or explicit threat of
exposure of personal information or academic consequences; non-consensual video or audio-taping
of sexual activity; allowing others to observe a personal consensual sexual act without the knowledge
or Consent of all involved parties; and knowingly transmitting or exposing another person to a
sexually transmitted infection without the person’s knowledge.
D. Indecent Exposure: the exposure of the private or intimate parts of the body in a lewd manner in
public or in private premises when the accused may be readily observed.
E. Sexual Harassment: unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors, and other physical or
verbal conduct of a sexual nature when it meets any of the following: (a) Submission to such conduct
is made either explicitly or implicitly a term or condition of an individual’s academic status; or (b)
Submission to or rejection of such conduct by an individual is used as the basis for academic decisions
affecting such individual; or (c) Such conduct has the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering
with an individual’s work or academic performance or creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive
environment for working, learning, or living on campus.
Page 169 of 183
2.
What is “Relationship Violence”?
Relationship Violence includes:
• Domestic Violence: Violence, including but not limited to sexual or physical abuse or the threat of
such abuse, committed by a current or former spouse or intimate partner or any other person from
whom the student is protected under federal or applicable state law.
• Dating Violence: Violence, including but not limited to sexual or physical abuse or the threat of such
abuse, committed by a person who is or has been in a social relationship of a romantic or intimate
nature with the alleged victim. The existence of such a relationship is generally determined based on
a consideration of the length and type of relationship and the frequency of interaction.
• Stalking: A course of conduct directed at a specific person that would cause a reasonable person to
fear for their own safety or the safety of others or suffer substantial emotional distress. A course of
conduct means two or more acts in which a person directly, indirectly or through third parties, by any
action, method, device or means, follows, monitors, observes, surveils, threatens, or communicates
to or about a person or interferes with a person’s property.
The following also constitute violations of this Policy:
o Complicity: Assisting, facilitating, or encouraging the commission of a violation of this Policy.
o Retaliation: Acts or attempted acts for the purpose of interfering with any report, investigation,
or proceeding under this Policy, or as retribution or revenge against anyone who has reported
Sexual Misconduct or Relationship Violence or who has participated (or is expected to
participate) in any manner in an investigation, or proceeding under this Policy. Prohibited
retaliatory acts include, but are not limited to, intimidation, threats, coercion, or discrimination.
To be clear, retaliation against a Complainant for reporting an incident or against any witness
who participates in an investigation is strictly prohibited.
3.
Who are “Complainants” and “Respondents”?
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale is not a court of law. We also do not engage in victim-blaming or
rushes to judgment. Therefore, without judgment, we refer to anyone who reports that s/he has
experienced Sexual Misconduct as a “Complainant” and to anyone who reportedly has engaged in Sexual
Misconduct as a “Respondent.”
4.
Defining Consent
In many cases of Sexual Misconduct, the central issue is consent or the ability to give consent. Consent is
a voluntary agreement to engage in sexual activity. Consent to engage in sexual activity must exist from
beginning to end of each instance of sexual activity. Past Consent does not imply future Consent, and
Consent to engage in one form of sexual activity does not imply Consent to engage in a different form of
sexual activity. Consent is demonstrated through mutually understandable words and/or actions that
clearly indicate a willingness to engage in a specific sexual activity. Consent must be knowing and
voluntary. To give Consent, a person must be awake, of legal age, and have the capacity to reasonably
understand the nature of her/his actions. Individuals who are physically or mentally incapacitated cannot
give Consent.
Silence, without actions evidencing permission, does not demonstrate Consent. Where force, threats, or
coercion is alleged, the absence of resistance does not demonstrate Consent. Force, threats, or coercion
invalidates Consent. The responsibility of obtaining Consent rests with the person initiating sexual
activity. Use of alcohol or drugs does not diminish one’s responsibility to obtain Consent or negate one’s
intent.
Consent to engage in sexual activity may be withdrawn by either person at any time. Once withdrawal of
Consent has been clearly expressed, the sexual activity must cease.
Page 170 of 183
Incapacitation is the inability, temporarily or permanently, to give Consent, because the individual is
mentally and/or physically helpless due to drug or alcohol consumption, either voluntarily or involuntarily,
due to an intellectual or other disability that prevents the student from having the capacity to give
Consent, or the individual is unconscious, asleep or otherwise unaware that the sexual activity is
occurring. In addition, an individual is incapacitated if he or she demonstrates that they are unaware of
where they are, how they got there, or why or how they became engaged in a sexual interaction. Where
alcohol is involved, incapacitation is a state beyond drunkenness or intoxication. Some indicators that an
individual is incapacitated may include, but are not limited to, vomiting, unresponsiveness, inability to
communicate coherently, inability to dress/undress without assistance, inability to walk without
assistance, slurred speech, loss of coordination, lack of awareness of circumstances or surroundings, or
inability to perform other physical or cognitive tasks without assistance.
5.
Title IX Coordinator & Deputy Coordinators
The Title IX Coordinator for The Art Institutes schools is: Kristine Andersen, Vice President of Student
Services. The Title IX Coordinator is responsible for, among other things, coordinating the campus’s
efforts to comply with and carry out the campus’s responsibilities under Title IX of the Education
Amendments of 1972, including compliance with this policy. The Title IX Coordinator will help to
coordinate any investigations under this Policy.
In addition, the School has other individuals who serve as Deputy Title IX Coordinators to help oversee
investigations and determination proceedings under this Policy.
6.
Reporting & Confidentiality
We encourage victims of Sexual Misconduct & Relationship Violence to talk to somebody about what
happened – so they can get the support they need, and so the School can respond appropriately.
Different employees on campus have different abilities to maintain confidentiality:
• CONFIDENTIAL REPORTING: Some individuals are required to maintain near complete confidentiality.
These include professional counselors such as those provided by Talk One2One counseling services.
These individuals can provide resources and generally talk to a victim without revealing any
personally identifying information about an incident to the School. A victim can seek assistance and
support from these individuals without triggering a School investigation.
•
NON-CONFIDENTIAL REPORTING. Other than professional counselors defined above, most other
employees and contractors are required to report all the details of an incident to the Title IX
coordinator. A report to these employees (called “responsible employees”) constitutes a report to
the School and generally obligates the School to investigate the incident and take appropriate steps
to address the situation. The following campus employees (or categories of employees) are examples
of responsible employees: the Title IX Coordinator, all Deputy Title IX Coordinators, President, Dean
of Student Services, other Student Services staff, Housing staff, Academic Advisors, the Security Team
(including contract security personnel), all full-time and adjunct Faculty, Human Resources, and
Employee Relations.
The School will seek to protect the privacy and confidentiality of the individuals involved in any report
of alleged Sexual Misconduct or Relationship Violence to the extent possible and allowed by law. The
Title IX Coordinator will evaluate any request for confidentiality in the context of the School’s
responsibility to provide a safe and nondiscriminatory environment to all members of its community.
The School will complete any publicly available record-keeping, including Clery Act reporting and
disclosure, without the inclusion of identifying information about the alleged victim. It will also
maintain as confidential any interim measures or remedies provided to the alleged victim to the
Page 171 of 183
extent that maintaining confidentiality will not impair its ability to provide the interim measures or
remedies.
In addition to internal reporting, the School strongly encourages anyone who believes they have
experienced a sexual assault (or any other crime) to make a report to local law enforcement.
Collection and preservation of evidence relating to the reported sexual assault is essential for law
enforcement investigations, so prompt reporting of the incident to law enforcement is especially
critical. Designated staff will, upon request, assist an individual in making a report to law
enforcement as necessary and appropriate.
Although we strongly encourage complainants to report to local law enforcement, such a report is
not a prerequisite to the School’s review and investigation of any complaint covered by this Policy.
The School will honor a Complainant’s request not to report the matter to local law enforcement
UNLESS we have a reasonable basis to believe that the safety and security of the campus community
is at risk. In this event, the School will endeavor to notify a Complainant or Reporter of the
institution’s intent to report the matter to law enforcement in advance of any such report.
The School does not limit the time frame for reporting under this Policy, although a delay in reporting
may impact the School’s ability to take certain actions.
Other Code of Conduct Violations: The School encourages students who have been the victim of
Sexual Misconduct or Relationship Violence to come forward. Students should not be discouraged
from reporting such incidents because they fear discipline for their own violations of the Student
Code of Conduct, such as use of alcohol in School housing. Therefore, the School has discretion not
to pursue other violations of the Student Code of Conduct that occurred in the context of the
reported incident of Sexual Misconduct or Relationship Violence.
7.
Response Procedure
Students are encouraged to report any incident of Sexual Misconduct or Relationship Violence to the Title
IX Coordinator, Deputy Title IX Coordinator, the Dean of Student Services, or the Campus President. If a
report is made verbally, the School will request a written statement by the student.
Upon receipt of a report, the School will generally proceed as described below.
• Investigation Commencement
The School will provide a timely and thorough investigation. Barring exigent circumstances, cases of
Sexual Misconduct and Relationship Violence will generally be resolved within a 60 day period once
the incident has been reported. An extension of time may be necessary if witnesses are unavailable
or uncooperative or due to other extenuating circumstances beyond the control of the investigator.
• Initial Response
Once the School is put on notice of possible Sexual Misconduct and Relationship Violence, the
Complainant will be offered appropriate confidential support, accommodations, and other resources
and will be notified of applicable policies and procedures. Accommodations include the ability to
move to different housing, to change work schedules, to alter academic schedules, to withdraw
from/retake a class without penalty, and to access academic support. The Respondent also will be
offered appropriate resources and notified of applicable policies and procedures.
• Interim Intervention
Pending a final determination, the Title IX Coordinator and/or Student Services staff will take
appropriate interim measures. These measures may include, but are not limited to, the imposition of
a no-contact order and/or employment, transportation, residence, and academic modifications.
Student Services staff may limit a student or organization’s access to certain School facilities or
activities pending resolution of the matter. The School may impose an Interim Suspension on the
Respondent pending the resolution of an alleged violation when the School determines, in its sole
Page 172 of 183
•
discretion, that it is necessary in order to protect the safety and well-being of members of the
campus community.
Decision to Proceed to Investigation
If the Complainant is willing to participate in the review and investigation process, the School will
proceed as described below in Section III (E).
If the Complainant requests a confidential investigation, the School will seek to protect the privacy
and confidentiality of the Complainant to the extent possible and allowed by law. The Title IX
Coordinator will evaluate any request for confidentiality in the context of the School’s responsibility
to provide a safe and nondiscriminatory environment to all members of its community.
If a confidential investigation is requested and agreed to, the School will investigate without revealing
the name of the Complainant in any interview or email and will not ask questions that inadvertently
or reasonably could reveal the identity of the Complainant.
If the Complainant asks that the report of sexual misconduct not be pursued, the School will consider
the interests of the Complainant, the campus community, law enforcement, and/or other
appropriate interests under the circumstances. The School, in consultation with the Title IX
Coordinator, will make a final decision on whether and to what extent it will conduct an investigation,
and notify the Complainant promptly.
•
Investigation Procedure
Investigators do not function as advocates for either Complainants or Respondents. Investigators
can, however, identify advocacy and support resources for either Complainants or Respondents. The
Respondent will receive written notice of the report and the nature of the alleged misconduct.
He/She will be advised in writing of the investigation process and opportunity to provide any relevant
evidence. The Investigation will generally be conducted by the Dean of Student Services for the
campus (or any other individual appointed by the Title IX Coordinator) if the Respondent is a student.
If the Respondent is a faculty or staff member, Employee Relations will also participate in the
investigation. The investigator will separately interview both Complainant and Respondent. Both
parties will be able to provide evidence and suggest other witnesses to be interviewed. The
investigator will interview other relevant witnesses and review any other available relevant evidence.
Both the Complainant and Respondent can have another individual present during their own
respective interviews. If the Complainant or Respondent elects, they may have an attorney present
during their own interview, but said attorney may not advocate during the interview.
•
Determinations
o For cases where the Respondent is a student.
The investigator will present all evidence to the Title IX Coordinator (or his/her designated
Deputy Title IX Coordinator). In all cases, the Title IX Coordinator or the designated Deputy Title
IX Coordinator will be appropriately trained regarding handling and considering sexual
misconduct and relationship violence cases. The Title IX Coordinator will weigh the evidence
presented and decide whether additional evidence is necessary for consideration. Ultimately,
the Title IX Coordinator will make a determination of whether a violation of the Sexual
Misconduct & Relationship Violence Policy or any other policy has occurred. The School reserves
the right to convene a Determination Panel to review the evidence and make the determination
in appropriate circumstances.
o For cases where the Respondent is a Faculty or Staff Member.
The investigator will present all evidence to the Ethics Committee of EDMC.
The Ethics
Committee will be appropriately trained regarding handling and adjudicating sexual misconduct
and relationship violence cases. The Ethics Committee will weigh the evidence presented and
Page 173 of 183
make a determination whether a violation of the Sexual Misconduct & Relationship Violence
Policy or any other policy has occurred.
•
•
•
•
Standard of Proof
In all cases under the Sexual Misconduct policy, the Title IX Coordinator (or designee) or the Ethics
Committee will determine if a violation of policy has occurred by the preponderance of evidence
standard. Thus, they will determine whether it is more likely than not that a violation has occurred.
Potential Sanctions
If a violation of policy has been found, the Title IX Coordinator or the Ethics Committee will impose
appropriate sanctions, including but not limited to coaching, training, probation, suspension, or
expulsion in the case of students or coaching, training, written warning, demotion, or termination in
the case of employees.
Outcome Notifications
Both the Complainant and Respondent will be notified in writing of the outcome of the investigation
and of the sanctions imposed, if any.
Appeals
If the Complainant or Respondent is a student, he or she may appeal the outcome determination by
written appeal to the Campus President within 15 days of notification of the outcome. An appeal
may be made based only on one or more of the following reasons:
o New and significant evidence appeared that could not have been discovered by a properly
diligent charged student or complainant before or during the original investigation and that
could have changed the outcome.
o The Finding is Arbitrary and Capricious: Reading all evidence in the favor of the non-appealing
party, the finding was not supported by reasonable grounds or adequate consideration of the
circumstances. In deciding appeals, the Campus President is allowed to make all logical
inferences in benefit of the non-appealing party.
o Disproportionate Sanctions: The sanctions were disproportionate to the findings.
The appeal shall consist of a written statement requesting review of the conduct decision or sanction and
explaining in detail the basis for the appeal. The Campus President, or designated representative, will notify the
non-appealing party of the request for an appeal. Within five working days of receipt of the notice, the nonappealing party may submit a written statement to be included in the case file. The appeal may proceed without
the non-appealing party’s written statement if it is not submitted within the designated time limit.
The Campus President will endeavor to make a determination of the appeal within 15 business days of receipt.
The President’s decision is final.
Student Grievance Procedure for Internal Complaints of Discrimination and Harassment
Students who believe they have been subjected to discrimination or harassment (other than sexual harassment) in
violation of the Non-Discrimination Policy should follow the procedure outlined below. (Please note that students
who believe they have been subjected to sexual harassment should follow the reporting process in the Sexual
Misconduct and Relationship Violence Policy.) This complaint procedure is intended to provide a fair, prompt and
reliable determination about whether The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale Non-Discrimination Policy has been
violated.
o Complainants are encouraged to file a complaint as soon as possible after an alleged incident of
discrimination has occurred. Any student who chooses to file a discrimination complaint should
do so either with the Dean of Student Services 954-308-2601 or with the Campus President 954308-2101. Online students should file complaints with studentcomplaints@aii.edu. The complaint
should be presented in writing and it should describe the alleged incident(s) and any corrective
action sought. The complaint should be signed by the complainant.
o The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale will investigate the allegations. Both the accuser and the
accused are entitled to have others present during a disciplinary proceeding. Both will be
informed of the outcome of any campus disciplinary proceeding. For this purpose, the outcome
Page 174 of 183
o
o
o
o
o
of a disciplinary proceeding means only The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale’s final determination
with respect to the alleged offense and any sanction that is imposed against the accused. Both
the complainant and the accused will have the opportunity to meet and discuss the allegations
with the investigator and may offer any witnesses in support of their position to the investigator
during the course of the investigation. A student may be accompanied during investigation
meetings and discussions by one person (family member, friend, etc.) who can act as an
observer, provide emotional support, and/or assist the student in understanding and cooperating
in the investigation. The observer may not be an attorney, unless otherwise required by local
law. The investigator may prohibit from attending or remove any person who disrupts the
investigation in the investigator’s sole discretion.
The student who made the complaint and the accused shall be informed promptly in writing
when the investigation is completed, no later than 45 calendar days from the date the complaint
was filed. The student who made the complaint shall be informed if there were findings made
that the policy was or was not violated and of actions taken to resolve the complaint, if any, that
are directly related to him/her, such as an order that the accused not contact the student who
made the complaint. In accordance with institutional policies protecting individuals’ privacy, the
student who made the complaint may generally be notified that the matter has been referred for
disciplinary action, but shall not be informed of the details of the recommended disciplinary
action without the consent of the accused.
The decision of the Investigator may be appealed by petitioning the President’s Office of The Art
Institute of Fort Lauderdale. The written appeal must be made within 20 calendar days of receipt
of the determination letter. The Campus President, or his or her designee, will render a written
decision on the appeal within 30 calendar days from receipt of the appeal. The President's
decision shall be final.
The Art Institute of Fort Lauderdale will not retaliate against persons bringing forward allegations
of harassment or discrimination.
Matters involving general student complaints will be addressed according to the Student
Complaint Procedures, a copy of which can be found in the Student Handbook or Academic
Catalog.
For more information about your rights under the federal laws prohibiting discrimination, please
contact the Office for Civil Rights at the U.S. Department of Education.
Page 175 of 183
FACULTY LISTING
Name
Ardiff, Mary
Balzano, Frank
Ben-Ezzer, Russ
Bing, Andy
Colda, Kerry
Embid, Jorge
Espinel, Carlos B.
Espinel, Malka
Evers, Valan
Farley, Kyle
Glenn, Elizabeth
Marshall, Joseph
Merle, Jan
Milman, Andrey
Nir, Karen
Reuter, Monika
Tatakis, Chrisa
Thompson, Jody
Wortham, Robert
Full Time Faculty Members
Institutions Awarding
Academic Credential Held
the Credential
Ed.D. (Instructional
Argosy University
Leadership)
MFA (Art)
Florida Atlantic University
Ph.D. (Computing
Nova Southeastern
Technology in Education)
University
Miami International
MFA (Graphic Design)
University Art & Design
MBA (Business
University of Oregon
Administration)
MFA (Special Effects
Digital Media Arts College
Animation)
MS (Hospitality
Florida International
Management)
University
MS (Hotel & Food Services
Management)
University
MA (Computer Imaging)
Antioch University
Miami International
MFA (Film)
University of Art & Design
MA (Architecture)
Tulane University
MS (Hospitality)
University Florida
International University
Miami International
MFA (Interior Design)
All-Russian Research
Ph.D. (Textile and Apparel)
Institute
MFA (Computer Arts)
State University of New
Ph.D. (Sociology)
York at Albany
Miami International
MFA (Visual Arts)
MFA (Graphic Design &
Antioch University
Photography)
Miami International
MFA (Visual Arts)
Area of Teaching
Specialization
Humanities &
Communications
Graphic Design
Web Design and
Interactive Media
Graphic Design
Media Arts
Culinary Arts
Culinary Arts
Photography
Digital Film Making &
Video Production
Design
Culinary Arts
Interior Design
Fashion Design
Gen. Ed, Humanities &
Communications
Fashion Design
Graphic Design
Industrial Design
Page 176 of 183
Name
Part Time Faculty Members
Institutions Awarding
Academic Credential Held
the Credential
Adam-Rabel, Eduardo
MFA (Illustration)
Alcena, Juanita
MFA (Fashion Design)
Alonso, Maria
MLA (Landscape
Architecture)
Alonso, Ray
BS (Industrial Design)
Boudev, Roumen
MFA (Painting)
Bradshaw, Mark
BS (Computer Science)
Math
Brandenburg, Drue
AOS (Culinary Arts)
Carrico, Cynthia
MS (Education)
MA – English
Mphil, Women's Studies &
British Literature
Choksi, Shefali
Colussy, Mary K
MFA (Visual Art)
Cote, Veronique
MFA (Fine Arts
(Photography))
Crary, Michael
D’Alessandro, Donald
MA (School
Administration)
Del Sordo, Danielle
MS (Design and Media
Management)
Diaz, Claudia
M. of Arch. (Architecture)
Donato, Robert
MBA (Business)
Doyle, Nancy
MA (English Literature)
Ericson, Helena
MA (Mathematics)
Fernandez, Marcia
MBA (Finance)
Gaines, Georgia
MS (Math)
Gatz, William
MFA (Industrial Design)
Area of Teaching
Specialization
SVA NYC (School of Visual
Arts)
Paris American Academy,
Ecole de Beaux Arts of
Architecture Interieure, de
Mode et de Langues
University
Fashion Design
The Art Institute of Fort
Lauderdale
Computer Aided
Modeling
Game and Toy Design
Higher Institute of Fine
Arts
California State University
Post graduate work in
Computer Graphics
Culinary Institute of
America
Keiser University
Maharaja Sayajirao
University of Vadodara
Design Basics
Interior Design
Drawing and Anatomy
Drawing & Perspective
Game Production I
Culinary Arts
Communications
English
Nova Southeastern
University
Fashion Design
University of Buffalo
Photography
Miami International
Rowan
University/University of
New Haven
Miami International
University
University
University of Miami
Nova Southeastern
University
Babson College
Nova Southeastern
University
Pratt Institute
Graphic Design
Culinary Arts
Fashion Design
Design
Culinary Arts
Humanities &
Communications
Math & Science
Advertising
Math & Science
Photography
Page 177 of 183
Gillam, Paula
MFA (Visual Art)
Vermont College of
Norwich University
Humanities &
Communications
Gislason, Rafn
Animation)
Game Art
Gomez, Jerome
MFA (Interior Design)
Gomez, Karina
MFA (Design & Media
Management)
Gordon, Dustin
BS (Professional Studies)
Guzman-Galan, Marcela
MBA (Masters
International
Management)
Hunt, Jonathan
Ivanova, Irina
Kager, Philip
Kane, John
MA (Industrial Design
Textiles and Fibers)
MA (Education)
MS (Hospitality
Management)
Kane, Paul
MFA (Graphic Design/Art)
Katz, Howard
Kay, Melanie
MFA (Painting & Drawing)
MFA (Animation)
MBComm (Concentration
in Leadership and
Influence)
MBA (Mass
Communication and
Media)
MS (HRM)
MA (Costume and Textile
Conservation)
MA (Mathematics)
MS (Biochemistry)
Master of Architecture
(Landscape Architecture)
MA (English)
MS (Hospitality
Management)
MFA (Art)
MFA (Media Design)
MS (Computer Information
Science)
MS (Computer Systems)
Animation)
MFA (Fine Arts)
MA (History)
Kerrigan, Lori
Kilayko, Chris
Kislingbury, Joel
Koehly, Joleen
Lambert, Andrew
Larson, Andrea
Linert, Lisbeth
Lowry, Michael
Matthews, Rich
Maxwell, Kimberley
Medley, RaAzikiwe
Moore, John
Morvay, Roslyn
Orue, Leslie
Patel, Larissa
Peacock, Patrick
Miami International
Miami International
Culinary Institute of
America
European University Lisbon Portugal
University Iberoamericana
- Mexico City
Le Cordon Bleu
Miami International
Vitebsk Technological
Institute of Light Industry
Ball State University
University
Miami International
Northern Illinois University
Academy of Art University
Interior Design
Fashion
Culinary Arts
Culinary Arts
Illustration
Fashion Design
Graphic Design
Culinary Arts
Graphic Design
Media Arts
Graphic Design
Jones International
University
Humanities &
Communications
Lynn University
Video Production
Golden Gate University
Fashion Institute of
Technology
Lehman College
University of Hannover
University
Kent State University
University
Full Sail University
Design
Apparel Evaluation &
Productions
Math
Gen. Ed, Math & Science
Nova Southeast University
Media Arts
Rutgers University
Gen. Ed, Math & Science
Graphic Design
Pratt Institute
Miami University, OH
Media Arts
Humanities &
Interior Design
General Education
Culinary Arts
Illustration
Graphic Design
Page 178 of 183
Peacock, Vuslat
MA (History)
Miami University, OH
Pitter, Michelle
MBA (Business
Administration/Marketing)
University
Communications
Humanities &
Communications
Graphic Design
Price, Todd
Ph.D. (Educational
Leadership and Research
Methodology)
Computer Science
Ramey, Gary
MFA (Art)
Art Institute of Chicago
Web Design and
Interactive Media
Rogers, Mark
MS (Marine Biology)
Rose-Myers, Debbie
MFA (Graphic Arts)
MFA (Fashion Design and
Writing)
MA (Motion Picture
Production,
Communication)
MFA (Illustration)
MS (Hospitality
Management)
Rousso, Chelsea
Salini, Tas
Sammet, Diane
Schlossberg, Eric
Schumy, Kolos
MA (Visual Arts-Painting)
Sheffield, Donald
MBA (Business)
Doctorate (Teaching and
Learning)
MS (Education Computers
and Technology)
BS (Environmental Design)
BS (Marketing)
MFA ( Fine Arts, with
concentration in painting)
MS (Instructional Design
and Technology)
Stern, Alicia
Stewart, Deby
Sukphisit, Peck
Tahmosh, Anthony
Tejeda, Elena
Thornhill, Cheressee
Voicu, Marius
MFA (Film)
Wood, Brian
MA (Industrial Design)
MA (Experimental
Psychology)
Worch, Sarah
Nova Southeastern
University
University of Miami
Science
Design
Goddard College
University of Miami
Video Production
University of Hartford
University
Hungarian University of
Fine Arts
Argosy University
Photography
Argosy University
Culinary Arts
Barry University
Design
Texas A&M
Babson College
Virginia Commonwealth
University
Interior Design
Culinary Arts
Full Sail University
Design
Culinary Arts
Media Arts
Art Foundations
Industrial Design
Antioch University
Video Production,
Web Design & Interactive
Media
Industrial Design
Psychology
Miami International
Page 179 of 183
TUITION AND FEES
Current tuition is charged at $489 per credit hour
Credit
Hours
Program
Length
(Qtrs)
Instruction
al Weeks
Tuition per
Credit
Hour
Lab Fee1
Baking & Pastry
90
6
66
$489
$1,800
$1,150
$645
$47,605
Culinary Arts
90
6
66
$489
$1,800
$1,250
$645
$47,705
Fashion Design
90
6
66
$489
$0
$1,500
$557
$46,067
Graphic Design
90
6
66
$489
$0
$1,500
$402
$45,912
Interior Design
90
6
66
$489
$0
$1,500
$584
$46,094
Photography
90
6
66
$489
$0
$1,500
$176
$45,686
Video Production
90
6
66
$489
$0
$1,500
$372
$45,882
Media
90
6
66
$489
$0
$1,500
$402
$45,912
Advertising
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$402
$91,422
Culinary Management
180
12
132
$489
$1,800
$2,750
$645
$93,215
Digital Filmmaking & Video
Production
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$372
$91,392
Fashion Design
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$557
$91,577
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$489
$91,509
Program of Study
Digital
Textbook2
Startin
g Kit
Fee3
Approx. Tuition &
Fees / Program4
Associate of Science (AS)
Bachelor of Science (BS)
Game Art & Design
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$402
$91,422
Graphic Design
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$402
$91,422
Illustration
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$402
$91,422
Industrial Design
180
12
132
$489
$0
$2,900
$600
$91,520
Instructional Technology &
Design
180
12
132
$489
$0
$2,750
$180
$90,950
Interior Design
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$584
$91,604
Marketing & Entertainment
Management
180
12
132
$489
$0
$2,450
$0
$90,470
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$402
$91,422
Photography
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$176
$91,196
Professional Writing for
Creative Arts
180
12
132
$489
$0
$2,700
$0
$90,720
Software Development for
Creative Technologies
180
12
132
$489
$0
$2,500
$180
$90,700
Visual Effects & Motion
Graphics
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$402
$91,422
Media
180
12
132
$489
$0
$3,000
$402
$91,422
Baking & Pastry
54
5
55
$489
$1,200
$600
$645
$28,851
Culinary Arts
54
5
55
$489
$1,200
$650
$645
$29,901
Diploma (D)
Fashion Retailing
48
4
44
$489
$0
$800
$0
$24,272
48
4
44
$489
$0
$800
$0
$24,272
Communications
48
4
44
$489
$0
$800
$0
$24,272
Page 180 of 183
The table above is calculated at full load, which is an average of 15 credit hours per quarter. The calculation would
be based on 12 credit hours per quarter if a student were to take the minimum allowable credits required to still
be considered a full time student.
Please visit our Student Consumer Information page to find the average time to completion for continuously
enrolled students for each credential level offered. This data is available at the average credit load, fulltime or at
full load. Changing programs, beginning programs at the midterm start date, taking remedial courses, taking time
off from coursework, registering for fewer hours or unsuccessful attempts at course completion will increase the
total length of the program and overall cost of education from what is disclosed. Transfer credits awarded toward
your program will likely decrease the overall length and cost of education.
Lab fees above represent the total for the program and are charged per course or quarter. Lab fees are
treated as tuition for refund purposes.
1
Not all courses include a Digital Textbook. Courses that include a Digital Textbook will be noted in the
registration material and the Digital Textbook will be charged in addition to tuition unless the student
chooses to opt out. Students that do not opt out will not need to purchase textbooks for courses using a
Digital Textbook. Students that do opt out will be responsible for purchasing the required textbook. If a
course does not use a Digital Textbook, the student is responsible for purchasing the required textbook.
The Digital Textbook charge is $50 per course for most courses; however, some courses may have more
than one Digital Textbook and carry a Digital Textbook charge of $75 per course.
2
The starting kit is optional and consists of basic equipment and materials needed for beginning each
program. A list of the components of the starting kit is provided to each enrolled student. These materials
may be purchased at the school or at most supply stores. Kit prices do not include applicable sales tax and
are subject to change.
3
Approximate tuition and fees is based on the current credit hour rate. Total cost will increase with each
per credit hour tuition increase.
4
Page 181 of 183
ACADEMIC CALENDAR
Holidays Observed (Dates Subject to Change)
Monday, May 30, 2016 – Memorial Day
Monday, July 4, 2016 – Independence Day
Monday, September 5, 2016 – Labor Day
Friday, November 11, 2016 – Veterans’ Day
Thursday, November 24, 2016 - Thanksgiving Day
Friday, November 25, 2016 - Day After Thanksgiving
Friday, December 23, 2016 – December Holiday
Monday, December 26, 2016 Christmas Day (observed)
Fall 2016 Quarter
Fall 2016 Classes Start
Add/Drop Period
Midterm Exams
Early Registration Winter 2017 Qtr.
Fall 2016 Mid-quarter Classes Start
Registration Winter 2017 Qtr. ALL STUDENTS
Course Withdraw Deadline On Ground
Graduate Candidacy Clearance
Portfolio Review
Last Day of Classes
Monday, October 3, 2016
October 3 – 10, 2016
October 31 – November 4, 2016
Thursday, November 10, 2016
Monday, November 14, 2016
Friday, December 2, 2016
Monday, December 12, 2016
Thursday, December 15, 2016
Saturday, December 17, 2016
Week 1
Week 1-2
Week 5
Week 6
Week 6
Week 7
Week 9
Week 11
Week 11
Week 11
Winter 2017 Quarter
Winter 2017 Classes Start
Add/Drop Period
Midterm Exams
Early Registration Spring 2017 Qtr.
Winter 2017 Mid-quarter Classes Start
Registration Spring 2017 Qtr. ALL STUDENTS
Portfolio Review
Last Day of Classes
Monday, January 9, 2017
January 9 - 16, 2017
February 6 – 10, 2017
Thursday, February 16, 2017
Thursday, February 16, 2017
Monday, February 20, 2017
Friday, March 10, 2017
Monday, March 20, 2017
Thursday, March 23, 2017
Saturday, March 25, 2017
Week 1
Week 1-2
Week 5
Week 6
Week 6
Week 7
Week 9
Week 11
Week 11
Week 11
Spring 2017 Quarter
Spring 2017 Classes Start
Add/Drop Period
Midterm Exams
Early Registration Summer 2017 Qtr.
Spring 2017 Mid-quarter Classes Start
Registration Summer 2017 Qtr. ALL STUDENTS
Portfolio Review
Last Day of Classes
Monday, April 3, 2017
April 3 – April 10, 2017
May 1-5, 2017
Thursday, May 11, 2017
Thursday, May 11, 2017
Monday, May 15, 2017
Friday, June 2, 2017
Monday, June 12, 2017
Thursday, June 15, 2017
Saturday, June 17, 2017
Week 1
Week 1-2
Week 5
Week 6
Week 6
Week 7
Week 9
Week 11
Week 11
Week 11
Page 182 of 183
Summer 2017Quarter
Summer 2017 Classes Start
Add/Drop Period
Midterm Exams
Early Registration Fall 2017 Qtr.
Summer 2017 Mid-quarter Classes Start
Registration Fall 2017 Qtr. ALL STUDENTS
Portfolio Review
Last Day of Classes
Monday, July 10, 2017
July 10-17, 2017
August 7-11, 2017
Thursday, August 17, 2017
Thursday, August 17, 2017
Monday, August 21, 2017
Friday, September 8, 2017
Monday, September 18, 2017
Thursday, September 21, 2017
Saturday, September 23, 2017
Week 1
Week 1-2
Week 5
Week 6
Week 6
Week 7
Week 9
Week 11
Week 11
Week 11
Fall 2017 Quarter
Fall 2017 Classes Start
Add/Drop Period
Midterm Exams
Early Registration Winter 2018 Qtr.
Fall 2017 Mid-quarter Classes Start
Registration Winter 2018 Qtr. ALL STUDENTS
Portfolio Review
Last Day of Classes
Monday, October 2, 2017
October 2 – 9, 2017
October 30 – November 3, 2017
Monday, November 13, 2017
Friday, December 1, 2017
Monday, December 11, 2017
Thursday, December 14, 2017
Saturday, December 16, 2017
Week 1
Week 1-2
Week 5
Week 6
Week 6
Week 7
Week 9
Week 11
Week 11
Week 11
Page 183 of 183

2015-2016 Catalog - The Art Institutes

Transcription

Similar documents

File

All Credits go to http://groups.msn.com/Cossackpowerb

Film screenings are perfect for date night

riverfront land

May 2012 - Fort Lauderdale Mariners Club

Mini tours flyer - Dallas Fort Worth Area Tour Guide Association

FLORIDA

Neon Lights Map V7

Leaving for the Summer? - Please Prepare your Unit!